Home

ROCLINK 800 User Manual - Welcome to Emerson Process

1. Key Action gt Move cursor to the right cell or character lt Move cursor to the left cell or character i Move cursor to the cell above it i Move cursor to the cell below it Backspace Delete the previous character Ctrl Home Move cursor to top left cell of Workspace Ctrl End Move cursor to bottom right cell of Workspace Delete Delete character in front of the cursor position End Within a cell move cursor to the right most position within the cell Within a row move cursor to the right most position in the row Enter Process saves contents of cell entry and moves to the next cell Esc Undo entry and display original or prior contents of the cell F1 Help Home Within a cell move cursor to the left most position within the cell Within a row move cursor to the left most position within the row Page Down Display next page of Workspace Page Up Display previous page of Workspace Tab Move to the next cell A 4 1 FST Function Structure Each function consists of a STEP number a LABEL optional a command CMD and up to two Arguments ARGUMENTI and ARGUMENT 2 STEP LABEL ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 The FST program provides the STEP numbers for each FST You complete the other fields in the structure to build a function Note Do not skip any Steps The FST program treats a blank STEP as the END of a program and will not compile correctly Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 6 ROCLIN
2. cccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 9 Heavy Gas Option cccccccscssssssssssseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 5 5 Help SV SCM ee ia E Aea l 11 Hierarchy TECG secite a a 1 20 Heh Alari ceann E 5 10 High DP SCP Oli csncvencceneensessoceasieusnssactineseneciwweobootiness 5 18 High Reading B Uj scveecevncawotetecveaddanemesnevincetineteunts 4 3 4 26 High Reading Time ccccsseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 26 Historical Database cccccceeeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 8 FAIS EE a adeconueedactaniaguneenbaneneasnonneeseewaaweaanscanaaamecenmasve wuasaate 6 1 Access Registers isrosadionsrocsscecatiansewasnasrzesadtonnreces 8 8 8 10 Alarm and Event Log Reports cccccceeeeeeees 6 31 Daily Minute and Periodic ccccceeeeeeeeeeees 6 31 EFM Reporting c1is cocsxcastsnsvecabotavecsnagnnnsednsaneaseesaness 6 13 Extend osrcrrereni recassa Eanan 6 4 WE Peer 6 6 IVS aa E AEOS 8 8 8 10 Modbus Table Configuration cccceccceesseees 8 11 Flot Repon esonero 6 34 PO eae E once 6 1 S a E 6 5 Setup FloBoss 100 Series ccccssssseeeeeeeees 6 3 6 5 Setup FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series 6 6 ZU posse dre E EA 1 19 eG AG ONPE PEE E OE EE 6 3 6 6 Da E EE E A E 6 2 History Point TS E E E ET A 28 History Points ccccceeeeeeeees 1 19 6 3 6 6 6 8 6 10 History Segments ccccccccssssssssseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 3 6 8 Hold Last Value cc
3. ccccccscccsesceeccescceseccesscessceeeseeseseeseeeseess 0S CONFIGURING HISTORY POINTS ee eee ee ee eer ee eee 6 6 CONFIGURING HISTORY FOR EFM REPORTING sssssesssnccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssssnsnaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 A lh F525 216 20d Kener ee re ne ee ee E NE E ee ee Oe 7 le Ollie Chin SOC D e E E E O E E E IS oa BEN R DON a pos seacetes seers eae senees hea eenrente st uesecusda Ones Om erie EET M Ne aac ieee E E E E E OLA POAS COMVCISIONS erresen iore Ea EEN E EEEE ERE E i Oo FOW CULCA C ONV ONS er E RE 6 8 HISTORY ALARM AND EVENT LOG REPORTS csccecceccecceccecceccsccsceecescesceecescescescescescescesceces 6 31 OS WCW Ue the History LOC rerne E seeeseadinansescevate 0S2 WCW US WN Ahm LO eer E O OS VIEWING SN LOD erarnan a E Eaa Aesi 6 8 4 Viewing Report Logs From the Device sisccesersseiccaxiscceiseessactatiletiotetestinedetiurisastereseeseeks 0S9 Viewine Report Lors From a Pile esiseina nR iE 6 8 6 Viewing the History Log Report Graphically Plot cc ceeccseecceecceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees EC NT UO ccc cs ne E nee eee Section 7 Extended Functions ccccccccsscccccccscccsccccccccccccccsccsccccccccsscccesccscscceccceees IA SOT PONT cates ceeneca E E A T PCO TADE e E EE E 7 3 SAMPLER ODORIZER ROC800 SERIES ccccccscccsecccsccessccsccescseeescesscesseescceeseeesseseseeceeseseeseuecs 7 4 PROPORTIONAL INTEGRAL AND DERIVATIVE PID ccce cece ceccceecc
4. cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 46 4 11 HART Input Configuration ROC800 Series nssssssseeeeesssssseeerrsssssssseerrssssssseeeresssssssseeeessssss 4 50 4 12 MVS Sensor ROC800 Series or FloBoss 407 cee cceccceccceeccenscceececscccecceessceecseseuseseusceuecs 4 57 4 1 I O Configuration Overview Configuring a ROC or FloBoss is a matter of establishing points and then configuring various parameters Each Input and Output has a unique Point Number to identify the input or output The Point Number indicates the location of the point at the slot number of the I O module and channel number in the ROC800 Series For example DI 2 1 indicates the Point Number for a Discrete Input at module slot number two first channel The Point Number in the FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 indicates the location of the point on the termination board The Point Number is automatically assigned by the device and cannot be edited a Note When configuring similar point types use the Copy F4 and Paste F5 options to speed configuration of similar I O types For example if you have nearly identical Analog Inputs to configure copy the configuration of one AI and paste that configuration into a new AI configuration Make the changes that are required to differentiate the two AI configurations Note Each point must be individually configured If there is more than one point of this type available in the device you can
5. ccc ccecccscccsecceecceseceessccscceeseesssueseesseeseseeseenseueesss 5 3 METER SETUP CONFIGURATION cccsssssctcsossnancacssatanserinaxnaasavahadevsnencassiabaesoninaxeassapehadevssancasseotansonisaxce Be Fa A oo eee G cla of eee en ene eee ee eee eee eT ery si ICU NS ss asc ssctrtesrte areca ce tel E 5 3 3 Meter Gas Quality FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 BP MMB Ko nol Geer CSA a En eS nN RE eee 5 3 5 Meter Sampler FIOBOSS 100 Series accicssccovasesaccnnseiccossssosemeciesedmsssenceeeamaonesdarsduanennstodenacad 5 3 6 Meter Instrument Calibration FloBoss 100 Series ssenssnssensenssessensensesseessesserssrssesss Rev Dec 05 Table of Contents V ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 3 7 Meter Calibration Factors ROC800 SerieS 0 eccccecceeecceecceecceeceescsessceeeseussseseeuess oS NEE AA eE E nv OO 5 3 9 Meter Mass Meter Pressure Effect ROC800 Series Section 6 Configuring and Viewing History seeeccccsssecceccccccccoscecccceccccsccecccecceessoo O TO a E E E E E 6 2 HISTORY SETUP PEOBOSS POO SERIES escscttushccccdtecicostashcdauiadessebeerdacsatiednceutesiatesdadomesteutausedesutens 6 2 1 Configuring FloBoss 100 Series History siscecsscsasccnacssencsassavacnsnstonsenrercnceanssencvassanassansdeadeneences 6 3 HISTORY SETUP ROC300 SERIES AND FLOBOSS 407 o cccccc ccc cceccesecceecceecceecceescesceeeseessseeseuess 6 4 CONFIGURING HISTORY SEGMENTS ROC800 SERIES
6. Liquid ISO5167 98 API 12 95 ISOQ10790 1999 ISO and API American Petroleum Institute standards for liquid flow through an orifice a linear meter and a mass Coriolis meter Select Gas AGA3 92 AGA7 96 AGA11 2003 for the Station when you want AGA 3 calculations for all orifice meters in the Station and AGA 7 calculations for all turbine meters and all mass Coriolis meters in a Station Select Gas ISO5167 98 ISO995 1 93 ISO10790 2003 for the Station when you want one of these calculations for all orifice meters in the Station and SO9951 calculations for all turbine meters and all mass Coriolis meters in a Station Note ISO9951 calculations are identical to AGA 7 calculations Select Liquid ISO5167 98 API 12 95 ISO10790 1999 for the Station when you want one of these calculations for all orifice meters with an expansion factor set to 1 0 Linear volumetric meters will calculate a corrected volume using user entered calculated pressure and temperature correction factors Mass Coriolis meters calculate a corrected volume form the Mass Flow Rate and the Base Density Note For linear volumetric meters using API 12 the user entered calculated pressure and temperature correction factors as well as the Base Density and Flowing Density values will need to be supplied by a FST User C program a host computer a DS800 program or manually entered from a custom display The FPV Method parameter must
7. If you Enable Alarming the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband are configured on the Alarms tab If you Disable Alarming no limit alarms generate for this point The Point Fail alarm appears in the Active Alarms field but will not be logged in the Alarms Log To conserve Alarm Log space alarms should be enabled only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so that no false alarms generate The Rate Alarm is the value in engineering units that represents the maximum amount of change allowed between updates If the change is equal to or greater than this value an alarm is generated To disable this Rate Alarm without disabling the other alarms the Rate Alarm value can be set greater than the Span of the Analog Input Enter the High Alarm limit value in engineering units to which the input value must rise to generate a High Alarm The HiHi Alarm value is typically set higher than the High Alarm Enter the Low Alarm limit value in engineering units to which the input value must fall to generate a Low Alarm The LoLo Alarm value is typically set lower than the Low Alarm Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 49 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Alarm Deadband is the value in engineering units that is an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limits and below the High Alarm limits The purpose of the Alarm Deadband is to prevent the alarm from being set and clear
8. E EA Paste 2 Update y OF Cancel f Apply Figure 4 21 Discrete Outputs General ROC800 Series Discrete Output EJ Discrete Outputs 1 DO Default Tag D Default General Advanced TOO Parameters Point Number AB State Momentary vane la On C Off fe f DOUT Type Scanning Latched Toggle Enabled f Time Duration TOO Toggle O Disabled Active Alarms lO EA Paste Update YY OK x Cancel Apply Figure 4 22 Discrete Outputs General FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 22 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Select the Discrete Output to be configured The outputs are listed by both number and tag Enter the 10 character string Tag for identification of the Point Number Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used The Point Number identifies the physical location of the input For the ROC800 Series the Point Number identifies the module slot channel number Select the Scanning Mode For the output to automatically process the field output select Enabled Automatic Mode When the Scanning mode is set to Auto Output On enter an Auto Output to drive the physical output of the Discrete Output ROC800 Series When the Scanning Mode is set to Disabled the Auto Output ROC800 Series Manual Output ROC800 Series or State FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and Flo
9. 1 every 100 milliseconds for a ROC800 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 The FloBoss 100 Series decrements by 1 second A timer can be set using the Set Timer ST Command or by saving the RR Results Register directly to the timer parameter using the SAV Command The Check Timer CT Command is used to compare the timer to 0 When greater than 0 it branches to the desired LABEL MSGI1 Character field for storing a message MSG2 Not used by the FST A value can be written to MSG2 using the FST Registers point or a ROC Display field and viewed while monitoring or tracing the FST MSG Data Displays any values associated with MSGI MISC 1 through MISC 4 Single byte registers that can be written to and the value can be used by the FST Valid value is 0 to 255 Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 14 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Table A 3 Monitor and Trace Mode Keystrokes Key Action Key Action t Move cursor to the cell above it End Move cursor to the right most cell 4 Move cursor to the cell below it F1 Help Ctrl End Display last entry in Workspace F6 Execute current FST command Ctrl Home _ Display beginning of Workspace Home Move cursor to the left most cell Page Down _ Display next page of Workspace Page Up Display previous page of Workspace A 6 1 FST Trace Mode In Trace mode you can view at which Instruction Pointer IP the FST failed Print the FST to assi
10. After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 37 ROCLINK 800 User Manual ih ee Se ee RE Tc Fe Bent Oe Ao SSeS Foi al ire Me Borac ca reena Epon e f G PSO rete Figure 4 35 Pulse Interface Module View FloBoss 104 If the meter is turning the magnet clockwise direction while looking down on the magnet after it is installed then PI 1 of the PIM PI Points 1 PI 1 PIM indicates pulses If the magnet is turning counter clockwise while looking at it form the top down after being installed on the meter then Pulse Input 2 PI 2 PIM indicate pulses 4 8 RTD RTD Input Configuration ROC800 Series RTD Inputs are analog signals generated by RTD Resistance Temperature Detector probes a device to measure temperature For the ROC800 Series select Configure gt I O gt RTD Points Examine the default settings and adjust the parameters to suit your application on each of the tabs in the order given below Note The RTD point for the FloBoss 100 Series or FloBoss 407 is configured as a type of AI Point Refer to AI Analog Input Configuration 1 Select Configure gt I O gt RTD Points 2 The General tab sets the basic parameters for the RTD Input point 3 The Advanced tab enables you to configure
11. COM User Prograrn C Enable Disable COM User Programmi C Enable Disable LOI User Program C Enable Disable Calc User Program LED User Program C Enable e Disable C Disable 2 Update y OK 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 3 21 Flags User Programs FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series General Advanced COM User Prograrn C Enable Disable COM User Program C Enable Disable LOI User Program f Enable Disable Cale User Program f Enable Disable Calc User Program C Enable Disable 2 Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 3 22 Flags User Programs FloBoss 100 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 22 ROCLINK 800 User Manual LOI User Program FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series If installed allows a User Program for the operator interface Local Port to be run Select Disable and then click Apply to stop the function COM1 User Program FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series If a user program is installed for the COM1 task this Flag allows the User Program associated with the COM1 or COMM port on the ROC to be run COM2 User Program FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series If a user program is installed for the COM2 task this Flag allows the User Program associated with the COM2 port on the ROC to be run Calc User Program FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series If installed allows the calculation user program to be run Calc2 User Progra
12. Figure 9 1 Saving Configuration ROCLINK 800 configuration files have the extension 800 Rev Dec 05 Save Configuration File C Program Files ROCLINKS00 fb1 03 900 Status Save configuration COMPLETED Point Type FST Version Info and Code Point Humber 4 Figure 9 2 Saving Configuration Complete Saving and Retrieving Configurations 9 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 9 3 Downloading a Configuration Use the Download option in the File menu to download a saved configuration to a ROC or FloBoss device Configuration files are created using the New Configuration function To download a saved configuration do the following 1 Connect to the ROC or FloBoss unit Select File gt Download Select the configuration File name ROCLINK 800 files have the extension 800 Click Open Select only the Configuration Points you desire to download The items that are not configured in your configuration will be grayed out Oe R P Download Configuration Select Points to Download biS Fonts Radio Control Soft Points System Variables Analog Inputs Opcode Tables User List Parameters Discrete Outputs Meter Configuration xi al al aI lt ai xl Pulse Inputs History Configuration PID Control FST Code FST Parameters fa 7 fa Ca Ca Ca ca Statys Point Type Point Number Ee Deselect AI Download Close Figure 9 3 Download Configuration 6 Click Download The Configurati
13. A 18 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Name Description Arguments Results Raise RR in to a power 1 Database or Constant Value ABS Absolute Value of None RR in e to the power of RR in INT Integer part of RR in Logarithm base 10 of RR in EXP None None LOG None LN Natural Logarithm None of RR in SQR _ Square Root of None RR in P3 8rd Order Polynomial None ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series RR out RR in ARG1 FloBoss 500 Series RR in gt 0 and ARG1 0 out RR in ARG1 in 0 and ARG1 0 out NAN in 0 and ARG1 0 RR out 0 ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 ARG1 0 and RR in 0 RR out RR in In all other cases RR out RR in ARG1 SVD out SVD in RR out RR in SVD out SVD in RR out e RR in SVD out SVD in RR out int RR in SVD out SVD in If RR in gt 0 0 RR out LOG RR in SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in SVD out SVD in If RR in gt 0 0 RR out LN RR in SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in SVD out SVD in If RR in gt 0 0 RR out SQRT RR in SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in SVD out SVD in RR out regi RR in 3 reg2 RR in 2 reg3 RR in 1 reg4 where reg1 through reg4 are the current constant values of Register1 through Register4 of the re
14. Base Pressure 14 73 PSIA rifice Material Fipe aera C Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Base Temperature 600 Deg F Monel ood Elevation 500 0 Feet Cates f Carbon Latitude 5 0000 Deg Ref Temp Ref Temp User Correction Factor ADO e80 DegF 68 0 Deg F Viscosity O O000063 Lom Ft Sec Pressure ap io 13 See tee C Gauge f Upstream fe Absolute C Downstream C EA Paste 2 Update vy OF A Cancel i Apply Figure 5 15 Meter Advanced Orifice ROC300 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Meter Setup x Meter Number 1 AGAT Meter Tag AGAT FRY Method Atmospheric Pressure Units Detailed C Calculate Enter fe US j Gross 14 45 peja Metric C Grose2 Base Pressure 475 PSIA Base Temperature 60 0 Deg F Elevation 500 0 Feet Latitude 35 0 Deg User Correction Factor i O Pressure ap C Gauge f Absolute Es Copy EA Paste 2 Update y OF Cancel i Apply Figure 5 16 Meter Advanced Turbine ROC300 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 26 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Meter Setup Meter Number 1 4G41 General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Alarms FRY Method Detailed Grose r Gross Units f US C Metric Atmospheric Pressure C Calculate Enter I 445 PSIS O CEF METU f MCF MMBTU C TOMCF MMMBTL 14 73 PEJA Orifice Material 60 0 Deg F FOO 0 Feet La
15. EU Value 1 to 5 are the five calibration settings in Engineering Units Values converted from the Raw Values based on the Low Reading EU and High Reading EU defined for the point EU Value 1 1s the Zero value EU Value 5 is the Span value and the rest are Midpoint values Press Effect is the Zero Shift adjustment value it is used as an offset to the calibrated EU Values to compensate for the working Static Pressure effect on a DP transmitter that was calibrated at atmospheric pressure For the FloBoss 407 this field represents the static pressure offset for the Static input point and the RTD Bias value for the Temperature input Set EU Value is the Tester Value specified for the last calibration value that was set Manual EU is the Live Reading for the last calibration value that was set The Timer field shows the last inactivity count down in seconds typically starting from 3600 seconds that occurred during the last calibration session Had the countdown reached O time out would have taken place causing the calibration mode to be automatically ended Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 16 Calibration Mode indicates 0 Use Current Calibration 1 Start Calibration 2 Calibrate 3 Restore Previous Calibration 4 Stop Calibration ROCLINK 800 User Manual Type indicates which calibration value is currently being set 0 Inactive no value 1 Zero 2 Span 3 Midpoint 1 4 Midpoint 2 5 Midpoint 3 6 Zero Sh
16. If the Output Type is Analog the selected change in output is added to the current value of the output If the Output Type is Discrete the change in output is sent to one of the two Discrete Outputs The magnitude of the correction determines the amount of time that an output is energized If the correction is positive it is routed to the open forward DO If the correction is negative it is sent to the close reverse DO One application of Override PID control allows pressure control to override flow control when the pressure exceeds a Setpoint value For example The output of the primary flow control loop would be selected until the pressure input approaches the Override Setpoint of 700 psig As the pressure input approaches its Setpoint the pressure loop tries to close the valve and take over control at the point when the output calculated by the pressure loop is less than the output calculated by the flow loop Control returns to the primary flow control loop when the change in output required to maintain the override Setpoint no longer outweighs the flow loop s attempts to maintain its Setpoint Through the use of an FST you may implement a switchover algorithm When the input exceeds a predetermined switchover value the FST can switch the mode to Override only When the FST determines that the input value is no longer in a critical range the PID mode can be switched back to Primary only Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 6 ROCLINK 80
17. In either condition an RBX message generates Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured For the ROC300 Series FloBoss 100 Series or FloBoss 407 Alarm Deadband Rate Alarm and alarm limits parameters apply when in TDI Mode Rate Alarm is the value in engineering units that represents the maximum calculated EU value change allowed between updates If the change is equal to or greater than this value an alarm is generated Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 20 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Alarm Deadband is the value in engineering units that is an inactive zone above the Low Alarm and below the High Alarm and is used to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the TDI EU value is oscillating around the alarm limit The four level alarms are the limit value in engineering units to which the EU Value must fall to generate a Low High LoLo or HiHi Alarm The LoLo Alarm value is typically set lower than the Low Alarm The HiHi Alarm value is typically set higher than the High Alarm To disable this alarm without disabling the other alarms the Rate Alarm EU value must be set greater than the Span of the TDI 4 5 DO Discrete Output Configuration A Discrete Output may be set to send a pulse to a specified device DOs are high low outputs used to turn equipment On and Off A Discrete Output can be configured in one of several different m
18. PMPOFF a C ewo w o iS A 4 4 FST Argument Fields ARG Depending on the Command Arguments can be unused references to parameters in the ROC or FloBoss TLPs numerical constants or ASCII characters Once the Command has been selected the Argument cell requires either typing a numerical constant or ASCII text or clicking the TLP button for data selection Depending on whether you have selected TLP as number or as text in the Tools gt Options dialog box of the main ROCLINK 800 application the TLP appears in the argument structure as the TLP numbers or a text abbreviation of the Type Point number and Parameter For example the text abbreviation of the status parameter of Discrete Input module 4 channel 1 would be DIN4 1 STATUS The Data 3 parameter for Softpoint 3 would be SFP 3 DATAS3 Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 4 5 FST Comment Fields The Comment field is used to enhance readability and provide a place to document the purpose of an FST Step group of Steps and save information within the FST Comments are discarded when an FST is compiled and downloaded to the device Comments remain with the FST when it is saved to a disk file A 4 6 FST Function Examples The command its associated arguments and a Label optional make up a function In this example the Value VAL command in Step 0 writes the current process value of Analog Input module 3 channel 1 in EUs to the Result Regis
19. ROCLINK 800 User Manual Discrete Input Discrete Inputs 1 Dl Default Tag Di Default RBs Alarming Disabled C On lam Set C On Alarm Clear On Alarm Set amp Clear Alarm Limita Low Alarm 0 0 LoLo Alarm 20 0 High Alarm 1 10 0 HiHi Alarm 1 20 0 Rate Alarm i 00 0 Alarm Deadband 2 0 Copy EA Paste Update Y OK Cancel a Apply Figure 4 20 Discrete Inputs Alarms FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series When Alarming is Enabled alarms generate on point status change When Alarming is Disabled the Status Change alarm appears in the Active Alarms field but will not be written to the Alarm Log To conserve Alarm Log space alarms should be enabled only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so that no false alarms generate If the host computer is configured to receive field initiated calls you can select a Report by Exception RBX option to send a Spontaneous Report by Exception message Disabled FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series Select Disabled to turn RBX Alarming Off for this point On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a SRBX message On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a SRBX message On Alarm Set amp Clear FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series
20. Restore device configuration from file Figure 11 4 Upgrade Hardware Note The I O Setup screen FloBoss 100 Series will display whether the termination board is detected as the 4 point I O or the 6 point I O Rev Dec 05 Updates and Changes 11 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 11 3 Plate Change The Plate Change option allows you to change the size of an orifice plate under flowing or non flowing conditions 1 Select Meter gt Plate Change to record an orifice plate change 2 Select the correct Meter Number for the Meter Run you are changing 3 Select Yes if the Plate Change occurs during flowing conditions You will be allowed to freeze the inputs for the duration of the Plate Change process Click No for non flowing conditions 4 Click Freeze if you are performing the Plate Change under flowing conditions the dialog box shows you the Freeze Value of each meter input for the purpose of calculating gas flow while the change is being made All I O values are held in Manual Mode at the current value The values are returned to an active state after clicking OK in the Plate Change dialog box Plate Change Meter Number 1 Orifice 1 hi Wall Plate Change Be Under Flowing Conditions O hs Mee Differential Press 0 0 Static Press 0 0 Temperature 0 0 Pipe Diameter Elta Inches Orifice Diameter EA inches yY OK Cancel Figure 11 5 Plate Change Pipe Diameter displays the size of the pipe dia
21. The Minute Entries read only field defines the number of entries in the minute log for this Segment Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The Space Allocated read only field displays how many history and time stamp entries are currently allocated by this Segment The Available Space read only field displays the total number of history and time stamp entries possible Factory default is 197 285 The Total Space Allocated read only field displays the number of history and time stamp entries allocated to all the Segments The Available Space to Allocate read only field displays the number of entries unallocated This number is the Available Space minus the Space Allocated 6 5 Configuring History Points The History options allow data values and calculated variables stored in the current value database to be copied and stored for up to a month in the historical database The historical database can be configured to log only the values that need to be logged The values are logged in the standard minute hourly periodic daily time base of the FloBoss or ROC unless FST control is used By using the FST Editor utility the period in which the data is logged can be placed under FST program control Note Make sure that the History Points for each Meter Run are configured to allow the EFM Report utility to properly access data History Setup standard History Extended History Setup q A
22. Tree Location Currently unavailable Update Mode Select Normal for the display to remain in the current state when displayed Select Auto Scan to allow the display to automatically update when viewed 3 Drag and drop Objects from the toolbar to the Custom Display For details on the elements refer to Custom Display Objects Create as many Objects as you desire Objects may be placed anywhere on the Display Editor screen Certain Option should be placed within a Frame such as for Option Buttons or Check Boxes to logically group them with a label so the user knows what the Option means 4 For each Object enter or select the desired data in the Object Properties box The items in the Object Properties box depend on the Object you have added You may edit the Object Properties of each Object at any time Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 10 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 Move and re shape Objects within the display To modify Object placement or shape 4 4 Click and drag on the control squares to change the size of the Object Press the lt Shift Arrow Keys gt to change the size of the Objector lt Shift Alt Arrow Keys gt for smaller changes Press the lt Ctrl Arrow Keys gt to move the Object to the desired position or lt Ctrl Alt Arrow Keys gt for smaller moves From the Icon bar select Align lefts to align all selected Objects to the furthest left point in the group From the Ic
23. Tuning Status Control Type C Primar Only Override Control C Overide Only Tag FID Output Analog Discrete Mode Loop Status Disabled Disabled a a om Loop Period 5 Secs Actual Period 0 0 Secs Frimary KO Definition Setpoint Local Process Yarable ATID 9 1 EU By Override Local Bl Process arable U ndefined BI Setpoint Output DO Open Point SFP 2 DATAT2 Bi DO Close Point SFP 1 DATATE Bi Output Low Lirit 0 0 Value m Output High Limit 00 0 E Update X OK Cancel BRApply Figure 7 7 PID General ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Select the PID control loop point to be configured Enter a unique 10 character alphanumeric Tag for this PID point Select the Control Type Primary Only The Primary loop is the only loop active and the output calculated by the Primary loop is used to adjust the control output Override Only ROC800 Series The Override loop is the only loop active and the output calculated by the Override loop is used to adjust the control output This Control Type is used mainly for tuning the Override loop or when loop selection is controlled by an FST or other logic external to the PID algorithm Override Control ROC800 Series Both the Primary and Override loops are active and the outputs from the two loops are compared and either the lesser or gre
24. Yesterday s Oil Runs w Select All Deselect All Select All Deselect All Select All Deselect All y OK Cancel Figure 12 1 Print Configuration 3 Click OK Wait for the information to preview on the screen 4 When the Print Preview screen appears you may choose one of the following buttons gt gt gt OH Print to send to a local printer PDF to create a pdf Portable Document File Excel to create an xls spreadsheet file RTF to create an rtf Rich Text Format file TXT to create a txt text file HTML to create an htm Internet browser file ROC800 Series The Device Group Device Address Station Name Field and Value information displays in the Print Configuration results window Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 12 2 I O Monitor Select View gt I O Monitor Use I O Monitor to view all installed and active I O points MVS values and flow calculations that provide information configured in the ROC or FloBoss and its operating environment Select the checkboxes that you desire to monitor Select All Selects all checkboxes Deselect All Deselects all checkboxes After selecting the monitor functions and clicking OK a screen appears that shows the requested point information such as field I O values or calculated flow values These on screen values are automatically updated by ROCLINK 800 software Select Points to Monito
25. 3 1 Setting the Clock Immediately after connecting to a ROC or FloBoss for the first time set the Clock to ensure proper logging of history The internal real time clock provides time stamping and control of the historical databases Event Log and Alarm Log Note The time stamp in the ROC or FloBoss reflects the time at the end of the period not at the beginning Data collected from 0800 to 0900 is thus time stamped 0900 This is used for the logging of history Device Date and Time Monday October 10 2005 05 27 36 AM Set Device Date and Time Davlight Savings Time a Me f Enabled Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Frio Sat f Disabled J 2 3 4 5 6 E 9 gih 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 23 24 25 256 2 20 29 J0 Sl 3 Today 10 10 2005 Ab Ab Auto Scan 2 Update y OF Cancel Apply Figure 3 1 Clock 1 Select ROC gt Clock or click the Clock icon in the toolbar 2 Ifthe clock in your PC is set correctly you can use it to set the ROC or FloBoss clock Click Today at the bottom of the calendar and click Apply Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 3 Ifthe PC clock is not correct Use the arrow buttons to select the correct Month and Year You can also click the Month to select the exact month or the Year and use the arrows to select the desired Year Click on the desired day of the month Click on the time field and type in the desired value
26. 8 FST Editor initiates the Trace mode ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series only 9 Indicates that the FST in the ROC or FloBoss is processing ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 only When an FST fails as indicated by an RF value of 5 you can view at which Instruction Pointer IP the FST failed A 6 Monitor Mode When on line use FST Monitor menu to select which FST to monitor turn Trace mode on and off Close the FST Pause or Resume an FST and Monitor Registers Timers Miscellaneous Registers Messages and Compare Flag options To start Monitor mode to display the selected FST select the desired FST from the Monitor menu while on line with the ROC or FloBoss unit or click the Monitor button from within the open workspace to monitor that FST FST fields located on the right side of the Monitor screen may be edited by highlighting the field typing the value and pressing lt Enter gt The new value is written to the FST and read back on the next update Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The Help Status Line at the top of the Monitor indicates the status of the Monitor and Trace Modes The Parameter and Data fields include CF Compare Flag often referred to as the Signal Value Discrete SVD is an 8 bit integer representing the numbers 0 through 255 CF Bny The Compare Flag displays as both the integer value and the binary value bit 7 to the left and bit O to the right RF Run Flag
27. 972 SAV INS BON CULPA Oisein in a E Tai EEE EE NE N EERTE ESETE NEE N Raa 9 2 9 Downloadi a Coni ouralo cc tge cosas cardi raniee dese teneteecends oes EEEE NT EEEE 9 3 9 1 Saving a ROC User File In addition to keeping backup copies of the configuration file it is also good practice to keep a backup copy of the ROC_USER mdb file This file contains the communications security and password settings for the ROC To create a backup copy of the file 1 Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the folder where ROCLINK 800 software is located Typically this folder is C Program Files ROCLINK800 2 Create a Copy of the ROC_USER mdb file 3 Paste the Copy into another folder on the PC or a disk Rev Dec 05 Saving and Retrieving Configurations 9 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 9 2 Saving a Configuration The Save option saves the current configuration of a connected device to a disk file This feature is useful when creating a backup when configuring similar ROC or FloBoss units for the first time or when making configuration changes off line Once a backup configuration file is created it can be loaded into a device by using the Download function 1 Select File gt Save Configuration The Save As dialog box appears 2 Type the desired File name of the backup file 3 Click Save save Configuration File C Program Files ROCLIN SOO R61 03 800 Shatus Saving Point Type 6 PID Parameters Point Number 4 OLL
28. ASCII mode uses Longitudinal Redundancy Checking LRC error checking RTU Remote Terminal Unit mode allows for greater character density and better data throughput than ASCII for the same baud rate Each message is transmitted in a continuous stream Data is sent in 8 bit binary characters RTU mode uses Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC error checking By default RTU is enabled In either mode ASCII or RTU a Modbus message is placed by the transmitting device into a frame that has a known beginning and ending point ASCII Message Framing LS ee 2 Characters 2 Characters N Characters 2 Characters CRLF RTU Message Framing Begin of Frame Data CRC Error Check T1 T2 T3 T4 1 Byte 1 Byte N 1 Byte 2 Bytes T1 T2 T3 T4 Byte Order of data bytes in a transmission or requests can be reversed This only affects the Data field of a Modbus message and has no effect on the data bytes for Function Codes 01 02 and 05 Least Significant Byte First Selecting this check box places the Least Significant Byte first This is the default value Most Significant Byte First Selecting this check box places the Most Significant Byte first Select Event Logging or Log Modbus Events Enabled to log all parameter changes made via Modbus to the Event Log or select Disabled to allow parameters to be changed via Modbus without being logged By default Event Logging or Log Modbus Events is Enabled The Exception Status field FloBoss 100 Series
29. Alarm will not affect volume calculations 1 Alarm will affect volume calculations ALARM_TEXT varchar 64 Text description of the alarm TRIGGER_VALUE char 16 Value that triggered the alarm 6 ALARM_VALUE char 16 Alarm Value 6 7 4 4 PGAS Gas Quality Files ANA All Gas Quality data converts to an ANA file The Gas Quality data is retrieved from the ROC or FloBoss in the form of Parameter change events to the Gas Quality Parameters if the Gas Quality type Point Type 112 Parameter 24 is configured for entered values 0 The Event Log scans for Gas Quality events and any group of unique Gas Quality events that occur within a five minute period appear as one record Use the date and time stamp for the latest event for the SAMPLE_DATE The Gas Quality data is retrieved from the ROC or FloBoss in the form of hourly historical averages of the Gas Quality Parameters if the Gas Quality Point Type 112 Parameter 24 is configured for live values 1 1 METER_ID char 16 Identification number for the measurement point in the field Tag of the orifice or turbine point associated with the alarm 2 SAMPLE_DATE datetime Actual date and time of the sample in mm dd yyyy hh mm format and is the date and time of the event excluding the seconds 3 evenis 4 5 n EFFECTIVE DATE datetime Optional date and time for which the sample should be considered i GAS _SAMPLE_TYP char 2 Sample Type effective in mm dd yyyy hh
30. Boot Firmware TDD S55 Part Number WEST 29 aera Resets Version Rev 1 10 EER E O Card 6 points S Part Number WEST FE Beachner Version Rev 1 10 ates Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 3 14 Information Revision Info FloBoss 100 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 3 2 Information Keypad Display ROC800 Series Select ROC gt Information The Keypad Display allows you to configure settings for the ROC800 Series optional Display Keypad Device Information 2A i LCD Master Swatch LCD Firmware Version On Off LCD Status LCD Not Installed LCD Video Mode Dark Text on Light Background C Light Text on Dark Background LCD Backlight Power Saving Mode C Enabled Disabled lnactwity Time 0 minutes 2 Update Y OK Cancel Apply Figure 3 15 Information Keypad Display ROC800 Series LCD Master Switch resets the Keypad Display task without cycling power or having to perform a Warm Start LCD Status indicates the status of the Keypad Display OK displays if a Keypad Display unit is installed and has a valid configuration file An error displays if the configuration file is invalid no Keypad Display is installed or if there is a CRC error Select the default LCD Video Mode for the display dark text on light background or invert the LCD display light text on dark background Click Apply to change the display m
31. Close the active window A Confirm Save dialog box appears if there are unsaved changes Delete current selection 1 6 3 ToolBar The following buttons appear in the ROCLINK 800 toolbar These buttons will be grayed out if not applicable to the current screen gt New file creates a New Configuration File Available configuration parameters can be specified using menu selections Configure the file as if you were connected to the device Functions requiring a live connection are unavailable in this mode Open a disk file opens an existing configuration file Configuration files are created using the New Device or Save Configuration functions Save file saves the current configuration of the connected Device to a disk file Cut deletes currently selected text and places it in the Clipboard Copy duplicates currently selected text and places it in the Clipboard Paste places text currently in the Clipboard where the cursor is located Print prints the configuration file AI Points views the Analog Input window AO Points views the Analog Output window DI Points views the Discrete Input window DO Points views the Discrete Output window Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual PI Points views the Pulse Input window Clock views the Clock window Comm Ports views the Comm Ports Setting window Direct Connect connects to a Device locally using the LOI Loca
32. Date as oa Oo ft 2 ts 1415 6 7 8 9 of 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 The above format will be used for the following event codes 144 Initialization Sequence 146 Initialize From Defaults 147 ROM CRC Error 148 Database Initialization 150 Program Flash 248 Text Message 249 Download Configuration 250 Upload Configuration 251 Calibration Timeout 252 Calibration Cancel 253 Calibration Success ete Oe OHH OH OH oF DO FST Events For FST Events the Code will be the FST number 1 to 6 Unused will be set to zero Bit Map Time as float Date as float Value as float Ott 273141 s el 7 elo mo 2s 4 15 16 17 18 19 Time Related System Events The time is the number of seconds since January 1 1970 Unused will be set to zero Bit Map Time as float Date as float OT1 12731415 6 71819 0 12178 14 15 16 17 18 19 Events are formatted as 145 All Power Removed 200 Clock Set Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 14 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Alarms Use the Alarms table to determine the alarming source The Register number for all unmapped Alarms will be set to the Event Alarm Register number default is 32 A normal Alarm record format Bit Map Time as float Date as float Value as float Unused Ol1 72731415 6 71 e819 0 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Unmapped Parameter Alarms If the alarming point is not mapped to a Modbus Register identi
33. If the AGA 8 detailed method is selected the Total Mole should equal 100 after all the component mole percentages have been entered The Gas Quality field FloBoss 100 Series determines where to get Gas Quality readings Live indicates readings come from a gas chromatograph or periodically downloaded from a host and will not be entered in the Event Log Constant indicates that the readings will be entered in the Event Log This field indicates the total sum of all gas component mole percentages The ROC or FloBoss will adjust the Methane level and ensure this value is 100 Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual If the percentages are automatically adjusted to total 100 and you would like to log this adjustment select Enabled in the Log Methane Adjust field If you select Disable this does not prevent the ROC or FloBoss from automatically adjusting the Methane but does prevent an Event Log entry Select between Dry no water vapor present in the gas Wet saturated water vapor present in the gas or As Delivered may contain some water vapor for the Heating Value Basis This selection indicates on what basis the entered Heating Value was determined and affects the flow or energy calculations When the Wet Gas option is selected the ROC or FloBoss calculates the mole percentage of water based on the algorithm from IAPWS IF97 standards and adjusts the other mole percentages accordingly Select ei
34. Note Be very careful when using the System Flags Certain Flags cause data to be lost parameter values to be changed and configuration memory to be cleared Be sure you understand the function of the Flags before changing them Note A Reset using the Reset switch or a jumper reloads all configuration data from Electrically Erasable Program Read Only Memory EEPROM or Flash memory clears all history clears the Event Log clears the Alarm Log and clears all ROC Displays disables all user program tasks and disables all user data types The Reset switch or a jumper permits a restart from the boot block of the flash memory Cold Start rather than from RAM Warm Start The Reset switch or a jumper permits a restart from the boot block of the flash memory Cold Start rather than from RAM Warm Start For a FloBoss 100 Series a Jumper Reset configures all Comm Ports back to their factory defaults shuts off all User Programs and FSTs All other data remains intact Note Cold Start reloads all restart configuration data and may also clear logs displays and FSTs In addition it may cause output changes load new accumulator values and disable User Program tasks and User Data Types Generally a Cold Start should not be used on a ROC or FloBoss that is actively gathering data or performing control Save or document all required data and parameter values that could be affected before performing the Cold Start Rev Dec 05 Configurin
35. Parity 95 ROC Comm Ports COMMS Comma Type FST Parameters Store and forward port FST Register Tags Kep On Delay Soft Point Parameters Key OFF Delay Power Control Parameters Modern Status Discrete Inputs Modern Type Discrete Outputs Connect Time Analog Inputs Configuration Command Analog Outputs Connect Command Pulse Inputs Disconnect Time RTD nactiwity Time Thermocouple w Modem disconnect command Show All Point Types and Parameters COM 1 TAG acio rzw Y OK X Cancel Figure 1 4 Select TLP To use the Select TLP dialog box 1 Select the Point Type from the list This opens a list of logical numbers and parameters that belong to that Point Type 2 Select the Logical Number In the configuration screens the Logical Number is generally referred to as Point Number or Number 3 Select the specific Parameter These are usually called by the same term as the Tag on the configuration screen Click OK The display field at the bottom of the Select TLP dialog displays the numeric point location of the TLP point or a text abbreviation depending on the setting in the Tools gt Options window Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 6 8 1 Display TLP Options Select Tools gt Options to set whether TLPs display as text or numbers in TLP display fields throughout ROCLINK 800 software including the FST Editor For example the TLP for Register 2
36. ROC menu gt Flags for saving and system variables to Flash memory 1 7 5 Duplicating a Configuration You can duplicate the configuration for another ROC or FloBoss unit by using these menu functions in the following order 1 2 3 File gt Save Configuration to save the configuration to a specified file ROC gt Direct Connect Local Port or Connect modem to connect physically to the second unit and then communicate File gt Download loads the configuration into the unit After you have loaded configuration data into the second ROC Step 3 and changed it as needed you can save the configuration to its own disk file by using Step 1 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 8 Creating a New Configuration File The new configuration file screen allows you to create a configuration file off line with the basic information about the meters and modules that will be installed on the ROC or FloBoss unit for which the new configuration was created 1 Select File gt New New Configuration File File Type Points Module amp Backplanes Control Configuration C FB103 BUS amp Expanded Po Points Per Module Number of PIDs C FB104 Expanded a p E Backplanes Humber of ESTs ROCS0S BOS amp Expanded ERN Version 1 20 C 16 Points Per Module Number of stations Compatability Mode ROCSO Series z Expanded Number of Orifice Meters Version 2 204 Backclenes 80
37. ROC800 Series PERAE E AE ARTEARI NET A E AEA 10 5 Figure 10 6 Set Zero Calibration FloBoss 100 Series EE E A ETE seals antes EE E EE EAEN 10 5 Figure 10 7 Set Zero Calibration ROC300 Series and FIBS AOT irina i EA 10 6 Figure 10 8 Set Span Calibration ccccceeceees 10 7 Figure 10 9 Set Span Calibration ROC300 Series and PIGBOSS40 7 eir elon dcaroutocdavelanes 10 7 Figure 10 10 Set Midpoints Calibration ROC800 Series Wes aun A A ahora E A als ein mee ademas 10 8 Figure 10 11 Set Midpoints Calibration ROC300 Series and FIOBOSS 407 ou ccc ceccceeeccceeecceeecceeecseessseeneees 10 9 Figure 10 12 Set Zero Shift Offset ROC800 Series A e ener oe or A so 10 10 Figure 10 13 Orifice Meter Calibration Example ROC S800 Ser1 S scnaceassnadsamnnccsssesasadioosaridvewebomadecancs 10 11 Figure 10 14 Turbine Meter Calibration Example ROC S00 SemeS scvsiceransusdamnivecscntoadasiccaasicsnusbsensceadec 10 13 Figure 10 15 HART Calibration eee 10 15 Figure 10 16 AI Calibration Values Example ROC800 Ses EEA A E E E E EA 10 16 Figure 10 17 RTD Input Calibration Values 10 17 Figure 10 18 MVS Input Calibration Values 10 19 Figure 11 1 Update Firmware Example ROC300 Series and FLOBOSS 407 scsrrisrenesen etaniers 11 2 Figure 11 2 I O Termination Board 0008 11 3 Figure 11 3 Update Firmware Keypad Display ROC S00 SGTIES Vicisisccaivnsisataseavectdvnsvvsascean
38. ROC800 Series Remote Operations Controllers ROC300 Series FloBoss 407 Flow Managers and FloBoss 100 Series Flow Managers The software and user documentation are supplied on a CD ROM ROCLINK 800 software is designed for ease of use Drop down menus simplify accessing the functions provided by the software Dialog boxes and drop down list boxes help to direct selections and data entry You can perform actions with the keyboard or a pointing device such as a mouse Refer to User Interface Basics for a description of the user interface Help screens are accessed either from the Help menu or in a context sensitive fashion using lt F1 gt This feature makes it easy to access on line information for any ROCLINK 800 software topic You can build custom displays for the ROC or FloBoss that combines both graphic and dynamic data elements The displays can monitor the operation of the ROC or FloBoss either locally or remotely The software also provides multiple levels of security for controlling access to ROCLINK 800 software functions as well as the ROC database on Note If you are using a serial mouse typically plugs into serial port COM1 be sure to set up communications to the ROC or FloBoss through a port that does not share interrupts typically COM2 or a conflict occurs Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 2 Computer Requirements ROCLINK 800 software runs on most IBM compatible personal co
39. RR out RR in SVD out SVD in RR out Day of Week SVD out SVD in RR out Minutes SVD out SVD in Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 7 5 FST Control Related Commands Use Analog Output AO Discrete Output DO and Timed Duration Output TDO control related commands to control outputs o Note The FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series units must use the AO DO and TDO commands to drive outputs from an FST SAV and other commands will not affect the Output Name Description Arguments Results AO Analog Output Sets the Analog Output 1 AO Point Database AO Output ARG1 ARG2 point EUs to the argument value If the Value Analog Output is in Manual no output 2 Database or RR out RR in is sent Constant Value SVD out SVD in DO Discrete Output Sets the Discrete 1 DO Point Database DO Output ARG1 ARG2 Output point status to the argument Value value If the Discrete Output is in 2 Database or RR out RR in Manual no output is sent Constant Value SVD out SVD in TDO Timed Duration Output Activates a DO 1 DO Point Database DO Output ARG1 point configured as a TDO or TDO Value Toggle This command requires that RR out RR in you write a value to the EU Value SVD out SVD in parameter prior to TDO command TDO command is only used in the FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series units As the required SAV command is performs the same
40. RR out RR in SVD out SVD in MSG LCD Message sends message ARGUMENT1 and value 1 Message FST Message ARGUMENT2 to local display panel One 30 character 2 Database or String ARG1 message can be sent by each FST as shown next Constant Value FST Message XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Value ARG2 XXXXXXXX Arg2 val RR out RR in yyyyyyyy ZZZZZ ZZ SVD out SVD in SCAN NEXT PREV MENU XXXX message yyyy FST Tag name Zzzz ARGUMENT2 value ALM Log Alarm records message ARGUMENT1 and value 1 Message Log Alarm ARG1 ARGUMENT2 in the Alarm Log Only the first 10 2 Database or ARG2 characters of the 30 character messages are used Constant Value RR out RR in Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Name Description Arguments Results SVD out SVD in EVT Log Event records message ARGUMENT1 and value 1 Message Log ARGUMENT2 in the Event Log Only the first 10 2 Database or Event ARG1 ARG2 characters of the 30 character message are used Constant Value RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Note The ALM and EVT functions can quickly overfill the allotted log space of alarms and events It is important to assure that these two functions do not operate continuously A 7 7 FST Database Commands Database commands provide access to the configuration and historical databases Operations include reading and writing configuration parameters and rea
41. Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 28 ROCLINK 800 User Manual ee Description ESI Definition 74 IEEE Floating 3 4 16 Code 71 reverses byte 2 and byte 3 order in register xxxxx reverses Point Number ao byte 0 and byte 1 order in register xxxxx 1 This places a 4 byte floating point value into two 2 byte registers to allow integer values to be transmitted Code 72 does the same as Code 71 regardless of the Byte 79 IEEE Floating 344g Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen Point Number o Register xxxxx byte 3 byte 2 Register xxxxx 1 byte 1 byte 0 73 IEEE Floating 3 46 16 FloBoss 100 Series Only Convert Codes 73 and 74 send the IEEE Point Number formatted floating point number as four bytes with a single register request Only the byte order is changed Function Code 73 loads register IEEE Floating Xxxxx in byte 2 byte 3 byte 0 byte 1 order Function Code 74 does the 74 Point Number 3 4 6 16 same as Function Code 73 regardless of the Byte Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen pa No Conversion N A N A 8 5 Modbus Master Table ROC800 Series Select Configure gt Modbus gt Master Table The Modbus Master mode of operation allows the ROC800 Series to simulate a master device that can poll other devices for data and to store that data within the ROC in any valid TLP The ROC800 Series can also send commands to set outputs and write data to a slave device Note The
42. The total is divided by the Extended History Points 5 Enter the Sample Interval for the Extended History Points Note The Sample Interval drop down list box for Extended History Points permits various rates of historical sampling The more frequent the samples the smaller the number of days Note If replacing a chart recorder select a 10 minute interval for 4 points Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 Determine whether the Number of Days are adequate for your application If not adjust the Extended History Number of Points and Sample Interval 7 Enter the Sample Interval for the Extended History Points Note The Sample Interval drop down list box permits various rates of historical sampling The more frequent the samples the smaller the number of days 8 Click the Standard History tab select Archive Types and assign Archive Points if you are configuring more than the eight pre configured points 9 Click Apply Changes in Standard History cause ROCLINK 800 to prompt to save changes This saves the changes to Flash Memory Saving at this point is recommended 10 Click the Extended History tab select Archive Types and assign Archive Points 11 Click the Apply button 6 3 History Setup ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 For the ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 configure Meter gt History and then Configure gt History Points Meter History Use
43. Use Current Date amp Time Select Meter Aun s to Convert Period Start Date End Date 10713 2005 1171772005 Start Eonversion Cancel Figure 6 13 Convert EFM File 2 Select a Device Type the ROC809 or ROC306 312 364 FB103 104 407 503 504 radio button 3 Select the Convert to format PGAS Flow Cal or AGA DET EVT ANA ARM and VOL are ROC800 Series device files available for PGAS EMS Pipeline Services CFX is the ROC800 Series device file available for Flow Cal Coastal Flow Measurement Inc AGA are FloBoss 100 Series files and contain only the eight standard History Points for the Meter Run DET are ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 files are formatted to contain gas composition specific gravity relative density and heating value averages 4 Click the Browse button next to the Select Efm File s to Convert field Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Navigate to the path where the EFM files are located 6 Select the EFM files you desire to convert You can individually select files using the checkboxes or you can click Select All to select all of the EFM files in the folder Click Deselect All to deselect all files in the folder Click OK fl Select EFM File s to Convert A11G22 efm A1G2_827 efm Ie A1G2_FB103_AGA7 efm oe Program Files MA1G2_fb503 etm Mhm lh A1G2_FE504 efm AlG2_fb504alarrnng efm A1G2_ROC3O0 efm 42556255 efm A
44. Y OK Cancel l Apply Figure 4 46 HART Advanced ROCS00 Series Adjusted A D 0 is the calibrated Analog to Digital A D reading corresponding to zero percent input In the Calibrate function this value is altered to set the zero percent input exactly at the Low Reading EU value to eliminate transmitter and system errors Adjusted A D 100 is the calibrated A D reading corresponding to 100 percent input This value is used to convert the input to engineering units In the Calibrate function this value is altered to set the 100 percent input exactly at the High Reading EU value Raw A D Input displays the current reading directly from the Analog to Digital converter When Retain Last Value is selected as the EU Value on Reset the last EU value for the channel is used after a reset or a Warm Start If Use Failsafe Value is selected then the value entered as the Failsafe Value here is used after a reset or Warm Start Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 53 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Pass Through enables pass through communications from a host device through the ROC800 Series unit and on to the HART devices The communications must be in ROC Plus protocol typically for Opcode 120 requests You may either enable it to strip all preamble bytes in HART protocol or leave the entire message intact If Enabled enter the Timeout the amount of time in milliseconds to pause between the end of the pass through commu
45. and Calibration screens The checkboxes will determine the type of access Read Write or Read Only and types of data available for each user 19 The Group Access checkboxes determine the type of access Read Write or Read Only and types of data available for each user 20 The User Access checkboxes determine the type of access Read Write or Read Only and types of data available for each user 21 Ifa Screen Saver is appropriate to your application edit the screen saver TLPs and display parameters The parameter definitions are given in Step 5 22 Once you have completed your modifications to the display file it is good practice to save it to the PC Click the Save As button and save it with a new name or write over an existing file ROC Keypad Display files have the extension dcfg The display files are also saved in the 800 configuration file 23 Once the file has been saved download it to the ROC unit by clicking the Download button Be sure to let the file download without interruption Before downloading the file verify that the ROC comm port has been assigned to LCD Comm Port Owner field on ROC gt Comm Ports 12 7 4 Keypad Display Security ROC800 Series Select Utilities gt Keypad Display Editor Security is provided by the Keypad Display to control user access to information Users are placed in groups having an assigned access level Within each group individuals can be assigned an additional level of acces
46. lt Esc gt de selects all menu options Press the lt Alt gt key or click with the mouse to reactivate the menu bar lt Ctrl N gt Creates a new configuration file lt Ctrl O gt Opens a configuration file lt Ctrl S gt Saves the current configuration file 1 6 5 Help System The Help menu provides detailed on screen information about getting started with ROCLINK 800 software and performing keyboard operations a list of the Help topics and the ROCLINK 800 software version To display context sensitive help on a menu item a parameter or a button press lt F1 gt while the item parameter or button is highlighted A help window appears on the screen To view detailed help select Help gt Help Topics Contents The Contents button displays a list of Help Topics that display based on task oriented situations Each screen tab and field has a help topic associated with it For example the Modbus Scale Values tab is located under Modbus gt Modbus Configuration gt Scale Values Tab Index Use the Index to locate specific Help Topics The Index lists each field individually and by the tab or screen in which the field appears For example Modbus Scale Values appears in the Index under Modbus Configuration gt Scale Values Tab and under Scale Values Each field within the Scale Values Tab displays under the Index listing Modbus Configuration Scale Values Tab and individual based on the name of the fiel
47. page to the other points by using Page Up and Page Down Points are in the same order as the I O modules installed in the slots Note For FloBoss 100 Series units with six points of I O select Configure gt I O gt Setup to select which types of I O each channel will be assigned before configuring the I O points This applies to the software selectable AI DI AO DO and PI DI channels Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 2 Al Analog Input Configuration Analog Inputs are analog signals generated by measurement devices such as pressure and temperature transmitters including RTD probes and pressure sensors Note Use the AI configuration screens to configure a DVS for the FloBoss 100 Series and RTD inputs for the FloBoss 100 Series and FloBoss 407 Note For the FloBoss 407 do not configure the second AI point if the jumper is selected to PI Refer to the FloBoss 407 Flow Manager Instruction Manual Form A6013 Select Configure gt I O gt AI Points Examine the default settings and adjust the parameters to suit your application on each of the tabs in the order given below 1 The General tab sets the basic parameters for the Analog Input point 2 The Advanced tab enables you to configure features such as filtering A D conversions and clipping for the selected Analog Input 3 The AI Calibration tab is available to allow for calibration of the AI point while on line
48. 0 FST is not running All devices 1 FST is running All devices 2 Restart from beginning ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 only 5 Indicates FST has shut down due to an invalid point reference All devices 8 FST Editor initiates the Trace mode ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series only 9 Indicates that the FST in the ROC or FloBoss is processing ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 only When an FST fails as indicated by an RF value of 5 you can view at which Instruction Pointer IP the FST failed IP Instruction Pointer Indicates the storage location in the FST of the next function to be executed One storage location is used for each byte that stores the function Size The number of bytes reserved for the FST program in bytes Equivalent to the end pointer value minus the start pointer value Brk The delay in 100 millisecond intervals between the execution of successive FST Commands or functions The FloBoss 100 Series Break interval is 1 second RR The Results Register or accumulator sometimes referred to as the Signal Value Analog SVA is a floating point value passed between functions or FSTs R1 through R10 Ten floating point registers for each FST The floating point registers are used for global storage and register contents can be called into any of the FSTs configured for a ROC or FloBoss Timer 1 through Timer 4 Four timers When set greater than 0 they decrement by
49. 1 Menu Listing for ROCLINK 800 Menu Menu Options New Open Download Close Save Configuration Print Configuration Print 3 4 Print Setup 4 List of recent files Exit Edit Undo a Cut T Copy T Paste Directory EFM Report Calibration Report History Alarms Events Display I O Monitor Toolbar ROC Direct Connect Connect Collect Data Clock Security Comm Ports Memory i Information I O Control History Segments History Points Opcode Table MODBUS LCD User List i LCD User Data Setup Calibration Values Plate Change History Update Firmware Update Hardware License Key Administrator Convert EFM File User Program Administrator ROCLINK 800 Security Al Calibration Values RTD Calibration Values MVS Calibration Values ee FST Editor ROC Keypad Display Editor Communications Monitor Customize Options Cascade Tile Device Directory List of open windows Help Topics About ROCLINK 800 1 This option applies to ROC800 Series units 2 This option applies to FloBoss 100 Series units 3 This option applies to FloBoss 407 units 4 This option applies to ROC300 Series units Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 6 1 Menu Bar and Menus The menu bar appears at the top of the screen From the menu bar you can use either the keyboard or the mouse to activate a menu and then to select a function
50. 1 130528 Uncorrected MCF METU Minutes Mass Compressibility Multiplier 09979234 Today 0 0 oo bo o a u Multiplier alue esterday 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Month 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Prey Month 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Accumulated 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pulses Accumulated Auto Scan 2 Update 7 Cancel Figure 12 7 Meter Run Values Example ROC800 Series Turbine Select the number of the Meter Run that you wish to monitor You can verify the choice in the meter Tag and Description fields This information was entered in the meter configuration screen The current values of the Differential Pressure orifice Uncorrected Volume turbine Static Pressure and Temperature for the meter selected will display Current Values displays the current Flow Rate Energy Rate and Mass Rate Accumulation displays accumulated flow energy flowing minute and mass values Factors displays current status of calculated and entered parameters of the meter These values are calculated by the firmware Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 8 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 12 6 Custom Displays Select View gt Display The custom display option in ROCLINK 800 software allows you to create customized PC displays or load a display from a disk file You can add fields to monitor flow I O points and other TLPs The display can incorporate live data as well as images and other information you may wish to convey On
51. 26 Figure 8 1 Modbus Configuration General ROC800 SEES a TAN VE ee anes ue em eae 8 3 Figure 8 2 Modbus Configuration General FloBoss TOODETES eara N VEE EE 8 3 Figure 8 3 Modbus Configuration Scale Values ROC SOOES Chie isso rans ash cetera sree A 8 6 Figure 8 4 Modbus History Example ROC800 Series Sieg eek said ee tars E Sonne setios ts aap ene totaal e oleae 8 8 Figure 8 5 Modbus History Access Registers FloBoss IOO SENES hiana a dence a asaaiee 8 10 Figure 8 6 Modbus History Table ROC800 Series E EE L E E T A A 8 12 Figure 8 7 Modbus Registers ROC800 Series 8 19 Figure 8 8 Modbus Registers FloBoss 100 Series E E E I O cowed TE teatansben sesh T 8 20 Figure 8 9 Modbus Master Table ROC800 Series EPO ETETE AEE T EAE E A T 8 30 Figure 8 10 Modbus Master Modem ROC800 Series OE S ata eae aatcaee ane etee cen nee e mates 8 31 Figure 8 11 Modbus Host Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC SUO SETICS Jeita tessa aateascake Meee 8 32 Figure 9 1 Saving Configuration esseeseeeeeeeees 9 2 Figure 9 2 Saving Configuration Complete 9 2 Figure 9 3 Download Configuration sseeeeeee 9 3 Figure 10 1 View Calibration Report 10 2 Figure 10 2 Calibration Report Print Preview 10 3 Figure 10 3 Verify Calibration ROC800 Series 10 4 Figure 10 4 Verify Calibration ROC300 Series and FOBOSA iraina a a 10 4 Figure 10 5 Set Zero Calibration
52. 3 Orifice Values 114 Multiplier Value 12 Flow Weighted Formulaic Orifice Values Multiplier Value 4 Pressure Extension 4 Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 27 ROCLINK 800 User Manual History Configuration for Orifice Meter Archive Type Averaging Rate Type Point Type Totalize 134 _ None 0 Orifice Values 114 Flow Accumulated 23 DE Per Day 13 Orifice Values 114 Flow Rate Per Day 0 129 I Per Hour 12 Orifice Values 114 Flow Rate Per Hour 2 129 Totalize 134 None 0 Orifice Values 114 Energy Accumulated 33 ee Per Day 13 Orifice Values 114 Energy Rate Per Day 1 129 ee Per Hour 12 Orifice Values 114 Energy Rate Per Hour 3 129 History Configuration for Turbine Meter Archive Type Averaging Rate Type Point Type Flowing Minutes Totalize 134 None 0 Turbine Values 116 Minutes Accumulated 21 Totalize 134 None 0 Turbine Values 116 Pulses Accumulated 9 1 113 ed eepe Formulaic 2 113 O ila ae p O 3 113 ee ee eee pe S Formulaic 4 113 1 113 pee kee eepe Formulaic 2 113 D a a egron per 11 3 2 ee es Formulaic 4 11 3 edie e ee ae pOnMUIAIG Xe ee ee nee are a sees aa Volume 31 ge rere Pereira 113 Totalize 134 None 0 Turbine Values 114 Flow Accumulated 16 Accumulate 129 Per Day 13 Turbine Values 114 Flow Rate Per Day 0 Accumulate 129 Per Hour 12 Turbin
53. Access Level Utilities Communications Monitor Directory Display gt Display 1 Display gt Display 2 Toolbar Cascade Currently Open Files View Display gt From Fil E Window Tie T Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 2 ROCLINK 800 Security Select Utilities gt ROCLINK 800 Security The ROCLINK 800 Security screen allows you to control who can log on to ROCLINK 800 software and which screens they can access You may specify up to 21 different users The Operator ID is used as the User ID when you login to ROCLINK 800 Refer to Section 12 Keypad Display Security Note After you initially access ROCLINK 800 software and establish security parameters delete the default Operator ID LOI and default Operator Password 1000 to prevent unauthorized users from accessing and changing parameters Note To delete an Operator ID Password or Access Level highlight the cell and use the backspace key or Delete key ROCLINK 800 Security Uperator ID Password Access Level 1000 z Figure 2 1 ROCLINK 800 Security 1 Select Utilities gt ROCLINK 800 Security 2 Enter the three alphanumeric characters for the Operator ID which is typically the initials of the person who operates the device Each Operator ID must be unique and is case sensitive Note The default Operator ID is LOI and the default Password is 1000 3 Enter the four numeric characters between 00
54. CONFIGURATION waicsscesscesics chi shosaMescushatancerassenbstoatabionueveuscelaniacsseeaheaiebiecamtesus Jo Opn a CONT UE AIO earne E E E E osetebaeaneaxt AETR Sechon 10 a I ACI O eeaeee EESE EEE EEES LOL CAERA TONDA SCS e E E E 10 1 WD Me MRAP ON I ODO a E E E E E O2 STARING CABRA TION eioen an E E ements Wer yon EO eE S E 10 2 2 Set Zero Calibration c ce escccsscscccsccesccesccescesscesscesscesscesseescessesscesscesscesseessesscenscesscs DG e A O a rca saree ss ener erase E elton uae nsdn cdawnetous E E IO PAAC Se No Fol ee CA 9 7110 10 eee eee E enn ene nes ee ee 10 8 10 2 5 Zero Shift Offset RTD Bias Calibration cc ecccccccccccccssseeeeeceeeceeeaaeseeeeeeeeeaaeeenees 10 1020 Onnee Mer Caur OM gc ne dni tenn A aens cue pacts E EE 10 2 7 Turbine Meter Calibration 0 0 cccccecccscccsccesccescescenscesccesscesseusseessessesssesccesceussens t028 AFand IS IDC ait Di ait Oieee oncensncunetetoseassweaiabasacassaceeriessacetaseassmeaesaceinonmeseciaal OZS TARF 2111110 2 101 e rR eT tS OY ren ee eee 10 3 ANALOG INPUT CALIBRATION VALUES cccccccccssccccssccessccesecseescceuscseuscseeecseesseeuseseusseesesseeesens 10 4 RTD INPUT CALIBRATION VALUES ccccccccscccssccceccenecsccecscscescscecsenacsceucacseeasscecsenacsenecacseeecas 10 5 MVS INPUT CALIBRATION VALUES ROCS800 SERIES AND FLOBOSS 407 oo eeeceeeeee ee Section 11 Updates and Changes ssssccccccssssssscccccsssssss
55. Dec 05 FST Editor A 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 3 FST Registers The FST Registers screen allows you to control and View the FST operation without opening the FST Editor FST Registers EST 1 FSTO1 Tag FST01 General Advanced Statue Version e e Description Cac E CRAIG Registers Tag Data Tag Data Register foo Register06 OO RegisterD2 0 0 RegisteO 00 Register05 R10 Registeri0 oo o n mn kn l lw im n mn 7 m 0 wo lo me mM n Copy E Paste 2 Update Y OK 7 Cancel 1 Apply Figure A 1 FST Registers General ROCS8 amp 00 Series 1 Select Configure gt Control gt FST Registers 2 Click the Advanced tab FST Registers EST 1 FST01 Tag FST01 Timer 1 Misc H Execution Delay Timer 2 Mise H2 0 Secs Timer 3 Misc H3 Result Register Timer 4 Misc 4 0 0 Mesg 1 Compare Flag Mesg Hz 0 Meg Data 1 0 0 H2 0 0 Code Size 0 Buttes Code Painter E Copy B Paste 2 Update Y OK JA Cancel 1 Apply Figure A 2 FST Registers Advanced ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Use the FST drop down list box to select the FST Enter the FST Tag as a 10 character name identifying the FST Register point optional The Version number and Description of the FST displays entered when the FST is downloaded FST Status shows the current state and allows for the starting an
56. Default Tag Al Default Filter 3 zero Shift 0 0 Adjusted A D 0 lal J Adjusted A D 100 4095 Raw 4 0 Input ls ooo Actual Scan 0 595951 Seconds Average Raw Value Clipping C Enabled f Enabled Disabled Disabled Copp E Paste 2 Update y OF 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 4 3 Al Advanced ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Analog Input Ed Analog Inputs 1 Freed AIH Tag Fixed AIH General Advanced a Calibration Alarms Filter So Adjusted A D 0 800 Adjusted A D 100 4000 Baw A D Input in Actual Scan i Seconds Average Faw Value Clipping Temp Compensation Enabled C Enabled f Disabled f Disabled Disabled Copy BB Paste 2 Update yY OK Cancel tl Apply Figure 4 4 AI Advanced ROC300 Series Analog Input Analog Inputs 1 Freed AIH Tag Fixed AIH Filter 3 Acton on Failure i Adjusted 4 D U 800 Hold Last Value C Set To Fault Value Z 4000 Adjusted A D 100 Fault Value 0 0 Raw A D Input 7 Actual Scan 1 Seconds Average Raw Value Clipping Temp Compensation Enabled C Enabled C Enabled C Disabled Disabled Disabled Copp E Paste 2 Update yY OF 7 Cancel Apply Figure 4 5 AI Advanced FloBoss 407 Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Analog Input Analog Inputs 1
57. E aoe een aseenera suede pase cea vases eeeeahe A 12 Reading Modbus Events amp Alarms Register 8 15 Relerence TeMi ernir 5 30 PRS 1 0S e E 8 18 FAS A EE A E E A A 3 REMOVE PLOSTaIMs esirinnas ndi 1 4 Renaming Group Or DEVICE sosea rru kn EEE 2 17 Reports eTo a E E 10 2 Collect Dala sseui gern sera er IRN Eaa 6 17 PV E E eases quecseeeonee 6 13 6 17 From CC ca suansecinusnesnancnnesanonnveaunaamnaseteaaneaatecanes 6 32 BEE OIF Oso sicoransquansecie uses sancnnesanoonveaunaamnnseteaaneasae same 6 33 History Plot seca snaetonnaanaintmecenooneannarneeseteanneasat same 6 34 History Alarm and Event Logs ccceeeeeees 6 31 O cas nese sear gscene 3s N E 6 34 OV 1G Wy E E TE EA TE T 6 18 PE CO aa E E 2 26 Reset All Connections sseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssees 3 7 Resistance Temperature Detector Refer to RD iiss ccoucresonesocesmacntsanonencvessaustseverediatcudes 4 38 Results Register Peai n E E 10 2 eore E AE EE A 2 Retrieving Configurations cccccccececeeeeeesseeseseeeeees 9 1 Returning the Device to Factory Default Settings 3 18 Revision Info cc cccccccccssssssseseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeees 3 13 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 User Manual ROC GUE CE Dala eeuen EEE 6 17 Comm Ports cece eeeeee 2 1 2 21 2 22 2 25 8 32 Direct ONGC seseriai n 2 36 E e e A E T A A A 3 15 PROPIA loi aasien irena A EAER 3 4 PION o E TEE 6 35 SC a E AEA TI EPEAT
58. E ee Oe 4 3 Value on Power ReSet c c cece ceecceccesccesscesceeseees 4 12 Values AI Calibration sessen aii 10 16 E D ESEE E EEA E AAN AET 12 3 Mare ee a 12 7 MVS Ca Brat OD wis escssvncdasscocecsesswasdeostocaseenatecssenss 10 19 RID CIT AU TO scriosann ini 10 17 Variable K Factof cscissivastasanacevsnguweeternsandveeciau 5 15 5 30 Verify CIID RAIN oree 10 3 View Calibration Report cccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 2 Custom Displays ccccceeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 9 I 13 DU SCOT oera sles ett nee rE 2 14 B SSS 6 Cc Given Reece ean nee Pe eee eR Cena Oreo 12 10 EEM REDON aaien na a S 6 18 HISTO ea asa ena tae naats 6 1 6 2 6 31 POS MOnItOR ceviche ude neath eiiahinadetataniads 12 3 VIS COSTLY ea anenioe socio edness naan iteenist 5 29 W X Water Manometer Calibration eeeeeeeeeessssssssseeee 5 33 WeDo sinna 1 2 Window Device DICCION senean ia 2 14 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Writing ES Disenarai a E taescataenectecate eas A 12 Y Xesterday S Tollasia Madunasnn muda deodsanss 4 31 Z LWO EU cerren EES 4 19 Z ROS D aans Ea E TA 10 10 If you have comments or questions regarding this manual please direct them to your local sales representative or contact Emerson Process Management Flow Computer Division Marshalltown IA 50158 U S A Houston TX 77065 U S A Pickering North Yorkshire UK Y018 7JA Website www EmersonProcess com flow Rev Dec 05
59. Host decides to request history the reply message contains the date and time stamp and historical values configured for the specified register for that index For the ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series the response message contains two floating point values for the time and date stamp of the history archive FloBoss 100 Series time stamp HHMMSS and date stamp MMDDYY ROC800 Series time stamp HAMM and date stamp MMDDY Y and floating point values for each of the defined History Points for that History Archive Register The date stamp for history uses the current year and does not figure the number of years since 1980 For example if the current year is 2007 the year Y Y for the date stamp would be 07 Note For the FloBoss 100 Series when in Modbus with EFM extensions mode two changes occur The time stamp is in the HHMM format and the date stamp is returned before the time stamp The ROC800 Series is always in this format For the ROC800 Series History collection is mapped on the Modbus History Table For the FloBoss 100 Series History collection is mapped on the Modbus History Access Registers tab of the Modbus Configuration screen Table 8 1 summarizes the function calls and their associated register and data fields Table 8 1 Modbus History Event and Alarm Functionality Function a Code Register Field Data Field Description 03 7160 Daily Ignored FloBoss 100 Series only Respons
60. Inputs General ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 14 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Discrete Input Discrete Inputs 1 Dl Default Tag Di Default General Advanced TDI Parameters Alarms Point Humber Ad Scan Period 3 DIN Type Status f Standard C Lached C Time Duration TO On C Off Scanning Alarming e Enabled C Disabled C Enabled e Disabled Active Alarms jo EA Paste 2 Update Y OK x Cancel a Apply Figure 4 15 Discrete Inputs General FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series Select the Discrete Input to be configured The inputs are listed by both number and tag Enter a 10 character string Tag for identification of this Point Number Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used The Point Number identifies the physical location of the input For the ROC800 Series the Point Number identifies the module slot channel number Select the Scanning option For the input to automatically process the field input select Enabled Automatic Mode When Scanning is set to Disabled Manual Mode Status is no longer automatically updated by the ROC or FloBoss If Alarming is Enabled an alarm generates when Scanning is set to Disabled Enter the Module Scan Period as the amount of time between scans of the physical hardware and updates of the Status Value in seconds The default value is 1 second All Discrete Inputs
61. Inputs and Outputs I O 4 34 ROCLINK 800 User Manual For a FloBoss 407 the Conversion K Factor value should be set to produce a EU value in the units select for the EU Units Define the EU Units FloBoss 407 represented by the EU Value The EU selections of values CF m 10CF 10m CCF 100m and MCF kM affect the weight of each pulse received by the Pulse Input For example if the PI is configured so that 50 pulses 1 EU and the EU Units is set to EU CF m then 100 pulses 2 CF or 2 m If the PI is configured so that 50 pulses 1 EU and the EU Units is set to EU MCF or kM then 100 pulses 2 MCF or 2 kM This selection will also have an effect on the uncorrected volume totals input to an AGA7 calculation The AGA 7 calculation converts the Pulse Input rate to MCF kM per day for the uncorrected meter input 4 6 3 PI Alarms Select Configure gt I O gt PI Points The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this PI point When Alarming is Enabled the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband are configured on the Alarms tab When Alarming is Disabled no limit alarms generate for this point The Point Fail alarm appears in the Active Alarms field but will not be logged in the Alarms Log To conserve Alarms Log space alarms should be enabled only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so that no false alarms generate Pulse Input Pulse I
62. Le E pe rr a aef ae Y Ok J Cancel Apply Figure 2 2 Device Security Users ROCS8 amp 00 Series and FloBoss 100 Series 3 Enter the Operator ID Password Confirmed Password and user Access Level Refer to Table 2 1 Security Access Levels on page 2 2 Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 Select the Group to which the user belongs Device Security User Member of Groups Operator ID TRF Password pee Confirm Password g Access Level 5 Oo 07 Oe ow hs WL OO Y OK X Cancel Figure 2 3 Device Security Users Maintenance ROCS800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series 5 Click OK and click Apply Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 3 2 Device Security Users FloBoss 407 Select ROC gt Security The Device Security screen controls who has access to the Comm Ports and LCD Keypad on the FloBoss device When Enabled you must login to use the communications port Each communications port may be Enabled or Disabled separately For the FloBoss 407 Device Security also controls who has access to the Liquid Crystal Display LCD for the unit Select an Operator ID in the table to set each individual s security for up to 32 users Device Security Operator ID LOD ON 2 User List 3 Std Lists wa ecumy on LO aoe User ID View FK Wiew E dit YWiew Edit Yiew Edit 3 fe Disabl
63. Manual Loop Status ee Hacer 40 a0 oo Disabled Auto Calc Time 1 5 Seconds Bice ao oo o es 1 0 Definition ScaleFactor 1 0 4 0 Setpoint Integral Deadband bo oo Process Wariable iUindelined ae l SP Ramp Fate oo oo Primary Switch Py Undefined pa l Switch to Override if gt l oo o Manual Tracking Halt PID On Reset i Disabled e Disabled Override C Enabled C Enabled Setpoint Process Yarable u ndefined o Override Switch PY Undefined Ea Min Control Time U Switch to Primary if E 0 0 SEC Output Primary Output Undefined ES Override Output Undefined Ee 0 0 g Tuning Copy ro Paste 2 Update ha OF X Cancel a Apply Figure 7 6 PID Loop ROC300 Series Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 8 Click Apply oe SS YS ROCLINK 800 User Manual To enable PIDs in a ROC or FloBoss select ROC gt Information gt Points Enter the number of PIDs you desire in the Point PIDs Active field To set up a PID loop configure the input for the Process Variable Configure the one AO or the two DO points each of which must be configured as TDO Timed Duration Output points If Override Control is selected Discrete Control will not be available 6 Select Configure gt Control gt PID to configure the parameters associated with PID Control Loops 7 4 3 PID General Select Configure gt Control gt PID Loop PID Loop PID 1 PID 1 General
64. Modbus Master Table only applies to the ROC800 Series When the FloBoss 100 Series has the special User Program installed to act as a host device the Modbus Master parameters are configured on the user data screen The Modbus Master functionality can be configured on the EIA 232 RS 232 EIA 485 RS 485 and modem communications ports COMM2 to COMMS The LOI and Ethernet COMM1 ports will not support Modbus Master communications Up to 200 different master requests commands can be configured across communication ports COMM2 to COMMS Each command can transmit or receive up to 240 bytes of data Modbus Function Codes 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 and 16 are supported Function Codes 1 to 4 request data from slaves while 5 6 15 and 16 transmit data to a slave device Each master request configured uses data read from or written to registers defined in the Modbus Registers table When using Modbus Function Codes to 4 the ROC800 Series will be reading data from a slave device and writing it to the TLP specified in the Modbus Registers table When using Modbus Function Codes 5 6 15 and 16 the ROC800 Series will be reading data from the TLP specified in the Modbus Registers table and write it to the slave device As a Modbus Master the ROC800 Series may have to communicate to multiple slave devices through modems and phone lines The Modbus Master Modem screen will provide the necessary parameters to configure the modems and map RTU Addresses to pho
65. Monday October 4 2005 Figure 1 3 About ROCLINK 800 ROCS800 Series 1 6 7 Basic Navigation When you start the ROCLINK 800 software the Device Directory displays After you connect to a ROC or FloBoss the Configuration Tree View displays Refer to Figure 1 7 Use the and symbols to display or hide various options Double click a point to display the associated parameter configuration screen You can also use the menu options and buttons to display the associated parameter configuration screen The Status Line at the bottom of the Device Directory and Configuration Tree View serves two purposes First on the left side of the line brief information about the device being connected Second on the right side of the line the device on line or off line status and system time display Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 6 8 TLP Box Selections Throughout ROCLINK 800 software the Select TLP dialog can be accessed by clicking the E browse button with three dots The Select TLP dialog allows you to assign specific inputs and outputs to parameters ROCLINK 800 software uses Point Type T Logical Number L and Parameter P to define point locations Select TLP Point Type Logical Number Parameter Undefined Ai 91 System Variables a COMM Baud Rate Generator Used Logon Parameters COMM Stop Bits License Kep Information LOMMS Data Bits User C Configuration COMM4
66. NEN A ete eee 4 29 Figure 4 28 Pulse Inputs General FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series 4 30 Rev Dec 05 Index ROCLINK 800 User Manual Figure 4 29 Pulse Input Advanced ROC800 Series Figure 4 30 Pulse Inputs Advanced FloBoss 407 and ROC SUO Series haii a a 4 33 Figure 4 31 Pulse Inputs Advanced FloBoss 100 DELIOS NEE E EA E E E EN 4 33 Figure 4 33 Pulse Inputs Alarms FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series 4 36 Figure 4 34 Pulse Interface Module Data FloBoss 104 Figure 4 36 RTD General ROC800 Series 4 39 Figure 4 37 RTD Advanced ROC800 Series 4 40 Figure 4 38 RTD Alarms ROC800 Series 4 4 Figure 4 39 Thermocouple General ROC800 Series Figure 4 45 HART General ROC800 Series 4 51 Figure 4 46 HART Advanced ROC800 Series 4 53 Figure 4 47 HART Device ROC800 Series 4 54 Figure 4 48 Multi Variable Sensor ROC800 Series or FIGBOSSiAOT unn Maeda 4 57 Figure 5 1 Station General ROC800 Series 5 3 Figure 5 2 Station Gas Quality ROC800 Series 5 5 Figure 5 3 Station Advanced ROC800 Series 5 7 Figure 5 4 Station Alarms ROC800 Series 5 9 Figure 5 5 Meter General Orifice ROC800 Series VE PTE FERAE TEE aches sla PAREEN POL PT AAEE E ETE TE ET 5 12 Figure 5 6 Meter General Turbine ROC800
67. OK Cancel Apply Figure 4 31 Pulse Inputs Advanced FloBoss 100 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 33 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Select the type of EU Option Rate Max Rollover EU Value is assigned the values of the Current Rate parameter Today s Total Max Rollover EU Value is assigned the value of the Today s Total parameter Running Total Entered Rollover EU Value corresponds to the accumulated pulses multiplied by the Conversion factor If the EU Value exceeds the Rollover value it is cleared and starts to accumulate from 0 again In this mode EU Values are not cleared at Contract Hour Enter the Rollover Value EUs when Running Total Entered Rollover is selected in the EU Options field Enter a number in EUs not pulses to specify when the rollover should occur This field is not used when Rate or Today s Total is selected as the EU Option type The Filter Time Seconds FloBoss 100 Series determines the amount of time in seconds between start of pulse and recognition of pulse The user should estimate the amount of signal bounce time so that the FloBoss will not count noise as actual pulses If none the default 1s selected the FloBoss will recognize all pulse signal movement as actual pulses Enter the Rate Period if Rate was selected under EU Options Four time periods can be selected to perform the rate calculation EU Sec Calculati
68. Other Information System Configuration keypad Display Addressing ROC Plus Protocol MAC Address 00a0d8fc09d6 IP Port Humber a000 IF Address hooo Inactivity Time 3600 0 Seconds Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 keep Alive Time 324 Seconds Gateway Address O01 Active Connections oO Reset All Connections Modbus Address to Use FOZ IF Port Humber C Device Address Inactivity Time J600 0 Seconds Keep Alive Time a24 Seconds C Either Device or Slave Active Connections 0 Slave Address 0 Reset All Connections 2 Update yY OK Cancel i Apply Figure 3 6 Information Internet ROCS00 Series View the MAC Address for the ROC unit The Media Access Control Address MAC Address is also referred to as the Ethernet address and is set at the factory Enter the desired IP Address for the ROC The IP Address will identify the ROC device on a TCP IP network Enter a Subnet Mask if required The Subnet mask is a mask used to determine to which subnet an IP address belongs Enter the desired Gateway Address for the ROC800 Series unit The Gateway address identifies the node on a network that serves as an entrance to the network on which the ROC resides Enter the IP Port Number for the Modbus or ROC Plus Protocol communications The IP Port Number determines which port that the ROC unit monitors for Modbus or ROC Plus Protocol connections when communicating over a TCP IP connection The ROC
69. Poit f ll Comm Pors o Undefined Poit O All Comm Parts o Undefined Poit O ll Comm Parts O Undefined Point O all Comm Ports o Undefined Poit f ll Comm Ports o Undefined Poit O AI Comm Ports Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 8 7 Modbus Registers ROCS800 Series Modbus Communications 8 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Modbus Registers Function Index S 0S seyret Function Hame Function 1 Device Parameter s Indexing Conversion OU STATUS mm f Point Param ndefined f Point Param f Point Param f Point Param f Point Param f Point Param ndefined f Point Param ndefined f Point C Param Lp el Ore EE FO El es ot P e DE f Point Param f Point Param Point Param f Point Param f Point Param ndetined ndefined f Point C Param co HEHEHE EE EEE EEE cos J m E C i 7 7 o 7 ie C a 7 a 7 ad C C m al 7 E _ a ee iam L a Pa o e f Point C Param Update y DK i Cancel Figure 8 8 Modbus Registers FloBoss 100 Series For a ROC800 Series twenty four register tables are available each containing fifteen table entries Each table entry can define multiple registers by using either point indexing or parameter indexing By making the registers continuous when the Start Register address of a new line is one greater than the End Register address of the previous line a continuous
70. ROC300 Series PA E EE E E E 2 22 Table 3 1 ROC gt Flag Definitions ee 3 17 Table 5 1 Default Engineering Units EU 5 2 Table 6 1 Optional History Configuration per Meter Run ENA E A neeedesaemeateannen 6 14 Table 6 2 Orifice EFM History Point for ROC800 Series ee E E E E E A 6 14 Table 6 3 Turbine EFM History Points for ROC800 S E E TE E sosces 6 15 Table 6 4 EFM History Points for a FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 eee cee eee seco eee 6 16 Table 8 1 Modbus History Event and Alarm CTI OMAMLY sis rncasceanceactus sacaeaeseneesnannaeasaanonseyouasncaonne 8 9 Table 8 2 Host Events and Alarms Request Example DVN SSS E E E E encualtes 8 16 Table 8 3 Events and Alarms Response Example WES e sored E E E E 8 16 Table 8 4 Events and Alarms Acknowledgement Response Example Message ccccccccsssssssseeeeeees 8 16 Table 8 5 Modbus Events and Alarms Log Contents see cri Bie ET A E T T 8 17 Table 8 6 Event and Alarm Change Bit Map Contents PAETAE NOAT EET A E ecu eenieaaeeeeenccirtent 8 17 l 12 Table 8 7 Modbus Register Definition Defaults FloBoss TOO S CICS noeneen 8 21 Table 8 8 Modbus Function Codes 8 22 Table 8 9 Modbus Convert Codes ccceccceeeeees 8 23 Table 8 10 Status of Host Request or Command 8 30 Table A 1 Devices Software and FST Functionality EI PEN I IEEE TIIN E TAS T E E TIEA N IN T A 2 Table A 2 Works
71. Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear If Alarming is set to Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled 4 3 2 AO Advanced Select Configure gt I O gt AO Points The Advanced Analog Outputs tab enables you to configure features such as resetting and RBX Alarming for the Analog Output Analog Output Analog Uutpute 1 A0 Default Tag AO Default Raw 044 Output 2504 Adjusted D74 Or 2504 Adjusted DA 100 62923 Value on Reset f Retain Last Value C Use Failsafe Value Failsafe Value 0 0 Copy B Paste 2 Update y OK Cancel Apply Figure 4 11 AO Advanced ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Analog Output Analog Outputs 1 A0 Deft 1 Tag Ag Detlt 1 General Advanced Raw O44 Output 0 Adjusted D74 0 o Adjusted 074 100 3250 RBs Alarming C Disabled C On Alarm Clear On Alarm Set f On lar Set and Clear Value on Power Reset C Low EU f Retain Last Value 2 Update YY OK Y Cancel Apply Figure 4 12 AO Advanced FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series Displays the Raw D A Output current reading in counts written to the Digital to Analog converter The D A value sent to the AO is the Raw D A Output Enter the Adjusted D A 0 count used by the Digital to Analog converter for zero percent output This value is also used to scale the output to eng
72. Security settings Rev Nov 05 Device Security Users Groups Comm Ports User Group Summary Member of Grou 1 g r a a r E E mo a E E E T rr E E G F a LMM MM ge ge Og OO OO OO SR a ee Se LMM MW Meg ge OO OO OO Oe LMM MM eg ge Og OO OO OO LM Mi Mi Mi Mg L OO OO OO a Le OOO Pee eee eee Bee eee eee Lo OO Lo OO OO Oe Li OO Oe Pee eee eee Loe tO Ot Bee eee eee Bee eee eee Lo OO Oe raup 1 AS t tt k a Da el T el CT el TT ae 5 t a mn el co LMM We OOOO 2 Update y OK 4 Cancel Apply Figure 2 8 Device Security User Group Summary ROCS800 Series Configuring Communications and Security 2 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 4 License Key Administrator ROC800 Series Select Utilities gt License Key Administrator to access the license information on any license key that may currently be installed in the CPU of the ROC800 Series From this screen you can view and manage the licenses stored on the license key s AGA Meter Runs and some applications such as DS800 and user programs must have a license key installed in the ROC800 Series CPU with the appropriate entry to allow execution of the application The Application Code is specific to the application and is defined by the application provider The application code should not be mistaken for license quantity License Application Code values may not be merged or s
73. Select History to View ROCS800 Series 6 8 5 Viewing Report Logs From a File A report is generated based on your Search Criteria from a disk file 1 Select View menu gt History Alarm or Event Log gt From File 2 Select the file and click Open 3 Perform one of the following Select New Return to the Select History Points to be shown screen and perform a new search Invert View the log in reverse order default is newest to oldest This changes the time order of the Alarm or Event Log Plot View a graphical display of the report Save Save the report to a file Print Preview Print the report gt 6M Close Close the screen Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 33 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 8 6 Viewing the History Log Report Graphically Plot After selecting View gt History gt From ROC or From File the history report displays Click the Plot button to view a graphical display the first four points of the History Report The plot chart displays each series of lines as connected points of data based on the time the data was archived and the current value at that time The Plot chart displays the type of history device type date time and the Operator ID name in the header The left Y axis displays the value and the bottom X axis displays the date and time the value was read A legend at the bottom of the graph corresponds with the lines within the graph Use th
74. Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 23 Rev Nov 05 Comm Port ROCLINK 800 User Manual Figure 2 16 Comm Port FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Configuring Communications and Security 2 24 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 7 1 Comm Ports General Select ROC gt Comm Ports to configure the communications ports on the ROC or FloBoss Comm Port Comm Ports COMM ooo Tag COMM2 General Modem SAB Store amp Forward Diagnostics Comm Type AS 232 Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Kep On Delay 300 f 600 f Mone ae w 0 01 SECS 1200 f 2400 f Even f cr 2 eeu OO m m C 4800 f S600 C Odd on eae jf 1926 C SB4k a 57 6 ERG 0 Port Owner ROC Plus Protocol Modbus Slave f ROC Flus Protocal Only Modbus Slave Orly Modbus Master DS 800 LCD User Program 1 User Program 2 User Program 3 User Program 4 User Program 5 User Program 6 User Program 7 User Program 2 Update XY OK 7 Cancel Figure 2 17 Comm Port Example ROCS800 Series eee eee ee m m m m m m Select the Communications Port that the device is using to communicate Enter the 10 character Tag name for identification of the communications port Comm Type ROC800 Series displays the type of communications port associated to this Comm Port number such as EJA 232 RS 232 Select the transmit and receive data Baud Rate in bits per second If Parit
75. Series Figure 5 7 Meter General FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series cece eee 5 13 Figure 5 8 Meter Inputs Orifice ROC800 Series SEES arion cn vasaancedad T 5 21 Figure 5 12 Meter Advanced Turbine ROC800 SCIES ic avausetalecavteessa A T TO 5 22 Figure 5 13 Meter Advanced Orifice FloBoss 100 DC LIOS ATES E PEE a oad une teenie eater 5 23 Figure 5 14 Meter Advanced Turbine FloBoss 100 SOLIS ious Wadsiiien isco Meise Nasiatiemetews 5 24 Figure 5 15 Meter Advanced Orifice ROC300 CS catalan EAE TE E T A E E ote tule ees 5 25 Figure 5 16 Meter Advanced Turbine ROC300 EE PEET E E EE TEE EE E E A TET 5 26 Figure 5 17 Meter Advanced Orifice FloBoss 407 E soa ioes E NE E AE 5 27 Figure 5 18 Meter Advanced Turbine FloBoss 407 ee Ce ee NE ee rer er ot 5 28 Figure 5 19 Meter Sampler FloBoss 100 Series E T EA AA E EE AT 5 32 Figure 5 20 Meter Instrument Calibration FloBoss TOO Sernie srra island iia celemiens 5 33 Figure 5 21 Meter Calibration Factors Orifice ROC S002SenieS saiisanuls a eacaiated 5 34 Figure 5 22 Meter Alarms ROC800 Series 5 35 Figure 5 23 Meter Alarms FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 ROC300 SerieS cccceecccceeeeecee eee 5 36 Figure 5 24 Meter Mass Meter Pressure Effect Turbine ROC800 SerieS 0 0 0 cece cceeeccceeeeceeeeeees 5 38
76. Series is determined by the History Segment Configuration screen Once the History Segment has been configured you may configure the History Points in each Segment For the ROC800 Series History Points can be distributed among History Segments 1 through 10 and the General History Segment For each History Segment you can configure the number of periodic history values archived the frequency of archiving the periodic values the number of daily values archived and the contract hour The number of minute values is fixed at 60 Additionally you can enable or disable logging and force the logging of daily values on a per Segment basis In History Segments through 10 the number of points in the Segment is configurable The maximum total number of points available for all History Points in all Segments is 200 but may be less depending on the number of periodic and daily values configured The number of points in the general History Segment will be determined by the system based on remaining memory All History Points in a Segment share the same time stamps with one time stamp allotted for each of the minute periodic and daily logs available in that Segment The History Segments 1 through 10 can be tied to meter Stations by configuring the History Segment under Meter gt Setup gt Station This allows the History Segment to inform the Station when the contract hour has occurred so that the Station can maintain daily and monthly accumulations
77. Y OK Cancel Apply Figure 4 17 Discrete Inputs Advanced FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series In the Input field select Normal to signify the field input as on when wired through a set of closed contacts Select Inverted to cause the field input to be inverted in the Status field On becomes Off and vice versa An open circuit in the field would then be indicated as On in the Status parameter and closed contacts would be indicated as Off in the Status Enter the Filter to determine the amount of time that the Discrete Input must remain in the On high state before it 1s recognized as such The Filter value is entered as a number of Filter Intervals Valid entries are 0 to 255 The Discrete Input returns to the Off state immediately upon detection of the On to Off transition there is no filtering for this transition For the FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 Filter Intervals is used with the Filter parameter to determine the amount of time that the Discrete Input must remain in the On high state before it is recognized as such The Filter value is entered as a number from 0 to 255 and the Filter Interval selection determines the time basis The Discrete Input returns to the Off state immediately upon detection of the On to Off transition there is no filtering for this transition For the FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series when 0 25 seconds is selected as the Filter Interval the Filter is defined as
78. and FloBoss 407 enable RTS CTS Handshaking if applicable The Valid Receive Ctr Counter displays the number of valid messages received by the FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 on this communication port This counter can be preset to a value or cleared For the FloBoss 100 Series Comm Board indicates if the communications port is available Local Port and COMM1 are always present Comm Board and Board Type indicate an optional communications board is installed Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 26 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 2 Comm Ports Modbus Host Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Select ROC gt Comm Ports gt Modbus Host Parameters tab to configure the Modbus communications on the ROC or FloBoss AE SS E Comm Port Comm Ports Local Fort r Tag Local Port General Start Transmission Continous Polling f Active C nactive Enabled Disabled Starting Hast Request jo Host Poll Delay Seconds Transmission Status Idle Copy rm Paste Update y DK Cancel Apply Figure 2 18 Modbus Host Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Note Modbus functionality is not resident in the firmware The Modbus User Program must be loaded and enabled for this tab to be relevant Select ROC gt Comm Ports Select the host Comm Port and click the Modbus Host Parameters tab Select the Start Transmission Active radio button to
79. and dropping it on the frame Align multiple objects Select Align Lefts or another alignment option from the tool bar selection list Multiple Object Spacing Select Make Vertical Spacing Equal and Make Horizontal Spacing Equal or another selection from the tool bar Tab Rey Order Select Set Tab Key Order under the tool bar Other Tools selection list Edit Auto Scan 2 Update Close F Figure 12 10 Custom Display Example Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 14 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 12 6 6 Display Administrator Select View gt Display gt From Device gt Display Administrator to access Custom Displays stored in the ROC800 Series unit with firmware version 1 20 or greater The ROC800 Series can store a maximum of 246 Displays Custom User Displays and User Program Displays Display Administrator User Displays Installed in Device Level Sensor Program Configuration User Program Display Level Sensors Configuration and Status User Program Display aeree Download User Display File Browse Flash File System Bytes Used Bytes Free Download Display Size Estimated Bytes Remaining 45 568 34 016 Close Figure 12 11 Display Administrator ROCS800 Series To access a display file stored in the ROC unit select a display from the list of Custom User Displays Installed in the ROC This screen will also download user designed displays to t
80. be configured for EFM Reports For each of the eight Parameters listed select one Archive Type and Point Type Table 6 3 Turbine EFM History Points for ROCS800 Series Archive Type Point Type Description TRBV Turbine Meter MINACC Minutes Run Values Accumulated Totalize TRBV Turbine Meter PULSETDY Pulses Raw Pulses Run Values Accumulated Avg Flow Weighted Linear Avg Flow Weighted Formulaic i Run Configuration CURSP SP Avg Flow Dependent Linear g Avg Flow Dependent Formulaic Totalize Flowing Minutes Static Pressure Avg Flow Weighted Linear Avg Flow Weighted Formulaic a N emo Avg Flow Dependent Linear un Configuration Avg Flow Dependent Formulaic Avg Flow Weighted Linear Avg Flow Weighted Formulaic Avg Flow Weighted Formulaic TRB Turbine Meter MUL TVAL Mutiper Value Avg Flow Dependent Linear un Values Avg Flow Dependent Formulaic Multiplier Value Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Totalize TRBV Turbine Meter UNACC Uncorrected Uncorrected Run Values Accumulated Volume Totalize LA a Meter FLOAGC Flow Accumulated TRBV Turbine Meter ENGACC Energy Run Values Accumulated Totalize Energy Note For a ROC800 Series Turbine Meter Run the following History Points must be configured for EFM Reports For each of the eight Parameters listed select one Archive Type and Poi
81. be affected by the Max Time Between Pulses parameter Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 18 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Maximum Time Between Pulses as the number of seconds within which the input must make a transition to the ON state If a new signal is not received in the number of seconds specified then the actual value of the Actual Pulse Width parameter is set to 0 The Max Time Between Pulses parameter is disabled by entering 0 Enter the Zero EU value corresponding to the 0 Pulse Width This is the low reading EU Enter the Span EU value corresponding to the 100 Pulse Width This is the high reading EU Enter the EU Value At intervals determined by the Scan Period parameter the EU Value is calculated using the 0 Pulse Width 100 Pulse Width and Actual Pulse Width parameters If Scanning was set to disabled the normal TDI calculation is suspended and a value can be manually entered Enter the engineering Units assigned to the TDI input For example MCF or CFM 4 4 4 DI Alarms Select Configure gt I O gt DI Points The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this DI point Discrete Input Discrete Inputs 1 DI Default Tag Di Default Alarming C Enabled f Disabled RBs Alarming On Alarm Set On Alarm Clear Copp BB Paste 2 Update y OK A Cancel l Apply Figure 4 19 Discrete Inputs Alarms ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 19
82. be greater than zero For turbine meters enter a Meter Factor FloBoss 407 value to adjust for inaccuracies associated with the meter s performance as determined at the time of proving For orifice meters select the Orifice Material Stainless Steel Monel or Carbon Steel Nearly all natural gas applications use stainless steel orifice plates For orifice meters enter a value for the Reference Temp of the orifice plate This is the temperature at which the bore diameter of the orifice plate was measured The units of measurement are in degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius For orifice meters select the meter tube material Pipe Material Stainless Steel Monel or Carbon Steel Nearly all natural gas applications use carbon steel meter tubes For orifice meters enter a value for the Reference Temp of the pipe This is the temperature at which the internal diameter of the pipe was measured The units of measurement are in degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius Enter the Static K Factor ROC800 Series for the Turbine linear meter constant in counts pulses per unit volume or mass such as 4 pulses per cubic foot or 235 pulses ft The volume units are in pulses ft or pulses m The mass units are pulses 1b or pulses kg The Static K Factor cannot be less than zero The Variable K Factor ROC800 Series if enabled allows the user to enter the K Factor values at multiple input frequencies If the Variable K Factor is disabled a st
83. by 100 0 and 18 Unsigned Long 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be Implied 2 sent as 123 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 1000 0 and 19 Unsigned Long 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be Implied 3 sent as 1234 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 10000 0 and 20 Unsigned Long 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be Implied 4 sent as 12345 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 100000 0 and 21 Unsigned Long _ 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be Implied 5 sent as 123456 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 1000000 0 and 22 Unsigned Long 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be Implied 6 sent as 1234567 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 10000000 0 and 23 Unsigned Long 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be Implied 7 sent as 12345670 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 100000000 0 24 Unsigned Long 3 4 6 16 jand converted to an unsigned 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would Implied 8 be sent as 123456700 Any type to Float No Scaling eee Any type to 26 Signed Short 3 4 6 16 Integer Raines ROC800 Serie
84. can be used when Temperature is between 0 and 54 C 32 and 130 F Pressure is between 0 and 8274 kPa 0 and 1200 psia Gas composition is within the normal range as defined in the 1992 AGAS report Briefly the three FPV Methods are Detailed Requires the natural gas composition in mole percent to be entered for all components Refer to the information on the Gas Quality Gross I Uses the Specific Gravity of the natural gas its heating value and the quantity of non hydrocarbon components as follows Specific Gravity Real gas gross heating value per unit volume The mole of CO Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 28 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Gross II Uses the Specific Gravity of the natural gas as well as the quantity of non hydrocarbon components as follows Specific Gravity The mole of COs The mole of No Note If either Gross Method is chosen manually enter the Specific Gravity and Heating Value in the Gas Quality screen For Gross Method II the Heating Value is required only for calculating the gas energy flow Select either US or Metric Units for calculations ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 If Metric units are selected then the AGA calculation expects all inputs to be in the indicated units such as kPa for the static pressure input keep in mind that any existing entered values are not converted For the FloBoss 407 select the Units to be output by the f
85. ccscncconersuucasadinncdusn ETA 2 19 l E A ANETARE AE ATAA AAAA AA 3 6 Port OO WINEE ssscnsccciadnccdcceveeudsicsaudiasieenddiantexcdouncanedebadpeans 2 26 Ports COMM 1 COMMS cece ccc ceeeccceeccceecceesecceeesenee 2 21 Power Saving Mod e cccccccccccccssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeees 3 20 PPE SS SA oe ejector cesecenanen cess ape erea Er arie 5 31 Print Configuration ccccccccsssssssssseeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 12 2 Print Preview xcesdaiencsrcnadatavdncancereuntaioalineaasancnatdtencencecs 10 3 Po Tirar NEE A 12 Printing eo A E TE A TET T E T A 12 Proportional Integral and Derivative PID 7 5 Protocol acess sae Tiaa EETA 2 26 3 6 Pulse Input Module Diagnostic cceeeseeeeeeees 4 37 Pulse Inputs EC EE og E A AA een ere 4 29 Pakes T or DAT nena E rr reteset 4 31 R Radio Power Control cccsseseeececeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeees 7 18 Rate Max Rollover cccccccceecccceeescesesceesseensseeneees 4 34 Rate Alar Menr AAN 4 20 4 36 Rae POG ese ectu nite canta cedceeaninosememnate 4 34 BAD TA OU atts ees tena ese ence iesoease a teeennsnmencesatss 4 6 Geren eer ere ere 2 30 4 8 4 28 4 36 5 37 PON A E E ea tenen E 4 20 5 10 Configuring Comm Ports cccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 30 IIS eE E see aoane ET EE eee 2 30 RBX Ack Bint la 6 1 ere reennr neem tenner ne me rrr reer ny nary te 2 31 Read VO Ferment ine ener nent ne rr emer errr ner eemieet 3 21 Reading DE
86. create a new display file in the editor you should follow the steps below 1 Select Utilities gt Keypad Display Editor wag ROCLINK 600 Keypad Display Configuration C Program Files Displays Example l dcig 2 O x 8 Fie Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help x Dae el Eel SRA g AN Mal VE Se ORR eel w a Maa kienu Screen Group Access ial Screen Saver Title Screen 1 Value Group as Menu 1 On Open TLF l o 5 Screen 1 Group 4 On Close TLP E Group 4 Paint Types fi 0i A e l Group amp H E Menu 2 Group 3 Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 E Field 1 Field 2 apa Group 15 Group 16 Group 17 Group 18 Group 19 Group 20 ps T T a 0 Calibration Wooo ooo VATA TTA TTT TT TTT aoa ps p I D T Delete Entry Move Up Mowe Down Field Value Manual Y alue bi Justify Left af Test Field Length fi 0 h Mi r_ Open File Read Device Save As Download X Cance r Figure 12 12 Keypad Display Editor TIT AT TTT TWAT TTT 7 JO00000oO7 Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 16 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 Right click on the Main Menu in the Hierarchy Menu in the left pane of the editor 3 Select Add Menu as many times as your display requires The Hierarchy Menu determines the navigation for the display Each level in the Hierarchy Menu represents a screen with menu choices Add menu
87. data into a format that is compatible to a Modbus device Select the Conversion field on the Modbus Registers or Modbus History screen to specify the type of conversion required if any on the data before it is sent to the host or before it is written to the ROC or FloBoss device The conversions are used to account for differences in data types between the master and slave devices Conversion Codes 65 to 72 allows a four byte IEEE formatted floating point number to be sent or received in two Modbus registers with the byte orders configurable A check is made to ensure that an even number of registers is requested that the Start Register number does not begin in the middle of a register pair and that the number of registers does not exceed the number of registers configured Table 8 9 Modbus Convert Codes Slave Function Convert Code Definition Description 0 No Conversion N A N A The Float to Integer conversion changes ROC or FloBoss floating point data to an integer for transmission to the host The number of the Convert Code specifies which floating point scaling value is to be used 3 4 for the conversion Float to integer Float Scale 1 3 4 Float to integer Float Scale 2 s aa 34 Feaceer 2 TE eee e se 7 Float to integer 3 4 Float Scale 7 Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Convert PE Slav
88. determine if flow was occurring over the Base Multiplier Period the number of counts over the period is viewed If there is an absence of counts or the BMP 1s set shorter than the normal time it takes to get a pulse the following occurs Meter run is defined in a No Flow condition e Accumulated flow is stored as zero for historical data over that time period e Accumulated Energy is stored as zero for historical data over that time period The BMP can be no more than 60 minutes in length the default is 15 minutes and cannot be less than 1 minute Enter the Static K Factor FloBoss 100 Series for the Turbine linear meter constant in counts pulses per unit volume such as 4 pulses per cubic foot or 235 pulses ft The English measurement is in ft and the cubic meter is in m The K factor is used in AGA 7 calculations and may be specified by the user for various low high flow conditions as received from a specified input The K Factor cannot be less than zero If the Variable K Factor is disabled a static factor will be used The Variable K Factor FloBoss 100 Series if enabled allows the user to enter the K Factor values over a range to be measured If the Variable K Factor is disabled a static factor will be used The K factor is used in AGA 7 calculations and the Variable K Factor may be specified by the user to keep the K Factor value more linear by equating them to an EU value as received from a specified Input The K Factor
89. during the interval instruction and argument type constant or value from other tasks such as Meter Runs When six FSTs are running the maximum number of steps executed would be 60 Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Each FST in a FloBoss 100 Series unit executes a configurable number of instructions per second By default the FST executes 20 Steps per execution period If an FST has 30 sequential Steps the first 20 Steps execute during the current execution period and remaining 10 Steps execute during the next execution period To configure the number of Steps executed select ROC gt Information In the Device Information screen enter a value between 1 and 100 in the FST Execution Instructions per Cycle field and click Apply Cycle is the execution period which is second in a FloBoss 100 Series The new number of Steps to execute takes effect the next execution period Restart is not required Each FST in a FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series unit executes as many Steps of FST code as processor free time allows every 100 mSec When a time slice completes another task 1s given the opportunity to execute If the FST task does not complete in the allotted time the FST task uses whatever time 1s left over from other tasks to attempt to complete the sequence of functions If the FST task executes in less than the time allotted the remaining time can be used by the operating system to perform other tasks Because of the pote
90. ed se peTLPH ie ea sR eg i Gale ee pe ee 2 Update y OK Cancel i Apply Figure 7 3 Opcode Table Settings Select the Table No for the Opcode screen For the FloBoss 100 Series four tables are available For the FloBoss 407 eight tables are available For the ROC800 Series sixteen tables are available The Version No field attaches a version number to an Opcode table configuration If the configuration of data points is changed update the version number The version number is a floating point number Each Opcode Data point has a TLP box for mapping TLP values into the Opcode Table Data point If a host computer asks for a specific Opcode Data point the ROC or FloBoss returns the value that is referred by the mapped TLP Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 7 3 Sampler Odorizer ROC800 Series Use the Sampler Odorizer to set up a Discrete Output DO channel of the ROC800 Series to send and control the timing and duration of a pulse output to another device such as an odorizer odor injector It can also control a gas sampler For the ROC800 Series select Configure gt Control gt Sampler Odorizer For the FloBoss 100 Series select Meter gt Setup gt Sampler tab Ssampler Odonzer SamplerO dorizer Mode f Enabled C Disabled Input Rate Point FIN a 1 EU EA Input Aate Value loo o Time Basis PerDay Unit 4ccumulation 1000 0 Duration O00 Sec
91. enable Modbus transmission Enable Continuous Polling to continuously poll for Modbus messages Enter the Starting Host Request line number entry in the host table where you desire the poll to begin The poll request continues through each line starting at the value entered in this field until it reads a O in the Modbus host table Enter the Host Poll Delay to specify the amount of time in seconds to wait between poll transmissions The Transmission Status displays the current status of the Modbus program Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 27 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 7 3 Comm Ports Modem Select ROC gt Comm Ports gt Modem tab to configure the Modem communications ports on the ROC or FloBoss Comm Port Comm Ports 3 COMMZ Tag COMM2 Modem Type f Aone C External Connect Time 60 0 Secs Disconnect Time 60 0 Secs Inactivity Time 400 0 Secs Contig Command AT amp FOE OH OY OO SS 0 15 f 2555 24 60 Connect Command ATDT number Disconnect Command ATHO Modern Status 0 OF 2 Update Y OK A Cancel Figure 2 19 Comm Port Advanced Example ROCS800 Series Select Modem Type Internal when an internal modem is detected Select None when using a Serial link to the host or External when using a Modem that is external to the ROC or FloBoss Note Internal cannot be selected by the user it is automatically set Set the Connect Time parameter to determin
92. eseuen n aiana 9 4 Configuration File scscsscessisadenutarcetcnssadeindwaaaseieanbwanade 1 19 Operator ID ereen 2 5 Opposite Poftea a aaa 2 32 Options TEP e A anacseneaaeeeu 1 14 Tool MoM enneren 1 14 Orifice Meter Calibration 2 0 0 ccc ceeccceeccesscessceeeseeees 10 10 Orifice Diameter cisceiivesisnnrsesavectravetentserctianerncere 5 14 11 6 Orifice Material css ccsccsecsvcscacseaescsstcsecrsavenevecsocnswssetoneds 5 30 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Other Information cc cece ceccceecceecceesceesceesseesees 3 10 OUMU iorra aie AEAEE 4 1 Override Default TAPI Init String eee 2 19 P Q Parameter Indexing reisiin niai 8 18 Pa e teebeqeuedessuniwaeseuaidancdtaseuentsaiataneueuies 2 25 Part Numbi eseon 3 13 Pass Through Mode cccccccccccccceceeesssseseseseeeeeeeees 3 20 PISS WOO rriaren 1 5 2 5 PC Comm Baud Rate ceccceecceescesceeeseneees 2 19 PC Comm Port and Baud Rate ou eee eeees 2 19 PC Reguite IMC OS os ssicnasevscsnccnsscnceraosomnsiaddansnisiacmnsieedentns 1 2 POMOGIC BNI CS seseina ETAT 6 9 Periodic HIStOry ejcnstacecntzssicananiaadcmtapsteannseacdsssseentasaieicst 6 31 Petiodic Sample R tC sinccriserrecieaniiini 6 9 P r E EO 6 19 Alana SS araa testcase eens 6 25 ONES 1 IVS eraren TR T TE 6 23 EA Te e a EEEE ee 6 23 Cias Quality FES sorserien kinine e 6 25 Meter Eyent Piles isc cis ec cistcccviccencdsvsacccetisbetecsesucecoees 6 24 NO FG aa A E EE 6 27 Volume Files Formate 2
93. features such as filtering A D conversions and clipping for the selected RTD Input 4 The RTD Calibration tab is available on line for calibration of the RTD point Refer to Section 10 Calibration 5 The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this RTD point 6 After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 38 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 8 1 RTD General Select Configure gt I O gt RTD Points The General tab sets the basic parameters for the RTD Input point RTD Input ATD Inputs 1 ATD Deft Tag RTO Deflt General Advanced RTD Calibration Alarms Point Murnber B10 Units Value S00 O DegF C Deg C Ohms Units Tag degt C Degk C DegR Scan Period WO Secs Scanning Low Reading EU 43 99999 f Enabled High Reading EU 3500 f Disabled EA Paste 2 Update YY OK x Cancel Apply Figure 4 36 RTD General ROCS amp 00 Series Select the RTD Input to be configured The inputs are listed by both number and tag Enter a 10 character string Tag for identification of the Point Number Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used The Point Number identifies the physical location of the input For the ROC800 Series the Point Number identifies the module slo
94. first screen that displays after logging in to ROCLINK 800 software The Device Directory provides a way to create and maintain communications setup configurations for a PC running ROCLINK 800 software The communication ports on the PC can be uniquely configured to send data to specified ROC or FloBoss units wa ROCLINK 800 Device Directory Eok i a File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help afat mj Mw i ih oo O i al a a kh E Device Root ta COMI Device Hg COM Device Modem Device Ethernet Device New Groupi Hg New Device Hg New Device Figure 2 10 Device Directory Use the and symbols to display or hide various options Note Configuration of the PC Communication Ports to the ROC or FloBoss unit cannot be performed within the Configuration Tree screen You must return to the Device Directory If you are in a configuration select Window gt Device Directory or View gt Directory to go to the Device Directory The PC communication configurations allow ROCLINK 800 software to communicate to an individual ROC or FloBoss unit You may add delete or modify these communications setups and establish a tree of Groups and Devices The Device Directory is used to set up the personal computer s PC communications ports COM ports The ROCLINK 800 Communication Parameter Setup screen allows you to change your PC communications port time out settings and other variables used b
95. for the specific User Program that you are loading When using a ROC800 Series click Reset Counter to clear the value that indicates how many times the User Program has been restarted Click Browse and select the User Program file to download from the CD ROM or PC User Program files are typically located in the Program Files folder The Open File dialog displays the names of all the files that have the tar ROC800 Series bin FloBoss 100 Series or HOO FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series extension Select the File name you desire to load and click Open Click Download amp Start to download the selected User Program and automatically start the program Click Download to download the User Program but not start the program Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 24 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 7 When using a FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series select System gt Flags Click Flash Memory Save Configuration and click Yes This ensures that the program automatically restarts after a Cold Start 8 Click OK Note User Program information displays under the Configuration Tree For the FloBoss units User Program information also displays under select Configure gt User Data The Status field in User Programs Installed in Device area displays ON or OFF indicating the status of the User Program selected in the User Programs Installed in Device field The Status field at the bottom of the screen displays the status of the Do
96. function using it on other units will only duplicate the action Note To trigger outputs use the corresponding output command previous table These commands trigger the mechanism that changes the output value Note The FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series units must use the AO DO and TDO commands to drive outputs from an FST SAV and other commands will not affect the Output The Analog Output AO command sends the analog value specified in ARGUMENT to the analog Point Number specified in ARGUMENTI The analog value is not sent if the analog Point Number is in Manual Mode The check for Manual Mode is included as a safety feature and permits the FST to continue operation if the device connected to the Analog Output is being serviced If a PID loop is controlling the Analog Output placing the PID loop into Manual Tracking Mode allows the FST to send a value to the output parameter of the PID For other active PID modes the FST and PID will be in conflict Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 24 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 7 6 FST Miscellaneous Commands Use the miscellaneous commands to move around FSTs and end FSTs Miscellaneous commands provide operations such as an unconditional go to GO message to local display panel MSG alarms ALM and event EVT generation end of the FST END and delay BRK GO The GO command executes an unconditional branch to the LABEL in ARGUMENTI Branching can direct the F
97. has been added in addition to the security timeout The Inactivity Time field on the Internet tab of the ROC Information screen sets this parameter in seconds A value of 0 disables the timer If a valid ROC Plus Protocol message is not received within the Inactivity Time the connection closes Each connection will be kept alive by periodic transmissions of messages probes If the other side of the connection fails to respond to 10 repetitive probes the connection will be considered broken and the connection closed The amount of idle time in seconds before the first probe 1s configurable is set in the Keep Alive Time field on the Internet tab of the ROC gt Information screen The other 9 probes will be 64 seconds apart The total time will be 9 64 the value of the Keep Alive Time parameter Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 34 ROCLINK 800 User Manual DS amp 00 DS800 Development Suite Software can be used to develop programs independently of ROCLINK 800 software These programs can be downloaded over the Ethernet port to a ROC800 Series that has the optional license key installed Once DS800 is enabled on the Configure gt Control gt DS800 screen the Ethernet port for DS800 is always available to accept DS800 connections The ROC800 Series unit is capable of distinguishing TCP IP messages received from DS800 in Modbus or in ROC Protocol The DS800 messages are routed to the correct communications task
98. in that menu You can also select functions using ToolBar Buttons or the Configuration Tree Menu On Line Com ROCBO9 File Edit View ROC Sie Meter Utilities Tools Window Help D ce ted 1 0 Pe Mol he SAAR R Bl a FST Registers me 0 History Segments PID Loop amp Control History Points Radio Power Control fA Meter Opcode Table Sampler Odorizer Me System MODBUS Ds800 History User Program User Display Figure 1 2 Menu Bar and ToolBar ROCS800 Series Example 1 6 2 Buttons Several buttons appear on the majority of ROCLINK 800 screens Minimize and hide windows Maximize the size of the windows to fit in the screen area Return to Original size of the window Close a window P lt 2 fo E Expand options listed in the Device Directory or Configuration Tree Menu Hide options listed in the Device Directory or Configuration Tree Menu i I pm ipy Copy contents of window to Clipboard Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 8 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Paste contents of the Clipboard to the active window dat Update contents of the active window from the device Apply changes if any on the active window to the device and close the active window 1 A Confirm Save dialog box appears if there are unsaved changes X Cancel Cancel all unsaved changes and close the active window cK Apply changes on the active window to the device Save contents of the active window
99. is Disabled no limit alarms generate for this point The Point Fail alarm appears in the Active Alarms field but will not be logged in the Alarms Log To conserve Alarm Log space alarms should be enabled only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so that no false alarms generate The Rate Alarm is the value in engineering units that represents the maximum amount of change allowed between updates If the change is equal to or greater than this value an alarm is generated To disable this Rate Alarm without disabling the other alarms the Rate Alarm value must be set greater than the Span Range of the TC Input Input Temperature Range J Type 200 to 1200 C 328 to 2192 P K Type 100 to 1372 C 121 to 2500 F The four level alarms are the limit value in engineering units to which the EU Value must fall to generate a Low High LoLo or HiHi Alarm The HiHi Alarm value is typically set higher than the High Alarm The four level alarms are the limit value in engineering units to which the EU Value must fall to generate a Low High LoLo or HiHi Alarm The LoLo Alarm value is typically set lower than the Low Alarm The Alarm Deadband value in engineering units is an inactive zone above the Low Alarm and below the High Alarm The purpose of the Alarm Deadband is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is osci
100. is to be compared with the assigned input Override Switch PV to determine when switchover to the Primary Control loop occurs The type of comparison is gt greater than or lt less than Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Use the PID Loop s Output fields to set the point and limits for the Analog Output or Discrete Output If Control Type is set to Analog select the Output Point ROC800 Series or FloBoss 100 Series to be assigned as the PID control output Enter an Output Low Limit ROC800 Series or FloBoss 100 Series If the change in output calculated by the loop causes the current value of the output to go below this value the output is set to the value entered here Enter an Output High Limit ROC800 Series or FloBoss 100 Series If the change in output calculated by the loop causes the current value of the output to go above this value the output is set to the value entered here Enter a Primary Output FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series This is the output that will be assigned as the control output for the Primary Control loop of the PID algorithm Enter a Override Output FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series This is the output that will be assigned as the control output for the Override Control loop of the PID algorithm If Control Type is set to Discrete select the Discrete Output point DO Open Point to open the valve or other device and the Discrete Output point DO Close Point to close th
101. is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This prevents the Alarm Log from being over filled with data Select the SRBX RBX Alarming option to configure Spontaneous Report By Exception SRBX or RBX alarming for this point Disabled The RBX Alarming is turned OFF On Alarm Set The point enters an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host On Alarm Clear The point leaves an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host On Alarm Set and Clear FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 In either condition an RBX message generates to the host Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 8 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 3 AO Analog Output Configuration Analog Outputs are analog signals generated by the ROC or FloBoss to regulate equipment such as control valves or any device requiring proportional control Select Configure gt I O gt AO Points Examine the default settings and adjust the parameters to suit your application on each of the tabs in the order given below 1 The General tab sets the basic parameters for the Analog Output point 2 The Advanced Analog Outputs tab enables you to configure f
102. mm format Not used for the Gas Quality E CO Continuous if the Gas Quality type in the ROC Point Type 112 Parameter 24 is equal to 1 for live Gas Quality values SP Spot if the Gas Quality type is equal to 0 for entered Gas Quality values 6 METHANE MOL float oa 8 PROPANE MOL float 9 IBUTANE_MOL float float float ROC Point Type 112 Station Parameter 34 SAMPLE_ID char 2 Not used by PGAS or ROC informational only M Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual a U ROC Point Type 112 Sain Parameter 26 ROC Pont Type 112 Sion Parameter 41 ROC ron Type 112 Sain Parameter 45 EA ROC Point Type 112 A Parameter 23 Ee SAMPLE_PRESSU float Pressure base at which the BTU value was measured This is left RE BASE blank as the ROC does not have a Parameter for this DRY_ENERGY_FA float This field is for heating value ROC Point Type 112 Parameter 22 i CTOR Dry 0 is selected for the Sadie Value Basis ROC Point Type 112 Parameter 21 30 SAT_ENERGY_FAC float This field is for heating value ROC Point Type 112 Parameter 22 if TOR Wet 1 is selected for the Heating Value Basis ROC Point Type 112 Parameter 21 31 AS DELIVERED E float This field is for feat value ROC Point Type 112 Parameter 22 if NERGY_FACTOR As Delivered 2 is selected for the Heating Value Basis ROC Point Type 112 nena BNA NA These fields are not used by the ROC and will be left bl
103. of gas through a pipeline The flow rate is calculated from the pressure differential created by the fluid passing through an orifice of a particular size and other parameters P Q P DP Pressure Differential Pressure Parameter A property of a point that typically can be configured or set For example the Point Tag ID is a parameter of an Analog Input point Parameters are normally edited by using configuration software running on a PC PC Personal Computer PI Pulse Input PID Proportional Integral and Derivative control feedback action PLC Programmable Logic Controller Point Software oriented term for an I O channel or some other function such as a flow calculation Points are defined by a collection of parameters Point Number In ROC800 Series the physical location of an I O point as installed in the ROC system module slot and channel In FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 the number of an I O point as installed in the FloBoss system Point Type The point type attribute defines the database point to be one of the possible types of points available to the system The point type determines the basic functions of a point Preset Number value previously determined for an register Pulse Transient variation of a signal whose value is normally constant PV Process Variable or Process Value Rev Dec 05 Glossary G 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual R RAM Random Access Memory In a FloBoss it is use
104. only the top three lines of the display area are configurable The bottom line is reserved for the function key definition The first ten characters columns of each line are used for text identifiers of the data contained on the rest of the line The specified data displays starting at character position column 12 in the format n nn As many as eight displays can be configured to display a variety of function and database parameters WE LCD Display Configuration Display Number 1 Line 1 Value DIN 44 ALARM B Test DI Alarm Line 2 Value PID 1 SWSTAT B Test PID SF Line 3 Value AIN AT EU m Test AI FEU Update yY OK 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 12 4 LCD Display Configuration ROC300 Series 1 Select Configure gt LCD and select the Display Number 2 Click on the Line Value TLP button Select the parameter for the Value field Because text characters cannot display in the Value field select only parameters that return a numeric value 3 Enter the Text up to ten characters to appear on the Local Display Panel The Text should describe the Value selected for this line Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 12 4 LCD User List FloBoss 100 Series and FloBoss 407 LCD User List Setup allows you to assign up to 16 parameters for viewing on the optional FloBoss display which shows each parameter for several seconds before continuing on to the next parame
105. previously saved disk file Once the History to View has been selected the history log will be displayed Perform one of the following Plot Click the Plot button to view a graphical display of the report Refer to Plot Select New Return to the Select History Points screen and make a new selection Save Save the history archives to a file Print Preview Show a preview of what will be sent to the printer and allow printing of the history log Close Close the screen 6 8 2 Viewing the Alarm Log Select View gt Alarms to view the Alarm Logs Alarms to be viewed can be retrieved either from the device if ROCLINK 800 is currently connected to a ROC or FloBoss or from a previously saved disk file Once the alarms are displayed the following options are available Save Save the Alarm Log to a file Print Preview Show a preview of what will be sent to the printer and allow printing of the Alarm Log Close Close the screen 6 8 3 Viewing the Event Log Select View gt Events to view the Event Logs Events to be viewed can be retrieved either from the device if ROCLINK 800 is currently connected to a ROC or FloBoss or from a previously saved disk file Once the events are displayed the following options are available Save Save the Event Log to a file Print Preview Show a preview of what will be sent to the printer and allow printing of the Event Log Cl
106. rise to generate a High Alarm The Mass units assumed for the input are MCF per day 1000 ft day or cubic meters per day m day The Volumetric units assumed for the input are MLb per day 1000 Ib day or tonnes per day 100kg day Enter the Low Alarm limit value in engineering units to which the Volumetric or Mass Flow Rate value must fall to generate a Low Alarm The units assumed for the input are MCF per day 1000 ft day or cubic meters per day m day The Volumetric units assumed for the input are MLb per day 1000 Ib day or tonnes per day 100kg day Alarm Deadband is the value in engineering units that the flow value must be above the Low Alarm limit and below the High Alarm limit before the alarm clears The purpose of the Alarm Deadband is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit Select the RBX Alarming option to configure Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX alarming for this point On Alarm Set The point enters an alarm condition the ROC generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host On Alarm Clear The point leaves an alarm condition the ROC generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 10 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 3 Meter Setup Configura
107. scaling factors allow values to be exchanged between Modbus emulating raw unscaled values As an example a 4 to 20 mA loop might have a raw A D value where 4 mA 800 counts and 20 mA 4095 counts At midrange or 12 mA the raw A D count would be 2448 If this AI signal was representative of a O to 250 pound pressure 4 mA 800 counts 0 PISG and 20 mA 4095 counts 20 mA and midrange would be 12 mA 2448 counts 125 PSIG Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual In older Modbus Programmable Logic Controllers PLCs it was typical to send and receive the A D counts and the conversion was performed by host systems The Scaling Values allow you to emulate this functionality For instance if a host system required information contained in a Softpoint that represented a level between 20 and 120 inches and the host required the same value scaled between 1000 and 7000 where the host would convert it back into a engineering scale of 20 to 120 In this example the Integer Scale would be set to 1000 and 7000 the Float Scale would be set up for 20 0 and 120 0 Thus if the Conversion Code 1 was used and the actual value in the Softpoint was 70 the host would actually be presented with the Integer Scaled Value of 4000 If the Softpoint was 20 the host would receive 1000 If the Softpoint was 120 the host would receive a value of 7000 In the ROC800 Series this is supported for both reads and writes For the FloBoss 1
108. scan occurs in multiples of 64 mSec 1 e if you enter 0 20 sec it will scan every 0 192 sec The Low Reading EU corresponds to a 0 input The High Reading EU corresponds to a 100 input The Active Alarms field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is set to Enabled the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm indicator can still appear If Alarming is set to Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled 4 8 2 RTD Advanced Select Configure gt I O gt RTD Points The Advanced tab enables you to configure features such as filtering A D conversions and clipping for the selected RTD Input RTD Input ATD Inputs 1 ATD Defl Tag ATID Detlt Filter iS AdustedA DO 42973 OO Adjusted A D 100 61963 Raw A D Input 35074 Actual Scan 0 530002 Seconds Average Faw Value AITO Alpha Clipping C Enabled f 0 00385 O Enabled f Disabled f 0 00392 Disabled Copy EA Paste Update Y OK Cancel Apply Figure 4 37 RTD Advanced ROCS800 Series Enter a Filter value which is a weighted sample using a percentage of the last value plus a percentage of the new value The entered data is the percentage of the last value used The filter 1s calculated every Scan Period by the formula Last Value x Entered New Value x 100 Entered Fi
109. screen The Time On field is calculated from the entered EU Value and the previous definitions of Low Reading Time High Reading Time Low Reading EU and High Reading EU entered in the TDO Parameters screen The calculation formulas are EU Span High Reading EU Value Low Reading EU Count Span High Reading Time 100 Count Low Reading Time 0 Count On Time Entered EU Value x Count Span Low Reading Time 0 Count EU Span 4 5 3 1 DO TDO Defining the Output Pulse To define the TDO Output Pulse 1 Select Configure gt I O gt DO Points 2 Selecta DOUT Type of TDO or TDO Toggle in the Discrete Outputs dialog TDO Timed Duration The single pulse output can be triggered by writing to the Status or the EU Value parameter of the DO point This can be accomplished directly by a PID point or by an FST TDO Toggle A continuous pulse is generated with the pulse length being controlled by writing to the EU Value parameter in the DO point This can be accomplished directly or by an FST 3 Click the TDO Parameters tab The output pulse from the TDO function must be defined for proper engineering unit EU conversion The minimum pulse width Low Reading Time 0 Count and the maximum pulse width High Reading Time 100 Count define the minimum and maximum ON time of the output pulse The values entered in the Low Reading Time and High Reading Time are the number of seconds the output is ON Rev Dec
110. sets the parameters for the gas information The Gas Quality tab defines the mole percentages of twenty gas components as well as the Heating Value Basis the Heating Value and the Specific Gravity If other Stations have similar characteristics use Copy and Paste to create Gas Quality configurations Note For information on the Gas Quality tab on the Meter Setup screens for the FloBoss 100 Series and 407 refer to Parameters on Meter Gas Quality Tab FloBoss 100 Series and 407 Station Setup Station 1 Station 1 w Tag Station 1 General Gas Quality Advanced Alarms Heavy Gas Option Nitrogen M Enter Hexane Coe Heptane Uctane Gas Quality Nonane C Constant f Live Methane Ethane Decane H25 WW aker Normalization Type f Methane Adjust C Full Normalization Propane n Butane Butane Helium Heating Yalue Basis e B i n Pentane Oxygen Drp Wiet As Deliv Co co Pentare Heating Value 1027 159 ETUCF m Hesane Hydrogen m m TTT Hesane Angon x Specific Gravity p 0 573538 Total Mole 2 100 00 2 Update y OF 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 5 2 Station Gas Quality ROCS800 Series Enter the mole percent of each Gas Component present in the gas for this Station This value is required to calculate the compressibility of gas using the AGA 8 detailed method If the AGA 8 detailed method
111. should be 10 characters or less When in Multi drop mode the Tag must be unique for every device The Poll Address displays the address used for this HART device When in Point to point mode the Poll Address will be 0 When in Multi drop mode the addresses of 1 to 5 will be used Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 55 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Device ID displays the coded ID that reflects the manufacturer of the device the device type and the device ID PV Sensor Serial Number displays the serial number of the sensor PV Upper Sensor Limit USL displays the upper limit on the sensor PV Lower Sensor Limit LSL displays the lower limit on the sensor Sensor Units displays the units of measure for the upper and lower sensor limits PV Damping Value displays the damping value reported by the device for the Primary Variable PV Range Units displays the units of measure for the Analog Output minimum span and upper and lower range limits PV Upper Range Limit URV displays the maximum value in the Analog Output range PV Lower Range Limit LRV displays the minimum value in the Analog Output range PV Minimum Span displays the minimum sensor span Enter a Descriptor to identify this device This may be 24 characters in length This is intended as a more specific identifier than the tag Enter a Message that will be sent to the device and stored there Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 56 ROCLINK 8
112. the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm indicator can still appear If Alarming is set to Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled 4 10 2 System Al Advanced ROC800 Series Select Configure gt I O gt System AI Points The Advanced tab enables you to configure features such as filtering averaging and clipping for the selected Input system Analog Input Analog Inputs 1 Battery Filter Adjusted A D 0 Adjusted 4 D 100 255 Raw A D Input 1 g4 Actual Scan 1 000028 Seconds Average Raw Value Clipping l Enabled l Enabled Disabled Disabled 2 Update YY OK 7 Cancel Apply Figure 4 43 System AI Advanced ROCS800 Series Enter a Filter value which is a weighted sample using a percentage of the last value plus a percentage of the new value The entered data is the percentage of the last value used The Filter is calculated every Scan Period by the formula Last Value x Entered New Value x 100 Entered Filtered Value Enable Average Raw Values to average and calculate the raw readings during the Scan Period and use the outcome as the Raw A D Input during EU calculations For example when enabled an Analog Input point configured with a Scan Period of 5 seconds obtains a new value from the A D every second During the Scan Period five values are
113. the number of 250 millisecond intervals before the change from Off to On is recognized For the FloBoss 100 Series when 0 1 seconds is selected as the Filter Interval the Filter is defined as the number of 100 milliseconds intervals before the change from Off to On is recognized The FloBoss 100 Series has a 1 second resolution The ROC or FloBoss round the Filter Time to the nearest second For a FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 when 15 0 seconds is selected as the Filter Interval the Filter is defined as the number of 15 second intervals before the input is recognized on the Off to On transition Accumulated Value indicates the number of times the Discrete Input goes from Off to On The accumulator is a 32 bit number with a maximum count of 4 294 967 295 The accumulator can be preset by entering the desired value or can be cleared by entering 0 Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual For the FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series On Counter indicates the number of 50 millisecond periods when the Status parameter is in the On state The On Counter which does not operate if Scanning is set to Disabled is a 32 bit number that automatically rolls over when it reaches its maximum value The On Counter can be preset by entering the desired value or cleared by entering 0 For the FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Off Counter indicates the number of 50 mi
114. this method typically takes the square root of each sample before averaging the samples together and then squares the result This formulaic method typically produces a slightly lower value than the linear method Avg Flow Weighted Linear This method does not discard any samples Instead it weights each sample by multiplying it by a flow value square root of the differential pressure measured during the sample period and then performs a linear average by dividing the sum of the flow weighted sample by the sum of the flow values This results in minute and hourly values that are more reflective of short periods of high flow Avg Flow Weighted Formulaic This method combines the flow weighting action with the formulaic averaging technique both of which were described previously Avg Linear One second samples are averaged to compute minute periodic and daily values Accumulate Second The one second samples of a per second rate value are summed over the logging interval to compute the archived value This Archive Type should be selected when the History Point being archived is a rate in EUs second Accumulate Minute The one second samples of a per minute rate value are converted to a per second rate and summed over the logging interval to compute the archived value This Archive Type should be selected when the History Point being archived is a rate in EUs minute Accumulate Hour The one second sa
115. to largest In certain Modbus Host devices the register 40101 is actually transmitted as 100 The value 100 should be placed in the Start address field because the ROC or FloBoss uses the actual number sent by the Host For example the host device requests the Starting Register 500 through Ending Register 700 The Starting Register is 400 and the Ending Register is 700 All register numbers requested by the host 500 through 700 are valid and would be responded to because the requested register numbers match or fall in between the Start Register and Ending Register numbers 400 through 700 Specify the End Register or Ending Register to represent the last register in the address span The value for this number is computed by End Register address Start Register address Number of Registers 1 Select the type of Indexing to define the block of Register values as successive Logical Point Numbers or Parameters without having to define each separately Point Indexing means that the Start Register is mapped to the selected Device Parameter Subsequent registers through the End Register are mapped to the same Point Type and Parameter and increment the point Logical Number Parameter Indexing means that the Start Register is mapped to the selected Device Parameter Subsequent registers through the End Register are mapped to the same Point Type and point Logical Number and increment the Parameter number Select t
116. turbine or rotary meter and does not support Stations The FloBoss 407 has up to four orifice or turbine meters and does not support Stations The ROC306 and ROC312 have up to three orifice or turbine meters and does not support Stations The ROC364 has up to five orifice or turbine meters and does not support Stations Table 5 1 displays the defaults for Metric and US Engineering Units Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Table 5 1 Default Engineering Units EU Flow Parameter US Units __ Metric Units Meter Input AGA3 Inches H2O Meter Input AGA7 Volume MCF Day kM Day Meter Input AGA7 Mass lb Hr kg Hr Static Pres PSIG or PSIA kPaG or kPaA Temp t Inst Volume Day MCF Day M Day Inst Energy Day MMBTU Day GJoules Day Flow Today Yesterday C k Energy Today Y day Viscosity Diameters Elevation Poo M O Inst Mass 5 2 Station Configuration ROC800 Series To configure a Station select a Station icon in the Configuration Tree menu or select Meter gt Setup gt Stations Configure the parameters on each tab as pertains to your application Configure the Station before configuring the Meter Runs 1 The Station Configuration General tab sets basic parameters that all the Meter Runs in the Station have in common 2 The Gas Quality tab sets the parameters for the gas information The Gas Quality tab defines the mole percentages of twenty one gas components as well as th
117. value can be set greater than the Span of the Analog Input Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 41 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the High Alarm limit value in engineering units to which the input value must rise to generate a High Alarm The HiHi Alarm value is typically set higher than the High Alarm Enter the Low Alarm limit value in engineering units to which the input value must fall to generate a Low Alarm The LoLo Alarm value is typically set lower than the Low Alarm Alarm Deadband is the value in engineering units that is an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limits and below the High Alarm limits The purpose of the Alarm Deadband is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This also prevents the Alarm Log from being over filled with data If the host computer is configured to receive field initiated calls you can select a Report by Exception RBX option to send a Spontaneous Report by Exception message On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the ROC generates a SRBX message On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the ROC generates a SRBX message Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured 4 9 TC Thermocouple Input Configuration ROC800 Series Thermocouple TC Inputs are used to monitor the extremely small voltage g
118. 0 0 0 cee eecceecceeecceesceees 6 29 Phone NUmDOE esearon ets rer Cee See ae 2 19 Physical Output ccccccccccccccceeeeeeeesssesseseeeeeeeeeees 4 23 Physical Status ccccccccccccccceceeeesesssssssessseeeeeeeeees 4 15 PI PG AA CCN aise atau is occ tetanus seine aecuanaaneees 4 32 A Soros es cee atatnc i ose cutee neeaateeesuiaceeanaanke 4 35 General cceccescccssccesccessceesccesccessseesscessceessees 4 29 Module Diagnostic cccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 37 PONG eanna AT T 4 29 Pulse Input Configuration neeeeeesessseseeeeeeeeeee 4 29 PID PTI orsoni oraaa E E RE 3 7 Example eies ro roae EEEa SIERENS E 7 17 ATC PIC E A uawatiamavionseaenaueatueisanienaeecee 7 9 TOD E S 7 5 Status Tab ROC800 Series neeeneeseneseneseneeens 7 16 A e EE A 7 13 ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series 7 6 PN Miser sca tana gacat seed E 4 38 PG sos osacrcanacannacseee sage sanasacouneagncaunansacassennecesteonncesaee care 5 31 Pipe Diameter scarcsacsannccerssopnedeanssacacesaasonacarncsanes 5 14 11 6 Pipe IVE ANC VAM ccacenesacarteseacorraanenenpacassennececteonnceynss meee 5 30 Plate AAS sa ccacoseyacasdeseacespescunnaeniesaenpecertaonncesnnaaneas 11 6 Point Indexing ccccceccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeseesessseeeeeeeees 8 18 Point NUIMDES ei ccciescsasvoererensesarevenciavarasasadtoeneraueees 4 1 5 14 Points Enabling escencia rane aicese 3 7 PO ea E EE ES 2 25 Port IN UID ER iiss
119. 0 Series AIIE EN deas OE ANE A AT E TEA 4 14 Figure 4 15 Discrete Inputs General FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series 4 15 Figure 4 16 Discrete Inputs Advanced ROC800 SENES i assists sitatecisecast aust teiseceaeiteratatuina ta iseteesaesaes 4 16 Figure 4 17 Discrete Inputs Advanced FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series 4 17 Figure 4 18 Discrete Inputs TDI Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Sertes cc cecccceeeecceeeeceeeeeeceeees 4 18 Figure 4 19 Discrete Inputs Alarms ROC800 Series EEEE AE EET LAE EA AIE ease EE EE E ANT 4 19 Figure 4 20 Discrete Inputs Alarms FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series 4 20 Figure 4 21 Discrete Outputs General ROC800 Series EEEE EEPE EET NTE ATE E eaten ease ene es 4 22 Figure 4 22 Discrete Outputs General FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series 4 22 Figure 4 23 Discrete Outputs Advanced ROC800 SEI IC State data tise tance E EAEE E T 4 24 Figure 4 24 Discrete Outputs Advanced FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series 4 25 Figure 4 25 Discrete Outputs TDO Parameters FloBoss 407 ROC300 Series ROC800 Series 4 26 Figure 4 26 Discrete Outputs Alarms ROC800 Series E ER E sat petal esto EAA EE EET 4 28 Figure 4 27 Pulse Inputs General ROC800 Series NENE ETAN EEE I PR
120. 0 User Manual PID Loop x PID 1 FID 1 Tag FID General Tuning Status Control Type Output O Primary Only Override Control C Analog C Override Only Discrete Mode Loop Status Disabled e Disabled g Loop Period 1 5 o e Actual Period 0 0 Frimary LO Definition Setpoint Local Bi Process Yariable ATID 4 1 EU veride Setpoint Local m Process Wariable Undefined Bi Output DO Open Point SFP 2 DATAI2 By DO Close Point SFP 1 DATATE Output Low Limit 0 0 Output High Limit 100 0 E update X OK Cancel Bappi Figure 7 5 PID Loop ROC800 Series To enable PIDs in a ROC or FloBoss select ROC gt Information gt Points Enter the number of PIDs you desire in the Point PIDs Active field Click Apply To set up a PID loop configure the input for the Process Variable A E pP a Configure the one AO or the two DO points each of which must be configured as TDO Timed Duration Output points 6 Select Configure gt Control gt PID to configure the parameters associated with PID Control Loops Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 7 4 2 PID ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Select Configure gt Control gt PID Loop Closed loop Proportional Integral and Derivative PID control is used to provide smooth and stable operation of the feedback control loops employing a regulating device such as a control valve or a motor The typical
121. 0 User Manual Select to enable or disable Differential Pressure Alarms Pressure Alarms and or Temperature Alarms If Enabled configure the alarms using the Modify Limits buttons Alarms are logged to the Alarm Log To conserve log space enable alarms only when necessary Even if all alarms are Disabled the Point Fail alarm indicator can still appear The status of the alarm is indicated in the read only Status field Low Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the value must fall to generate a Low Alarm High Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the value must rise to generate a High Alarm Alarm Deadband The value in engineering units that is an inactive zone above and below the Low Alarm and High Alarm limits The purpose of the Alarm Deadband is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the DP SP and Temp values are oscillating around the alarm limit This also prevents the Alarm Log from being overfilled with data Fault Value If a point fails and Action on Failure is configured to Set to Fault Value the EU value for that point is set to the number entered in the Fault Value field Fault Values are only used in Modify Limits Select the Reference Temperature to determine how the DP is reported The default value is 15 6 C 60 F This value is only used when the Units selection is changed or the Downstream option is selected If the host computer
122. 00 Series Convert Codes 1 to 8 are for reads and 17 to 24 are for writes Modbus Configuration J Low Value High Value Integer Scale 0 a ic _ Float Scale 1 Float Scale 2 Float Scale 3 Float Scale 4 Float Scale 5 Float Scale HE Float Scale H7 Float Scale 8 THT Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 8 3 Modbus Configuration Scale Values ROC800 Series Enter the Integer Scale values The Low Value determines the Low Integer Scaling that represents the data and the High Value represents the Highest Integer Valued used to scale the date Enter the Low Value and the High Value The High Value and Low Value fields are signed integers so they can range from 32768 to 32767 These data fields can also be used to scale the Analog I O to integer values with an implied decimal point Enter the Float Scale in the Low Value Float Scale and High Value Float Scale fields This is use by the ROC to scale the data in conjunction with the Low and High Integer Values Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual In host systems that do not accept floating point numbers eight sets of floating point ranges for values can be specified This allows floating point values such as PID Setpoints Softpoint values and flow values to be read and set by the host as integer values The floating point values are converted to integers by configuring a register o
123. 00 User Manual 4 12 MVS Sensor ROC800 Series or FloBoss 407 Select Configure gt I O gt MVS Sensor The MVS Sensor screen provides you with an interface to a Multi Variable Sensor The MVS sensor is a smart device that can measure temperature static pressure and differential pressure Note Refer to Section 10 Calibration Note The DVS sensor for the FloBoss 100 Series is configured using Analog Inputs Multi Yariable Sensor MYS Sensor 1 MVS Deftlt Sengo Intertace Version 0 MS Values DP ero Shift Sensor Configuration Tag MVS D eflt Address Voltage 0 0 0 0 Witite Read Pressure emperature Scanning Units Report Pressure 43 Value Fault Yalue C Enabled C Disabled f US f Upstream Diff Pressure 0 0 0 0 InH20 Contig Pall Metric Downstream 0 0 Few Me tee sensor Alarms Pressure 0 0 0 0 Pa C Enabled Disabled M REX On Alarm Set Temperature 459 4 459 4 Deg F 495 Communication Failure RES On Alarm Clear Diff Pressure Alarm Action on Failure f Enabled Disabled C Hold Last Value f Set To Fault Yalue Pressure Alarm f Enabled Disabled Modify Limits a Tereersture Temperature Alarm C E0 Deg F C Enabled Disabled Modify Limits 68 Deg F Copy EA Paste 2 Update y OF A Cancel i Apply Figure 4 48 Multi Variable Sensor ROC800 Series or FloBoss 407 Select Configure gt I O gt MVS Sensor Select the MVS Sensor to configure Each MV
124. 00 and 9999 to define the Password More than one user can have the same Password 4 Enter the desired Access Level of the user 0 is the lowest Access Level and allows access to the fewest number of screens 5 is the highest Access Level and permits access to all screens Each Access Level permits access to screens at that level and any inherited from lower access levels For example the users with Access Level 3 have access to screens with levels 0 1 2 and 3 Refer to Table 2 1 Security Access Levels on page 2 2 Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 3 Device Security Select ROC gt Security Device Security screen controls who has access to the Comm Ports on the ROC or FloBoss device Refer to Section 12 Keypad Display Security 2 3 1 Device Security Users ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series Select ROC gt Security For the ROC800 Series and the FloBoss 100 Series the Device Security screen controls who has access to the Comm Ports on the ROC or FloBoss device When Enabled you must login to use the communications port Each communications port may be Enabled or Disabled separately For the ROC800 Series the Keypad Display user and group security settings are also configured on this screen The default Operator ID is LOI The default Password is 1000 1 Select ROC gt Security 2 Click an Operator ID field to add edit or remove a user Device Security
125. 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 27 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Example A TDO 1s used to emulate a field instrument measuring flow The TDO outputs a pulse width of 3 seconds for no flow and a pulse width of 12 seconds for 1000 MCF per day flow Low Reading Time 0 Count 3 seconds High Reading Time 100 Count 12 seconds Low Reading EU 0 High Reading EU 1000 4 5 4 DO Alarms ROC800 Series Select Configure gt I O gt DO Points The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this DO point Discrete Output Discrete Outputs 1 DO Default Tag Do Detault Alarming C Enabled f Disabled RE On Alarm Set O On Alarm Clear Copp E Paste 2 Update y OF 7 Cancel t Apply Figure 4 26 Discrete Outputs Alarms ROCS800 Series When Alarming is Enabled alarms will be generated on point failure When Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail alarm appears in the Active Alarms field but will not be written to the Alarm Log To conserve Alarm Log space alarms should be enabled only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so that no false alarms generate If the host computer is configured to receive field initiated calls you can select a Report by Exception RBX option to send a Spontaneous Report by Exception message On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a SRBX message On A
126. 07 devices display Action Describes the type of Action Possible Actions are Verify Set Zero Set Span Set Mid 1 Set Mid 2 and Set Mid 3 Entry Expected or desired value This is the entered Dead Weight Tester value for point being verified calibrated Reading The actual Live Reading value read from the sensor or AI point Deviation Difference between expected or entered value and live reading Deviation Entry Reading Deviation Deviation as percent of range Deviation Deviation Span EU Zero EU x 100 To set the Midpoints 1 3 Click the Set Mid 1 button If desired calibrate Midpoint 2 such as 50 of range for the Differential Pressure orifice only Static Pressure or Temperature Set Midpoint 2 allows you to specify the middle calibration point between the Zero and Span endpoints Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units Click the Set Mid 2 button If desired calibrate Midpoint 3 such as 75 of range for the Differential Pressure orifice only Static Pressure or Temperature Set Midpoint 3 allows you to specify a third point between the Zero and Span endpoints Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units Click the Set Mid 3 button Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 10 2 5 Zero Shift Offset RTD Bias Calibration Zero Shift enables you to zero the static pressure effect for the Differential
127. 1G2_ROC300 efm Select Meter Runje ta Convert 41G24_ bo04alarrnng efm A1G2_FB504 efr AlG2_fb503 efm A1G2_FB103_AGAT efm 411G22 efm ASG _multik efm ASG etm ASG 5 etm ASG 4 fb40 v1 04 efr ASG 4 etm 4255G 255 efm 41G2_ROC300 efm AlG2_fb504alarning etm AlGe2_FBS04 efm AlG2_fb503 efm asi MIGZ FB103 AGAT efm Select All Deselect All 411G22 efm Start Date End Date 10713 2005 1171772005 Start Conversion Cancel Figure 6 16 EFM Files Select for Conversion and Invalid Files Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 10 Click the Browse button next to the Select Folder for Converted File s field select the path 11 12 13 14 where you desire the converted files to be stored and click OK fe Select Folder for Converted Files Pack i Program Files ar ROCLINKS00 CI Displays Uzer OF Cancel Figure 6 17 Select Folder for Converted Files Select the Converted File Name s Prefix options to determine the converted file name format Refer to Figure 6 16 Use Station Address amp Group Includes the Station Address and Group in the file name Use Current Data amp Time Includes the current data and time in the file name Select the Period Start Date and End Date to define the time frame for which the conversion of data is performed The Start Date is automatically post dated thirty five days prior to the end date The End Da
128. 232 communications card The Read I O Flag forces the unit to search for all installed I O modules Select the Flag and click Apply when an I O module is added or removed under power For a FloBoss 407 the Transmitter T Flag changes transmitter power to Analog Inputs when enabled For the Revision M of the Termination Board with the 12V 24V jumper P15 set to 24V selecting this Flag maintains the Transmitter Power at 24 volts nominal De select the checkbox to change the Transmitter Power to 12 volts nominal If the jumper is set to 12V this Flag essentially has no effect Revisions A and B of the Termination Board certain I O modules specifically the AI Loop and AO Source route input power back to T With T flag disabled the T voltage returns to zero when those modules are removed Revisions A and B of the Termination Board did not have a 12 24 jumper so this feature allows the Transmitter Voltage to be selected Revisions A and B of the Termination Board did not have a 12 24 jumper so this feature allows the Transmitter Voltage to be selected Select the A4 A5 Function ROC300 Series to determine whether the two built in DI PI channels in the ROC300 Series are configured Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 3 3 3 Flags User Programs FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Select ROC gt Flags Click the User Programs tab General Advanced User Programs
129. 3 and Group 1 If more than one computer running ROCLINK 800 software will be communicating with a group of devices either by radio or by other multi drop communications the Host Address of each Device Directory setup must be unique to avoid multiple responses The Host Address must also be different from any other host system that may access the communications link Host Group The PC has a default value of 1 When using ROC Protocol the Group address must match the address setup at the destination device in order for communications to properly transmit In the assignment of the Host Group and Host Address the following convention should be used Host Group and Host Address limitations 0 and 240 Reserved Use Select the connection type Comm Port Modem or TCP IP Note If TCP IP is selected the Time Out parameter on the Advanced tab applies but the other parameters do not apply Firmware updates cannot be transmitted over a TCP IP connection PC Comm Port If in the Use portion of the screen you selected Comm Port select the PC Comm Port on the computer to be used by ROCLINK 800 software for this setup The device can communicate through any configured Comm Port of the PC Typically COMM1 or COMM2 is used with the Local Port Before selecting this parameter check to see which Communications Ports are assigned in the PC Baud Rate The Baud Rate is set in the PC and used by ROCLINK 800 software to communicate wit
130. 5 Modbus Communications 8 20 Refer to Table 8 7 Modbus Register Definition Defaults FloBoss 100 Series concerning Modbus ROCLINK 800 User Manual Register Definition defaults for the FloBoss 100 Series Table 8 7 Modbus Register Definition Defaults FloBoss 100 Series pe Ro eta bisa Device Parameter Indexing Conversion 1 1 1070 1070 2 19 3 DOU STATUS Point 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 Point 0 3 1 7052 7060 3 0 14 AIN EU Point 0 2 7100 7102 46 0 51 AGANEW1 CURDP Param 0 3 7103 7107 47 0 0 FLWNEW1 FLOWDY Param 0 4 7108 7127 47 0 36 FLWNEW1 FLOTDY Param 0 5 7262 7288 46 0 15 AGANEW1 ATMPRS Param 0 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 Point 0 5 1 1070 1070 2 19 3 DOU STATUS Point 0 1 7052 7060 3 0 14 AIN EU Point 0 2 7100 7102 46 0 51 AGANEW1 CURDP Param 0 3 7103 7107 47 0 0 FLWNEW1 FLOWDY Param 0 4 7108 7127 47 0 36 FLWNEW1 FLOTDY Param 0 5 7262 7288 46 0 15 AGANEW1 ATMPRS Param 0 15 1 0 0 0 0 0 Point 0 16 1 8000 8053 46 0 O0 AGANEW1 TAG Param 0 2 8054 8063 45 0 O SMP1 OPTION Param 0 Select the Table to which you wish to map registers The ROC800 Series has 24 register tables available Select the Function Index to which you wish to map registers The FloBoss 100 Series has 9 Function Indexes available each corresponding to a Function Code displayed in the Function name field Enter a 10 character alphanumeric Tag ROC800 Series to
131. 6 32 From Factory Defaults asics cccssieciiivedssncaiadesaveisacsesendevence 3 18 Fonti e i N 6 33 FO EE AE E EAE EE A TE TE A 1 Argument Fields ARG ccsessseesseeeeeeeeees A 7 Build Compile ccssseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 11 Command Field CMD seeeeesceeesseressreresrresercesen A 7 Command Library ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 16 Comment Field cceccccceeecccceeeccceeseceeeeeeseeees A 8 Comparison Command cccccccccccccsssssseeeeeees A 22 Control Related Commands A 24 A FSA senorname an i NE EAEE S A 10 Database Command3 cccccceeeeceeeeeeeceeseceeees A 26 PVG HANG esae EEE A 12 Downloadestasrasrinrisrne ninn AAAS A 11 Pe AN A E AE A 13 COI a a AAEE AAAA EA A 5 Fe ING aineseos neres ENERET 3 7 PS e E EEE EENE 3 5 Function Examples cccccccccccccssssssssssseseeeeeeeees A 8 Function Structure ccccccccccccccessccceesececeeeeceeenees A 6 History Point az o2asanaasrcnacosoacsesseunchatanasacentoononeieaiess A 28 Label SUCU Coona A 7 Logical Commands ccccccceccececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees A 20 Mathematical Commands cccceecccceeeeeeeeeee A 18 Miscellaneous Commands cceececeeeeeeeeee A 25 Monitor Mode ccccccceecccceeseccceescceeescceeeeeseeees A 13 PDS censo A 12 Reading Writing Selecting and Closing A 12 REZISTIS cer gentcarereme se nena A 3 EAEI A EE E T EEEE E EE EEE EE A 8 By
132. 7 4 6 PID Example Select Configure gt Control gt PID Loop The following configuration example describes how to configure a PID point and associated inputs and outputs to implement flow control with pressure override to protect against over pressuring the line In this example the Primary Process Variable Primary PV is obtained from an orifice Meter Run point specifically the volumetric flow rate per day The Override Process Variable Override PV is obtained from the pressure value on an MVS point Setpoints for both the primary and override loops are entered by you A description is given for setting up either discrete or analog control for the control output See MVS Sensor ROC800 Series or FloBoss 407 for properly configuring the orifice Meter Run point and the MVS point If the control valve is controlled by a 4 to 20 mA signal to an I P converter configure an Analog Output with the appropriate Low and High Reading EU engineering units The units can either be in terms of the valve position 0 to 100 or in terms of flow capacity 0 to 1000 MCF Day Set the Output type on the PID screen to Analog Under Output Point select a TLP Point Type of Analog Outputs the desired Logical Number and EU Value parameter If the control valve is controlled by a motorized actuator on the valve configure two Discrete Output points for the open and close contacts Each of these Discrete Output points must be configured as TDO time dura
133. 800 Series 3 3 Figure 3 3 Device Information FloBoss 100 Series besiege eg A E EE E E T 3 3 Figure 3 4 Device Information FloBoss 407 and ROCJUQ SETIES vissscscvasasnccsstiadassancansdsaocssteusenseanaccsaanss 3 4 Figure 3 5 Device Information Example ROC300 Series and FIOBOSS 407 cccccccccessccceesececeeeeceeeeees 3 4 Figure 3 6 Information Internet ROC800 Series peepee ya esr der ag E E E E TEET E 3 6 Figure 3 7 Information Points ROC800 Series 3 8 Figure 3 8 Information Points FloBoss 407 and ROCJOU SETICS sscecsasctonncavasatotsaronenercacsgnateuntyevaroueses 3 8 Figure 3 9 Information Points FloBoss 100 Series E ieee A I A A A T 3 9 Figure 3 10 Information Other Information Example ROC800 Series esse ccccwsseccacncuasaddactaceniscweeenansassecbeass 3 10 Figure 3 11 Other Information FloBoss 407 and FloBoss TUO SGriEs sicessnasccnceneaccbiniconiacantesancdeteiaacaedahoteatancicss 3 11 Figure 3 12 Other Information ROC300 Series 3 11 Figure 3 13 Information System Configuration ROCSOU SETIES rriaro a 3 12 Figure 3 14 Information Revision Info FloBoss 100 OS araa E 3 13 Figure 3 15 Information Keypad Display ROC800 e e PE T ET E E 3 14 Figure 3 16 Flags ROC800 SeriesS 0 0 0 0 eeeees 3 15 l 4 Figure 3 17 Flags FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROE 300 SeneS Jirar iranere naea EES E 3 16 Figure 3 18 Flags Advanced ROC800 Seri
134. 9 Display Configuration ccccccsssssssessseeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 5 Firmware Versi n sisson Aa S 3 14 Master o wehea A S 3 14 ON eae A 2 8 2 9 STATUS ian E set atinaedea Gua E A 3 14 WISE CUS anoni a E eh staneawies 12 6 User Prostam ocne aneen e eai 3 23 Vdeo Mode conero E easeaneouns 3 14 BEDS e E E Messtanmeuas 3 20 License Key Administrator ccccccccccccccsssssseeeeeees 2 13 Liquid ISO5167 98 API 12 95 ISO10790 1999 5 4 Local Gravitational Acceleration c ccccececeeeeeeees 5 8 Local Operator Interface LOI cccceeeseeeeeeees 2 37 POC al POU eean S AO 2 36 2 37 L s Methane AC ius t via cterteereatenrrn onesies 5 20 LOEN 2 copie ssa tansounuessecdossaueooaraunentandaanmatoonnacsedeoes 10 3 OCC ING OM si sotsascaooctesnandenqussomeeunsa TEE 1 5 Logical Commands PS RENEE E sheen io ES EEE T A 20 15 S a E aemacteenennes 1 5 2 37 LS OOS EAE TEE A AT 6 31 COL resnie 2 37 POr esenea Aa 2 36 User RTO OT AN enana EE 3 23 LOWAO Nre a E 5 10 EOW DP Np xxcscste scare nEs 5 18 Low DP SetPoint iccssscccssmcmatisaienisdanedeidaosusiammanescans 5 18 Low Flow Cutoff eserin ces dudasensbessoevarcantenerdentene 5 14 5 30 Low Reading EU ssssnnseeesssssssssssssssesssereresssssss 4 3 4 26 Low Reading Time csssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeees 4 26 M MAC Addie Sunnen anintnaleneotadiatl mote 3 6 Manal Mode ismene stata 4 3 Manual QOuUtPUt ess ersan ocheianeeeceey 4 23 Mass Meter Pressure Eff
135. 9 16 Points Per Module Number of Turbine Meters Compatability Mode Number of Sarmpler Odorizers o C 809 8 Points Per Module Expanded 1 Expanded 2 Expanded 3 Expanded 4 4 i 10 13 16 15 Ze 25 fiene None None None None None None None 3 g 11 l4 17 au 23 26 None None None None None Nore None None le 15 18 z2 24 E 3 er None Nore None Nore None None Mone Nore Start Close Figure 1 6 New File Configuration Example ROCS8 amp 00 Series 2 The Type parameter indicates the type of ROC or FloBoss unit For the ROC800 Series select the type of I O or Comm 809 Modules that will reside in each of the nine module slots of the ROC800 Series unit 4 For the FloBoss 100 Series select the type of termination board I O Type Selections are 4 point old style termination board or 6 point new style with or without I O points When 6 point with I O is selected External I O selections appear Be sure to select the types of I O for which the termination board switches and wiring are configured 5 For the ROC800 Series enter the number of PID loops FSTs Stations Sampler Odorizers Orifice Meters and Turbine Meters that will be configured Only activate the necessary number of devices For the FloBoss 100 Series enter the number of PID Loops For the FloBoss 100 Series select the maximum number of History Points in Standa
136. 9979234 Energy Rate 0 0 MMBTU day Zb 0 997923 hlass Aate 0 0 MibAday Base Density 0 043592 Lb Cf Flow Today 0 0 MCF Flow esterday 0 0 MCF Energy Today 0 0 MMBTL Energy esterday 0 0 MMBTL Mass Today 0 0 Mlb blass esterday 0 0 Mlb Active Alarms ja 2 Update Y OF 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 5 1 Station General ROC800 Series Select the active Station to be configured This lists all active Stations Enter a unique Tag for the Station of up to 10 characters Select the History Segment in the Historical Database that will be used to configure history points for the Meters in this Station Select the Contract Hour for the meters in this Station Note The Contract Hour for the Station may also be set in the Configure gt History Segment screen Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Select the set of Calculation Standards that are to be used for orifice gas linear meters and mass linear meters in this Station There is only one edition of AGA and ISO flow calculations for the ROC800 series Calculation standards include Gas AGA3 92 AGA7 96 AGA11 2003 American Gas Association AGS standard for gas flow through an orifice a linear meter and a mass Coriolis meter Gas ISO5167 98 ISO9951 93 ISO10790 2003 International Standard Organization ISO standard for gas flow through an orifice a linear meter and a mass Coriolis meter
137. A a coneaceecucavea come adstanie aetanetseeseaswanacesesse A 11 SC ar E A 11 SOPPINE secies aE eaaeo A 12 Storage and Restart ccsssssesssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaas A 9 Time Related Commands cccceeccceeeeeeeeeeee A 23 Trace Mod ernier A 15 Troubleshooting csssseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeseseeeees A 13 Function Sequence Table RECOS I rerainan A 1 G Gas Component sssseseeeeeeeesssssssssssseetrerressssss 5 5 5 19 Gas Quality 0 cccccccsssseeeessseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenaaas 5 6 5 19 l 7 Gas AGA3 92 AGA7 96 AGA11 2003 5 4 Gas ISO5167 98 ISO9951 93 ISO10790 2003 5 4 Gateway Address cccccccccccccccssssssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanaas 3 6 CAS E T AE co bestusnsetaetouavinmennanene 5 31 Gravitational Acceleration c ssseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 29 OSS a sed wean boots E nepcuines 5 8 SS roca eet E ean eon E 5 8 CEOS e nanos saan omnes 2 15 3 5 PRACT dpceinsict sores E E E 2 16 DSN aea E E EEE 2 16 NON DON I O E E eee 2 15 New GOU eea E E E O 2 15 RBX of SRBA Gener ene eee E en 2 30 KO ea E E E 2 17 SCO r A neste ane eesteudes 2 10 H Handshake sesroiniisespr ain 2 26 HART PG TUE E E E tate nest E E a aenne 4 53 AU Di AON E 10 15 DE O E E E otareias 4 54 E e E E E E E E 4 51 Inp t Config ratiON scrisese sisan 4 50 Heating Vaessen taisiin re innn a 5 6 5 20 Heating Value Basis 1 0 0 0 ccccccssssssseeeeeeeeeees 5 6 5 20 Heavy Gas Distribution
138. AG eae 3 7 Meter SCUD inte deas tam uieemaess 5 1 5 11 Meter TaT Gastincarcat ice te teanedttan tatneteaiep es cansesenaie teewinee 5 14 Meer Typ ae hare stene eats anadens Site tiee eaten osloacdisaetaialana ines 5 14 Minute IIS CODY sc055 tscastaaadesSee eeciatostetcanedsanastome leas 6 31 Miscellaneous Commands E a EAT AE EAE ALI EA R A AN A 25 ModDUS aeaea ia AEri 2 35 8 1 Continuous Polling eeeeeeeesseesssssssssseeeresrrressssssss 2 27 CONV ON e a a E 8 23 TO SU aeee e totes 8 2 Host Pal AMC CLS eenen 8 32 Host Parameters Tab ROC300 Series and FloBoss TOT een E cause 2 27 MATE E ENA ARA A EE EAER AT 2 26 Master WI OG Sic canim 8 31 Master Tables Acre er Cre re ee Rr ee eT 8 29 Regie S tics teaitinitarten cop hicesd cateniaibaides vheedammdemuiabs 8 18 RTU Encapsulated in TCP IP ce eeeeeeeeeees 2 34 BGS eae ress acta reac noe E OE E tacos neon 2 26 8 2 Slave OMY iin celavernonssier A iain oxen ones 2 26 FCPI P oA ost arate sh ataugueamecnydsd ote 2 34 Modbus Configuration ccc sssssssssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaes 8 2 Acknowledging Events and Alarms 8 16 Events and Alarms i e ile 8 13 8 14 Genera hacian a erect ee nse aed tose eee 8 3 PRIS ORY a sats ovens tt oc a 8 8 8 10 l 9 History Table a ccasacsasonesxcermnensacsonencvestauntveuveeiateantins 8 11 Reading Events and Alarms ccccccccccsssssneees 8 15 Scale Valls esana A TOA 8 5 Modem Comm POTIS sorcrnovsecirredak i
139. AGA or International Standards Organization ISO ROC800 Series calculation configuration parameters and calibrating the meter In this Chapter Section Page mr Mr a Da Ch r er ee nr ee EE E ee ee 5 2 Station Configuration ROC800 Series 00 ccccccccsssssseeecceeeeeeeaeesseeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeceeeeesasaeseeeeeeeeeaaas 5 2 5 3 Meter Setup Conf CUE AO ssseeseriseigniset kase eiii er n ani Enea EE EA SE ea ESEN narii i 5 1 Meter Setup Basics The ROC800 Series organizes Meter Runs into Stations The 12 Meter Runs can be grouped among the 12 Stations maximum in any combination Meters are assigned to Stations in the Meter gt Setup gt Orifice or Turbine screens Meter runs belong in the same Station when they have the same gas data calculation methods and base contract conditions If using constant gas quality data from a lab analysis report then all 12 Stations can be employed If using live Gas Quality data from a Gas Chromatograph no more than ten Stations are recommended Note Contract hours can be set differently for each Station in the History Segment Configuration screen Configuration screens for the Station and the individual meters are accessible by clicking on the Station or meter icon in the Configuration Tree Each Station may be given a unique Tag and each Meter may be given a unique Tag and Meter Description The FloBoss 103 has a single orifice meter and does not support Stations The FloBoss 104 has a single
140. AO eeseeseeeteeteeteeseeseeeneeneeeneeneceeeneennseneeneeeneeneseneenaes 6 27 A a E AN We PO 4 8 a EN AAT E E E A A A 3 21 Configuring Comm Ports for RBX or SRBX 2 30 MCAD ANG a toteccdustcer ce TT cates 4 21 4 36 Numbers High Low Deadband cccccccceceesssseeeeeees 5 10 NO Mest EEE ANE EA neces 4 26 TOE NEPON t ieee Uae occ oer 0 Pulse Width cessssssssssssssesssnessseeessunnssseesennnnsse 4 18 rene he Agia egies eek greiner dace He LOO Fe COUN sonnera n Eii 4 26 Wester 5 1 5 35 100 Pulse Width wo cceeeeeeeeeeeeeccccseesseeeeees 4 18 Modbus pe ee y 213 14 103 History Sizing sonic cticansaqracousacseradnadodsectiwansresacoutean 1 19 RBX O O 4 8 5 10 SO a a a 9 2 9 3 oe emp E A 809 Modules 1 19 Reading MOdDUStsisisase aa ieee 8 15 ee ROC800 SeM1ES cones csscsiss condsseaccnsseasceevacenssedsecedsasaces O OO SRBA oere rE AA 4 8 5 10 A SAHO onuren ear a POP ee 5 10 AATA S PUNCO RR 3 21 MOE a E a About ROCLINK 800 sssssssssssscssssssssttiseesseeeeesssnnnen 1 12 Altering PADS ONG oniran anaa r AE 5 31 FST Edit Menu A 13 Access Levels ccccccccsccsssssssssssssscsssssscssssssssessees 222 25 Ambient Hg Temp seesecececees sees teeneeeneeencen 5 33 Accum d Pulses cccccccccscscsccsessesevsneseestesecesssseoses 4 31 Analog Input Accumulated Value 55ccooooooooooooocececeeccee 4 17 4 25 RELOAD eta neo a OPN eRe SU ne et Et OS tg 4 2 Acknowledging Events amp Alarms ccccceeeeee
141. Alarms Pressure Alarms Temperature Alarms and RBX Alarms for the MVS Sensor Select either Upstream or Downstream to indicate the location of the static pressure tap in relation to the orifice and normal flow By default the MVS sensor is set as an Upstream device The Report Pressure As parameter allows the pressure to be reported as either Upstream or Downstream pressure If Downstream 1s selected then the Diff Pressure DP is subtracted in PSI from the Static Pressure SP reading to obtain a Downstream Pressure measurement for archiving For Downstream operation adjustments to the calibration procedure may be required when setting the Span value Enable or disable Sensor Alarms Status displays the alarm conditions of the sensor or any alarms that are active for this point When Sensor Alarms are Enabled the failed alarms such as point fail alarms 485 comm fail and sensor fail that are active appear Click the Write button in the Sensor Configuration field to update the sensor with the current values on the screen or click the Read button to read the sensor s current configuration data and Process Variables Select the Action on Failure to set the sensor to retain the last values Hold Last Value before the failure or you can set the sensor to return to the configured fault values Set To Fault Value when the sensor fails an input point fails or comm fail Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 58 ROCLINK 80
142. B AI Advanced n ET 4 4 ea b 9 1 A a ON 4 7 T ee Oe ge we ee ee 5 4 E RE cae P a eee re Base Multiplier Period BMP c scsssesssseseeseseseeeees 5 15 Gone oc 4 9 Base Multiplier Value BMV ssseeeeeeeeeeees 5 15 Dy fe ek ck oh ete 4 9 IASC PEC SSURO sacsaseddacavesantccbancveesdinesernardoacosiventcoe 5 8 5 29 A sei ta taki neve E E ee al ne teeta eee Ae Biaiel Tempe S ages 58 9209 Rev Dec 05 Battery Power Controlling cccccceeecccceeceeceeeeeseeessssseeeeeeeeeeeees 7 18 BAU Rale couronna AEETI 2 19 2 25 Baud Rate Generator cccccceecceecccsecceecceseccessceeesees 3 12 BMP orea EENE 5 15 Browse Button TEP e a oes A EAEE A E 1 13 BO r E A AEA A 11 TONS arisen ovatesndcncvowaneatone ile EAEE 1 8 1 9 C Cale User Pi Ger aiiisis xcascatestvosciededacouastnesaianibatiteieasbdes 3 23 Cale2 User Program sis cenustetavietncmnstaseenteveeremanmedensanats 3 23 Calculation Standards ceeeeeceecceeceeceeceeees 5 4 5 14 Calibrated A TT TAN ee E E 5 34 EEE Cee E A A SE E A T E A 5 33 HO TEMP sss ste ron ce sdeadeastnnratuncducouaicencongeaaenoseiaetanes 5 33 PN VIC GAD T E E A EA T A 5 33 Calibrated Grav Accel cccc cece cscccsescesscessceesseenscees 5 35 Calibration AL AUN Sates et etctaerc 2 see ac ETTA 10 16 PC OS soca fatace tse A EEE 5 34 HART o NAE A A 10 15 MYS VAOS onie san RE ETS 10 19 Gah Stereos oe eera 10 10 REDON 322 csnasetie ic hoscddaauatsednshoistane
143. Boolean fixed bit change to Status in DO or DI Not Used 5 Fixed variable flag change to Manual Mode for an I O point Manual Alarm 6 Table entry change change to Modbus Function Tables Status Change Alarm 7 System command change events logged by system Power up No Flow Alarm 8 Not Used Point Fail Alarm 9 Operator change Event Log identifier bit O for Alarm 10 Low Low Limit change to Low Low Alarm parameter Low Low Alarm 11 Low Limit change to Low Alarm parameter Low Alarm 12 High Limit change to High Alarm parameter High Alarm 13 High High Limit change to High High Alarm parameter High High Alarm 14 Rate of Change Limit change to Rate Alarm parameter Rate Alarm 15 Not Used Set Clear Alarm 1 Set or 0 Clear Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 8 4 Modbus Registers ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series Select Configure gt Modbus gt Registers Modbus Register tables allow you to map Modbus Registers to Point Type Logical and Parameter TLP numbers One line in the Modbus Register table can be used to map more than one register to TLP pair by using either Point Indexing or Parameter Indexing Point Indexing means that the Start Register is mapped to the selected TLP Subsequent registers through the End Register are mapped to the same point type and parameter and increment the point logical number Parameter Indexing means t
144. Boss 407 is no longer updated by the ROC or FloBoss When Alarming moves from enabled to disabled an alarm generates When the Scanning Mode is set to Manual ROC800 Series use the Manual Output field to override the output Auto Output ROC800 Series Manual Output ROC800 Series and State FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 indicate the State of the Discrete Output Off normally indicates that the output is Off or that a switch is open On normally indicates that the output is On or that a switch is closed Set the Momentary parameter When set to On the Discrete Output regardless of its configured DOUT Type is placed into the one shot Momentary mode Immediately after setting On and clicking Apply the Discrete Output is activated for the amount of time defined in the Time On parameter The Momentary radio button automatically resets to Off at the end of the time period For a ROC800 Series Physical Output indicates the actual status of the output channel at the field terminations Select the DOUT Type to specify the function of this Discrete Output Select Latched if you want the Discrete Output status on an active transition of the output from Off to On to change to On and remain in that State until it is cleared To be cleared the Auto Output or Manual Output parameter must be changed to the Off state either by the software or manually in a ROC800 Series For a FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and Fl
145. Boss 407 option allows you to setup History Points for meter Parameters For the ROC300 Series FloBoss 100 Series and FloBoss 407 35 days of hourly and daily data are stored for each point For a ROC800 Series you can configure the amount of storage The historical database can be configured to log only the values that need to be logged The values are logged in the standard minute hourly periodic daily time base of the ROC or FloBoss unless FST control is used By using the FST Editor utility the period at which the data is logged can be placed under FST program control The ROC800 Series Periodic history can be configured for 1 to 6 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes or in 60 minute frequencies The ROC and FloBoss maintains several types of historical databases Minimum Maximum Min Max Database Minute Database Periodic Database ROC800 Series Hourly Database Daily Database Extended History FloBoss 100 Series A gt gt gt The Min Max Database is for viewing only and cannot be saved to a disk file Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Note The time stamp used for standard logging of historical values reflects the time at the end of the period not at the beginning For example data collected from 8 00 to 9 00 is time stamped 9 00 History values can be collected from the ROC or FloBoss via ROCLINK 800 or other third party host systems From the Vi
146. C300 Series and FloBoss 407 For FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 the Gas Quality tab defines the mole percentages of twenty gas components as well as the Heating Value Basis the Heating Value and the Specific Gravity If other meter runs have similar characteristics use Copy and Paste to create Gas Quality configurations Select Meter gt Setup or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units Meter Setup Meter Taq Meter 1 General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Sampler Instrument Calib Alarms Meter Humber 1 Meter 1 Log Methane Adjust foo Nitrogen Heptane f Enabled C Disabled COZ Methane Ethane Propane n Butane Butane n Fentane Pentane Hesane Octane Honane Decane H25 Water Helium Oeyigen CO Heating Value Basis f Om Wet C As Deliv Heating Value i Calculate C Enter C BTU Lb 1027 152 i BTUACF Specific Gravity C Calculate ie Enter Hydrogen 05735421 Total Mole 3 700 00 Gas Quality f Constant f Live 2 Update y OK A Cancel i Apply Figure 5 10 Gas Quality FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Enter the mole percent of each Gas Component or use the default values of 96 Methane 3 Ethane and 1 Nitrogen This value is required to calculate the compressibility of gas using the AGA 8 detailed method
147. Constant Value Database or Constant Value Database or Constant Value RR out ARG1 SVD out SVD in ARG1 RA in RR out RR in SVD out SVD in For FST History Point RR out History Value ARG1 ARG2 For floating database value ARG2 lf ARG1 gt No of archived periods ARG1 then ARG2 0 Otherwise ARG2 ARG2 1 For all other cases RR out RR in SVD out SVD in For FST History Point History Value ARG1 ARG2 RR in For floating database value ARG2 If ARG2 gt No of archived periods ARG1 then ARG2 0 Otherwise ARG2 ARG2 1 For all other cases RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 27 ROCLINK 800 User Manual WTM Write Time To Historical Database sets the value 1 Database or For FST History Point of the database point ARGUMENT1 and the Constant If minute resolution pointer ARGUMENT2 to the historical database Value then time string with either minutes or seconds 2 Database or History Value ARG1 resolution The time format for minute s resolution Constant ARG2 minute format is min hr day mon and for seconds resolution is Value Otherwise History sec min hr day Applies to historical database Value ARG1 ARG2 points defined for the FST only second format If ARGUMENT2 is a floating database value for For floating database example FST1 FST SEQ 1 R8 the value ARG2 command increments ARGUMENT2
148. EP pointed to by ARGUMENT 1 X X LABEL MSG MSG String 1 ARG1 MSG Data ARG2 X END End of FST restart at beginning X X BRK Delay ARGUMENT1 100 mSec intervals 1 X X second for FloBoss 100 Series ALM Log 10 character message and a current value X X EVT Log 10 character message and a current value X X Note MSG not supported by the FloBoss 100 Series A 7 1 FST Mathematical Commands The mathematical commands provide simple arithmetic or mathematical operations Such operations include addition subtraction multiplication division raise to power absolute value ABS e raised to a power EXP truncate to integer INT base 10 logarithm LOG natural logarithm LN square root SQR and 3rd order polynomial P3 L2 Register is less than or equal to zero Note No operation occurs with the LOG LN power and SQR commands if the Results Name Description Arguments Results Add value to 1 Database or RR out ii n ARG1 RR in Constant Value SVD out SVD in Subtract value 1 Database or RR out ee ARG from RR in Constant Value SVD out SVD in Multiply RR in by 1 Database or RR out i n ARG1 value Constant Value SVD out SVD in i Divide RR in by 1 Database or If ARG1 0 0 value Constant Value RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in ARG1 Rev Dec 05 FST Editor
149. Ee 2 9 5 Disconnec ng roma ROC or PIOB OSS scxccrist casteetecaerssclestancsceteerb Gaesiesicentenastensnestieeaaes Section 3 Configuring System Parameters ccccccccssssssscccccsssssscccccccssssssccccssssees 3 1 SETTING THE CLOCK oocccccccccccccscccccecccccecccccececuuecccuucesccuececuecssuucesscusecscusecscucecssuceesscusessuusessuauacesuuess 3 1 3 2 CONFIGURING DEVICE INFORMATION cccccccccececececececscscseseseceseseceeaececececeeecesececesecetscseseseseseseeees Dek e LO M2 CMe Fall A E A E E E E E OE 3 4 3 2 2 Information Internet ROC800 Series ooo ec ccecceeccceecceeccecceeuccessceesceesesecseesssueeceuacs 3 2 93 MMM OU MIA LOM 2 IP OMICS ec sresctesecsnteicteaein cece EAE e i 3 2 4 Information Other nformation 0 ccc cccecescececcececcecececcscececcscscececescecescecesescusescecesces 3 2 5 Information System Configuration ROC800 SerieS ccescesseccecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeenees 3 2 6 Information Revision Info FloBoss 100 Series oo eeccseecceecceeeseeeseessseeeseeeseees 3 2 7 Information Keypad Display ROC800 SerieS cccccccccsesccescesscesccssccsscssssssssssessseeseeees 3 14 I CONFIGURING I STEM EFEAG mi E E R 3 3 1 Returning the Device to Factory Default Settings enoesssoeeessssssseserrsssssssseerrrssssseeeeees 3 3 2 Flags Advanced seseeeeseeseesesreseeresresrestsrtsrtstastettsttsteststts tastas tattstastastettstesta
150. Figure 6 1 History Memory FloBoss 100 Series 6 3 Figure 6 2 History Setup Standard History FloBoss TOO SETIES wcassscaweeutdec ven OENE 6 3 Figure 6 3 History Setup Extended History FloBoss POO SS Cie Ss iat ann a snout tataaaae assole earence 6 4 Figure 6 4 History Setup Points Setup FloBoss 100 SELIG S ia a a a a A a caanaele 6 5 Figure 6 5 Meter gt History Setup FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Meter seeececeeeseeeesceesecresssrrrsseree 6 7 Figure 6 6 Configure gt History Points FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Standard eeeeeeeeseeeeseeeessseeen 6 7 Figure 6 7 History Segment Configuration ROC800 SES S eaycacad vat sas toeasatene beneunlawigad EEN 6 9 Figure 6 8 Configure gt History Points FloBoss 100 See a 6 10 Figure 6 9 Configure gt History Points FloBoss 407 and ROCO SETE S hai satin ness leditianteeatateneate 6 11 Figure 6 10 Configure gt History Points ROC800 Series E R 6 11 Figure 6 11 Collect Device Data eee 6 17 Figure 6 12 View EFM Report 6 18 Figure 6 13 Convert EFM File eens 6 19 Figure 6 14 Select EFM Files s to Convert 6 20 Figure 6 15 Invalid EFM File Allert ee 6 20 Figure 6 16 EFM Files Select for Conversion and Invalid il cho Rage mean rears a anne reece nce pre E AE mene ee ee an 6 21 Figure 6 17 Select Folder for Converted Files 6 22 Figure 6 18 History From Device Example F
151. Form A6121 Part Number D3801159X012 December 2005 ROCLINK 800 Configuration Software User Manual EMERSON Flow Computer Division Website www EmersonProcess com flow ROCLINK 800 User Manual Revision Tracking Sheet December 2005 This manual is periodically altered to incorporate new or updated information The date revision level of each page is indicated at the bottom of the page opposite the page number A major change in the content of the manual also changes the date of the manual which appears on the front cover Listed below is the date revision level of each page Page Revision All Pages Dec 05 All Pages Feb 05 All Pages Oct 04 All Pages Apr 04 All Pages Sep 03 All Pages Jul 03 All Pages Sep 02 FloBoss and ROCLINK are marks of one of the Emerson Process Management companies The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co All other marks are the property of their respective owners This product may be covered under pending patent applications Fisher Controls International LLC 2002 2005 All rights reserved Printed in the U S A While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Fisher Controls does not guarantee satisfactory results from reliance upon such information Nothing contained herein is to be construed as a warranty or guarantee express or implied regarding the performance merchantability fitness or any other matter with respect to th
152. GA3 and AGA7 calculation methods are not pre configured You should begin the configuration of an AGA calculated Meter Run by configuring those points Refer to Configuring History for EFM Reporting Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 8 ROCLINK 800 User Manual History Segment Configuration Penodic Number Minute Pernodic Daily Space Sample Contract Enable Force End Segment Tag of Ponte Entries Enties Entries Allocated Rate Hour Logging of Dap 18793 y Mow m OTOT E z i a a General General 00 T wo LRR mo E _ Lo ha i T L 4 L 4 x egment 0 Moo Mow ae a on T oS 4 4 x egment U2 E D ara ae azae EEEPC ae a on T oS 4 4 x egment U3 Moo mo E _ Lo ha i g T L 4 L 4 x egment 04 Moo x egment U5 Moo E m E L co DJ CT T L 4 egment 06 Mow oo mm egment 07 E m E L Ci mm DJ CT T L 4 egment 08 1 z 3 4 5 E if g 3 oo F m oo oo DI DI cn cn T T D D wheel olol afaa 4y4 4a E E E egment 09 4 ai 4 41 4 L wn a m J L uo DJ Lm T L 4 egment 10 4vailable Space 197205 Total Space Allocated 197265 Available Space to Allocate U 2 Update y OK Cancel Apply Figure 6 7 History Segment Configuration ROCS800 Series Enter a Tag for each Segment that will identify the group of historical points that will be archived there For Segment
153. History Points is 35 Refer to Figure 6 1 The Standard History database logs entries for each point at three intervals minute hour day Every day at the contract hour a min max entry is also logged History Setup standard History Extended History Setup 1 Accumulate H our ERN 1 MINTO Avg Linear Undefined Undefined Undefined 1 12 13 14 15 J Update Y OK 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 6 2 History Setup Standard History FloBoss 100 Series 2 3 4 F 6 i E 4 mm Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Extended History The minimum number of Extended History Points is 0 The maximum number of Extended History Points is 15 The default number of Extended History Points is 4 The default interval for Extended History is 10 minutes Refer to Figure 6 1 The Extended History database creates entry for each point at the user specified interval The intervals are 1 2 3 4 5 10 12 15 20 30 and 60 minutes All the points in the Extended History will be logged at the same interval History Setup Standard History Extended History Setup i Archive Type Archive Faint Current Yalue PIN BB RATEFL Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Pi Update Y OK 7 Cancel Apply Figure 6 3 History Setup Extended History FloBoss 100 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 4 ROCLINK 800 User
154. ID loops can have Override Control Each active PID loop acquires the Process Variable input and calculates the change in output required to maintain its Setpoint The change output of the selected loop is applied to the appropriate output The PID control loop can use either one Analog Output or two Discrete Outputs to control the regulating device If Discrete Output control is to be used one DO will provide open forward control and the other DO provides close reverse control If the Output Type is Analog the selected change in output is added to the current value of the output If the Output Type is Discrete the change in output is sent to one of the two Discrete Outputs The magnitude of the correction determines the amount of time that an output is energized If the correction is positive it is routed to the open forward DO If the correction is negative it is sent to the close reverse DO To set up a PID loop configure the input for the Process Variable Then configure the one AO or the two DO points each of which must be configured as TDO Timed Duration Output points Then select Configure gt Control gt PID to configure the parameters associated with PID Control Loops 1 To enable PIDs in a ROC or FloBoss select ROC gt Information gt Points 2 Enter the number of PIDs you desire in the Point PIDs Active field The maximum number of PID loops is sixteen for the ROC800 Series one for the FloBoss 100 Series four for the F
155. K 800 User Manual A 4 2 FST Label Field The LABEL field allows you to uniquely identify a function and consists of up to six alphanumeric characters in any combination A common practice is for the LABEL to identify the action being performed by the function For example the LABEL PUMPON describes a function that activates a pump LABELs enable branching the ability to direct the execution to a function other than the next function in the sequence For example after completion of a given program STEP 0 a GO command that has a LABEL provided in ARGUMENT directs the program to advance to the branch identified by the LABEL and to perform the functions defined there STEP LABEL CMD ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 oo GO PMPOFF SO Ti Pomon oo oova no o e emor oo pousa o In the example above the program is instructed to GO to the LABEL PMPOFF as established by ARGUMENT in STEP 0 STEP 0 jumps to STEP 2 where the LABEL PMPOFF is located A 4 3 FST Command Field CMD The FST command CMD field specifies the action to be taken by a function A drop down list is available in each Command cell that shows the function commands and provides a brief description of how they operate on the RR CF and Argument values Commands may also be typed in directly This example shows the use of the command CMD GO Refer to Command Library for a definition of each command STEP LABEL CMD ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 oo GO
156. K 800 User Manual The Objects selections are gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Tab Control Separate a large number of elements with a Tab to group user selections onto the appropriate tab Once a Tab is in place drag and drop Objects onto the Tab Add Frame Place like Objects within a Frame to group user selections Once a Frame is in place drag and drop Objects onto the Frame Add Label Use labels to mark other Objects Add Text Box Creates data entry fields Add Check Box Creates boxes for multiple selections Add Option Button Create radio buttons to limit input to a single selection Add Combo Box Create a list of options that limit input to a single selection Add Line Use lines to mark borders between Objects Add Rectangle Use rectangles to mark borders between Objects Add Oval Use ovals to mark borders between Objects Add Picture Add an image from a file Add Chart Create a chart to represent data graphically Add Pushbutton Create a button to write data to the ROC or FloBoss 12 6 3 Custom Displays Object Properties Select View gt Display The items in the Object Properties box depend on the Object you have added You may edit the Object Properties of each Object at any time The Object Properties box allows you to gt gt OH gt gt gt OH Enter a Caption for the item This applies to tabs frames l
157. LINK 800 Software Basics 1 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 7 2 Configuration Checklist ROC300 Series For a ROC300 Series unit Sd gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt o o o Utilities menu gt ROCLINK 800 Security logon Device Directory gt Comm Port gt Properties PC communication configurations ROC menu gt Security User List and Comm Port Security ROC menu gt Clock ROC menu gt Information system variables ROC menu gt Comm Ports ROC communication configurations Configure menu gt I O menu gt AI AO DI DO and PI Meter menu gt Setup Orifice or Turbine meter Meter menu gt History Meter run history setup Configure menu gt Control menu gt PID Loop Configure menu gt History Points history database Configure menu gt LCD Configure menu gt Radio Power Control communications sleep mode Utilities menu gt FST Editor ROC menu gt Flags for saving and system variables to Flash memory 1 7 3 Configuration Checklist FloBoss 100 Series For a FloBoss 100 Series unit d gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt o o o o gt ROC menu gt ROCLINK 800 Security logon Device Directory gt Comm Port gt Properties PC communication configurations ROC menu gt Security User List and Comm Port Security ROC menu gt Clock ROC menu gt Information system variables ROC menu gt Comm Ports ROC communication configurations Configure m
158. Manual 6 2 1 Configuring FloBoss 100 Series History Select Configure gt History Points History is saved to two databases Standard and Extended History Historical Configuration for the FloBoss 100 Series units occurs on three tabs Setup Standard History and Extended History The number of entries logs available to Standard and Extended History is configurable within boundaries 1 Verify that you are on line with the FloBoss 100 Series unit 2 Select Configure gt History Points gt Setup tab History Setup Standard History Extended History Setup Humber Sample Humber Number of Points Interval of Entries of Days Standard History EE Extended History 4 B R ame zo Note Number of Standard History Points 6 35 Number of Extended History Pots 0 15 Update y OK Y Cancel A Apply Figure 6 4 History Setup Points Setup FloBoss 100 Series 3 Enter the number of Standard History Points required oe Note Be sure to specify enough points in history to accommodate your present application and any foreseeable changes Changing the number of points later will cause a Cold Start amp Clear History function If you must change the number of points later make a back up of the history log before making changes 4 Enter the number of Extended History Points needed The Note above also applies to this step e Note The Extended History has a maximum number of 5040 entries per point
159. Meter History Meter gt History to associate History Points with a Meter Run meter inputs or flow rates Standard History History Points not associated with a specific Meter Run input voltage or MPU loading should be defined in Standard History Configure gt History Points Meter History and Standard History share a common database The ROC300 Series has 87 Historical Points and the FloBoss 407 has 50 Historical Points A History Point cannot be defined in both Meter History and Standard History Note History Points configured in the Meter gt History screen overwrite History Points configured in the Configure gt History Point screen Use the screens to setup the History Points by selecting which Parameters in the ROC or FloBoss to archive and which archiving method to use for each Parameter In Meter History each meter run can have up to ten History Points configured for a FloBoss 407 and up to sixteen History Points can be configured for a ROC300 Series Note The first eight Orifice or six Turbine History Points or the first flow run are pre configured with the default values used in EFM Reporting Do not change these values except for the Averaging Type or Accumulation Basis or your EFM Reporting may not be complete The historical database can be configured to log only the required values The values are logged in the standard minute hourly periodic daily time base of the FloBoss or ROC unless FST
160. Multiplier Period cc csssssssssseseeeeeeeeeees 5 14 Integral Multiplier Period IMP sseeeeeeeees 5 14 Integral Multiplier Value IMV cccceeeeeeeeees 5 14 in re File A gnmenetomeresenaanensanaananatnns 2 28 TE at e E E 3 6 Invalid Message Byte Time ccccssessessseeeeeeeeeees 2 33 Invalid Message Bytes ccccccccccssssssssseseseeeeeeeeeeees 2 33 DOV e neo aparacouveagnccsmnannceseanpecestaorucesneiancdts 4 17 IP A oe errr Ea 2 19 3 6 IP Port IN mCi issiron seissanta aia 3 6 TOTI aa A 5 14 IXD TiS Ke cieee ETEEN Enana 7 21 J LID e E 4 43 K Be E e so asemanserececsannecenecat one eanaaaseastnecnncasmeencenstoonauanes 5 15 MEV o 2a sucenanoma sia nadine E A N 4 43 Keep Alive Time sarce ts senaastenenivamnncmn ect omupnegnawaitaseneaganans 3 7 Key Off DG lay sedis caus araen e E EEE E EEE Er EEE 2 21 2 26 Key On Delay oeer eran eE edits E EE 2 26 Keyboar eia a a viet 1 10 Keypad Display ron N E 3 14 Creatine NOW ceria aa hehe tease 12 16 Firmware UPd I Ecci a 11 4 12 17 Keypad Display Editor sacciisvaavicsteoveiesiecicovere 12 16 EENET De EA A E E EE E 12 18 SECU r E E 12 19 eee TOKE S urrean r S 1 10 L EEE e a EEEE EE EA E AA TE T 4 16 4 23 SAUL WG 1 o E T E E E E E EN 5 8 5 29 Launching ROCLINK S00 eunn a E EA 1 4 ROCLINK 800 during Startup eee 1 4 LOD E E AN EA 2 26 Backlight Power Saving Mode neeeeeeeeeeessssss 3 14 Custom User EiS aee ne ee es 2 8 2
161. NotPresent Taq NotPresent General Advanced a Calibration Alarms Filter 3 Acton on Failure Adusted A D 0 0 Hold Last Value p C Set To Fault Value ae 29695 Adjusted A D 100 Fault Value 0 0 Raw 4 0 Input 0 Actual Scan 1 Seconds Average Raw Value Clipping C Enabled C Disabled Disabled Copy BB Paste 2 Update Y OF 7 Cancel Apply Figure 4 6 AI Advanced FloBoss 100 Series Filter value is a weighted sample using a percentage of the last value plus a percentage of the new value The entered data is the percentage of the last value used The Filter is calculated every Scan Period by the formula ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series Last Value x Entered New Value x 100 Entered Filtered Value ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Last Value x 75 Entered 4 New Value x 25 Entered 4 Filtered Value The Adjusted A D 0 is the calibrated Analog to Digital count corresponding to zero percent input In the Calibrate function this value is altered to set the zero percent input exactly at the Low Reading EU value The Adjusted A D 100 is the calibrated Analog to Digital count corresponding to 100 percent input This value is used to convert the input to engineering units In the Calibrate function this value is altered to set the 100 percent input exactly at the High Reading EU value Raw A D Input displays the current digital count directly from the A
162. Other Trace commands include Select Monitor gt Trace On to turn on Trace mode Select Monitor gt Pause to stop the FST at the current command Select Monitor gt Resume to start the FST at the current command Select Monitor gt Trace Off to turn off Trace mode gt gt Select Monitor gt Next Step to turn off Trace mode Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 7 FST Command Library Commands are identified by a name that consists of one or more characters or mathematical symbols In the FST Editor select the CMD field and perform one of the following Type the Command Click the Led button This opens a list of commands the command names and their descriptions actions Command Library Conventions Table describes the terms RR and CF used in the command descriptions actions In FST Command Summary Table each command name is given along with a brief description action the Arguments ARGUMENTI or ARGUMENT72 required and the effect each operation has on the RR and CF In the explanation of the operation if RR or CF is not mentioned then the current content 1s not affected and remains unchanged In general the CF is affected only by logical commands Table A 4 FST Command Library Conventions Convention Description RR in The value or contents of the Results Register RR Signal Value Analog SVA prior to execution of the function command RR out O
163. Path Address 1 0 Group 1 o Address He 0 Group 2 0 Address 3 0 Group 3 o 2 Update XY OK 7 Cancel Figure 2 21 Comm Ports Store amp Forward ROCS8 amp 00 Series and FloBoss 407 Select Store amp Forward Port FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Same Port to transmit a received message out using the same communications port or select Opposite Port to transmit using an alternate communications port Note Only COMM and COMM Ports are supported Enter the Store amp Forward Path Address and Group numbers of the devices that need to receive this SRBX message and forward it on to the next device to extend the communications path You may also specify addresses for other devices that support the ROC Protocol The device specified by the last non zero Address Group then sends the message to the host specified by the previous parameter If Store amp Forward Mode ROC800 Series is Enabled all Store and Forward messages transmit out the Port selected in the General tab If it is Disabled none will be sent Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 32 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 7 6 Comm Ports Diagnostics ROC800 Series Select ROC gt Comm Ports gt Diagnostics tab to view the communications diagnostic features on the ROC Comm Port Comm Ports 3 COMM Tag COMM2 ROC Protocol Valid Receive Counter o Successful Message Time o 01 2000 00 00 00 Modbus Valid Rece
164. Plus Protocol default is 4000 The Modbus default is 502 Port Numbers 1113 and 1131 are reserved If you change the port number the change takes effect immediately If the default value of this parameter is changed then all Modbus or ROC Plus Protocol over TCP IP connections will be closed and you will have to re establish a connection Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Inactivity Time in seconds If a valid Modbus or ROC Plus Protocol message is not received within the Inactivity Time the connection will be closed This timer is in addition to the security timeout A value of 0 will disable the timer Each connection will be kept alive by periodic transmissions of messages probes Enter the amount of idle time before the first probe is configurable in seconds in the Keep Alive Time field If the other side of the connection fails to respond to ten repetitive probes the connection will be considered broken and the connection closed The other nine probes will be 64 seconds apart The total time will be 9 x 64 the value of the Keep Alive Time parameter The total number of Modbus or ROC Plus Protocol over TCP IP connections will be limited to six of each type The Active Connections field displays the number of active Modbus or ROC Plus Protocol over TCP IP connections Use the Reset All Connections button to close all active Modbus or ROC Plus Protocol over TCP IP connections This bu
165. Pressure input Set Zero Shift Offset Paint Al Morth Live Reading 0 0000 Cancel Figure 10 12 Set Zero Shift Offset ROCS00 Series 1 If desired after you have calibrated Differential Pressure click Zero Shift to zero the static pressure effect for the Differential Pressure input The Point field displays the Point you are calibrating or verifying The Live Reading field displays actual Live Reading value read from the sensor or point 2 Apply the typical line pressure to both the high and low side of the sensor 3 Click Set Offset to send the value to the live reading to get the reading as close to zero as possible 4 Click the Done or Cancel button to close the dialog box 5 For a FloBoss 407 static pressure input click Offset to calibrate the offset shift of static pressure if desired Enter a value for the Measured Pressure Reading Click Set Offset to send the value to the live reading to get the reading as close to the measured reading as possible Click the Done button to close the dialog box 6 For a FloBoss 407 temperature input click RTD Bias to calibrate the offset shift of temperature throughout the RTD curve if desired Enter a value for the Temperature Standard Reading Click Set Bias to send the value to the live reading to get the live reading as close as possible to the standard reading Click the Done button to close the dialog box 10 2 6 Orifice Meter Calibration The Differen
166. Refer to Section 10 Calibration 4 The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this AI point 5 After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start 4 2 1 Al General Select Configure gt I O gt AI Points The General tab sets the basic parameters for the Analog Input point Analog Input ad x Analog Inputs 1 Al Default Tag Al Default General Advanced Al Calibration Alarms Point Number BA Value 2411477 Scanning Urita po Scan Period VO Secs Low Reading EU oo o High ReadingEU 100 0 dctve dams i Copy B Paste 2 Update OK Cancel I Apply Figure 4 1 AI General ROCS800 Series C Disabled Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Analog Input Analog Inputs 3 ATD Tag RTE General Advanced Al Calibration Alarms Point Humber aS Value 410 0724 Scanning Alarming Units Degrees F f Enabled f Enabled Scan Period fo R C Disabled C Disabled Low Reading EU 400 High Reading EU 464 0 Active Alarms as o k EA Paste 2 Update yY OF Cancel Apply Figure 4 2 AI General FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Select the Analog Input to be configured The inputs are listed by both Point Number and Tag Each Point i
167. S A E E E R 45 DO DISCRETE OUTPUT CONFIGURATION saci ciccoacuiaceaancetnsasntsuesawatcinicusaseietdesnatiamsntcumawataineusasesad da DO E N E E A E 43 2 DO Adan oe eein EE E EE E Se Haa POSIP P ae S E EE E E 4 5 4 DO Alarms ROC800 Serles s nsenneessenseessessesseessessseserssessssssessessesserssesseeserssessesseessensee Ao Pr PULSE INPUT CONFIGURATION orisi rrr T onna EN E AE AVON PLE e a a E E E EA We 6 Wa PEAN Aa A a EE E A E E E o E EEA S a E E E 4 7 PULSE INTERFACE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC FLOBOSS 104 oo cece eeccceecceecceeseeescessseesseusseees 4 8 RTD RTD INPUT CONFIGURATION ROCS800 SERIES ccccccccceeccescccecceesseeseesssessseeeseeessees Tar RID Go 0c a Re ee a Re AN ee Re Ae mn nee ee A eee ORE 7A 0 REDAN E een am no E ee ev AESA aT oP REDAN 15 ee en ne eo ener eer eee 4 9 TC THERMOCOUPLE INPUT CONFIGURATION ROC800 SERIES cccccseccsescesesceesceesseeeseeessees 49 1 Thermocouple Generaliniai N E aa e ten a iei dI Thermocoup e NOY ANC eG ei E E E 4 9 3 Thermocouple Alarms eessesseeeeesssssssseceresssssssecereossssssecceresssssssecceessssssseccreessssssseeeeessss 4 10 SYSTEM AI SYSTEM ANALOG INPUT CONFIGURATION ROC800 SERIES cccceeeseeeseeeseeee 4 10 1 System AI General ROC800 SerieS ec ceeccssecccccccceaeeesseeeceeeeaeeeseeeeceeeessaaaeeseeeeeees 4 10 2 System AI Advanced ROC800 SerieS ce eeeccccccccecceeeseseeecceceeeeaseessseee
168. S has a unique Address number to differentiate it from other MVS units because MVS sensors can be multi dropped Sensor Interface Version displays the version of the sensor interface firmware for the sensor Enter the ten character Tag that resides in the MVS Click the Write button to write the Tag to the MVS Sensor Enter the Address of the MVS interface used with the device communications protocol The default Address is 1 If the MVS is used in the multi drop mode each MVS must have a unique Address Address 240 can be used to poll the sensor to determine the address of the connected sensor This is similar to polling a ROC or FloBoss using Address and Group 240 When Address 240 is used the sensor will respond with its address by updating the Address field Click the Write button to write the Address to the MVS Sensor Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 57 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Displays the Voltage input to the sensor If the MVS interface version is 6 or greater this field should read approximately 5 which is the voltage to the microcontroller in the sensor If the MVS interface version is less than 6 this field shows the input voltage to the sensor The input voltage to the sensor in versions less than 6 must be at least 10 5 volts dc for proper operation For a ROC800 Series unit enter the DP Zero Shift value to be used as the Zero Shift Differential Pressure value during calibration During a calibratio
169. S800 communications on the Configure gt Control gt DS800 screen 4 If using Modbus RTU Encapsulated using TCP IP or Modbus TCP IP select the communications port and configure the parameters on the Configure gt Modbus gt Configuration screen The parameters on the General Modem SRBX and Store and Forward Tabs of the ROC gt Comm Ports screen do NOT apply to the Ethernet port The Diagnostics tab of the ROC gt Comm Ports screen displays the communication statistics available for all Modbus and ROC Plus Protocol communications transmitted using TCP IP connections Refer to Parameters on Comm Ports Diagnostics Tab ROC800 Series The total number of Modbus and ROC Plus Protocol over TCP IP connections is limited to 6 of each protocol at any given time The number of active TCP IP connections is displayed on the Active Connections field on the Internet tab of the ROC gt Information screen SRBX messaging or firmware updates cannot be transmitted over a TCP IP connection Once a ROC Plus Protocol Modbus RTU encapsulated in TCP IP or Modbus TCP IP connection is made the communication session can be closed by a timeout Three timeouts that can close a connection are executed as follows A security timeout is started after a valid Login If a valid ROC Plus Protocol message is not received within 60 minutes the connection closes The timeout is reset after each valid message An inactivity timer for each TCP IP connection
170. SG4 efm AIGA fb407v1 04 efm A3G5 efm ASG en ASG _ multik efm Select All Deselect All 0K Cancel Figure 6 14 Select EFM Files s to Convert An internal verification of each file is performed very if that file type is valid If any of the files are invalid a notification displays Refer to Figure 6 15 7 Click OK If this error message displays the invalid files are automatically removed and display in the Log frame Refer to Figure 6 16 ROCLINK 800 x One or more of the selected EFM files is not valid for the conversion type Invalid files will be removed from the list Figure 6 15 Invalid EFM File Alert Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 20 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 8 Select the files from the Select Meter Runs s to Convert list that you desire to convert You can individually select files using the checkboxes or you can click Select All to select all of the EFM files in the folder Click Deselect All to deselect all files in the folder Refer to Figure 6 16 w Convert EFM File Device Type Convert To e ROCS09 C ROC306 312 364 FB103 104 407 503 504 lic FPGAS f FlowCal AGA DET Select Efm File s to Convert Select Folder for Converted File s Je Pro ram FilesSROCLINKSO0 Je Pro ram FilesSROCLINK S00 es ASG r multik efm l l ASG efm AlG2 Sarem Converted File Hamels Prefix over een W Use Station Address amp Group 43G4 eft 4255255 efm Jf Use Current Date amp Time A4
171. ST to a step before or after the current step Message The Message MSG command provides a 30 character message and value for viewing on the local display panel Not supported by FloBoss 100 Series units Break The BRK command imposes a delay Break period in 100 millisecond 1 second for a FloBoss 100 Series intervals before executing the next command Once the break period is set to a value other than zero a delay in 100 millisecond or 1 second intervals occurs between the executions of each subsequent command End The END command completes execution of the FST and waits for the next FST execution cycle before returning to the first STEP of the FST The END command can only be used once in an FST If omitted End is appended to the FST by the FST Editor at compile time following the first empty Command field Alarm and Event Log The ALM and EVT commands log a 10 character message and the current value of the selected parameter to the respective log Name Description Arguments Results GO Goto specified LABEL 1 LABEL Goto ARG1 RR out RR in SVD out SVD in BRK Break delays execution of each command after this one 1 Database or FST break time for the number of 100 millisecond 1 second for a FloBoss Constant Value ARG1 100 Series intervals defined by ARGUMENT1 RR out RR in SVD out SVD in END End of FST returns to first command None Execute FST starting with first command
172. TA TE 2 6 ROC Plus Protocol ce eeeeeece scenes 2 26 2 35 3 6 ROC_user mdb sieiswcsecndccd xcunnsvaderindicdncvansiadevexeneees 2 15 9 1 ROC800 Series Modules cece ceecceeecceeseeeeseeeees 1 19 ROCLINK 800 Communications ccccce ec eeecceeeeeees 2 1 PV ANN SN eg tebe ted scde cence E nosetseccescceuaeeses 2 20 IS CUA lessee ccc E A E E EA 2 17 ROCLINK 800 Security sascccsncatinedeineatateravedicnesennte 2 1 2 5 ROCLINK 800 Software wo eee cccecceeecceeseeesceees 1 1 ROCLINK 800 V C SiOD tesssccssdicssccsaidsssecdaaveuseabwassennd 1 12 PROMO VEY UN sacacs a veceenceae erase aucicenceatesau ousnceseeatedesons 4 34 R262 6 0 10 eRe ener oe Ts ene ere ee ae ern 4 37 td E EE er E E ee ere 7 21 RTD FCG UTES 0 eee ere ee eee 4 40 Alas sereno A EA AAO 4 41 Calibration Values ccc ec ccecccsccceescesscesceeesees 10 17 Genera becsccsiriscaciosnte sueovminassneadaisusaerncostawbelsveonaveassneenens 4 39 MIMO UU E EEE A E EE T 4 38 POIS seres nnr E nonr 4 38 RTD Input Configuration eeeeeeeeeesessessseeeeeee 4 38 BP Ei AEE I E 10 10 Dis E EE ENE AAEE 2 20 RTS CTS Handshaking cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 2 26 FIU E E 8 4 Running Total Entered Rollover eee 4 34 S Same POr oacecctsatenctveoateinteceteninioaatotsonctienesastannineeadeneteanes 2 32 Sample TMICLY al eaasincasnewasdccaneasvoqnannadwasnodgasoneesancenes 6 5 6 6 MIU CL A N 7 4 OTTO ls ic cin adeweniveaverspnnsadninaniv
173. The Direct Connect command causes ROCLINK 800 software to initiate communications with the ROC or FloBoss device by performing a search of the PC communication ports at various baud rates Direct Connect then locks on to the first Comm Port and Baud Rate that are successful in communicating with a device Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 36 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 8 2 Local Operator Interface LOI Local Port The PC running ROCLINK 800 software physically connects to the ROC or FloBoss device through a cable For a local connection this cable is typically a prefabricated local operator interface LOI cable available from the Flow Computer Division of Emerson Process Management One end of the cable a 9 pin D shell female connector plugs into a serial communications port on the PC running ROCLINK 800 software The other end of the cable plugs into the ROC or FloBoss operator interface connector called the Local Port 2 8 3 Connect To connect the computer to a remotely located ROC or FloBoss a serial dial up modem radio satellite or other communications line should be installed This connection may be made through the LOI Local Port or other Communications Port on the ROC or FloBoss Use the Connect command to connect to a serial or dial up modem To use Connect 1 Physically connect the ROC or FloBoss unit 2 Launch and log in to ROCLINK 800 software 3 Perform one of the following Se
174. Thermocouple Input to be configured The inputs are listed by both Point Number and Tag Enter a 10 character string Tag for identification of the Point Number The Point Number identifies the physical location of the input For the ROC800 Series the Point Number identifies the module slot channel number When Scanning is set to Enable Value displays the last TC Input scan in engineering unit If Scanning is set to Disabled enter a Value to override the input Select the Type of Thermocouple sensor in use Input Temperature Range J Type 200 to 1200 C 328 to 2192 P K Type 100 to 1372 C 121 to 2500 F Select one of the Units radio buttons This determines in which EU the temperature will be calculated Enter a Units Tag to display in configuration screens reports and custom displays This should be the same unit of measure as is chosen in the Units radio buttons If this field is blank then configuration screens reports and custom displays will show a blank where the unit of measure should be Select the Scanning option For the input to automatically process the field input select Enabled Automatic Mode When Scanning is set to Enabled Value displays the last TC Input scan in engineering units e When Scanning is set to Disabled Manual Mode the engineering unit EU Value is no longer updated by the ROC If Scanning is set to Disabled enter a Value to override the input Rev Dec 05 Configurin
175. a a Hourly Daily Hourly Daily Hourly Daily O Hourly Daily 7 Hourly Daily 3 Hourly Daily ee ae ae ee a a ae ae a ry Hourly s r m m o g T m r m TE P HEE EEE EEEE 7m iF 7 7 i 7 i 7 i 7 e 7 i 7 i Hourly 2 Update yY OK Cancel Apply Figure 8 5 Modbus History Access Registers FloBoss 100 Series Enter the Modbus Register Number used to acquire the Daily Index values Enter the Modbus Register Number used to acquire the Hourly Index values Enter the Modbus Register Number used to acquire the Extended Index for Extended History values Enter the Modbus Register Number used to acquire the Events Alarms logs Refer to Modbus Events amp Alarms Functionality Enter the Modbus Register Number used to acquire the group of History Points defined in the Starting History Point and Ending History Point fields without having to define each history point separately Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 10 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Starting History Point to acquire a group of History Points without having to define each history point separately Enter values in both the Starting History Point and Ending History Point fields The Starting History Point and Ending History Point values must be different with the Starting History Point value being the smaller of the two The group of History Points is specified by the Modbus registe
176. a Comment eo 6 cee en ee re ne eee eee AAG FST BUC Oi ES AEM LCS aie ee sass nas ce tecen E E PF Basic R les lor Credtne FS U6 asso ceseeanthaeosatncaut bec tonacs A AS FST Storace and RCS atic ccccccenssssssiceceeacesnaiewnscaqeesncnbaaensendecaniendawnassqeeanaebnerendesteazacnesnivenead PES NVR ICING WTA 1S e se neraiaastenenens easiest esnenecastesenscuenet A asia sien Pe Ss Oe AU A TN parse casera A E A32 Altenne an PS T Edt MCI oirre EE AG MONTO MODE eere E A E EE TE ACLl Pore Trace VOCS aenrennane che eciacienea oseascaineeassea esans sane dscns woieisonnceenns se cemgssehacsineesooie sence Ad Tel OMIM AID AB RAR Y E E EE E E AE NT A 7 1 FST Mathematical Command 0 ccc cece cscccsccesccescessccsscesccesscessescenscesccesscusseescescenccescss Pe FSE Logica Commands caceea poen ct scwnaeectattesecsuaineta poerahsdetasentpbiasacsmeteeka A N aani aait A13 FST Comparison Commands ee eer ee er ee E ee ee ee eee ere A 22 AA Fo T Wie Ie Pate CG ATI S arrene seen SE E EE EEEE ESE A 23 A 7 5 FST Control Related Commands 20 0 cceccseccssccscccsccesccesceuscescesscesscesseesseesceceeccences A10 FST Miscellaneous Commands reesisrreier orereta EE E E TEE EEE Ad FST Database Commands siccsienasicavsendsaasedud niione Keur n a Or ETna REE OEEO EESE Rev Dec 05 Table of Contents viii ROCLINK 800 User Manual MSIOSSAL h cecseveceasseccesevsnvesenssotecauuceseseneseuesdsessnyesssusesesssescessaceessseesessvansscousseucss senssseeceessses o
177. aanagnaawadinwevionawationwuneuunatennnn 5 32 DOTA oso acestenasieaneconesetenanionanceemeneceianenaediannivoseeneee 5 32 Volume ACCUM cceeccsecccscccesccesscesceesceeceeaes 5 32 Sampler Odorizer ROC800 SerieS 000eeeeeeees 7 4 Samplers A AD Md ce 3 7 Save Configuration cccssseseeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeas 1 17 9 2 Save ROC User File wc srsascassssecaweasnacecsadocansesactesivadnsen ont 9 1 Saving e a E E T OET A 11 Saving and Retrieving Configurations 00008 9 1 Scale Valie S uenrierrnnr ren E Nai 8 5 Scan PEO icoxesauscsesenesecacevenGerenensaveienaesan 4 3 4 31 5 14 DC ANNI E osere o EERE EERE N EN ERER 4 3 Scanning Disabled ccccccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeees 4 4 I 11 DE CUI DY A E EE T EE T E 2 1 2 6 PROC CGS Level eegieence nse eeri 2 5 ACESS LEVE lS urere e aS 2 2 CGTOUDS srce EEA 2 10 Keypad Display cccccccccceeeecceeeeeeesesseseeeeees 12 19 ROCLINK B00 arean eais atendene 2 5 IE E t PEI E P NIN PANA A 2 6 2 8 2 9 Users Group Summary ssseeeeseesssseeeesesssssseeeee 2 12 E O e EET 2 11 Segments O r E ci iosanaseiecanes 6 8 Selecting I e A E E A E T N A A A 12 DV aT E E E S E A AE OET 10 10 E USC E EE E E aoiatasaeaanes 10 10 SEERTS to Hich Tor 30 SCC sonson e 3 21 Set To Factory Defaults cc ceceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 19 setting the losk eseru 3 1 Setup HISTO reou 6 5 Shortcut NCS AOD eers ENA 1 3 Signal Val
178. aateecanaunnacebooesvasedate 10 2 Ba A 10 17 Torone ICU GI ce tsetse a 10 13 OY TD pct se ec ta cee EE E E E E 10 3 A SUT A ha cae ete A AAT 10 1 Enake Ooi cepa eee E ener reer RE OTST arena 5 30 Channel Version ccccccecceeccceesceecccsscesscesccescceessees 4 51 Clearing e i E E E E A A 12 Ba I O EE E E E N E E E 4 7 R e eE E E A T E 3 1 Closing E A EEE E EO A 12 0 Uo a anes 6 17 COMI Device nui cece cceccscccsscesccesceesseesscescceessees 2 15 COMI User Pro crams cicsnccesssincsatensessssainaveatacsnedacanceces 3 23 COM2 Device ou cece cceccsscccsscesscescceccesscesscescceeesees 2 15 COM2 User Program scan oscssanneaccsansneansnabncarnraantenaneons 3 23 Comm Boarder 2 26 Comm POTS siirisiirsircriivesreriaeuticihuns 2 15 2 19 2 21 2 22 Diagnostics ROC800 SerieS seceeeseeeeeeeeees 2 33 GOCE A EEA A A A T 2 25 Modbus Host Parameters ec seco eee 2 27 8 32 Mode ireren AAEE 2 28 ROC800 Series amp FloBoss 100 Series 2 11 SRBX Or RB X i a 2 30 Store amp Forward Tab ROC800 Series and FloBoss A een E A E EE E en 2 32 MO A E E A E EE E E A 2 11 Comm Sia enan A EEEE 4 51 Comm Type ic cetctecsawsvavndasnndensdesaecucceeSdasdavebeasditendwwanets 2 25 Rev Dec 05 Index ROCLINK 800 User Manual Command Library Poleo A A 16 Communciations Power Control ecccccccccccecccecccssccesccesscesceesceeseeees 7 18 Communication Ports on the ROC and Fl
179. abels option buttons and check boxes When used in tabs the captions will appear at the top tab edge Enter the number of Tabs to appear in this tabs element The minimum is 1 and maximum is 8 Enter the Text you desire to appear in a Text box Object Enter a Header to run at the top of the chart This applies only to charts Select a TLP whose value will show in the display This applies to labels text boxes option buttons checkboxes combo boxes and charts Enable the Allow Data Entry This creates a R W field that will allow the user to write parameters values to the ROC or FloBoss This applies to frames text boxes option buttons checkboxes and combo boxes If you select Expression refer to Adding an Expression to a Display Element Select the Alignment of text left right and center This applies only to labels Enter a Mask Value The default is 255 This applies to option buttons and checkboxes Select a Picture to add to your Custom Display Enter a value in the Selected When field It allows you to create a radio button that will be selected when a specified value for that specific TLP is read from the ROC or FloBoss This applies only to Option radio buttons Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter a value in the Checked When field It allows you to create a Check Box that will be selected when a specified value for that specific TLP is read from the ROC or FloBo
180. ability FSTs are programmed and configured using the FST Editor which is embedded in the ROCLINK 800 configuration software An FST defines the Input to Output I O relationships in the Remote Operations Controller ROC or FloBoss through a set of user selected instructions called Functions Functions which define the specific actions to be performed are executed in their specified sequence The Functions are normally executed in top to bottom order however the sequence may be altered by certain decision making functions Functions consist of a Command Argument and optional Label An FST is built from a library of Commands that provide mathematical and logical operations database access operations historical commands testing and branching operations and control related operations The Devices Software and FST Functionality table displays the ROC and FloBoss devices and their FST capabilities Each FST may consist of as many functions as can fit into the memory reserved for the FSTs Reserved memory is pre determined by the ROC or FloBoss with a set amount of Steps allocated for each FST The byte size of an FST displays in the Code Size field on the FST Registers gt Advanced tab Each individual FST in a ROC800 Series unit executes up to Steps in any given 100 mSec interval However it does not guarantee that 10 instructions will execute for a given FST within a 100 mSec interval Factors that affect this include processor load
181. about the International Electrotechnical Commission refer to their website http www iec ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers The Open System Interconnection OSI reference model and an international standard for the organization of local area networks LANs established by the International Standards Organization ISO and the IEEE For more information refer to the IEEE website http www ieee org IMV Integral Multiplier Value Used in AGA3 calculations Input Analog or Digital input a bit to be read Input Register Input numeric value to be read IRQ Interrupt Request Hardware address oriented ISO International Standards Organization For more information refer to the ISO website http www iso ch IV Integral Value L LCD Liquid Crystal Display Display only device used for reading data LED Light emitting diode Logical Number The Point Numbers used by ROC and ROC Plus Protocol for I O Point Types are based on a physical input or output with a terminal location the point numbers for all other Point Types are logical and are simply numbered in sequence LOI Local Operator Interface Local Port Refers to the serial EIA 232 RS 232 port on the ROC or FloBoss through which local communications are established typically for configuration software running on a PC LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check error checking M N MAC Media Access Control Address is a hardware address
182. against a set of discrete inputs Rev Dec 05 Glossary G 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Deadband A value that is a zone above the low limits and below the high limits The purpose of the Deadband is to prevent a value such as an alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the specified limit This also prevents the logs or data storage location from being over filled with data Device Instrument for a specific purpose and generally refers to a ROC or FloBoss unit Device Directory When ROCLINK 800 software opens the Device Directory appears Also referred to as the Communication Directory Tree it provides a hierarchy tree style means of navigating through the PC Comm Ports and the ROC Comm Ports setup screens DI Discrete Input DO Discrete Output Download To send data a file or a program to the ROC or FloBoss unit DP Differential Pressure Duty Cycle Proportion of time during a cycle that a device is activated A short duty cycle conserves power for I O channels radios and such DVS Dual Variable Sensor The DVS provides differential pressure and static pressure inputs to the FloBoss 100 Series for orifice flow calculation E EFM Electronic Flow Metering or Measurement EIA 232 Serial Communications Protocol using three or more signal lines intended for short distances Also referred to as the RS 232 standard EIA 422 Serial Communications Protocol using four signal
183. alibrating or verifying Set Zero Point N otPresent Dead Weight T ester Value Live Reading 0 0 l Set Zero Figure 10 6 Set Zero Calibration FloBoss 100 Series Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Set Zero Proirt Fixed AH Deadweight T ester Value i og Live Reading 0 0000 Deviation 00 000 z Set Zero 7 Cancel Figure 10 7 Set Zero Calibration ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 2 Compare the Dead Weight or Tester Value with the Live Reading If the value is too far out of tolerance perform calibration for the input 3 Click the Set Zero button ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 devices display Action Describes the type of Action Possible Actions are Verify Set Zero Set Span Set Mid 1 Set Mid 2 and Set Mid 3 Entry Expected or desired value This is the entered Dead Weight Tester value for point being verified calibrated Reading The actual Live Reading value read from the sensor or AI point Deviation Difference between expected or entered value and live reading Deviation Entry Reading Deviation Deviation as percent of range Deviation Deviation Span EU Zero EU x 100 Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 10 2 3 Set Span Calibration Calibrate the Span value 100 of range for Differential Pressure orifice only Static Pressure or Temperature The Point field displays th
184. alue and the Parameter will be 17 If the Point Type is any other type a span will not be available z The ROC Point Type and Parameter listed for this entry contains a 3 byte value that is the Point Type Point Number and Parameter to use for the temperature value If the Point Type of the temperature input is MVS 108 Analog Input 103 or RTD 106 the temperature zero and span will be the same Point Type and Point Number as the temperature value and the Parameters will be as follows Point Zero Span Type Parameter Parameter VVS 108 AIN 109 aon o o Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 24 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 7 4 3 PGAS Alarm Files ARM All alarms in the Alarm Log that are related in anyway to a Meter Run are included in the PGAS ARM file These alarms include High Low and No Flow alarms for Meter Run and Station Flows Low Low Low High High High Rate Manual Mode and Point Fail alarms for points configured as inputs to meter points including communication alarms for an MVS points configured as inputs to a meter point Station alarms duplicate for each Meter included in the Station Column Name Data Type 1 METER_ID char 16 Identification number for the measurement point in the field Tag of the orifice or turbine point associated with the alarm ALARM_DATE Date and time the alarm occurred in mm dd yyyy hh mm ss format 3 PRIORITY LEVEL U8 This represents the importance of the event 0
185. am Administrator ROCLINK 800 User Manual The User Program Administrator allows you to download extended functions and applications to a ROC or FloBoss Select Utilities gt User Program Administrator User Program Administrator Device User Program Environment Used Free S916 16564 400704 2179072 45566 534016 SRAM DRAM FLASH User Programs Installed in Device LevelSensorlF Ao Program Ao Program Ao Program Ao Program No Program Mo Program Mo Program Hame Displays Created Version Handle 2 4 4 z 6 f g Entry Pomt 025E 3408 Clear Start Stop Status Running Download User Program File Library Version 24 2 LevelS ensorlF ro 04022003 14 22 05 1 00 Library Yersion 15 0 DRAAM Used 94208 FLASH Used 33134 Restart Counter 0 Reset Counter fe w TawnrFishersUser ProgrameslevelSensorlF tar Browse Status Download amp Start Download Figure 7 13 User Program Administrator ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 1 22 ROCLINK 800 User Manual User Program Administrator User Programe Installed in Device User Program Name and Version DO O S hatus Code Data Start Addr Start Addr End Addr End Adar Memory Usage Segment 12345 6 8 91011 121314151617 1819 20 Code 0790000 OOOOOO0 Data Ik45C000 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0O000 O Unused O Used B Used by Selected Program Download Us
186. and to retrieve the appropriate flow dependency and flow weighting factors This also allows the Station to inform the History Segment that a configuration Parameter has changed and therefore periodic values need to be logged per API Section 21 1 The maximum number of 200 points is based on 60 minute values 840 periodic values logged hourly 35 days X 24 hours per day and 35 daily values for a total of 187 000 history values Each Segment also has storage allotted for the time stamp values with a default of 935 time stamps per Segment 60 minute times stamps 840 periodic time stamps 35 daily time stamps x 11 Segments for a total of 10 285 time stamp values The 197 285 Available Space shown on the ROCLINK 800 History Segment Configuration screen indicates the total of history and time stamp values Space Allocated Number of Points 1 x Minute Entries Periodic Entries Daily Entries The Configure gt History Segments option allows you to setup the division of points among the History Segments through 10 and the general History Segment It also allows you to assign the number and frequency of periodic logs the number of daily logs and the contract hour for each Segment In addition you can enable or disable logging and force the logging of a daily value on a per Segment basis Once the History Segment has been configured you may configure the points in each Segment Note In the ROC800 Series the required points for A
187. ank The PGAS system does not support Stations All Gas Quality data is part of the Station point in the ROC all ANA files duplicate for each Meter Run in the Station the only difference being the METER_IDs Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 26 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 7 4 5 PGAS Volume Files VOL The PGAS VOL file contains the hourly volume data related to a Meter Run including the Meter Run ID report information general Meter Flow Parameters and Calculated Factors The Archive Type and TLP of the History Points expected for the hourly volume report display History Configuration for Orifice Meter Archive Type Averaging Rate Type Point Type Flowing Minutes Totalize 134 None 0 Orifice Values 114 Minutes Accumulated 28 Pressure 1 113 ae eee pe Formulaic 2 113 PR lia ce 113 oe re 4 113 1 113 ae eee Formulaic 2 113 O Teup e 113 L e eee re 4 113 1 113 eae keee pe Formulaic 2 113 a o aal a 113 OS ara e 4 113 Extension 1 OO i ae Formulaic 2 ee 114 4 Average 128 Flow Weighted Linear 3 Orifice Values 114 Pressure Extension 4 114 4 i Average 128 Flow Weighted Formulaic Orifice Values 4 Average 128 Flow Dependent Linear Orifice Values 114 Multiplier Value 1 Average 128 Flow Dependent Orifice Values 114 Multiplier Value Formulaic 2 12 a Average 128 Flow Weighted Linear
188. ar in your hardware configuration and for control elements PID FST and such that do not apply to your application Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 14 1 7 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Configuration Checklist ROC800 Series For a ROC800 Series unit gt gt gt OH gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt ROC menu gt ROCLINK 800 Security logon Device Directory gt Comm Port gt Properties PC communication configurations ROC menu gt Security User List and Comm Port Security ROC menu gt Clock ROC menu gt Information system variables Utilities menu gt License Key Administrator for user programs DS800 programs and AGA Meter Runs Meter menu gt Setup gt Station for English or Metric Unit selection ROC menu gt Comm Ports ROC communication configurations Configure menu gt I O menu gt AI AO DI DO PI HART MVS RTD and T C Meter menu gt Station Configuration Meter menu gt Orifice or Turbine Meter Setup Configure menu gt History Segments and History Points history database Configure menu gt Control menu gt PID Loop Configure menu gt Radio Power Control for communications sleep mode Utilities menu gt FST Editor View menu gt Display gt New or from File for custom PC displays Utilities menu gt Keypad Display for ROC Keypad Display ROC menu gt Flags for saving and system variables to Flash memory Rev Dec 05 ROC
189. are unable to establish a connection between ROCLINK 800 software and the ROC800 Series unit on the Ethernet port verify that the PC is able to ping the ROC 1 Launch the DOS command prompt and write a command to ping the ROC at its IP Address For example C gt ping 155 177 78 111 2 If the Ping Statistics Reply is similar to Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 lt 0 loss gt then the PC and ROC are connecting You may need to alter the Internet communications setting in ROCLINK 800 software Verify all parameters on the pertinent screens Refer to Configuring TCP IP Communications on the Ethernet Port ROC800 Series 3 If the Ping Statistics Reply is similar to Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 lt 100 loss gt then the PC and ROC are not connecting You will need to review your network your physical connection your router and your PC Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 39 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 9 4 Communications Monitor Select Utilities gt Communications Monitor and perform an operation to displays the data bytes in hexadecimal format sent and received from the ROCLINK 800 software during that operation Bytes sent are shown in black bytes received are shown in red Data received since the last good response and before a request are shown in aqua Right click on the display to Copy highlighted data Clear All data or Unselect Copied data can be p
190. are updated based on their individual Scan Periods and all Discrete Inputs are scanned on a per module basis For a ROC300 Series or a FloBoss 407 the minimum Scan Period is 0 05 50 milliseconds Status indicates the state of the Discrete Input Off normally indicates that the input is Off or that a switch is open On normally indicates that the input is On or that a switch 1s closed For a ROC800 Series Physical Status indicates the state of the hardware Off normally indicates that a switch is open On normally indicates that a switch is closed This may be different from the Status if Inverting or Latching is in effect Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Select the DIN Type as Standard Time Duration TDI or Latched Select Standard if you want the Discrete Input status to follow the actual field input Select Latched if you want the Discrete Input status on an active transition of the input from Off to On to change to On and remain in that state until it is cleared To be cleared the Status parameter must be changed to the Off state either by the software or manually If the DI has the Input Inverted field set the field input is inverted in the Status field Status latches on a physical change from On to Off Select Time Duration TDI FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series if you want the Discrete Input to function as a Timed Discrete Input For Timed Discrete Inputs the time t
191. arming High Alarm 0000 0 MCF Aday ee Disabled Low Alarm 1000 0 MCF day C Alarm on YolurneD ay r Pn Alarm Deadband MCF day C Alam on Wolumer Hour C Alarm on Mass Hour RE W On Alarm Set On Alarm Clear Update y OK A Cancel i Apply Figure 5 22 Meter Alarms ROCS amp 00 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 35 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Meter Setup Meter Number 1 Meter 1 Meter Tag Meter HI General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Sampler Instrument Calib Alarms Flow Alarms Low Alarm 1000 0 MCF day High Alarm i 0000 0 MCF day RBs Alarming C Disabled On Alarm Set On Alarm Clear C Dn Alarm Set and Clear 2 Update y OF A Cancel i Apply Figure 5 23 Meter Alarms FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 ROC300 Series You can either enable or disable alarming for each meter run or Station in a ROC800 Series Alarms can be configured for the individual Meter Runs and or the Stations generating meter specific and or Station wide alarm conditions If you enable alarms the alarms can be configured using the Alarms tab and are logged to the Alarm Log To conserve log space alarms should be enabled only when necessary If you disable alarms no alarm generates for this point regardless of the Alarm configuration Alarm conditions display in the Active Alarms fields located in the Meter Setup General tab or the ROC800 Series Station Conf
192. arting History Index value for a specific day Using the DIS History Index value use the DHV command to locate the Daily History Value To find specific data in history such as the data entered at 9 00 AM yesterday first use the Starting Periodic Index PIS command to find the starting History Index value for yesterday s date and then count forward nine to acquire the History Index value for 9 00 AM Use this new History Index with the Periodic History Value PHV command to locate the data Name Description Arguments Results DHV Daily History Value 1 History Segment History Point Stores value in RR 2 DB Point or Constant History Halts on invalid History Index Index DHT Daily History Time Stamp 1 History Segment History Point Stores value in RR 2 DB Point or Constant History Halts on invalid History Index Index PHV Periodic History Value 1 History Segment History Point Stores value in RR 2 DB Point or Constant History Halts on invalid History Index Index PHT Periodic History Time 1 History Segment History Point Stores value in RR Stamp 2 DB Point or Constant History Halts on invalid History Index Index MHV Minute History Value 1 History Segment History Point Stores value in RR 2 DB Point or Constant History Halts on invalid History Index Index DIS Starting Daily Index 1 History Segment History Point Stores value in RR 2 Month Day Returns 1 if Month Day not found DIN Number o
193. asesavacenosaswnacesanesenstashoadenanedonsaannoessaaesorvaneondesencteensaneinens NOG D aire e EE A T A E E 1 8 EO BOUON oen E E LOS TODI e A E AE E E E NE AA OA EES UOK OS e E RE E E Loo Hpo o e E sen asian E E A E Eon ADO ROCE SOO renare E E Ma Be Na O e E E T Koo LLEBO E 11 0 1 a E A E 16 9 AutoScan Update Internal Opn sesicsscunsasscecorsascanthotmuvaracsswacsseuneavsionwansheteuemsanesvecanesacnemnnans b C ONTICGOURA TONDAS S eorr EEEE E E T 1 14 1 7 1 Configuration Checklist ROC800 Series snssssseoeenssssssssseerssssssssecerrssssssssceeesssssssseeeees 1 7 2 Configuration Checklist ROC300 Series nnsssssooeenssssssseserersssssssecerrssssssseeeerssssssseeeeres 1 7 3 Configuration Checklist FloBoss 100 SerieS cc cccccccccccccsesssseseeceeeeeeeaeeesseeeeeeeeeeeaeeesees 1 7 4 Configuration Checklist PIO BOSS 407 sic tessaieorsacsarhordsesesssacanideduestossacsaatectineesaaemncecdeontn L79 DOC Ae oC Oil SUT ALO Mh icaeaaec st onsiwiernnteciesouesatacheaeuta E E e EE 1 8 CREATING A NEW CONFIGURATION FILE ccccsscccccsessccccceseccceesecccaueeeceeeueeceseueeeceesaeecceseneeeeeeas LSA Opomin AC OMS Ui AIO T eiee ane E E 18 2 CONTOUR Tree VNC sisrpciescieseinna p coemb indus cttape ssstuiieeseaebioaseays Section 2 Configuring Communications and Security sssscssscccccsssssssssssscees pe Me gt E E dle aera G13 hm 1D E eee me nn E E E E nen ee ener ee 2 ROCEINT GOO SE CURIE Y ose
194. asted in a file for analyzing wa ROCLIMK 800 Communications Monitor le File Edit View BOC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help al WH it o4 ORE 2 e z 20 20 20 20 z 20 20 O1 00 00 80 oo 00 00 CE 42 00 00 CS 42 00 00 CE 00 00 0 Cl oO 00 20 Cl OO 00 DC 4z oo ad 65 9B Figure 2 24 Communications Monitor Example ROCS800 Series 2 9 5 Disconnecting from a ROC or FloBoss To disconnect an on line connection close the screen by clicking the lower of the two Close buttons or select File gt Close This automatically closes the connection wan ROCLINE 800 Device Directory St File Edit View AOC Configure Meter Utilities Tools window Help Dee tee Slee Ve Na EIS e Oe Fla Direct Connect Be ROC Root E g ROC COMM oo ROC COMM Modem ROC Eg Ethernet ROC E New Group E o Figure 2 25 Device Directory Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 40 ROCLINK 800 User Manual SECTION 3 CONFIGURING SYSTEM PARAMETERS This section describes how to set system preferences within the ROC or FloBoss such as the Clock Security System Information and License Keys In this Chapter Section Page 3 1 Setting the COCK cccccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseececcecsssssssssssussusnunssssessssseseeeesssssssssssssinussssesseeeeeeeeeeeee 32 Coni ounn We Vice M Or mia OU sssini E E B 2 3 3 Con purine System Flai S ecrasiiicrononii nienean r i e AR E R ER rA E EEE A EER EEEa 3 15
195. ata and stores the data in TLP locations within the ROC800 Series The TLPs can be virtually any location with in the ROC such as Softpoints FST Registers User Program TLPs and point types AGA or I O You can map Modbus Registers to any TLP with the correct data types and conversions configurations The ROC800 Series can also send commands to set outputs and write data to a slave device Modbus Host in the ROC800 Series is only supported by COMM2 COMM3 COMM4 and COMMS Modbus Host is not supported on the Ethernet port COMM_1 or on the LOI Local Port In slave mode the data link between the host device and the ROC800 Series can use any of the communications ports Serial ports and a communications port with a dialup modem card installed can only be designated to switch between ROC or Modbus slave The Ethernet port can always recognize Modbus messages Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Note For more information about Modbus communications on the Ethernet port refer to Configuring TCP IP Communications on the Ethernet Port ROC800 Series Any serial or modem communications port configured with a Port Owner of ROC Plus Protocol Modbus Slave will automatically determine if the incoming communication request is in ROC protocol or Modbus protocol The ROC responds using the same protocol as the incoming request The Ethernet communications port will automatically determine if the incoming communica
196. atacntasadvounsiescnnincsiseientsentees 11 4 Update Pir iw at since cscsssssnenssctcentnrecasieedcntssetesmanicentxes 11 1 MS ee A ate sacceme E nomenon cantnes 5 31 Use eee Wid aks 02 ce ee eee 4 25 E S EA is roe gue oasis seen ors etc E E 5 8 User Correction Factor seceeeeeece eee 5 29 5 34 5 35 MG AU E sarc ose A susie toutes te acct ey aos sents tsceeee dunes 7 25 Me I E AE E E Bacto se eae scandens 1 5 2 5 NY SCE TET AC E E E E 1 6 User Program 1 to 8 cccccccccccccccccceeeessssssseeeeeeeeeeees 2 26 User Program Admimistrator ccc sssssseseseeeeeeeees 7 22 De PS wcxantenotcecclaee edn aseuwateehan hueentee anise gsiaaeaeeyedunee 7 24 User Programs FTA S pss tane sansa hue tstcaie A E T 3 22 3 23 Users Group Summary cccceeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Utilities Communications Monitor ccceeeecceecceeeeeeeeeee 2 40 Convert EFM File wu cece cccccseccessceeeseeeesees 6 19 FST Editor eseese nno T A 5 Keypad Display Editor cccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 16 License Key Administrator cccccceesseeeeeeeees 2 13 ROCLINK 800 cece eeecccseccceesccessccescsceseseeeecs 2 5 Update Firmware cccsseeceeeeeeeeeeeees 11 4 12 17 User Program Admimistrator ccccccceessseeeeeeees 7 22 V Valid Receive Counters cccccccccceccsecceesceesceeeseeeees 2 33 Valid Receive Ctr wc ccc cecccsccceeccessccesccesceeeseuecss 2 26 Be 10 oe A
197. ater of the two outputs is used to adjust the control Output Select the type of Output Analog The PID output is written to the assigned Analog Output point EU value Discrete The PID output is written to the assigned DO Open point EU value if the change in output is positive and is written to the assigned DO Close Point EU value if the change in output is negative The Discrete Outputs must be configured as Timed Duration Outputs DOUT Set Scanning FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units to Enabled or Disabled to control the ON and OFF status for scanning the PID loop If Off no new output is calculated and no update is sent to the output point Select the PID Mode Disabled ROC800 Series No loops are active and the PID output parameter is not written to the assigned control output e Manual No loops are active and the PID output parameter is written to the assigned control output allowing you to adjust the output as required Auto PID loops are active as configured under Control Type You enter the Setpoint of the loops Any change in the calculated output is automatically sent to the configured output point Remote SP ROC800 Series PID loops are active as configured under Control Type The Setpoint of the loops are read from the Setpoint I O Definition Loop Status displays Primary or Override to indicate which loop is currently selected or disabled if the loop is in Di
198. atic factor will be used The K factor is used in the flow calculations to convert raw pulses to either Volume or Mass This conversion may vary with flow rate and Variable K Factors allow you to specify flow rates as indicated by Frequency The K Factor values cannot be less than zero Up to twelve K Factor and Frequency values can be entered When the value of the uncorrected volume input is less than or equal to the Low Flow Cutoff value ROC800 Series the calculated flow is set equal to zero A No Flow alarm is recorded in the Alarm Log if Alarming is Enabled The units are MCF Day 1000 cubic feet per day and the Metric units are kM Day 1000 cubic meters per day This parameter is only used if the uncorrected volume input selected is NOT a pulse input point type Enter the No Flow Time ROC800 Series This is the amount of time without a pulse after which the ROC declares a No Flow condition The flow cutoff is the analog signal lower limit below this limit a no flow condition exists When the Speed of Sound ROC800 Series calculation is Enabled the Speed of Sound is calculated per AGA1O feet per second or meter per second based on the Pressure Temperature and Gas Composition AGA8 Detail Method must be selected and a full Gas Composition entered to calculate the Speed of Sound For diagnostic purposes the measures Speed of Sound may be read through a serial connection to an ultrasonic flow meter and stored under the measured Spee
199. ations Port Device Group The Group in which the ROC or FloBoss is associated Device Address The Address of the specific ROC or FloBoss with which you desire to communicate If you are connected to a multi drop series of devices enter the Device Address and Device Group of the specific Device to which you will talk Note If the PC that is running ROCLINK 800 software is connected directly to the LOI Local Port on the device ROCLINK 800 makes a request to Device Group of 240 and Device Address of 240 The Local Port of a device always responds to a request for Address 240 Group 240 no matter what Device Address and Device Group is configured in the device 1f the LOI Security is valid Note For communications to any port on the ROC or FloBoss other than the Local Port the Device Address and Device Group in the ROCLINK Communications Parameters window determines which device will be contacted The Device Address and Group must match the Device Address and Group in the ROC gt Information screen Changing the Device Address and Group on the ROCLINK 800 Communications Parameters window will cause the PC to communicate with a different device Note When using a FloBoss 100 Series device the default Device Group of 240 and Device Address of 240 allows communications to any Comm Port Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 18 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Host Address The PC has a default value of Address
200. ay be Enabled or Disabled separately and you can select the Access Level Device Security Security on LOI ni User ID User Access g Cisseles ME fed S E he Secunity on COM User ID f Disabled f Eed Update yY OK 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 2 5 Device Security Users ROC300 Series User Table Select an Operator ID in the table to set each individual s security If you wish to create a user click on an empty cell in the table The Device Security dialog box appears Refer to Device Security To delete an operator entry from the table highlight a cell in that line When the Device Security dialog box appears click the Remove button Operator ID Enter the three alphanumeric characters for the Operator ID which is typically the initials of the person who operates the device through that communications port Each Operator ID must be unique The Operator ID is case sensitive Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Password Enter the four numeric characters between 0000 and 9999 for the Password Users can have the same Password Access Level 0 is the lowest Access Level and allows access to the fewest number of screens 5 is the highest Access Level and permits access to all screens Each Access Level permits access to screens at that level and any inherited from lower access levels For example the users with Access Level 3 have access to
201. be set to User so that the density values can be entered The Station Values displays flow rates and accumulations that represent the summation of all the Meter Runs in the Station Flow Rate Volume flow rate at base condition in MCF day or kM day Energy Rate Energy rate at base conditions in mmBtu day or GJ day Mass Rate Mass rate conditions in Mlb day or Tonnes day Flow Today Total accumulation of flow for the current contract day in MCF or kM Energy Today Total accumulation of energy for the current contract day in mmBtu or GJ Mass Today Total mass for the day in Mlb or Tonnes Zs Represents the compressibility at standard conditions Zb Represents the compressibility at base conditions Base Density Represents the density of the measured fluid at base conditions in lbm ft3 or kg m3 Flow Yesterday Total accumulation of flow for the previous contract day in MMCF or kM3 Energy Yesterday Total accumulation of energy for the previous contract day in MMBTU or GJ Mass Yesterday Total accumulation of mass for the previous contract day in Mlb or Tonnes Current alarm conditions display in the Active Alarms fields located at the bottom of the General tab Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 2 2 Station Gas Quality ROC800 Series To configure a Station select a Station icon in the Configuration Tree menu or select Meter gt Setup gt Stations The Gas Quality tab
202. ble is controlled Select the input point defined as the Process Variable for the Primary loop of the PID algorithm The Value is used for comparison to the Setpoint Select the Primary Switch PV ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 input point assigned for comparison with the Primary Variable This value determines when switchover to the Override Control loop occurs Enter a Switch to Override if ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Direction entered to be compared with the assigned input Override Switch PV to determine when switchover to the Primary Control loop occurs The type of comparison is gt greater than or lt less than Use the PID Loop Override fields to setup the Override PID Loop s configuration For a ROC800 Series or FloBoss 100 Series select an input or enter a Setpoint around which the Override Process Variable is controlled Fora ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 enter a Setpoint around which the Override Process Variable is controlled Select the input point defined as the Process Variable for the Override loop of the PID algorithm The Process Variable is used for comparison to the Setpoint Select the Override Primary PV ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 input point assigned for comparison with the Override Switch Setpoint This value determines when switchover to the Primary Control loop occurs Enter a Switch to Override if ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 as the direction the entered Switch to Primary Setpoint
203. bled Start Time HH Mik 9999 9999 9999 On Time Secs 0 000 0 000 0 000 Off Time Secs 0 000 0 000 0 000 Hold Time 10 000 Secs On Counter 85 Secs Low Battery Shutoff 11 0 Wols Off Counter oO Secs Low Batten Deadband hoo o Walks Power Timer ooo Secs Remaining Discrete Output Undefined By Copy EA Paste 2 Update y OF 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 7 11 Radio Power Control ROC 800 Series During the ON time The power output DO is switched to ON DTR signal for the Comm Port is activated Communications may occur During the OFF time The power output DO is set to OFF DTR signal for the Comm Port is in activated gt gt Communications may not occur If communications occur during the ON time the ON time is extended by the Hold Time The DO and DTR single remains ON and receive interrupts remain enabled for the duration of the Hold Time Note The FloBoss 100 Series units use the Power on the terminal block using LOI Power 3 3 volts and COM2 Power 6 2 volts When the Radio Power Control parameter is Enabled radio power cycling is activated The Low Battery Shutoff parameter allows power cycling to be automatically disabled whenever the input voltage to the ROC or FloBoss falls below the specified threshold To use Radio Power Control select Configure gt Radio Power Control After configuring the Radio Control points click Apply Save the configuration to programmable memo
204. can be configured for detailed EFM Reporting Refer Table 6 1 Optional History Configuration per Meter Run on page 6 14 For a ROC800 Series all History Points for a Station and the Meter Runs that belong in that Station must reside in the same History Segment The order or database number of these History Points is not critical the EFM Reports utility will search for them The following table shows how the History Points must be configured for each Meter Run depending on whether it is AGA3 or AGA7 metered Table 6 1 Optional History Configuration per Meter Run Description Parameter Description Parameter Description Parameter Specific Gravity SPGR C2H6 Ethane ETHANE C7H16 n Heptane NHEPTA Heating Value GASHV C3H8 Propane PROPAN C8H18 n Octane NOCTAN N2 Nitrogen NITROG C4H10 n Butane NBUTAN C9H20 n Nonane NNONAN CO2 Car Diox CARBDI C4H10 i Butane IBUTAN C10H22 n Decane NDECAN H2S Hyd Sf HYDSUL C5H12 n Pentane NPENTA O2 Oxygen OXYGEN H2O Water WATER C5H12 i Pentane IPENTA CO Car Monoxide CARBMO He Helium HELIUM C6H14 n Hexane NHEXAN H2 Hydrogen HYDROG CH4 Methane METHAN All points in this table are for both AGA3 and AGA7 AGA Flow Parameters type and Average Archive Type Table 6 2 Orifice EFM History Point for ROC800 Series Archive Type Point Type Description ORFV Orifice Meter Run MINACC Minutes Values Accumulated Flowing Minutes vg Flo
205. cccccccssssssccccccesssssccccsees Me UPDATE URINE ARE aparece mas dausne E E E E 11 1 1 Update Firmware I O Termination Board ccccccccccccccesssseeeeceeeeeeeaaeeeseeceseeeeaeeeeees 11 1 2 Update Firmware Keypad Display ROC800 Series 11 2 UPGRADE HARDWARE FLOBOSS 1OO SERIES ccccccseccsecccssccecccucsesceescceseceescseseceeseeseseuees ML Ae ET AINE a cee tesa cencseteeteaceseesanesesaaesieanece lt oeeeaaice cossecenaueszaletseacienecoseteaigtcneseces dea seater E Rev Dec 05 Table of Contents vil ROCLINK 800 User Manual Section 12 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring cccccssssssscccccccccccsssscesees 1 PRINT CON IGURA Cremer eee rere ey ee eer eee rere rere ree Oe VEO OR srs cts cere tes ssc otseece E att caer danse saceeetacetaa the E E 12 3 LCD DISPLAY CONFIGURATION ROC300 SERIES cccesssssccecssssseceeseessseseessesssseseeesoesseaeeese 12 5 12 4 LCD USER LIST FLOBOSS 100 SERIES AND FLOBOSS 407 ccccccccccccceccseccceecceesceseceeeseensseeeees 1S ae 0 2 EN 2 0 oer ee ee ee BZ SOS OI DS PLAYS enera E A E E E E E 12 6 1 Custom Displays New Display siccccsscvstncccudawonesancin tsidawesnntenoewianeiadauslerssianshcncslevsswaun 120 2 Custom Displays lt ODJECIS arenccen ac saria ean deacts oacaacieen EE EEEO 12 6 3 Custom Displays Object Properties verexcessiesasexendncteoresaaseendneleeuiosansmerteedtemnaaseadedeewes 12 6 4 Editing a Custom Display From a File sssnnn
206. cccessssseeccceeeeeeesesecceeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenses 6 2 MODBUS CONFIGURATION HISTORY ecesencssazsteessniaceczecesescnzaasctesextedaavssnndsesesedoscvecaeceusveneusesubaverevaca 8 2 1 Modbus Configuration History Access Registers FloBoss 100 Series 8 3 MODBUS EVENTS AND ALARMS FUNCTIONALITY cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeessescaaeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas S291 Modb s Events and Alarms KR OCSO0 SeMES tsidscucnsatenedaaseronnensetadantececsasesrectaceaevendoutsier 8 14 8 3 2 Reading Modbus Events and Alarms Register cecccccccccccceeesesseeecceeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeeeeaaas 8 3 3 Acknowledging Modbus Events and Alarms cece eeeeeessseeeeceeessseeeeecesesaeeeeeeeessaaeeees 8 16 8 4 MODBUS REGISTERS ROC800 SERIES AND FLOBOSS 1LOO SERIES cccceeessseeeseeessseeeeeeeens 8 18 8 4 1 Modbus Conversion ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series wo ccc cceeeseeeceeeeeees 8 5 MODBUS MASTER TABLE ROCS800 SERIES cccccccccsccceescceeccesccescseescceusseesceenceeseseeseessseseseuncs 8 6 MODBUS MASTER MODEM ROCS800 SERIES cccccseccescccsscceeccescceusccesccessceesceeseseeeseessseeseuecs 8 7 MODBUS HOST PARAMETERS FLOBOSS 407 AND ROC300 SERIES cccccceecceeesceesceesseeeseeues Section 9 Saving and Retrieving Configurations FL SAVNCAROCU PREIE pee ee enn Oe ee ea U2 SAVING A CONFIGURATION ve sscsccencseaniwasesecdguc scansvessieiesabevenednss eabeathsveswayesis EE ENEN KERESE EO 9 5 DOWNLOADING
207. cceleration The units of measurement are in ft sec or M sec If entered the value must be greater than zero Enter the flow measurement Base Pressure specified in the gas contract The pressure units are in PSIA or kPa for Metric Enter the flow measurement Base Temperature specified in the gas contract The temperature units are in degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius Enter the Elevation or altitude of the metering location The units are in feet or meters Enter the geographic Latitude of the metering location The units are in degrees and minutes separated by a decimal point For example 46 15 Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 8 ROCLINK 800 User Manual If Heavy Gas Option was enabled on the Gas Quality tab the mole percentages of Heavy Gas Distribution hydrocarbons Hexane and heavier should be entered here The mole percentages in the Heavy Gas Distribution fields must equal 100 If the Total of the distribution among the 5 heavier components is less than 100 hexane is increased to make the total add up to 100 If the Total of the distribution is greater than 100 Decane is reduced first then Nonane then octane then Heptane and then hexane until the total is equal to 100 5 2 4 Station Alarms ROC800 Series To configure a Station select a Station icon in the Configuration Tree menu or select Meter gt Setup gt Stations The Alarms tab allows you to configure Station wide alarming paramet
208. ccuriulateH our ERM 1 MINT Dy Awg Linear Undefined Undefined Undefined 1 12 13 14 15 Undefined Undefined jg Update yY OK Cancel Apply Figure 6 8 Configure gt History Points FloBoss 100 Series O oo o om ee poo a 2i m Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 10 ROCLINK 800 User Manual History Setup Archive Type Archive Point Totalize ERM 1 MINTO z Average FL 1 CURDP Average FL 1 CURFP Average FL 1 CUR TMP F Average La 1 TATE MY Average Accumulate Accumulate FL 1 ENERGY 3 FST Data FsTRS ED 10 11 12 13 14 15 J E Update ok X Cancel t A Figure 6 9 Configure gt History Points FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series History Segment Point Configuration General Seq 1 Seg 2 Seg3 Seq 4 Seg5 Seq 6 Sea Seq 8 Seg 4 Seq 10 Point Archive Type Archive Point Point Tag User Description Current Value Last Daily Value 1 Avg Linear HART 4 1 EU 0 0 0 0 Avg Flow Weighted Linear UDP631 YESOILPO 177 7 Undefined 8 Undefined 9 Undefined 10 Undefined 11 Undefined 12 Undefined 13 Undefined 14 Undetined Undefined 2 3 4 Undefined 5 E uol K Cancel Apply Figure 6 10 Configure gt History Points ROC800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 11 ROCLINK 800 Us
209. ce permanently You can save the FST to a file before you erase the Workspace Cut Copy and Paste function are available using lt Ctrl X gt lt Ctrl C gt and lt Ctrl V gt You can copy fields entire Steps or blocks of Steps The FST Editor will not insert but will override existing fields Two other modes of operation are available for the FST Editor Monitor and Trace Monitor mode allows for continual viewing of the present contents of the FST structure in the device as it is modified Trace mode allows you to examine execution of an FST one STEP at a time for debugging purposes A 5 2 1 Troubleshooting an FST An execution error is an error that will cause the stopping of an FST by the ROC or FloBoss An execution error occurs when the FST references a Point Number that has been removed or changed If a compile error occurs during the compile process Build gt Compile the Output field lists the error type and the cell in question turns red Execution errors are caused by changes in the ROC or FloBoss configuration after the download of an FST This may include removal of I O or other logical points used by the FST In Monitor mode execution errors are indicated through the Run Flag Status RF 0 FST is not running All devices 1 FST is running All devices 2 Restart from beginning ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 only 5 Indicates FST has shut down due to an invalid point reference All devices
210. cececececececececscscseseseseeees Dom COUNTRY PORES CCC Td ea a EA AE E E A 2 7 2 Comm Ports Modbus Host Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series 0 0 00 Dh COTM ORES INI O GCN pics 5553p ssctn ceases oasteaseian osase ess ate concn sstauessaes A GG AE Comm Pots SRBA Or Ac gt enn ee er 2 5 Comm Ports Store amp Forward ROC800 Series and FloBoss 407 cece cece wees 2 7 6 Comm Ports Diagnostics ROC800 Series 0 0 eeeeeeecccccececeeeeeseecceeeeceaeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeaeesees 2 7 7 Configuring TCP IP Communications on the Ethernet Port ROC800 Series 2 8 CONNECTING TO A ROC OR FLOBOSS sssenooseenesseenesseeressecrsssecesssecessseerossereosseeeosseceosseeeesseeeosseeee gt ZSA DE E E e A E A E E E A 2 8 2 Local Operator Interface LOI Local Port scisesaziccdsessextatsasdecdsereossacsasteciiceteaamancecdeones De COE e E E E E A 284 Successi LOSI eeren aE E E T E R E TER 2 9 TROUBLESHOOTING OMMIU NIC A TION Sse censusacecasteuceosseatecas eu eeseusececasteureesssaetecaqeu wees suet esasie e 2 9 1 Troubleshooting Connection Errors ccccccccccccceessssseecceceeeeaaessseeecceeeeeeaaeeseeeceeeeeeeaaaesees 2 9 2 Troubleshooting ROCLINK 800 Communications c cc ceseeeeseeeeeeececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeees 2 9 3 Troubleshooting TCP IP Connections cccccccccsssssesseeccccccceeaeesesecceeeeeeaaeeseeeeceeeeeeeaaeesess 294 COMMUNIC AOU S MOMOL semseiana Ea OEE OE
211. cee sent as 12345670 places r He eae 3 ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 100000000 0 16 ba lied Pe 3 4 6 16 and converted to a signed 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be p sent as 123456700 places 17 Integer to Float 6 16 17 to 24 are for the FloBoss 100 Series only The Integer to Float Float Scale 1 conversion changes a transmitted integer value to a floating point value 6 146 for the FloBoss The number of the Convert Code specifies which 18 Integer to Float floating point scaling value is to be used for the conversion If no Float Scale 2 fractional part is coming through on conversion from integer to float use 6 16 a float conversion that more closely fits the range of integer to be 19 Integer to Float converted such as float range 0 to 10 instead of 0 to 1000 Float Scale 3 20 Integer to Float 6 16 Float Scale 4 D1 Integer to Float 6 16 Float Scale 5 6 16 99 Integer to Float Float Scale 6 Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 24 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Convert AT Slave i Code Description Function Definition 93 Integer to Float 6 16 Float Scale 7 24 Integer to Float 6 16 Float Scale 8 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 10 0 and 17 Unsigned Long 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be Implied 1 sent as 12 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied
212. ceeeessaaaeeseeeeees 4 10 3 System AI Alarms ROC800 Series sssssseseressssssseceresssssssecceeossssssecceeessssssseeesssssssees 4 11 HART INPUT CONFIGURATION ROC800 SERIES ccccccscccsecccsscceeccescsesceeecceseseesseeseseeeseenssees 4 11 1 HART General ROCSO0O SEriES ccscccscsecvsecsvercvsvevecccescsovecovccosossevsscvsssovescssvcsusccesscoes 4 11 2 HART Advanced ROC S00 Sem enc ccewicennsdaweseadshesdvnsivccegastesnceestessmwabiteucensddeceniesntcsessduaws 4 11 3 HART Device ROC800 SeriteS o oo ccccccsecceeccesecccescessceeeseescceeseesceeseceeseenseueeses 4 12 MVS SENSOR ROC800 SERIES OR FLOBOSS 407 ccccccccceecccseccsesccssceesceesscessseeessessseeeseeeseees TE TN TT OA TT A OTT A OTT OR OTT TR OTT RY OTT RK TT RX TT ISS I I l NO N OINO IIO IION D H C IO IONII D Section 5 Configuring the Meter SetUp sssssssscceccsscccccccssseccecccsseccecccsssccccccssseceeesso IL NPIEROLPUPB A I a E ee eee er eee ener eee ener 5 2 STATION CONFIGURATION ROC800 SERIES ccccccccccsecccesccsccesccesceuecceseceesssessseusceesesesseueseees 5 2 1 Station General ROC800 SerieS oo cece cccsecceeccesecceccenccseccescseseseeeseeeseeseceeseenceuseees 5 2 2 Station Gas Quality G ROCS00 SerreS isis decasevecasacendvesavesianvadadeacedavevenaeacendvenevasseaeteacnenaceciueass 52 Station Advanced ROC S00 SemES saccone rE rniii 5 2 4 Station Alarms ROC800 Seri S
213. ch ROCLINK 800 ROCLINK 800 amp EMERSON Process Management User ID Password OF Cancel Figure l 1 Logon 2 Type in your assigned 3 character identifier in the User ID field and press lt Enter gt or lt Tab gt Note This User ID is case sensitive Your initials are typically your User ID If User IDs have not yet been assigned try using the default User ID of LOI User IDs are assigned by using the ROC gt Security feature in ROCLINK 800 software 3 Type in your assigned 4 digit Password and press lt Enter gt or click OK For added security the software displays an asterisk for each number that you type If Passwords have not yet been assigned use the default Password of 1000 valid with default User ID of LOD ROCLINK 800 software compares the entered User ID and Password to a list of valid ones If the log on is not valid a dialog box appears Click OK and re enter the User ID and Password You can repeat the procedure as many times as needed until you successfully enter a valid User ID and Password To exit from the log on screen press lt Esc gt or click Cancel This aborts ROCLINK 800 software and returns you to the point where you started ROCLINK 800 software Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 6 User Interface Basics Users interact with ROCLINK 800 software using various displays on the computer monitor and the computer keyboard and or
214. ched DI remains in the active state until reset Other parameters can invert the field signal and gather statistical information on the number of transitions and the time accumulated in the on or off state Select Configure gt I O gt DI Points Examine the default settings and adjust the parameters to suit your application on each of the tabs in the order given below 1 The General tab sets the basic parameters for the DI point 2 The Advanced tab lets you configure features such as filtering input inversion and counter values for the Discrete Input 3 The TDI Parameters tab FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series provides additional parameters to specify scaling and engineering unit conversion 4 The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this DI point 5 After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start 4 4 1 DI General Select Configure gt I O gt DI Points The General tab sets the basic parameters for the DI point Discrete Input Discrete Inputs 1 DI Default Tag DI Default General Advanced Alarms Point Humber 6 Module Scan Period 0 05 Seconds Status Physical Status Scanning On C Off ie oO Enabled Disabled DIN Type f Standard C Latched Active Alarms jo EA Paste 2 Update y OK A Cancel l Apply Figure 4 14 Discrete
215. ckups is complete a message appears saying Reconnect to Device Completed You can verify the upgrade on the Other Information or Revision Info tab of the ROC gt Information screen 11 Perform a Cold Start to reload the configuration from Flash memory if it was saved to Flash memory Check the configuration and FSTs and if they are not correct reload them from the disk files created in Step 4 Rev Dec 05 Updates and Changes 11 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 11 1 1 Update Firmware I O Termination Board I O Termination Board allows you to view the currently installed firmware version and download a new Firmware Image Update Firmware Firmware Currently Installed Description I O Card points Fart Number W68156 Revision Rev 1 10 Firmware Image to Download File Hame Browse Status Start Close Figure 11 2 I O Termination Board Firmware Currently Installed Displays the currently installed firmware information Firmware Image to Download I O Termination Board Tab The path and name of the Firmware Image to Download Click the Browse button to locate the Firmware Image Rev Dec 05 Updates and Changes ROCLINK 800 User Manual 11 1 2 Update Firmware Keypad Display ROC800 Series Select Utilities gt Update Firmware Click the Keypad Display tab to upgrade the Firmware associated with the ROC800 Series Keypad Display Update Firmware Firmware Currently Installed Flash Fil
216. configure the number of PIDs and AGAs For a FloBoss 100 Series the Points tab also displays the number of points allocated for Standard History and Extended History on the Configure gt History Points screen You can also configure the number of PIDs and AGAs Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Other Information System Configuration Keypad Display Active Maimun Active Events 450 eter Runs E Alarms rtice moo PIDs 16 Turbine i Stations E fi Samplers E fi FSTs G Update y OK 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 3 7 Information Points ROCS800 Series Device Information Wasimum Achye History Points Pils 2 E Base RAM 15 AGAS fi fi RAM 1 fo RAM 2 0 Update y OK 7 Cancel Apply Figure 3 8 Information Points FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Configuring System Parameters 3 8 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Device Information asimum Active History Points PIDs Standard History 35 AGAS Extended History 4 2 Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 3 9 Information Points FloBoss 100 Series Configuring System Parameters 3 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 3 2 4 Information Other Information Select ROC gt Information The Other Information tab displays information about the firmware boot firmware processor and LCD if pertinent to the type of ROC or FloBoss The fiel
217. control is used By using the FST Editor utility the period in which the data is logged can be placed under FST program control Note Make sure that the History Points for each Meter Run are configured to allow the EFM Report utility to properly access data Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Meter History Setup Meter 1 Meter Tag AGAT Archive Type Archive Point History Point Exponent Flow Minute Accurn ERN 1 MINTE Avg Flow Dependant Forrnulaic FL 1 CURDP Avg Flow Dependant Forrnulaic FL 1 CURFF Avg Flow Dependant Formula FL 1 CUR TMP a a a Avg Flow Dependant Linear 6 a 2 4 4 Avg Flow Dependant Linear Accumulate D ay i Accumulate D ay FLW ENERGY 8 Avg Flow Dependant Linear FSTULRI a Avg Flow Dependant Linear Undefined 0 0 w ok X Cancel Apply Figure 6 5 Meter gt History Setup FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Meter ae as a ae History Setup 1 Totalize ERN 1 MINTD Y E 2 Average FLW CURDP FLAW 1 IMW BMY 9 FST Daa FSTLAS 10 1 12 EE 14 15 J 2 Update Figure 6 6 Configure gt History Points FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Standard Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 4 Configuring History Segments ROC800 Series Select Configure gt History Segments The number of History Points available in each Segment ROC800
218. cssssssessseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 6 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Host Address se orosrcicccinnvdnisnetctemunanea daneneh aneddbnataintewwaraoutend e 2 19 COND aroia aE ET 2 19 Poll Delay crire nre 2 27 Host Address RBX or SRBX asictsseadcecneinegncattateeunmnessdeasitnenninagcs 2 30 Host Group RBX or SRBA axictsdeesecennieagacatindscnnmiess densietacenniwascs 2 30 Hourly valiso EE 3 5 I O AI POINTS co gem crnasdont sraceemeseaddontnstenmansiacseatrretdonasictdontes 4 2 OMIT OUTING oiris aa ES 4 1 Mode e E E E E A 2 26 MIONO ene a A E E E 12 3 DC AMT eroi a E E 3 20 OU D E A A A E N E E 4 1 UY PO o E E E PE A A E E T 1 19 TAC EY iy AN osee sce aaresie E E 2 28 3 7 3 14 TRG KW E sue uuceeteataanne 8 18 TR EOTUA AT OM i cepcce E A A ence eaiie 3 2 Solita 221 ERs eee Ren ete ee en ere mtr rere ee 3 4 LET Ieee ee enemy reece e en mer rrr en tem ne eer et ater ye 3 6 Keypad Display cccccccssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 3 14 Other Information ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 3 10 PODIS sore E 3 7 System Configuration cccccsseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 12 Information Revision MUG iz ps E E E AEE E 3 13 M eee E E E 5 15 Inp t Rate Poiti sesser 7 4 Input Rate Value wo sccsssvncxeacitascaseastccvnediunstebiioneeddudcacenstacts 7 4 HINO US E E E A E E EE E E S 4 1 MEISEL E a A EE E A 13 Insta llati OM ne cccoctetaasanneosenamaessnveahaomatuavansaghoueanossnbeassions 1 2 Integral
219. ct Command required to disconnect the contact to the host Typically this is the command ATHO The Modem Status numerically displays the result code e j 4 ERROR Error in command line Not supported by the FloBoss 100 Series 6 NO DIAL TONE No dial tone detected Not supported by the FloBoss 100 Series 7 BUSY Busy signal detected Not supported by the FloBoss 100 Series 8 NO ANSWER Line not picked up on the called end Not supported by the FloBoss 100 Series 3 NO CARRIER Carrier not detected lost Not supported by the FloBoss 100 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 29 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 4 Comm Ports SRBX or RBX Select ROC gt Comm Ports gt SRBX or RBX tab to configure the Spontaneous Report by Exception alarming features on the ROC or FloBoss Comm Port f Ed Comm Ports 3 COMM Tag COMM2 SAB Mode SAB Host Delay Enabled Address i Delay 1 20 0 Secs Disabled Group o Delay 2 30 0 Secs Delay 3 45 0 Secs SABA Attempts H SRB Attempts HZ SRB s Attempts 3 f Fixed Humber f Fixed Number Fixed Number f Continuous f Continuous C Continuous a z0 a SAB Alarm Indes 0 SRB Status 0 2 Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 2 20 Comm Port SRBX Example ROCS amp 00 Series Enables or Disables SRBX Mode or RBX Mode for Spontaneous Report by Exception alarming on this Comm Port When using SRBX Alarming you must e
220. ctual Live Reading value read from the sensor or AI point Deviation Difference between expected or entered value and the Live Reading This is the Deviation from the actual versus the expected value in percent of range Deviation Entry Reading Deviation Deviation as percent of range Deviation Deviation Span EU Zero EU x 100 10 2 4 Set Midpoints Calibration If desired calibrate Midpoint 1 such as 25 of range for the Differential Pressure orifice only Static Pressure or Temperature otherwise click the Done button Midpoints allow you to specify the points between the Zero and Span endpoints Note You can calibrate Midpoints in any order from low to high or high to low The Point field displays the Point you are calibrating or verifying The Live Reading field displays actual Live Reading value read from the sensor or AI point Set Mid 1 f fx Point Al Morth Dead Weight or Tester value AII Live Reading 0 0000 l Set Mid 1 Cancel Y Done Figure 10 10 Set Midpoints Calibration ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 8 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Set Mid 2 Print Fixed AH Set Zero 100 000 0 000 100 000 100 0000 3 Dead WeightT ester Value 100 Live Reading 1 00 0000 Deviation 0 000 Set Mid 2 7 Cancel Y Done Figure 10 11 Set Midpoints Calibration ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 ROC300 Series and FloBoss 4
221. cuted The Compare Flag CF or Signal Value Discrete SVD is a special purpose 8 bit register that stores an integer representing the numbers 0 through 255 The Compare Flag is manipulated by the logic Commands The Mesg 1 and Mesg 2 is a 30 character field for storing a message that will display in the FST Message area Msg Data 1 and Msg Data 2 display any values associated with the messages The Code Size Bytes is the number of bytes used by the FST The Code Size is read only device specific parameter Refer to the Devices Software and FST Functionality table The Code Pointer Byte field is the display of the offset of the next function to be executed from the beginning of its memory Segment Values are device specific This value normally changes rapidly unless the FST is ata Wait WT statement an FST Execution Delay is used or in Trace mode It is used for debugging purposes Note Use FST Monitor within the FST Editor to monitor these operations Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 4 FST Editor Using the FST Editor FSTs are created compiled debugged and downloaded to the device The FST Editor consists primarily of a Workspace and menus similar in structure to spreadsheet programs The FST Editor also allows monitoring and tracing of an FST while it is running Select Utilities gt FST Editor or click the FST Editor button to launch the FST Editor wa ROCLINK 800 Function Sequ
222. d Search Use Search to query on specific word Back Click to return to the last topic that you viewed Print Click to Print the currently displayed topic lt lt and gt gt Click the Browse Sequence buttons to navigate forward gt gt and backwards lt lt through the help system on a per topic basis The Browse Sequence follows the order of the topics as displayed in the Contents tab See Also Click to display topics related to the selected topic Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 6 6 About ROCLINK 800 Select Help gt About ROCLINK 800 to view the ROCLINK 800 version number and other information such as Supporting Files Version Information About ROCLINK 800 eee ROCLINE S00 Version 1 51 Part Number We 40 License Copyright FISHER CONTROLS INTERNATIONAL LLC ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CONFIDENTIAL This program is the property of FISHER CONTROLS INTERNATIONAL LLC Its configuration and algorithrn are confidential and may not be used reproduced or revealed to others escept in accord with contract or other written consent of FISHER CONTROLS INTERNATIONAL LLC Any permitted reproduction in whole or in part must bear this legend Supporting Files Version Information AOC MDE 1 51 DESO MDB 1 51 Pa asF iter OG 1 3 0 0 Paas MDB 1 3 0 0 FlowloalF iter OCs 1 3 0 0 FlowlalMDE 1 3 0 0 EfmE sport OL 1 6 0 0 EfmE sport MOB 1 6 0 0 Build Date
223. d Modbus register Twenty groups are available Enter the Modbus Register Number in either the Periodic History Register or Daily History Register fields used to acquire the group of History Points defined in the Start History Point and End History Point fields One register Commonly register 704 can retrieve periodic data and another register commonly register 703 can retrieve daily data for the group of History Points The time Period for the Periodic history is set on the History Segment configuration screen if the Period is set as 60 this will be Hourly history Select a History Segment from which the history is to be acquired Make sure this Segment is configured through the Configure gt History Segments screen The General Segment is listed on this table as 0 Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Start History Point for this group of history point values The Starting History Point value is the first history point to be retrieved Refer to the Configure gt History Segments screen for a full list of the points assigned to this History Segment The first history point in the Segment is listed on this table as 0 Enter the End History Point for this group of history point values The Ending History Point number should be greater than or equal to the Starting History Point number The Ending History Point is the last history point to be retrieved Refer to the Configure gt History Segments scr
224. d The Calibration Freeze Value field displays the value received from the Analog HART MVS or RTD input when the Update button was last pressed 10 2 1 Verify Calibration If the run has been calibrated before click Verify to begin a verification of the last calibration or immediately after a new calibration Click Log Verify to write the data to the Event Log and calibration report Verify proceeds with verification of the calibration at a point in the operating range such as at 0 25 50 75 or 100 percent The Point field displays the Point you are calibrating or verifying Enter the Dead Weight or Tester Value This is the input desired for the test value and is the actual value expected by the test equipment being calibrated against For example When calibrating temperature for an RTD input enter the degrees value associated with the resistance set up in the decade box The Live Reading field displays actual Live Reading value read from the sensor or AI point Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 devices display Action Describes the type of Action Possible Actions are Verify Set Zero Set Span Set Mid 1 Set Mid 2 and Set Mid 3 Entry Expected or desired value This is the entered Dead Weight Tester value for point being verified calibrated Reading The actual Live Reading value read from the sensor or AI point Deviation Difference betwe
225. d in On Time and Inverted output is energized in Off Time Not available for the FloBoss 100 Series The Power Timer counts down the amount of time On Time Off Time or Hold Time that the Radio Control is currently using The value is the number of seconds or minutes remaining The On Counter value indicates the cumulative time that the Power Control has been in the ON state in seconds or minutes The Off Counter value indicates the cumulative time that the Power Control has been in the OFF state in seconds or minutes Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 20 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The Radio Power Status indicates the current status of the Power Control function of ON OFF or RBX The Active Zone indicates which zone is currently activated for determining the Start Time On Time and Off Time Some of the On Time is also used by the radio during power up initialization of the receiver causing part of the On Time to be unavailable for receiving requests 7 6 DS800 Development Suite Software ROC800 Series This screen provides parameters related to the DS800 application It is good practice to check these settings prior to downloading a DS800 application For more information on DS800 programs refer to the DS800 Development Suite on line help or the DS800 Development Suite User Manual Select Configure gt Control gt DS800 DS800 fx Pairits nd Mode RSI Task TCPYIP Task sD Task e On f Enabled f Enabled f Enab
226. d of Sound to be compared to the calculated value Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 30 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enable the AGA Limit Events FloBoss 100 Series if the FloBoss unit is to log AGA events An AGA limit event is logged when an input to the AGA calculation is outside the specified limits or the calculation fails Disable this parameter if the FloBoss should ignore AGA calculation related events Disabling this parameter will prevent the Event Log from filling with AGA limit type events Select Force Recalculation FloBoss 100 Series and click Apply to cause a full recalculation of the flow without waiting for the next normal recalculation Normal recalculation periods are established in Meter Setup screen using the Integral Multiplier Period or the Base Multiplier Period Upon forcing a recalculation the accumulations are zeroed and the flow value is logged as a new entry The Force Recalculation parameter is automatically set to Clear after the recalculation completes Up to three selections can be made for the Pressure Tap used in this Meter Run Gauge or Absolute Select either Gauge or Absolute as the pressure tap type This choice must match the static pressure type is actually measured by the sensor The MVS sensor DVS sensor or other pressure transmitter can be ordered to provide either absolute or gauge measurements Upstream or Downstream For an orifice run select either Upstream or Downstream to i
227. d stopping of the FST This turns the associated FST on or off by selecting or deselecting the correct radio button and clicking Apply Registers R1 to R10 may be used to store floating point values The ROC or FloBoss allows you to assign a Tag to each Register The FST Registers can store calculated or manually entered values and can pass data from one FST to another That is the FST can write values to the Registers and the FST can also read the values stored in the FST Register storage points These Registers may be read from or written to any FST configured for the ROC or FloBoss The Timer 1 to 4 are countdown timers used to signal that a certain period or time has elapsed You set the time and the time is then updated by the FST These four timers when set greater than 0 decrement by 1 every cycle time Cycle times are FloBoss 100 Series 1 second FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series 100 millisecond ROC800 100 millisecond Set the Misc 1 to 4 unsigned 8 bit integers with valid decimal values of 0 to 255 that are used for global storage by the FST Set the Execution Delay between the executions of successive FST command steps The default is 0 seconds The minimum delay is 1 second for a FloBoss 100 Series and 0 1 for other ROC and FloBoss devices The Results Register RR or Signal Value Analog SVA is a special purpose register that stores the floating point result from the most current command exe
228. d to store history data most user programs and additional configuration data RBX Report by Exception In a ROC or FloBoss it always refers to Spontaneous RBX in which the ROC or FloBoss contacts the host to report an alarm condition Results Register RR Results Register Stores the SVA ROC Remote Operations Controller a microprocessor based unit that provides remote monitoring and control ROM Read Only Memory Typically used to store firmware Rotary Meter A positive displacement meter to measure flow rate Also referred to a Roots meter RS 232 Serial Communications Protocol using three or more signal lines intended for short distances Also referred to as the EJA 232 standard RS 485 Serial Communications Protocol requiring only two signal lines Can allow up to 32 devices to be connected together in a daisy chained fashion Also referred to as the EIA 485 standard RTC Real time clock RTD Resistance Temperature Detector RTS Ready to Send modem communications signal RTU Remote Terminal Unit RXD Received data communications signal S Soft Point A type of ROC point with generic parameters that can be configured to hold data as desired by the user SP Setpoint or Static Pressure SPI Slow Pulse Input SRAM Static Random Access Memory Stores data as long as power is applied typically backed up by a lithium battery or super capacitor SRBX Spontaneous Report by Exception in which the ROC or Fl
229. data table can be created up for Modbus Function 3 4 or 16 up to the limit of 240 bytes This type of data table allows access to all its data with one request Note The ROC800 Series has no Modbus Register definition defaults Periodic or Daily History index registers should be mapped to the TLP for the Periodic Index Point Type 124 Parameter 5 or Daily Index Point Type 124 Parameter 6 In this TLP the Logical number is the History Segment number Remember to create an index for each History Segment from which you need to request history For a FloBoss 100 Series up to fifteen different lines can be configured for Modbus Functions 1 2 4 5 6 15 and 16 Up to thirty different lines can be configured for Modbus Function 3 split into tables 3A and 3B By making the registers continuous when the Starting Register address of a new line is one greater than the Ending Register address of the previous line a continuous data table can be created up for Modbus Function 03 04 or 16 up to the limit of 240 bytes This type of data table allows access to all its data with one request For Function Codes 01 02 05 and 15 the parameter specified should be a single byte parameter type preferably a status parameter only bit O is used because this function packs the data into a binary format for transmission Each address span must be unique within the function for proper operation If not the first valid address is used Rev Dec 0
230. dbus Host Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Select ROC gt Comm Ports Click the Modbus Host Parameters tab Comm Port x Comm Forts 2 Comm 1 Tag Comm 1 General Modbus Host Parameters Modem RE Store amp Forward Start Tranemssiori Continous Polling C Active e Inactive Enabled C Disabled Starting Host Request o Host Foll Delay 0 Seconds Transmission Status Idle EA Paste 2 Update y OF Cancel Apply Figure 8 11 Modbus Host Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Note Modbus functionality is not resident in the FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series firmware The Modbus user program must be loaded and enabled in the FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series for this tab to be available Note Modbus Registers functions are available for the FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series through the use of a user program Refer to the Modbus Protocol Emulation Program Manual Form A4606 To enable Modbus transmission select Active for the Start Transmission Enable Continuous Polling to control whether the Modbus Master polling sequence is executed on a continuous basis Enter the Starting Host Request number defining where in the Host Config table to begin the transmission The default is 0 which tells the Host to start at message 0 If another value is entered the Host begins at that number and skips prior messages defined in the host table For example 1f you enter 10 as a Starting Register the transmi
231. ding writing storing values from historical databases and time stamping values to a History Point VAL The Value VAL command loads the Results Register RR with the value defined in ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT can be a constant or any database parameter available to the FST The value defined in ARGUMENT is converted to floating point data type and written to the Results Register SAV The Save SAV command writes the Results Register RR value to any database parameter available to the FST as defined in ARGUMENTI WDB WTM and RDB The historical database commands Write to Historical Database WDB Write Time to Historical Database WTM and Read Historical Database RDB allow you to establish a non periodic history database one that has no specific time interval a periodic history database one that has a specific time interval or a storage array for data similar to a Softpoint For the FST historical database commands to work a History Point has to be configured correctly for a FST History Point as either FST Time Archive Type or FST Data Archive Type Refer to Defining a FST History Point The FST for a History Point uses one of the historical database commands and two Arguments ARGUMENTI contains the history database point number ARGUMENTI can be a constant or a parameter with a value between 1 through 35 FloBoss 100 Series 1 through 87 ROC300 Series 1 through 50 FloBoss 407 History Segme
232. displays the status codes returned from the modem For a FloBoss 100 Series enter the Date Register and Time Register for the time period in which you would like to acquire the data Enable EFM Modbus to use the FloBoss 100 Series EFM Reporting option for date and time format When disabled standard Modbus reporting will be used Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The Slave Mode Exception Status field ROC800 Series displays the error code for the last Modbus message received This field is applicable only in slave mode 0 No error 1 Illegal function 2 Illegal data address 3 Illegal data value If Modbus Master has been selected as the Port Owner on the General tab of the ROC gt Comm Ports screen Start Polling ROC800 Series controls the initiation of a Modbus Master polling sequence It will begin polling at the Starting Request entry from the Modbus Master Table and then proceed through the entries in the table The checkbox will be reset when the polling sequence is complete Enter a Starting Request ROC800 Series value to enable a Modbus Master polling sequence to begin polling with the request number entry which represents the line entry from the Modbus Master Table and then proceed through the entries in the table Enter the total Number of Requests ROC800 Series of Modbus Master requests to be made in this polling sequence This represents the lines in the polling table on which t
233. ds are read only Device Information f Ed Version Mame WEST25 Werd 52 Time Created May 05 2005 1220 Vendor ID Emerson Process Mgmt MPU Loading 10290 O00000 Boot Version WEST 2780012 Yer1 00 Time Created Jul30 2002 1518 Last Power Down Time 1 1 03 2005 16 19 40 Last Power Up Time 1 1 03 2005 17 74 03 Update y Ok 7 Cancel Figure 3 10 Information Other Information Example ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 10 Device Information Customer Name NONE WEQ123 Ver212 Version Name ID Time Created ROM Serial H MPU Loading 1 q 200 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 Update OK 7 Cancel Figure 3 11 Other Information FloBoss 407 and FloBoss 100 Series Device Information Customer Hame f Version Mame ID Time Created ROM Serial H MPU Loading LED Installed meser Yes 2 Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 3 12 Other Information ROC300 Series The Version Name Part Number ID and Time Created of the firmware display The information about the ROM Customer Name and Serial Number display The processes in the processor MPU Loading display The amount of RAM installed in the ROC or FloBoss display Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual In a ROC800 Series field display when power was added or removed Last Power Up Time connected to power and Last Pow
234. e Press OK or Apply a ae a N 2 6 ROCLINK 800 Communications The Device Root is the organizational level in the Device Directory When you open ROCLINK 800 software the default Device labels display in the Device Directory You can modify these communications setup configurations or you can create new configurations Refer to 2 3 Device Security on page 2 6 2 6 1 ROCLINK 800 Communications General The Device Directory is the first screen that displays after logging in to ROCLINK 800 software Use the ROCLINK 800 Communications General tab to configure basic communications for the PC running ROCLINK 800 software 1 Select the Device Root directory icon 2 Right mouse click on a communications icon 3 Select Properties Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual ROCLINK 800 Communication Parameters General Advanced Tag COM Device Destination Source Device Address 1 Host Address 3 Device Group 2 Host Group Use C Comm Port C Modem PE Comm Fort Comm Fort Baud Rate Modem Parameters Modem Phone Number O U TCP IF Addressing IF Address Fort Number 0 yY OK 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 2 12 ROCLINK 800 Communications General Example ROCS800 Series Tag Enter the Station Name in the Tag field Connect Press the Connect button to connect using the configured parameters for this PC Communic
235. e Heating Value Basis the Heating Value and the Specific Gravity If other Stations have similar characteristics use Copy and Paste to create Gas Quality configurations Note For information on the Gas Quality tab on the Meter Setup screens for the FloBoss 100 Series and FloBoss 407 refer to Parameters on Meter Gas Quality Tab FloBoss 100 Series and FloBoss 407 3 The Advanced tab of the Station Configuration contains a number of additional parameters that affect the flow calculation 4 The Alarms tab allows you to configure alarming parameters for Station flow rates After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 2 1 Station General ROC800 Series To configure a Station select a Station icon in the Configuration Tree menu or select Meter gt Setup gt Stations The Station Configuration General tab sets basic parameters that all the Meter Runs in the Station have in common Station Setup Station 1 Station 1 Tag Station 1 General Gas Quality Advanced Alarms History Segment General OW Contract Hour 4 Calculation Standard C Gas 1505167 98 1509951 93 15010790 2003 C Liquid 1505167 98 4P1 12 95 15010790 1999 Station Values Flow Rate 0 0 MCF Aday os 0
236. e Point you are calibrating or verifying This corresponds with the High Reading EU 100 Count and is the high value to the input the top end of the expected operating range For Static Pressure on an absolute pressure device remember to add in the actual atmospheric pressure for example 300 14 73 set Span Paint Al Morth Dead Weight or Tester Value LII Live Reading 0 0000 l Set Span Cancel Figure 10 8 Set Span Calibration set Span Paint Fixed lH Action Entry Reading Deviation 4 Deviation Set ero 100 000 0 000 1 00 000 1 00 0000 Dead Weight T ester Value 100 Live Reading 1 00 0000 Deviation 0 000 s 2et spar ance Set A Cancel Figure 10 9 Set Span Calibration ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 The Live Reading field displays actual value read from the sensor or I O point 1 Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units This should correspond with the High Reading EU 100 Count and is the high value to the input the top end of the expected operating range 2 Click Set Span Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 devices display Action Describes the type of Action Possible Actions are Verify Set Zero Set Span Set Mid 1 Set Mid 2 and Set Mid 3 Entry Expected or desired value This is the entered Dead Weight Tester value for point being verified calibrated Reading The a
237. e Preseure 14 75 PSIA T p l E T foo 0 Bea Stainless Steel Stainless Steel aa C Monel Monel Elevation Feet C Carbon f Carbon Latitude 35 0 Deg Rei Temp Ba en Viscosity a 010268 Cp 68 0 DegF 68 0 DegF Sp Heat Ratio 1 3 Force Recalculation AGA Limit E vents Pressure Tap C Set f Enabled C Gauge f Upstream f Clear C Disabled f Absolute C Downstream C Update Y OF A Cancel i Apply Figure 5 13 Meter Advanced Orifice FloBoss 100 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Meter Setup f Ed Meter Number 1 Meter 1 Meter Tag Meter HI FRY Method Units Atmospheric Pressure Gravitational 4cceleration f Detailed f C Calculate Enter w Calculate C Enter m Gross 4 45 PSIA 32 1 1478 Ft Sec C Gross2 Base Preseure 14 75 PSIA Base Temperature 60 0 Deg F Elevation 500 0 Feet Latitude 35 0 Deg Force Recalculation AGA Limit E vents Pressure Tap C Set f Enabled C Gauge f Clear Disabled f Absolute Update y OF A Cancel i Apply Figure 5 14 Meter Advanced Turbine FloBoss 100 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 24 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Meter Setup x Meter Number 1 AGAT Meter Tag AGAT General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Alarms FRY Method Atmospheric Pressure Units Detailed C Calculate Enter fe US p i Gross 14 45 peja Metric C Gross2
238. e System Description Current Yersion E Display Main Code FVEARSIONG apace Remaining 46 4896 Bytes Firmware Image to Download File Name Browse File Information 0 C Status Start Close Figure 11 3 Update Firmware Keypad Display ROC800 Series Firmware Currently Installed Displays a Description and Current Version of the Firmware stored in the Keypad Display Flash File System Displays the total Space Remaining in Bytes for Firmware storage File Name Click Browse to locate the Firmware Image to Download File Information Display information about the file selected to be downloaded Status Current Status of the download Rev Dec 05 Updates and Changes 11 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 11 2 Upgrade Hardware FloBoss 100 Series When you replace the Termination Board in a FloBoss 100 Series unit you should select Utilities gt Upgrade Hardware and follow the procedure to save configuration remove power remove hardware install new hardware connect power and download configuration Check the configuration for that device and the Point Numbers in the FSTs PID loops and historical EFM Event and Alarm Logs that may be affected Upgrade Hardware Press Next to start hardware upgrade procedure Save device configuration to file Update device firmware to latest version Power down the device _ Replace the termination board _ Power up the device
239. e Values 114 Flow Rate Per Hour 2 Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 28 ROCLINK 800 User Manual History Configuration for Turbine Meter Archive Type Averaging Rate Type Point Type Totalize 134 None 0 Turbine Values 114 Energy Accumulated 26 Lh Accumulate 129 Per Day 13 Turbine Values 114 Energy Rate Per Day 1 foe Accumulate 129 Per Hour 12 Turbine Values 114 Energy Rate Per Hour 3 The format of a PGAS volume file 1s 1 METER_ID char 16 Identification number for the measurement point in the field Tag of the orifice or turbine point associated with the alarm 2 PRODUCATION_DATE_START datetime Start date and time of the record in mm dd yyyy hh mm format Since date and time stamps of ROC history are for the end of the record this will be the date and time stamp of the previous record 3 PRODUCTION DATE END datetime Ending date and time of the record in mm dd yyyy hh mm format This will be the history date and time stamp from the ROC FLOW_TIME_MINUTES Hourly value for the meter run flow minutes EFM_VOLUME Hourly accumulation of volume for the meter run in MCF K EFM_ENERGY Hourly accumulation of energy for the meter run in MMBTU FLOW_EXTN Hourly value for hwpf Orifice only DIFF_PRESS float Hourly average of differential pressure in Inches H2O Orifice only 9 STAT_PRESS Hourly average of static pressure in PSI FLOW_TEMP Hourly average of the flowing
240. e Values field indicates the current input value Click the Temperature TLP button to assign the input that senses the temperature of the flowing gas The units assumed for the input are degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius If Manual appears the Values field can be used to enter an engineering units value for the Temperature input Otherwise the Values field indicates the current input value Enable Stacked DP to use stacked differential pressure transmitters used for low and high pressure ranges Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Click the Low DP Input TLP button to assign the input for monitoring low differential pressure The Stacked DP parameter must be Enabled for this input to be used This input may be left in Manual Mode when Stacked DP is disabled Enter the Low DP SetPoint to determine when switchover to the low differential pressure input occurs When High DP input is active and the High DP reading drops below this value the Low DP input becomes the active input The units assumed for the input are inches of water column In H20 or kPa Enter the High DP SetPoint to determine when switchover to the high differential pressure input occurs When the Low DP input is active and the Low DP reading rises above this Setpoint the High DP input becomes the active input The units assumed for the input are inches of water column In H20 or kPa Select an Averaging Technique FloBoss 100 Series fo
241. e contains current daily Index index 03 7161 Hourly Ignored FloBoss 100 Series only Response contains current hourly Index index 03 32 Ignored Response contains Event and Alarm records Maximum Event Alarm number of bytes returned is 240 12 records of 20 bytes Register each Events are returned before Alarms are returned The format is displayed in the Modbus Events and Alarms Log Contents table 05 32 Ignored After Events and Alarms have been returned there must be Event Alarm an acknowledgment made so that the same Events and Register Alarms are not returned on the next request 03 703 Daily Daily History Response contains two floating point values for the time and History Archive Register date stamp of the history archive time stamp HHMMSS Index 0 to 34 and date stamp MMDDYY and floating point values for each of the defined History Points for that History Archive Register 03 704 Hourly Hourly or Periodic Response contains two floating point values for the time and History History Archive _ date stamp of the history archive time stamp HHMMSS Register Index 0 and date stamp MMDDYY and floating point values for to 839 each of the defined History Points for that History Archive Register 1 The Periodic Index Daily Index and Event Alarm data fields are used to address a history index number 2 The Event and Alarm Log record consists of the bytes shown in Table Modbus Events and Alarms Log Content
242. e display Follow the element steps in New Display Be sure to Save changes to the display after editing 12 6 5 Adding an Expression to a Custom Display Object Some of the Custom Display Objects allow Visual Basic Expressions to be built that will cause the display to change under specific conditions Users creating display element expressions should have experience with Visual Basic programming Expressions may be added to the following elements tab label text box option button pushbutton checkbox combo box line circle square and image If the Allow Data Entry or Visible property of an element is set to Expression click on the button with three dots in the property box The Expression Builder screen will appear To create an Expression 1 Select View gt Display gt From File 2 Select the display File name Display files have the DSP extension 3 Click Open 4 Click Update to update data for the existing display elements Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 13 10 11 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual From the three list boxes in the center of the screen select a category from the left box Select a subcategory from the center box Select an item from the right box As you select from the list boxes definitions of the categories and items will appear below the list boxes Click the Add button You may select items from the list boxes as many times as your expression requires From the butt
243. e each individual ROC or FloBoss device among all units in a communications group The Address can be assigned a value from 1 to 255 Do not assign a value of 240 for an address Enter a Group to identify a set of ROC or FloBoss units for communication purposes typically to a host that polls the ROC or FloBoss The Station Group can be assigned a value from 1 to 255 Do not assign a value of 240 for a Group All of the ROCs addressed as an area in the host have the same Station Group When using the ROC Protocol the Group and Address values must match the address setup at the destination device in order for communications to properly transmit For a ROC800 Series TCP IP connections can be used for Modbus RTU encapsulated in TCP IP Modbus TCP IP and ROC Plus Protocol communications If the default value of the Address or Group parameters is changed then all Modbus RTU encapsulated in TCP IP Modbus TCP IP or ROC Plus Protocol over TCP IP connections will be closed and you will have to re establish a connection Select either US or Metric Units FloBoss 100 Series for calculations If Metric units are selected then the AGA calculation expects all inputs to be in terms of the indicated units such as kPa for the static pressure input The calculation results are then in terms of the selected units Enter the Contract Hour FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 which is the time when values are totaled for a single day of produc
244. e flow equation allowing you to make any desired adjustment to the flow If you use the default value of 1 no correction is applied 5 3 7 Meter Calibration Factors ROC800 Series The Calibration Factors tab displays a dialog box containing a number of instrument specific parameters that can affect calibration of the meter inputs Selecting the Meter gt Setup Orifice or Turbine gt Calibration Factors tab ROC800 Series displays a dialog box containing a number of instrument specific parameters that can affect calibration of the meter inputs The options allow you to set calibration parameters for the Analog Inputs for this flow calculation Orifice Meter Setup wd x Meter Run 7 Orifice 1 Tag Orifice 1 Deadweight Gravitational Correction Static Pressure Differential Pressure Calibrated Grav Accel 32 1 rd FiSece Leer User Correction Factor i O Copy Update y OK 7 Cancel Figure 5 21 Meter Calibration Factors Orifice ROCS amp 00 Series Select whether or not to correct for local gravity effect on deadweight calibration for Static Pressure and or Differential Pressure The factor Fpwl is multiplied by the base volume flow equation once for each selection Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 34 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The factor Fpwl is used to correct for the effect of local gravity on the weights of a deadweight calibrator The calibrator weights are usuall
245. e i Code Description Function Definition Float to integer o Float Scale 8 an en ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 10 0 and 9 sc ane gv 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be implied decimal sent as 12 place h A 3 ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 100 0 and 10 ee gv 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be implied decimal sent as 123 places l r B EA ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 1000 0 and 11 ee 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be implied decimal sent as 1234 places R A F ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 10000 0 and 12 gie gv 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be implied decimal sent as 12345 places l a N F ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 100000 0 and ie Pee 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be implied decimal sent as 123456 places Se ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 1000000 0 and 14 ee dates el 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be implied decimal sent as 1234567 places l a Hel A i ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 10000000 0 and 15 A lied aa 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 32 bit integer A value of 1 234567 would be
246. e limit values in engineering units to which the EU Value must fall to generate a Low or LoLo Alarm The LoLo Alarm value is typically set lower than the Low Alarm The Alarm Deadband value in engineering units is an inactive zone above the Low Alarm and below the High Alarm The purpose of the Alarm Deadband is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This also prevents the Alarm Log from being overfilled with data If the host computer is configured to receive field initiated calls you can select a Report by Exception RBX option to send a Spontaneous Report by Exception message Disabled Select Disabled to turn RBX Alarming Off On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a SRBX message On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a SRBX message On Alarm Set amp Clear FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 In either condition an RBX message generates Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 36 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 7 Pulse Interface Module Diagnostic FloBoss 104 When on line with a FloBoss 104 unit select Utilities gt Pulse Input Module Diagnostic to monitor the operation of the Pulse Interface Module The
247. e products nor as a recommendation to use any product or process in conflict with any patent Fisher Controls reserves the right without notice to alter or improve the designs or specifications of the products described herein Rev Dec 05 iI ROCLINK 800 User Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics ccccossssscccsssscccssssscccsscscccessscceessscoss 1 1 ROCLINK 800 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION scnciabcstacsstcaenssalcacncssedencsatcasacsakicaeadsaisacecsictaenciateaeacsateaedes 1 2 COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS cccccsccccscssccecsccsccececcscsccccssssccecscsscnececcssececcssssceccecssceececsssececcssssceeees 1 3 CONTACTING THE FLOW COMPUTER DIVISION ssccccccceesseccecceeessecccceeussecccceaueseecceeeaueneeceeeeas LA SOFTWARE INSTALLATION csccssscecessssensasesade occpsotesacnsads sadesenssataradsanvaseeisateoatt uadesensacbavehssunseteseeevetenetes 1 4 1 Manually Creating a Desktop Shortcut 0 i ceccccceccccceceeeeeseeececceceesaeecseeeceeeessaaaeeeeeeeeess 1 4 2 Launching ROCLINK 800 During Setup ce cecccccccccccceeeesseeecceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeaees 1 4 3 Un Installing ROCLINK S00 6 cacsccostneacentaasnousaacensceeanctmt asasennecctedone sanpmedmessteuievesnaanecotodone rena LS UO LAR TING ROC IZUN EK 500 SOFTWAR rasesececcstncccgacscevsadessecedsesteiesdessoncascssansacsse A LoL LO NN oc nsacct cya sacunsdend E EE E E EE AE 16O USER INTERFACE BASICS usc cscssscscsesanecensidusc
248. e scroll bar to the left of the graph to change the Y axis Graphics zoom enlarges the selected area of a chart while not necessarily showing the axes Axis zoom changes the minimum and maximum data values to those selected and redraws only that data with the axes To Scale the Chart 1 lt Ctrl gt and press down both mouse buttons or middle button on 3 button mouse 2 Move the mouse down to increase chart size or move the mouse up to decrease chart size To Move the Chart 1 Press lt Shift gt and press down both mouse buttons or the middle button on 3 button mouse 2 Move the mouse to change the positioning of the chart To Graphics Zoom an Area of the Chart 1 Press lt Ctrl gt and hold down left mouse button 2 Drag the mouse to select zoom area and release the mouse button To Axis Zoom the Chart 1 lt Shift gt and hold down left mouse button 2 Drag the mouse to select the zoom area and release the mouse button To Reset Scale and Position 1 Press lt r gt to remove all effects Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 34 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 9 Device Memory Select ROC gt Memory A display appears that allows you to specify the memory address as Segment and Offset for FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series units or as a single hexadecimal Address for FloBoss 100 Series units When you enter numbers within the valid ranges of memory location and use the Update button the display updates to show the cont
249. e the Differential Pressure or the Static Pressure select the respective Yes option Enter the Calibrated Grav Accel value Select the Mercury Manometer Instrument Used option FloBoss 103 If a mercury manometer is used select the Yes option Enter the Ambient Hg Temp option FloBoss 103 If the Ambient or Calibrated temperature of the mercury 1s different from the indicated values enter the correct values The default is 60 degrees Fahrenheit or 60 degrees Celsius Enter the Calibrated Hg Temp option FloBoss 103 If the Ambient or Calibrated temperature of the mercury is different from the indicated values enter the correct values The default is 60 degrees Fahrenheit or 60 degrees Celsius Select the Water Manometer Calibration option FloBoss 103 If a water manometer is used to calibrate the differential pressure Diff Press select the Yes option Enter the Calibrated H2O Temp option FloBoss 103 If the calibrated temperature of the water is different from the indicated values enter the correct values The default 1s 60 degrees Fahrenheit or 60 degrees Celsius Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 33 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Calibrated Air Temp option FloBoss 103 If the calibrated temperature of the air is different from the indicated values enter the correct values The default 1s 60 degrees Fahrenheit or 60 degrees Celsius Enter the User Correction Factor value that is multiplied by the base volum
250. e the I O parameters before referencing them in an FST When using any branching command GO lt gt lt gt make sure that you have defined the LABEL that you are referencing with the command Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 8 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 4 8 FST Storage and Restart This section details what FST configuration data is stored when a write to Internal Configuration Memory EEPROM is performed and what happens to the FST after a Cold Start Warm Start or after upgrading the ROC or FloBoss firmware on Note A Warm Start occurs when a ROC or FloBoss is powered on For a FloBoss 100 Series Flash Memory Save Configuration FSTs are permanently saved to memory Stop Start If you disable an FST and restart it the FST begins executing from where it left off Warm Start If an FST is saved to memory and it is active running when a Warm Start occurs FSTs automatically restart at the beginning STEP Cold Start On a Cold Start FST Registers will be cleared but will be restored from Internal Config Memory if valid However if you perform a Cold Start amp Clear FSTs or a Cold Start amp Clear ALL type of Cold Start FSTs are permanently deleted from Internal Config Memory Upgrading Firmware If an FST is saved to memory and it is active running when a firmware upgrade occurs FSTs automatically restart after the upgrade completes For a ROC300 Series Versi
251. e the amount of time that the ROC or FloBoss waits after initiating a call to receive a connect message from a device typically the modem before it terminates the call The Connect Time varies from system to system and can take up to 60 seconds to make and complete a dial up connection If a successful connection is made the Disconnect Time begins Set the Disconnect Time parameter to determine the amount of time that the ROC or FloBoss waits for further activity on the line before it hangs up This timer resets after each valid receive signal Enter the Inactivity Time in seconds that the ROC or FloBoss will wait without receiving a signal before it resets the modem The inactivity timer looks at the valid receive counter to determine if the signal has been received Enter the Config Command characters required to initialize the modem For external modems refer to the manufacturer s literature For an internal modem use the default value or the modem card may not operate correctly Refer to your modem s documentation for default Config Command characters Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 28 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Hayes style Connect Command required to contact the host Typically this is the command ATDT followed by the telephone number This parameter is required only for dial out operations such as for SRBX Alarming For example ATDT5155551212 For a ROC800 Series enter the Hayes style Disconne
252. e use of custom displays is to graphically represent the application that a ROC or FloBoss is monitoring and controlling A second use is to monitor the ROC or FloBoss and to allow the user to change commonly used parameters from a single screen Each Custom Display has parameters specific to the entire Display that you are creating By default the Object Properties box displays at the right of the screen in a pop up window Drag and drop the menu Option buttons from the tool button bar to the Custom Display screen and set the associated parameters Each Option has parameters associated with it depending on the type of option you have selected and you can customize the parameters in the Object Properties box Note Custom Displays are not compatible between ROCLINK for Windows and ROCLINK 800 Configuration Software Bele C Gle Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Do bed Bj Ww hho 4 il KEI Dl E E T grwm R a UE AMe WF B OCBE Bonto o Frarre 1 C OptionButtan 1 f OptionButtan Logical Point List Disabled Point Type s Undetined Label None CheckBox 1 TextBox 1 CheckBox 2 Update Mode Normal Combobox Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Figure 12 8 Display Editor Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 12 6 1 Custom Displays New Display To create a new display 1 Select View gt Display gt New The Dis
253. e valve or other device e Note These Discrete Output points must be configured as TDO Time Duration Output Discrete Output Mode Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 7 4 4 PID Tuning Select Configure gt Control gt PID Loop PID Loop FI 1 PID 1 Tag FID 1 Primary Override Gain Of Reset Aoo Rate ooo o Scale Factor AO Control Deadband oo SP Ramp Fate oo 0 SP Low Limit foo fod SP High Limit f1000000 0 1000000 0 Change in Output oo Manual Tracking C Enabled f Disabled Halt PID On Reset Override Type Select f Enabled C High C Disabled f Low pa Copp Ei Faste Update X OK i Cancel Es Apply Figure 7 8 PID Tuning ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual PID Loop PID Control Type Output Type r Tuning Mah C Friman Only of Analog Primary Override Tag PID H fi Loop Period ie 4 G i Scanning Mode pater los o5 f Enabled C Manual Loop Status ae ae ao moo Disabled Auto Cale Time 5 Seconds Bae ao moo o ruman 40 Definition ule Scale Factor E 0 O setpoint 370 1626 Integral Deadband oo o oo Process Variable Undetned 22 ase a oP Ramp Fate oo ooo oo Primary Switch PY Undefined Switch to Override if gt oo Manual Tracking Halt PID On Reset i Disabled i Disabled Override C Enabled C Enabled Setpoint Process Variable E ndefined i O
254. each user who can connect to a ROC or FloBoss in the ROC gt Security options Ifthe PC cannot establish a connection to the ROC800 Series by pinging the Device Address ROC Address a TCP IP connection through ROCLINK 800 software cannot be made Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 38 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 9 2 Troubleshooting ROCLINK 800 Communications Occasionally you may need to alter your PC communications options when you are having problems communicating with your ROC or FloBoss 1 Select the desired Device in the Device Directory Right mouse click and select Properties 2 Make sure you have specified the correct Device Address and Device Group of the ROC or FloBoss with which you are trying to communicate If you are communicating through the LOI port of the device the Device Address is 240 and Group Address is 240 which is the universal address 3 Click the Advanced tab Try increasing the Time Out and or Tx Delay 4 Click Apply Return to the General tab and click Connect 5 If you are still having trouble communicating try increasing the Number of Retries field in the Advanced tab screen Click Apply Return to the General tab and click Connect 6 If you are still having trouble communicating try increasing or decreasing the Keyoff Delay field in the Advanced tab screen Click Apply Return to the General tab and click Connect 2 9 3 Troubleshooting TCP IP Connections If you
255. eainvovaveouiesun 11 4 Figure 11 4 Upgrade Hardware 11 5 Figure 11 5 Plate Change ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeees 11 6 Figure 12 1 Print Configuration cccceeeeeeeees 12 2 Figure 12 2 I O Monitor cccccccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 3 Figure 12 3 I O Monitor Values cceeeenees 12 4 Figure 12 4 LCD Display Configuration ROC300 SET IGS E E E E 12 5 Figure 12 5 LCD User List cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 12 6 Figure 12 6 Meter Run Values Example ROC800 Series DEI CS crap teense E EE A 12 7 Figure 12 7 Meter Run Values Example ROC800 Series LEED LINS craveri aaia 12 8 Figure 12 8 Display Editor cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 12 9 Figure 12 9 Display Editor Objects 12 11 Figure 12 10 Custom Display Example 12 14 Figure 12 11 Display Administrator ROC800 Series P E sere ceebe seeeaenneeeuass sceeananecenee 12 15 Figure 12 12 Keypad Display Editor 12 16 Figure A 1 FST Registers General ROC800 Series AEE EE T E EEE E A 3 Figure A 2 FST Registers Advanced ROC800 Series Spe ecicn peuetienene A E A E E sone eneehee 2e A 3 Figure A 3 FST Editor ccccccccccccccececeeeeeensseeeeeees A 5 File Download sespencon 9 3 DO eea E 9 4 Print Configuration ccccccccccssssssssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 2 Save Configuration ss cssesscsceecscsnadaccacscvacbscededareacentee 9 2 MPN CE cece caicas dacesianertatcveguceinse
256. eatures such as on a restart and RBX Alarming for the Analog Output 3 The Alarms tab on a ROC800 Series sets the alarm parameters for the AO point 4 After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start 4 3 1 AO General Select Configure gt I O gt AO Points The General tab sets the basic parameters for the Analog Output point Analog Output Analog Outputs 1 A0 Default Tag Ag Default General Advanced Alarms Paint Number Manual Value 0 0 Auto Value Physical Value 0 0 Units Percent scanning Mode Low Reading EU 0 0 O Auto Manual C Disabled High Reading EU 1 00 0 Active Alarms Pe o Copp BB Paste 2 Update y OK A Cancel i Apply Figure 4 9 AO General ROCS amp 00 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Analog Output Analog Outputs 1 40 Deflt 1 Taq Ag Detlt 1 General Advanced Point Number Scanning Alarming Value f Enabled f Enabled ae Disabled C Disabled Urita Low Reading EU 0 0 High Reading EU i 00 0 Active Alarms o Update YY OK Y Cancel Apply Figure 4 10 Analog Outputs FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series Select the Analog Output to be configured The outputs are listed by both Point Nu
257. eceeseaaesseseceeseseasaaeaeseeeeees 10 16 10 4 RTD Input Calibration Values scion csasesehcrcuetnccsavesenstinsescsaussoncunvne aati onan oneunnicatceoun lonataaeeeeh paeboranssins 10 17 10 5 MVS Input Calibration Values ROC800 Series and FIOBOSS 407 ce eeeccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 19 10 1 Calibration Basics The Calibration routine provides Verify Calibrate and Zero Shift functions for AI MVS DVS and RTD inputs You can calibrate Differential Pressure orifice metering may be High or Low Differential Pressure depending on the device Static Pressure or Temperature readings are available for each Meter Run Note During calibration the ROC or FloBoss times out and resumes normal processing if it 1s left idle for an extended period Calibration values are restored to their previous values an event is logged and you must reconnect to start calibration from the beginning Calibration parameters include Set Zero Set Span and Set Midpoint 1 2 and 3 All new calibration values are automatically logged in the Event Log Note Click Cancel to exit the calibration without saving the changes The previous calibration settings are retained An event is also logged For a ROC800 Series Meter calibration related parameters Gravitational Acceleration and User Factor are configured on the Calibration Factors tab of the Meter gt Setup Orifice or Turbine screen For a FloBoss 100 Series calibration related param
258. ect ccccccccceeeececeseeceeeeees 5 38 MSR Orena E 5 4 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Mass Lody remenan e Er N 5 4 Mass Yesterday oieee eee a ia 5 4 Matet TaD a N 8 29 Mathematical Commands Bie i interne Enea ene EP Cee PIN on eae ar en ea Rarer Rene A 18 Maximum Time Between Pulses ccc cece ce eeeeee 4 19 MEMON onnar ced aes sanlatiuhas Dada EN 6 35 IN Sh B a as cnt ace eet tees ha ee eae 1 8 Menmi LASNE 5hct 3s vegieh nyesaaiitateo eh aetanesanantedoveakecenveoueie l 7 Mercury Manometer Instrument Used 0 5 33 ME Eeee ea tew aaa als ratuaun i caapeteew aie nals cents 2 13 Meter PROV ANC OC aetis ee taceeser as alates eis val cect a eta 5 21 PT AMS 5s otto sie at ele ae A iat aie ha 5 35 Calibration Factors eea a E eiecs sees 5 34 Gas QUAN DY axe iota oul a ested tees 5 19 SCT A ea eee E rece eae 5 12 PANS CODY ccaueaiaicve aces Veer E N 6 1 PUIS rsen esreecheaniodsavaaieengin eaneucnvu ees 5 16 Instrument Calibration 20 0 0 ceecceeeceeecceesceees 5 33 Mass Meter Pressure Etec tic scccversisvicccecvimcvs 5 38 DAM PCL e aE veaueccncues 5 32 Meter Calibration OTA Costes eters a eee Ua eet ite 10 10 PUDE Aer a Re mPER En r ENO re 10 13 Meter DescripuOiis cvdsnieni A 5 14 Meter Tacloban a aS 5 30 Meter ENSO sneen a etna 6 6 6 10 Meti riren Taner AE NE TN rosea 5 14 Meter RUM neiaie AE O accion 5 1 5 14 Meter Run Values cece cceeccesecceecceeccesceesseueces 12 7 Meter Runs PAD A
259. ect Configure gt Control gt Radio Power Control to conserve battery power to a radio or any other communicating device Radio power is controlled either by the DTR signal or by a Discrete Output Because there are separate Radio Control points for COM1 and COM2 radio power cycling for COM1 can be configured differently from that for COM2 including independent timer values and separate output controls using the Output Definitions options When using a FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 two modes of Power Control are possible Seconds and Minutes In Seconds mode the time base for the timers is in 0 1 second 1 0 seconds for a FloBoss 100 Series increments primarily used with radios In Minutes mode the time base for the timers is in one minute increments primarily used with cellular telephones For each Radio Power Control point the power cycling can be configured to automatically change three times a day During each of these three periods called Zone 1 Zone 2 and Zone 3 the ON and OFF times can be set up to operate at various intervals to conserve battery power The figure below is a graphical depiction of how the power control operates within each time zone Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 18 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Radio Power Control id x Radio Power Control 11 PYAR CTRL Tag FwA_CTRL_O Radio Power Statues Power Disabled Active Zone Radio Power Control One Zone ones Ones f Disa
260. ecurity screen For more information on security in the ROC unit refer to Device Security The Group Access checkboxes determine the type of access Read Write or Read Only and types of data available for each user The User Access checkboxes determine the type of access Read Write or Read Only and types of data available for each user Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual APPENDIX A FST EDITOR A 1 FST Editor This section describes the Function Sequence Table functionality in ROCLINK 800 In this Chapter Section Page A BST EIN OT aa ate ascers ete cc ees E E E E A I A 2 Function Sequence Table Introduction ssiiecrseosciorsrosonidenneni inneni ieina iiini ennai A 1 Ao PER T a E E A 3 A E CEO eea E E A EE E E E E E E A E E A 5 Pr WO VT E E E E E A 10 Or TROUT OT IOUS ares cree a eon seeceienacheaeesensaenarc E E E E A 13 Ped PL COMING DE y eaen EE E E E EE E EA A 16 A 2 Function Sequence Table Introduction The Function Sequence Table FST capability is provided as an instruction list programming language that allows you to define and perform a set of specific actions when a set of conditions exists FSTs can be written specifically for applications that require special control features such as logic sequencing capability For example you can use an FST for emergency shutdown control when a parameter exceeds a low or high limit or in any application that requires logic sequencing cap
261. ed continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This also prevents the Alarm Log from being over filled with data If the host computer is configured to receive field initiated calls you can select a Report by Exception RBX option to send a Spontaneous Report by Exception message 4 4 4 11 On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the ROC generates a SRBX message On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the ROC generates a SRBX message Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured HART Input Configuration ROC800 Series Select Configure gt I O gt HART Examine the default settings and adjust the parameters to suit your application on each of the tabs 1 2 Select Configure gt I O gt HART Highway Addressable Remote Transducer The General and Advanced tabs set parameters for the channel Each ROC800 Series HART module can support up to four channels The Calibration tab enables you to calibrate the HART Analog Input Refer to Section 10 Calibration The Device tabs set parameters specific to the devices in that channel Each channel in Analog Output mode can support one device Each channel in Analog Input mode can support up to five devices After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to per
262. ed on an optional communications card Table 2 4 Communication Ports for the FloBoss 100 Series LOI RS 232D COMM1 Serial EIA 485 RS 485 COMM2 EIA 232 RS 232 Modem or Spread Spectrum Radio Local Port LOI RS 232D COMM1 EIA 232 RS 232 EIA 485 RS 485 or Modem COMM2 EIA 232 RS 232 EIA 485 RS 485 or Modem Note COMM1 and COMM2 are located on an optional communications card The communication ports of the ROC or FloBoss provide a link to computers such as one running ROCLINK 800 software or a host computer ROC800 Series units can have up to six communication ports FloBoss and ROC300 Series units can have up to three Select ROC gt Comm Ports to set up communications ports available for the ROC or FloBoss Note For FloBoss 100 Series the Modem tab only appears after Comm Ports 3 has been selected The SRBX or RBX Spontaneous Report by Exception alarming feature 1s available for serial communication ports It is not supported on the Ethernet port This feature allows the device to call in to a host computer when a configured alarm occurs To prevent nuisance alarms from being reported to the host configure the parameters correctly If you wish to configure dial up SRBX then a modem must be present and appropriately configured When using SRBX Alarming you must ensure that the alarms are enabled and configured for each point you desire to monitor Configure the alarm parameters so that an alar
263. ed t Enabled Level Enabled Security on COM maT User ID User Access O Died We hed Los Ereta Security on COM eer ID User Access La onee e esa saci 2 Update yw OK A Cancel i Apoly i Figure 2 4 Device Security Users FloBoss 407 User Table Select an Operator ID in the table to set each individual s security If you wish to create a user click on an empty cell in the table The Device Security dialog box appears To delete an operator entry from the table highlight a cell in that line When the Device Security dialog box appears click the Remove button Operator ID Enter the three alphanumeric characters for the Operator ID which is typically the initials of the person who operates the device through that communications port Each Operator ID must be unique The Operator ID is case sensitive The default Operator ID is LOI The default Password is 1000 Password Enter the four numeric characters between 0000 and 9999 for the Password Users can have the same Password Note Login requests are rejected when ROCLINK 800 Access Levels are greater than Device Security Refer to Table 2 1 Security Access Levels on page 2 2 Access Level Enter the desired Access Level of the user 0 is the lowest Access Level and allows access to the fewest number of screens 5 is the highest Access Level and permits access to all screens Each Access Level permits access to screens at that level a
264. eecceescesscesceesseessseeseenseees 7 4 1 PID ROC800 Series and FloBoss 1OO Series c ccc ccccceecceseccecceecceeseesseesssesseesseees 7 4 2 PID ROC300 Series and FIOBOSS 407 cccccsecceeccesecceeccessceesseessceeseeeceeseseeeseeeseees TA PIDE a a sates acticin anon E AE E EA dAd PID IMM e E E E E E E hesovonstasdnetcn svebotcenered 7142 PUD Stas ROCS00 SOES enserrer orainne E E EEEE E Raae JAS TIDES TIM aaseantlecnaniaeeccoaatanees Ted TRADIG POWER CONTRO aia os sad stencateusioashceateateeaeetstaudendtenssasabienensstoauncedteun nuetteaseastoulencateaasandteues 7 18 7 6 DS800 DEVELOPMENT SUITE SOFTWARE ROC800 SERIES 7 1 USER PROGRAM ADMINISTRATOR ssirsssirssicscrsrroirnsotiki erorii inon e Ee nET NEn E n EAS TEE aE JJA User Prosram Download Sle PS essien ereket a E e Anai To UPDA e E A eer Rev Dec 05 Table of Contents vi ROCLINK 800 User Manual Section 8 Modbus COMMUNICATIONS ccccccccssssccsscscssscssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssees 8 1 MODBUS CONFIGURATION ROC800 SERIES AND FLOBOSS 100 SERIES cccccecccceseseeeeseeeees 8 1 1 Configuring a ROC800 Series or FloBoss 100 Series as a Modbus Slave 8 1 2 Configuring a ROC800 Series as a Modbus HOt ccccccccessseeseeeeceeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees Blo Modbus Onis Mia IOn Ge Metal ccibcescassshacedcstcunassnncadcanctwaumssnnceauidcdsdeasceecenntassuussadaccammuscnies 8 1 4 Modbus Configuration Scale Values ccccccccccccccc
265. eeees 8 18 8 5 Modbus Master Table ROCS800 SerieS neensenssensenseessensenssessessesssrssessesserssessesserssessesserssessess 8 29 8 6 Modbus Master Modem ROC800 SerieS ec ecccsecccscceecceecceecceseceuscceseceescsessseeeseessseeceuecs 8 31 8 7 Modbus Host Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series 0 ccc cceccecceeeceeceensseeeseeees 8 3 FloBoss 100 Series The FloBoss 100 Series can act as a Slave device Modbus Master host functionality is only available through the use of a User Program The Local Port COMM1 and COMM2 ports all support Modbus communications The Modbus mapping on the Modbus Registers screen and Modbus History Access Registers screen defines access to Modbus Registers on any communication port on which Modbus Host or Slave is enabled When a communications port is set up as a slave the FloBoss 100 Series can automatically detect whether the incoming communication request is in ROC protocol or Modbus protocol If the Modbus User Program is installed and a communications port is configured as a host the communications port can only support Modbus host functionality ROC800 Series The ROC800 Series can act as a Slave or a Host device and does not require a User Program The Modbus Master mode of operation which is enabled by selecting the correct port owner designation in the ROC gt Comm Ports screen allows the ROC800 Series to simulate a master device that can poll other Modbus devices for d
266. eees 8 16 Analog Outputs Active Alarm o 4 4 5 4 5 15 Rer A Sonar Ree UU NN ROP Ne eee SU a ea Et ORE a 4 9 ACTIVE CONNECIIONS aasian ar ee 3 7 AO Actual Pulse Width nnna 4 18 4 19 POON ANN CC sos a Acces Daciano T eoes oxen ees 4 11 NOCI o OOOO 4 6 4 18 PRT AN eet A E EE ONSE 4 13 Adding Analog OU DUE oscan EE Guuereevee 4 9 TG E E hehe teh do tetnnacttesars decal cnctiteecbieciedsieat 2 16 Genea Eana NE E E PPE eT ero 4 9 ra o EE E EEE E 2 16 POD eea A N EE ON 4 9 Addes renane AN 2 15 3 5 Application Code ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssns 2 13 EET Ge heceeeheceecioi necceeciens sie on cdc ate tatetesiowecs 3 7 ACHIV DPO an 6 12 S a E dieciee ace tiedtet ecteal 3 6 ASCII soeeeneeenscensecaneconscenscennecenecensceaneconcenacennetanaten 8 4 INV OGIOUIS tat aas taeate sc aitatdseiat E et aacatan 3 7 Atmospheric Pressure sceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesen 5 8 5 29 RBX or SRBX cocooooococccocooooooooooooocco ce 9 30 PAULO OULU sa n An 4 23 Adjusted A D Q 4 6 AUTO MAC MOUE amona te esaneleibsa et ancne lust dete 4 3 Adjusted A D 100 seescecssscsssssesssessesstessecssesstesseessees 4 6 AutoScan AGAJ DPT oesi testes 6 19 Update Interval Option ssssss1111ss5rss1111rsssssntettees 1 14 AGA Calculat oinen r delsutetnnes 3 5 Average Raw Values 0 4 6 4 44 AGA LIMIE VENS mirerien ir ETA A 5 31 Averaging Technique ssssesssseeserstressretrreesssetreeesss 5 18 AGAS 199 iara 5 14 AGAT TOJO Forainen T 5 14
267. eeesivetventlasbnaenaabees 6 19 History Configuration ccccccccsssssssssseseeseeeeeees 6 13 MAC Will E T tend E E E 6 18 Eleva OW eeren sneren nanna EEEE EKONET 5 8 5 29 e E E A A A 1 2 BSE OY Rale peseer eee E 5 4 Energy Loday sediveveccnnactacesaterettndienraesaatinactunctmeaeibetoaties 5 4 Energy Y CSCC sciccacasenecananconsenesepbincnqanensbenaniesbacuaentes 5 4 Engineering UNG csncdicccannteveasnsinnvsiensancesdmenndeaanoasvecuacinns 4 3 Erase Workspace 0 sssssseseeceeesecccessseeeesseeeeeses A 13 Ethernet Address 5 o c cadooseedanacseosacoinsseaacdsuncsacseanaeenaraeneane 3 6 Ethernet Dey Corpsin EEANN 2 15 Ethernet POM sta aica cseosacteescodoea eseosaeeinseeaaeesumcsatonseaosauaaten 2 34 PEOD O eee terete re ree renrrer tern errr r ee 4 34 EU VS einioes 4 19 4 26 4 30 5 15 Event Log Reports nsseneneessssssssssssseerrreeerssssssssssns 6 31 Events Acknowledging Modbus sscccceeeeeeeeeeees 8 16 IVC DG r sesannancuneemescs 8 13 8 14 Reading Modbus ccceccceccceeceeeesssseeseseeeeeeeees 8 15 OUR M eea eenia 6 13 Expression Custom Displays ccccccccececccceeeeesssesseeeeeeeeees 12 13 Extended Functions ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 1 Extended History ccccccccssseseeeeeees 1 19 6 3 6 4 6 5 Extemal LO seosibcsrcssncnnopnidikiin aiena 1 19 Extra Key On Delay ccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 31 F Factory Defaul
268. een for a full list of the points assigned to this History Segment The first history point in the Segment is listed on this table as 0 Select the Conversion field to specify the type of conversion required if any on the data The values will be returned as floating point numbers by default Refer to the Event amp Alarm Change Bit Map Contents table The Event Alarm Registers are Modbus Register Numbers used to acquire the Current Date value Current Time value and Event Alarm Logs You may enter registers or use the defaults Using the defaults is highly recommended The Current Date and Current Time values identify the current date and time from the unit and may be most useful to users who want the date and time as floating point numbers in the format of DDMMYY and HHMM For more information on the Modbus retrieval of the Event Alarms log refer to Modbus Events amp Alarms Functionality 8 3 Modbus Events and Alarms Functionality To view the Modbus Event Log and Alarm Log select Configure gt Modbus gt History The record formats for the Event Log and Alarm Log are the same size and have similar contents The first word in a record is a bit map in which bit 9 indicates if the log record is an Event 1 or an Alarm 0 The meanings of the other bits are specific to either the Event or the Alarm Log records Refer to Table 8 6 Event and Alarm Change Bit Map Contents on page 8 17 The ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series support the M
269. egments and points User Programs Displays all installed User Programs ROC800 Series User Data Displays all installed user defined points FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series From the Configuration Tree you may change the configuration or monitor current operations Once you are in the Configuration Tree menu you can use the and l symbols to display or hide various options Double click the desired function in the Configuration Tree to display the associated screen Double clicking an icon is the same as selecting the menu bar or Toolbar button option If this is the first time that you have connected to the ROC or FloBoss continue to the Setting the Clock procedure Refer to Setting the Clock 2 9 Troubleshooting Communications This section details how to troubleshoot connection and communications 2 9 1 Troubleshooting Connection Errors Several events can cause a connection problem Ifthe parameters used by ROCLINK 800 when establishing a communications link to your PC are incorrect a Direct Connect connection cannot be made If ROCLINK 800 software stands idle for too long and exceeds the timeout value for a device a communications failure can also occur In this case simply log back into ROCLINK 800 and use the Direct Connect or Connect features If you do not have security access to the ROC or FloBoss a connection cannot be made A valid User ID and Password must be configured for
270. en expected or entered value and live reading Deviation Entry Reading Deviation Deviation as percent of range Deviation Deviation Span EU Zero EU x 100 Point MVS Deflt Dead Weight or Tester Value Live Reading 0 0000 Laci Y Done Figure 10 3 Verify Calibration ROC800 Series Faint Fixed AH Action Entry Reading Deviation 4 Deviation Verity 100 000 100 000 0 000 0 0000 Dead WeightT ester Value OU Live Reading i 00 0000 Deviation 0 000 Figure 10 4 Verify Calibration ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 10 2 2 Set Zero Calibration After Verifying Calibration calibrate the Zero value 0 of range for the in Differential Pressure orifice only Static Pressure or Temperature This should correspond with the Low Reading EU 0 Count and is the low value for the Meter input 1 Enter the Dead Weight or Tester Value in engineering units This is the input desired for the test value and is the actual value expected by the test equipment being calibrated against For example When calibrating temperature for an RTD input enter the degree value associated with the resistance set up in the decade box or other equipment Set Zero Shift Offset Point MVS Deflt Live Reading 0 0000 7 Cancel Figure 10 5 Set Zero Calibration ROCS800 Series The Point field displays the Point you are c
271. ence Table 1 Workspace FST Edit View Build Monitor Window D to bel Ge a A YW Hea e FARBE Ma a a a wo 8 FST 1 FST 2 FST 3 FST 4 FST5 FST e ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 COMMENTS Not stored in device Use Read Fie to get conr i O SFP 1 DATA z Label gt Oo oo on poo pho e a J rie eee aT ees DJ Mi co Figure A 3 FST Editor The FST Editor provides a Workspace menus and buttons for creating a Function Sequence Table The Title Bar at the top of the Workspace window identifies the FST being created or edited The Workspace area is a table divided into rows and columns with the intersection called a Cell You can use lt Tab gt and the arrow keys to move between cells or you can go directly to a cell by clicking it with the mouse Cells are denoted by a box containing the cursor and a gray line around the cell The Header Line of the Workspace contains the function structure column names The STEP column contains the numbers that correspond to the number of rows or Steps available in the Workspace The LABEL CMD ARGUMENTI and ARGUMENT columns correspond to the structure of the functions The Comment column allows the user to insert comments about the FST The comments will not be downloaded sent to the ROC or FloBoss unit and they are only included in the FST when it is saved to a file Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Table A 2 Workspace and Output Keystrokes
272. eneral Inputs Advanced Alarms Calibration Factors Pressure Tap C Gauge Upstream f bsolute f Downstream Orifice Material Fipe Material Stainless Steel f Stainless Steel Monel C Monel C Carbon f Carbon Ref Temp Ref Temp 68 0 DegF 68 0 Deg F Viscosity O O000063 Lom Ft Sec Sp Heat Ratio 1 3 2 Update y OK 7 Cancel l Apply Figure 5 11 Meter Advanced Orifice ROC800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Turbine Meter Setup X Meter Run 1 Turbine 1 v Tag Turbine 1 General Inputs Advanced Alarms Calibration Factors Mass Meter Press Effect Static Pressure Units Varable K Factors f Gauge Disabled C Absolute k Factor Frequency Miscellaneous Static K Factor al Pulses Lb Ho Flow Time 5 Secs Low Flow Cutoff 0 0 Lb Howr Speed of Sound Enabled C Disabled Measured a U FS ec Calculated 0 U FS ec Zo Ee TTT Copy Update YY OK 7 Cancel l Apply Figure 5 12 Meter Advanced Turbine ROC800 Series i Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 22 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Meter Setup Ed Meter Number 1 Meter 1 Meter Tag Meter HI FRY Method Units Atmospheric Pressure Gravitational 4cceleration f Detailed gt C Calculate Enter f Calculate C Enter A gt Gross 4 45 PSIA 32 1 1479 FSec C Gross2 Orifice Material Pipe Material Bas
273. enerated by a thermocouple sensor These small voltages are converted to temperature values Note Thermocouple modules are only available with ROC800 Series units Select Configure gt I O gt TC Points Examine the default settings and adjust the parameters to suit your application on each of the tabs in the order given below 1 Select Configure gt I O gt TC Points 2 The General tab sets the basic parameters for the TC Input point 3 The Advanced tab enables you to configure features such as filtering and averaging for the selected TC Input 4 The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this TC point 5 After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 42 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 9 1 Thermocouple General Select Configure gt I O gt TC Points The General tab sets the basic parameters for the TC Input point Thermocouple Input Thermocouple 1 TC Default Tag TC Default General Advanced Alarms Point Humber at ruts DegF C Degl i ra39 688 E C Degk C Deg Units Tag deg C Scan Period ADO Cece scanning f Enabled Disabled Active Alarms jo EA Paste 2 Update y OK 7 Cancel Apply Figure 4 39 Thermocouple General ROCS800 Series Select the
274. ennnnssssssseeenssssssssseersssssseeersssssssssereressssssees 12 6 5 Adding an Expression to a Custom Display Object ce eecccccccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees T2620 Diipa ACM SOR i E E to engnyeaeteqse cages 12 7 KEYPAD DISPLAY EDITOR CONFIGURATION eeseeeeeeesessenncecececeececeeeeeeeeeeesssssesaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 7 1 Creating a New Keypad Display File ROC800 Series 12 7 2 Update Keypad Display Firmware ROCS800 SerieS cc eeeccccccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 1273 Edi ne a Keypad Display Filo as cease recccrcrssite ceanreaanctionsig naeran EE 12 7 4 Keypad Display Security ROC800 SerieS ee cecccccccececeeeeeeeecceeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeenees PO DCTIONS Ai BS EGON side so cacaavsesavecssecnnsuvsecesecosaceencndesavianseavessesctuvecsvecesseasesivicsteaere Pee TES DUE OR ee E A E E A E A A 2 FUNCTION SEQUENCE TABLE INTRODUCTION ccccceccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccscceccscsssssssesees Ao PLR GCIR eera EA ecekegne ase T encsataserssascces Aat TS CEDIOR een E AAE A E AA EE E O E AACE ET O S E E A EEA EE E A 4 2 FST Label Field eessorsscrsrrssireririsiresrrsrer isese sonaiaasiatewsetaasatt eE EEN SEEE EENE AEE EEE A 4 3 FST Command Field CMD asinssnsesensenesssessessesssssrssssersessessessessrssessrssrseesersessesseserseesereeeseee AAA FST Pei Fields ARG wetoratsat carct a eedetissariaesosin ter od onsen sane aceeebosiuewiananetenedousinsaneseteaetonbewiauseats AAa wal to
275. ent Response Example Message Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 16 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Table 8 5 Modbus Events and Alarms Log Contents Byte Contents of Event Log Record Contents of Alarm Log Record 1 to 2 Operator change Event Log bit map 16 bit Alarm change bit map 16 bit integer Refer integer Refer to Table Event amp Alarm Change to Table Event amp Alarm Change Bit Map Bit Map Contents Contents 3 to 4 Modbus Register number of variable 16 bit Modbus Register number of variable 16 bit integer integer 5 to 8 Time Stamp HHMMSS 32 bit floating point Time Stamp HHMMSS 32 bit floating point 9to12 Date Stamp MMDDYY 32 bit floating point Date Stamp MMDDYY 32 bit floating point 13 to 16 Previous value of variable 32 bit floating point Current alarmed value of variable 32 bit floating point 17to20 Current New value of variable 32 bit floating Unused at the current time zero filled when point transmitted to the master Table 8 6 Event and Alarm Change Bit Map Contents Bit Operator Change Bit Map Alarm Change Bit Map 0 Fixed value change to an EU value on an I O point in Manual Mode Not Used 1 Zero scale change to the 0 Adjusted on an AO or Al Not Used 2 Full scale change to the 100 Adjusted on an AO or Al Not Used 3 Operator entry work value change to any parameter other than those described Not Used 4
276. ent as 12 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 1000 0 and 51 Unsigned Short 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 16 bit integer A value of 0 1234567 would be Implied 3 sent as 123 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 10000 0 and 52 Unsigned Short 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 16 bit integer A value of 0 1234567 would be Implied 4 sent as 1234 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 100000 0 and 53 Unsigned Short 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 16 bit integer A value of 0 1234567 would be Implied 5 sent as 12345 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 1000000 0 and 54 Unsigned Short 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 16 bit integer A value of 0 01234567 would Implied 6 be sent as 12345 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 10000000 0 and 55 Unsigned Short 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 16 bit integer A value of 0 001234567 would Implied 7 be sent as 12345 Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 27 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Convert Slave Code Description Function Definition Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 100000000 0 56 Unsigned Short 3 4 6 16 jand converted to an unsigned 16 bit integer A value of 0 0001234567 Implied 8 would be sent as 12345 Any type to ROC800 Series only Response is similar to dual register f
277. ents of 240 bytes of memory The hexadecimal values are shown on the left and the ASCII character equivalents are shown on the right Use the Prev Block and Next Block buttons to view the previous or next block 240 bytes of memory If you are viewing data that may be changing click the Update button to refresh the screen with the most recent values from the FloBoss or ROC Click Close to exit the Device Memory screen EZ Device Memory Segment oo00 Offset Rev Dec 05 ogogo 001g og20 003d o040 0050 ogag oo70 oged oo090 ogag OOBO oo0Cco oono OOEFO Oo 1 2 3 4 2 81 6 5 Se Of o0f 0 D Ge O Oh mz 2 D Oe Oe Or Oe Oe Ge Next Block Previous Black Close Figure 6 20 Device Memory ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Configuring and Viewing History 6 35 E2 Device Memory oo000000 Hooo0o0o0 10 ooo000020 HoOo000030 oo000040 oo000050 ooooo0o08O oboo000o070 OOO0008O oo000090 OOO000AO OOoooo0BO opoo0000Cco bo0000D0 OOOOO00ERO Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Address OOO igo gue Gd wea eave ie tl MENDE ee ee Pe eres eee ome ee 2 es eee ee i EN eskiuweewsmicaate eee ee ee i es ee ee ey d ee ee ee ey a eee eee eee chee cew owe eee sediou eee waco coe POE ee an ele EEE ee ee re Figure 6 21 Device Memory FloBoss 100 Series Configuring and Viewing History 6 36 ROCLINK 800 Us
278. enu gt I O menu gt AI AO DI DO and PI Meter menu gt Setup orifice or turbine meter Meter menu gt History Meter run history setup Configure menu gt Control menu gt PID Loop Configure menu gt History Points history database Configure menu gt LCD User List Configure menu gt Radio Power Control for communications sleep mode Utilities menu gt FST Editor View menu gt Display gt New or from File for custom PC displays ROC menu gt Flags for saving and system variables to Flash memory Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 16 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 7 4 Configuration Checklist FloBoss 407 For a FloBoss 407 unit Sd gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt o o o Utilities menu gt ROCLINK 800 Security logon Device Directory gt Comm Port gt Properties PC communication configurations ROC menu gt Security User List and Comm Port Security ROC menu gt Clock ROC menu gt Information system variables ROC menu gt Comm Ports ROC communication configurations Configure menu gt I O menu gt AI AO DI DO PI and MVS Meter menu gt Setup Orifice or Turbine meter Meter menu gt History Meter run history setup Configure menu gt Control menu gt PID Loop Configure menu gt History Points history database Configure menu gt LCD User List Configure menu gt Radio Power Control communications sleep mode Utilities menu gt FST Editor
279. er Down Time power was disconnected For the ROC300 Series the LCD Installed field indicates whether an LCD is connected to the unit 3 2 5 Information System Configuration ROC800 Series Select ROC gt Information The System Configuration tab allows you to specify the four Baud Rates bps possible by the ROC unit at any given time You may use any one of the four baud rates specified on the System Configuration tab A Read Only display on the Comm Ports General screen indicates which of the four Baud Rate Generators is in use Device Information Baud Aate Generator 0 19200 Baud Rate Generator 1 9600 Baud Rate Generator 2 38400 Baud Rate Generator 3 57600 2 Update yY OK 7 Cancel Figure 3 13 Information System Configuration ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 3 2 6 Information Revision Info FloBoss 100 Series Select ROC gt Information The Revision Info tab displays information about the Application Firmware or Accessory software installed in the FloBoss 100 Series unit For example the Accessory field may say I O Card 6 Points or Turbine Interface When the Accessory field displays Not Used there are no additional accessories installed The Part Number and Version control number also display Device Information Application Firmware Part Number WEST 23 R E ner Version Rev 22 ee
280. er Manual Choose the Archive Type to specify how the logged value is calculated included are some special purpose types for FST control 4 4 Disabled Point not configured Avg Flow Dependant Linear This is the default method for calculating the average for the flow input It is the simplest and most commonly used method This method discards samples when there is no measurable flow and performs a straightforward linear average of the remaining samples to compute the minute and hour values For orifice or turbine meters with Analog Input values no flow conditions are defined as the differential pressure meter input less than or equal to the Low Flow Cutoff For turbine meters with a Pulse Input values no flow conditions are defined as the no flow time elapsing without receiving a pulse A linear average of all samples is performed if there is no flow during the logging period Note In the FloBoss 100 Series Flow Dependent and Flow Weighted Averaging Techniques are located in Meter gt Setup gt Inputs tab The first eight History Points are archived appropriately and should not be changed or your EFM Reports will be inaccurate 2 Note The Average Flow Archive Types can be changed however the History Points cannot be changed Avg Flow Dependant Formulaic Like the Flow Dependent Linear method this method discards samples for periods when there is no flow However in calculating the average
281. er Manual SECTION 7 EXTENDED FUNCTIONS This section describes how to configure a ROC or FloBoss to perform extended functions Softpoints Opcodes Samplers Odorizers PID Radio Power Control DS800 Development Suite programs and User Programs In this Chapter Section Page Jal SON IP OMG scare arar rE EN EENE E R E AAA O EE TAE Pe CONS TA aa EEA AE E E EA A R ka sampler OGorzer ROCCO SECTIES Jessiina EEEE EEEa 17 4 7 4 Proportional Integral and Derivative PID ce ecccccccccccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeceeeeesaaeaeeeeeeeeeeaas Pe IRAQIO OWE COMO E E E A E E E T 7 6 DS800 Development Suite Software ROC800 Series nenesssssssssoeressssssssseeresssssssserresssssssees dek User MOS TAI Adminis AlO ses stieec vaise vines inanin arene wed orgie eaea E e EEEE EEEE A ea Po UTDI a E E E ee E E E EN eee 7 1 Soft Points Select Configure gt I O gt Soft Points Softpoints are global storage areas for data that can be used by any ROC or FloBoss application For example a Softpoint may store the results of a specified calculation by an FST or store an intermediate result of a specified value acquired by an FST Softpoints consist of a Tag identifier one integer value and twenty floating values For the ROC800 Series thirty two Softpoints provide storage for over 1200 variables Softpoints consist of ROC800 Series FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 1 tag 10 character string 1 tag 10 charact
282. er Name If the field is to have an abbreviation of the Parameter Name select Parameter Abbreviation If the field is to have the value of the parameter select Parameter Value If the Value selected was Manual Value then enter the text or number in the Text field If the Value selected was Parameter Name Parameter Abbreviation or Parameter Value then select the TLP to be displayed Select Read Only if the TLP selected is to be a display only on the Keypad Display If not selected the TLP will be Read Write if the keypad user has Read write privileges to TLPs in that access group Note that only one field in an entry line can be R W For the Line Entry highlighted Justify determines whether the text or numbers in the entry field will be right or left justified Length determines the maximum length of the text or numbers in the entry field In some circumstances when the Value selected was Parameter Value the user will be allowed to provide text to go before or after the value Leading and Trailing Text will allow units of measurement or some other text to appear on the screen In some circumstances when the Value selected was Parameter Value the user will be allowed to specify whether the Data Format will be the default that has a precision of two characters or another manually entered precision Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 18 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 18 Edit the security settings for the Events Alarms
283. er Program File Cc w Tann FisherUser Programs FB 100M b1 032 bin Browse Tithe Modbus Host COM 1 00 Code Data Type User Comm Pom 3 COM Start Segment 7 Start Segment 17 Size 27504 Segments Segments es Download amp Start Download Figure 7 14 User Program Administrator FloBoss 100 Series Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 23 1 1 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual User Program Administrator User Programe Installed in Device User Program 1 FE HART O MdleWwBS04940022 1 11 USER CRE 024745 Clear Enable Disable Status OFF Menor Usage Segment 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 WT 8 4 6 6 OT 19 60 64 68 EC 70 74 78 7C A0 A4 AS AC BO B4 BS BC CO C4 C8 CC NOOOOOOOM Gm OOOOOOOOO Cc oO L Unused C Used 9 Used by Selected Program Download User Program File fe w TawniFishersUser Programs sFBHIA0 C HOO Browse Title FB HART 10 MdleWweal4sso022 1 11 Lode Data Type USERT Start Segment 6 Start Segment 7 Size OsvFFS Segments B Segments E Download User Program COMPLETED Tee er ree Figure 7 15 User Program Administrator FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series User Program Download Steps To download a User Program 1 2 Select Utilities gt User Program Administrator Determine the amount of memory available in Memory Usage FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 or Device User Program Environment ROC800 Series The memory location must be available
284. er Tag to verify the identity of the Meter Run 2 Click AutoScan or Update AutoScan requests values from the meter until the Freeze or StopScan button is pressed Update requests a single update of new values from the meter 3 Click Freeze to stop the values of the Differential Pressure Low Differential Pressure labeled Low DP Static Pressure and Temperature RTD from being updated during verification or calibration 4 Click the AutoScan or Update and then the Freeze buttons to create the Freeze Value used in ongoing processing such as flow calculations and history logging while calibration is being performed The Calibration Freeze Values field displays the values received from the AI MVS DVS or RTD when the Update button was last pressed Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Open the by pass valve on the valve manifold prior to isolating the sensor from the process to protect the differential cell of the Dual Variable Sensor This Keeps one side of the differential sensor from being subjected to high pressure while the other side has no pressure applied This is required when calibrating either differential or static pressure If you are calibrating a pressure input isolate the Sensor from the process Set up the pressure calibrator and make the necessary connections to the Sensor If you are calibrating a temperature input disconnect the RTD sensor and connect a decade box or comparable equipment t
285. er string 20 floats floating point values 20 floats floating point values 2 longs 32 bit 1 Unassigned Integer 16 Bit 10 shorts 16 bit 10 bytes 8 bit Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Soft Point Softpoints Site aaa Tag Soft Pt 1 Data Integer Flag E Data 1 00 O Data 11 00 Data 2 00 9 Daata joo Daa 3 00 9 Daata o0 8 Data 4 00 Data 14 00 Daa 5 00 Data 15 00 OOOO Data 6 00 O Daae 00 OO Daa 7 00 OOO Daa t7 00 8 Data 8 00 Data 8 00 OOO Data 9 00 OOO Data 19 00 OOOO Daa to o0 Data 20 00 8 Copy Update y OK A Cancel Figure 7 1 Soft Points FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 MB Soft Point Softpoints Reet ae Tag Soft Ft 01 Parameters Float Short ey TTT TT 2 3 4 F B T E J a Cc TAT I mm Copy Update y OF Cancel Figure 7 2 Soft Points ROCS800 Series 1 Select the Softpoint you desire to configure or view Enter the Tag as a 10 character identification name for the Softpoint Enter Float or Data 1 to Data 20 parameters to provide storage for IEEE floating point values 4 Enter Long ROC800 Series parameters to provide storage for 32 bit unsigned integer values Enter Short ROC800 Series parameters to provide storage for 16 bit unsigned integers Enter Byte ROC800 Series parameters to provide storage for 8 bit un
286. ered Value Enable Average Raw Values to average and calculate the raw readings during the Scan Period and use the outcome as the Raw A D Input during EU calculations For example When Enabled a TC Input point configured with a Scan Period of 1 5 seconds obtains a new value from the A D every 100 milliseconds During the Scan Period 10 values are obtained from the A D and summed together At EU calculation the values summed are divided by the Actual Scan Period display and are used as the Raw A D Input Disable this function to acquire instantaneous values Actual Scan displays the actual amount of time in seconds that passes between scans This number should be the same as shown for the Scan Period parameter if the system is not overloaded Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 44 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 9 3 Thermocouple Alarms Select Configure gt I O gt TC Points The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this TC point Thermocouple Input Thermocouple 1 TC Default Tag TC Default Alarming HiHi Alarm 120 0 gea High Alarm 10 0 f Disabled Low Alarm 10 0 RBS LoLa Alarm 20 0 On Alarm Set 5 0 Dn Alarm Clear Sale Aarm po Alarm Deadband 2 0 Copy EA Paste 2 Update y OK 7 Cancel Apply Figure 4 41 Thermocouple Alarms ROCS800 Series When Alarming is Enabled the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband are configured on the Alarms tab When Alarming
287. eressssssssceeessssssssceerrssssssseerrrsssss 11 5 ES PE C e E ont E A E E E 11 6 11 1 Update Firmware The Update Firmware option updates the internal software stored in Flash ROM of a ROC or FloBoss unit by loading it from a file This option does not update ROCLINK 800 software Firmware cannot be updated over an Ethernet connection Note Use caution as the Update Firmware procedure clears the configuration of the ROC or FloBoss unit and reloads data when the Restore functions are selected The Event Log Alarm Log and History logs are cleared If you want to preserve the contents of the Event and Alarm Logs be sure to save them to a file Collect Data procedure before starting Note that the Event and Alarm Logs cannot be reloaded 1 Create a backup copy of the firmware update disk or download the firmware file from the Emerson website 2 Read the README text file included with the firmware update 3 Select Utilities gt Update Firmware 4 Select the Save Device Configuration Before Firmware Update checkbox to save the current configuration calibration and communication settings and FSTs to the specified directory 5 Select the Restore Device Configuration After Firmware Update checkbox to restore the configuration file after the update Use the Browse button to define the path and file name in the Config File or File Name field Note The configuration may also be saved during an update by saving the configu
288. ers You can either enable or disable alarming for each Station Alarms can be configured for the individual Meter Runs and or the Stations generating meter specific and or Station wide alarm conditions If you enable alarms the alarms can be configured using the Alarms tab and are logged to the Alarm Log To conserve log space alarms should be enabled only when necessary If you disable alarms no alarm generates for this point regardless of the Alarm configuration Alarm conditions display in the Active Alarms fields located in the Station Configuration General tab Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so that no false alarms generate Station Setup Station 1 Station 1 Tag Station 1 Alarming High Alarm 0000 0 MEF dap i Disabled apalen 1000 0 MCF day Alam on YolurneDay aaa E r Alarm Deadband l MCF day RE On Alarm Set On lar Clear Copy 2 Update Y OF 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 5 4 Station Alarms ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Select Alarming as Disabled No alarms occur for this Station Alarm on Volume Day Alarm values occur based on volumetric flow rate per day Alarm on Mass Day Alarm values occur based on mass flow rate per day Enter the High Alarm limit value in engineering units to which the Volumetric or Mass Flow Rate value must
289. ers sceseeses eee neatcatececceane sete E E 2 DIVO ORT Y cd cpp hata pay ns E 2 3 1 Device Security Users ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series cceeececeessseeeeeeees 2 3 2 Device Security Users FloBoss 407 accanscee ssssusnecetencdewasancoatentccesevandaracwastiesveeniendededoseacel 2 3 3 Device Security Users ROC300 Series nssssssoooeesssssssseersssssssscerrssssssssscreresssssseeerrssssne Dee Doyice Sec UN COB S ee E E S 2 3 5 Device Security Comm Ports ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series 2 3 6 Device Security Users Group Summary ROC800 Series ssssseensssssssssserrsssssssseeeeees 2 4 LICENSE KEY ADMINISTRATOR ROC800 SERIES ccccccsecccsecccsecccuscceseccesccesscseesssseeseuessuuess 29 DEVICE DIR BC DOR Y san ccscsssecdeorzatecepnedercepsauoosonnieadeossawacosseuencesssatadecaeiendeossasnoseauetespsaakeeesaerenteotainee 2o WIC VICE IR OO lrsasesrseis tapes descr sees satis sede erecta rer asa sas ice panes aes E 2 6 ROCLINK 800 COMMUNICATIONS Jgssccnisdisusnscnsaedasseidesosseawoniiotapiuscdaswsdgsdadesessdbawoniiotadascdeaweoeseeey 2 6 1 ROCLINK 800 Communications General ccc ccccccseccceccceccessceeccessceeeseessseesceuess 2 6 2 ROCLINK 800 Communications Advanced cceeccccccceecceecccecceeceeessessceeessensseesseeuss Rev Dec 05 Table of Contents lil ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 7 COMMUNICATION PORTS ON THE ROC AND FLOBOSS c ccececececcccece
290. es 3 19 Figure 3 19 Flags Advanced FloBoss 407 and ROC 500 SeMeS herran eE aE E tinier toads 3 19 Figure 3 20 Flags Advanced FloBoss 100 Series sue eh tose ata AA EE E N A N E A E E 3 20 Figure 3 21 Flags User Programs FloBoss 407 and ROC 300 Semes ocre E 3 22 Figure 3 22 Flags User Programs FloBoss 100 Series REEE AA I natal E arta EAA EA A A 3 22 Figure 4 1 AI General ROC800 Series 4 2 Figure 4 2 AI General FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series essesensosessesssssesessesrssesres 4 3 Figure 4 3 AI Advanced ROC800 Series 4 4 Figure 4 4 AI Advanced ROC300 Series 4 5 Figure 4 5 AI Advanced FloBoss 407 0 4 5 Figure 4 6 AI Advanced FloBoss 100 Series 4 6 Figure 4 7 AI Alarms ROC800 Series and ROC300 oT EE T N E TTE A Geen tee E AA AA EEEE ees 4 7 Figure 4 8 AI Alarms FloBoss 407 and FloBoss 100 SEES S a N EEN OENE 4 8 Figure 4 9 AO General ROC800 Series 4 9 Figure 4 10 Analog Outputs FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 SerieS c ee eececcceseeeeeeeees 4 10 Figure 4 11 AO Advanced ROC800 Series 4 1 Figure 4 12 AO Advanced FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 SerieS ce eeecccceseeceeeeees 4 12 Figure 4 13 AO Alarms ROC800 Series 4 13 Figure 4 14 Discrete Inputs General ROC80
291. es Select ROC gt Security Click the Comm Ports tab For each communications port select one of the following Security on options Disabled All login requests are accepted User ID Enabled Login requests are accepted if the Operator ID and Password are valid Upon successful login full access is allowed User Access Level Enabled Login requests are accepted if the Operator ID and Password are valid Upon successful login the user is restricted by access level Refer to Table 2 1 Security Access Levels on page 2 2 Device Security Ed Security on LOI Security an COM Security on COM 2 m User ID User Access Oise f Enabled Level Enabled Secunty on COM S m User ID User Access Disabled Fabled oe Secunty on COM 4 n User ID User Access Disabled we wed Level Enabled Security on COMS mEnE User ID User ccess Disabled Fo cbled ee 2 Update y OK 4 Cancel Af Apply Figure 2 7 Device Security Comm Ports ROCS800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 3 6 Device Security Users Group Summary ROC800 Series Select ROC gt Security Click the Users Group Summary tab For ROC800 Series units with firmware version 1 50 or greater the User Group Summary tab displays which users belong to which Group Use the Users and Groups table to quickly make changes to the ROC gt
292. es J Eao L csncceccsesaucacecssoseasetaecaccunnsevesssuaseaeesseauyssseaseadusaysaceantestoseannsasesoussusessauenaeussseaueasecanses scons I 1 Rev Dec 05 Table of Contents ix ROCLINK 800 User Manual SECTION 1 ROCLINK 800 SOFTWARE BASICS This section describes how to use the ROCLINK 800 Configuration Software to configure and monitor ROC800 Series Remote Operations Controllers ROC300 Series FloBoss 407 Flow Managers and FloBoss 100 Series devices The software runs on a personal computer that uses the Windows 98 or higher operating system This user manual covers configuration calibration monitoring database archiving custom displays and embedded utilities In this Chapter Section Page 1 1 ROCLINK 800 Software Description ssseeseeeeessssssseeerrsssssssscerrssssssssecrressssssseererssssssseeeresssssses 1 1 1 2 COMMUTE FR COM IMC IMC IS csee EEEE EEE EE E EE EAE E Traa 1 3 Contacting the Flow Computer Division ccccccssesssseceeeeecceeeeeseeecceeeeeaaeesseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeas LA SON EOT eset cere E E E E ceeds 1 5 Starting ROCLINK 800 Software cecccccccccccesssseeeecceeeeeeeeaeeesseeeeeeeeeeaeeesseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 1 4 LO T rne ASICS an ERE E E A ER E E ER 1 6 L COn AEG a E a E ten l 14 LS Creatine aNew Configuration NC ossis oa E E EE Aare 1 18 1 1 ROCLINK 800 Software Description ROCLINK 800 Configuration Software provides the capability to monitor configure and calibrate
293. es or millimeters Enter the Low Flow Cutoff when the differential pressure value of the metering device is less than the Low Flow Cutoff value the calculated flow rate 1s set to zero A No Flow alarm is recorded in the Alarm Log if Alarming is Enabled For the AGA3 calculation method this value is in terms of inches of water column or kPa Enter the Integral Multiplier Period IMP FloBoss 103 to indicate the frequency of calculation in minutes of the Integral Multiplier Value IMV in the flow orifice equation Note that the Integral Value IV portion of the flow equation is calculated once per second The Integral Multiplier Period is the amount of time in minutes between calculations of the combined correctional factors called the Integral Multiplier Value IMV in the API measurement standard Section 21 Section 1 Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 14 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The IMP can be no more than 60 minutes in length the default is 15 minutes and cannot be less than 1 minute For a FloBoss 100 Series unit enter the Base Multiplier Period BMP to indicate the frequency of calculations The Base Multiplier Period is the amount of time in minutes between turbine calculations of the combined correctional factors called the Base Multiplier Value BMV in the API measurement standard Section 21 Section 1 The BMV is multiplied by the actual uncorrected volume to arrive at the quantity accumulated for the period To
294. eters Calibrated Gravitational Acceleration and User Correction Factor are configured on the Instrument Factors tab of the Meter Setup screen If you have an MVS sensor refer to the Sensor Calibration section in the ROC or FloBoss Accessories Instruction Manual Form A4637 for the recommended way to remove restore the MVS from to working pressure during calibration Failure to follow recommendations may cause sensor damage If you have a DVS Sensor refer to the Calibration section of the appropriate FloBoss hardware manual for the recommended way to remove restore the DVS from to working pressure during calibration Failure to follow recommendations may cause sensor damage Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 10 1 1 Calibration Report If required create a Calibration Report to record the calibration procedure 10 1 1 1 Creating a Calibration Report 1 Click Freeze to stop the values of the Analog MVS HART and Temperature RTD inputs from being updated during verification or calibration 2 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog to create a Calibration Report 3 Enter the File name of the Calibration Report and use the default extension of 800 or cal to represent calibration Click Save 4 The Calibration Report File is created in the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK 800 unless you specify another Directory Drive Once the calibration is complete the report can be viewed using a text editor o
295. ew gt History selection the user can view history directly from the device or from a previously saved disk file FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units have several History Points that are pre configured defaults In the ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 these may be changed by the user to suit the application For ROC800 Series the required History Points for AGA3 and AGA7 calculation methods are not pre configured You should begin the configuration of an AGA calculated Meter Run by configuring those points Make sure that the History Points for each Meter Run are configured to allow the EFM Report utility to properly access data Refer to Configuring History for EFM Reporting Note In the ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 History Points configured in the Meter gt History screen overwrite History Points configured in Configure gt History Point screen Several options are available for the type of history values archived Archive Type Linear averaging is available for all Parameters Meter run and Station Parameters may be averaged using one of the four averaging techniques recommended in API Section 21 1 flow dependent linear flow dependent formulaic flow weighted linear and flow weighted formulaic Parameters that represent a rate engineering units time period may be accumulated integrated to give total values when the time period of the rate is specified Parameters that represent an accumulated total can be to
296. f Daily Indexes 1 History Segment History Point Stores value in RR 2 Month Day Returns 1 if Month Day not found PIS Starting Periodic Index 1 History Segment History Point Stores value in RR 2 Month Day Returns 1 if Month Day not found PIN Number of Periodic Indexes 1 History Segment History Point Stores value in RR 2 Month Day Returns 1 if Month Day not found Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 29 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Name Description Arguments Results GTE Extract Time Element 1 DB Point or Constant History Stores value in RR Index Valid Time Elements Time in Seconds since 1 1 1970 10 Month 2 Time Element 1 Day 2 Year 3 Hour 4 Minute 5 Second Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 30 ROCLINK 800 User Manual GLOSSARY A A D Analog to Digital signal conversion AGA American Gas Association Association that oversees the AGA 3 orifice AGA 5 heating value AGA 7 turbine AGA 8 compressibility and AGA 11 ultrasonic gas flow calculations standards For more information refer to the AGA website http www aga org AI Analog Input AO Analog Output Attribute A parameter that provides information about an aspect of a database point For example the alarm attribute is an attribute that uniquely identifies the configured value of an alarm B BMV Base Multiplier Value Used in AGA7 turbine calculations BPS Bits Per Seco
297. f Enabled f Enabled C Disabled Disabled f None C LOI to COM f COMI to LOI Set ATS High for 30 secs C LOI to COM LOI Fort m p amp pas Come COM to LOI COM to COM COM to COM Power Saving Mode f Enabled C Disabled 2 Update Y OK Cancel Figure 3 20 Flags Advanced FloBoss 100 Series Select CRC Check Enabled to perform CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check checking on ROC Protocol and ROC Plus Protocol communications Select I O Scanning Enabled so I O is in normal scan mode When Disabled all I O scanning is stopped and the last values are used until scanning is resumed This includes MVS sensors You can Enable and Disable I O Scanning on the I O point displays LEDs ROC800 Series with the exception of the LED on the Power module can be enabled or disabled as a power saving feature This parameter determines how long the LEDs remain on after the LED button on the CPU module is pressed For instance with the default setting of 5 minutes all LEDs will go off If you press the LED button the LEDs become active again for 5 minutes By placing a O zero in this field the LEDs always stay active For a FloBoss 100 Series Power Saving Mode when enabled allows the FloBoss unit to enter sleep mode when no activity is occurring When disabled the FloBoss unit will stay awake not enter sleep mode during no activity periods Enabled is the default For a FloBoss 100 Series select a Pass Th
298. f the CD ROM runs automatically click the Install a ROCLINK Product button in the Main Menu C Click the Install ROCLINK 800 button in the Installation Screen Note If the CD ROM does not run automatically click Windows Start gt Run When the Run dialog box opens click the Browse button and navigate to the CD ROM drive and select Setup exe Click the Open button If the CD ROM drive is drive D the location will be D Installs ROCLINK800_ W68130 Setup exe Click OK in the Run dialog box Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 2 1 4 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Method 2 If you have zip file that contains the ROCLINK 800 installation files A Extract the zip file to the local hard drive for example in the C TEMP directory B Run setup exe from extraction location for example run C TEMP SETUP EXE The Installation Wizard screen appears The Installation Wizard determines whether ROCLINK 800 has been installed previously If this is an upgrade a dialog box appears asking whether to continue with the upgrade Click Yes Installation begins Click Next when prompted If this is a new installation click Next in the ROCLINK 800 Welcome screen Read the License Agreement and click Yes to confirm Enter your Name and Company name and click Next Select a destination folder if you want to install the software in a folder other than the default C Program Files ROCLINK800 The ROCLINK800 default folder is rec
299. figuration Select Configure gt I O gt System AI Points General tab sets the basic parameters for the AI Input point The Advanced tab enables you to configure features such as filtering averaging and clipping for the selected Input 3 The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this AI point After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 46 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 10 1 System Al General ROC800 Series Select Configure gt I O gt System AI Points gt General to set the basic parameters for the AI Input point system Analog Input Analog Inputs 1 Battery Tag Battery General Advanced Alarms Sint Muraber ow EU Value Units Scanning one C Walts Enabled si E C Disabled Unite Volts Scan Period al Secs Low Reading EL 0 0 High Reading EU 1 5 225 Active Alarms E E Update Y OK A Cancel i Apply Figure 4 42 System AI General ROCS800 Series System AI Number In the ROC800 Series System AI 1 Battery System AI 2 Charge Voltage System AI 3 Module Voltage System AT 4 AI Default System AI 5 Board Temperature gt 6M Note For the FloBoss 100 Series or FloBoss 407 select Configure gt I O gt Analog Input The Sys
300. fying the point using the following table The TLP will be the source TLP of the alarm The type will be set to 1 Bit Map Time as float Date as float Value as float eee 12 13 14 115 16 17 18 19 FST Alarms If the Alarm is an FST Alarm the above following will be used The FST will be the source FST Number that generated the alarm Unused will be set to zero and the type will be set to 2 Bit Map Time as float Date as float Value as float FST Ott 2s t4ts yet 7 ele oy 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 User Text Alarms If the Alarm is a User Text Alarm the following format will be used Text is filled in with seven bytes of User Text and the Type will be set to 3 Bit Map Time as float Date as float Ott 2s i47s1et7 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 User Value Alarms If the alarm is a User Value Alarm the following format will be used Unused will be set to zero and the Type will be set to 4 Bit Map Time as float Date as float Value as float Olt 2s t4ts yet 7 ele of 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 3 2 Reading Modbus Events and Alarms Register The Modbus request to read the Event Log and Alarm Log uses the standard read Function Codes 03 or 04 and the Register Number defined in the History Access configuration In this request the number of Registers is included to maintain format compatibility but 1s ignored by the receiving ROC or FloBoss unit Twenty bytes are returned fo
301. g Inputs and Outputs I O 4 43 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Scan Period as the amount of time between updates of the Filter value All TC Inputs are updated based on their individual Scan Periods The default value is 1 second The minimum scan period allowed is 100 mSec The Active Alarms field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is set to Enabled the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear If Alarming is set to Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is disabled 4 9 2 Thermocouple Advanced Select Configure gt I O gt TC Points The Advanced tab enables you to configure features such as filtering and averaging for the selected TC Input Thermocouple Input Thermocouple 1 TC Default Tag TC Default Filter 0 Actual Scan 0 999992 Seconds Average Faw Value C Enabled Disabled Copy EA Paste 2 Update YY OK A Cancel i Apply Figure 4 40 Thermocouple Advanced ROCS800 Series Enter a Filter value which is a weighted sample using a percentage of the last value plus a percentage of the new value The entered data is the percentage of the last value used The filter 1s calculated every Scan Period by the formula Last Value x Entered New Value x 100 Entered Filt
302. g System Parameters 3 16 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Table 3 1 ROC gt Flag Definitions Button Dewis SCHON Clear Flash Memory Clears all Flash memory Clear History Configuration and Data Cold Start Cold Start amp Clear Alarms Cold Start amp Clear Alarms Events Cold Start amp Clear All Cold Start amp Clear Displays Cold Start amp Clear Events Cold Start amp Clear FSTs Cold Start amp Clear History Cold Start amp Clear History Data From Factory Defaults Restore Configuration History Configuration amp Data Clear Save Configuration Flash Memory Warm Start Rev Dec 05 ROC800 Series All ROC800 Series FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 All FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 ROC800 Series All FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 ROC800 Series ROC800 Series ROC800 Series All Configuring System Parameters Clears all Historical Database files and clears the Historical Database configuration Restores a configuration from default values stored in Flash memory If the configuration memory is not valid the factory default settings are used Restores a configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clears the Alarm Log Restores a configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clears the Alarm Log and Event Log Restores a configuration from default values
303. g System of your PC use the required method to place the shortcut file into the startup folder 1 4 3 Un Installing ROCLINK 800 To remove ROCLINK 800 software from a personal computer perform the following steps 1 D N RYN Click the Windows Start button Select Settings gt Control Panel Double click the Add Remove Programs icon Select ROCLINK 800 Click Add Remove button Follow the instructions 1 5 Starting ROCLINK 800 Software To use ROCLINK 800 software to configure a hardware device you must have the ROC or FloBoss properly connected to power and I O Refer to the appropriate hardware instruction manual Initially the ROC should also be connected to a personal computer PC running ROCLINK 800 using the Local Operator Interface LOD serial modem or Ethernet port To run ROCLINK 800 software perform one of the following steps 4 4 4 Double click the Desktop shortcut Select Start gt Programs gt ROCLINK 800 gt ROCLINK 800 Double click the file ROCLINK exe located in C Program Files Roclink800 the default directory or wherever you installed ROCLINK 800 software The software loads and initializes Note You can only run one version of ROCLINK 800 software at a time Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 5 1 Logging On To log on to ROCLINK 800 Software 1 Connect the ROC or FloBoss to the Local Operator Interface LOI Local Port and laun
304. gain and download it to the ROC unit after editing 12 7 2 Update Keypad Display Firmware ROC800 Series The firmware in the Keypad Display can be updated while connected by a serial or TCP IP Ethernet communications connection 1 m e p P The updated firmware files are typically supplied on in a zip file It is recommended that you create a backup copy of the firmware update file after you unzip the file Read the README text file included with the firmware update Select Utilities gt Update Firmware and select the Keypad Display tab Click the Browse button and navigate to the new firmware file on the PC Once the file is found click the Start button The update may take a while do not interrupt the update while it is in progress Click the OK button when the Firmware Update Completed dialog box appears Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 12 7 3 Editing a Keypad Display File You may edit an existing Keypad Display file using the Keypad Display Editor A default file typically named display_config dcfg may be used in its current state or customized to suit your application The default file is available with ROCLINK 800 software version 1 50 or greater To modify a display file 1 2 Select Utilities gt Keypad Display Editor Click the Read Device button in the right pane of the editor if file is stored in the ROC unit or the Open File button if file 1s saved
305. gt If RR gt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 X X LABEL gt If RR gt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 X X LABEL Time ST Set Timer ARGUMENT1 to ARGUMENT2 X X 100 mSec intervals or 1 second for FloBoss 100 series CT If Timer ARGUMENT1 gt 0 go to LABEL X X ARGUMENT2 WT Suspend FST execution for ARGUMENT 1 X X Secs DWK RR Day of Week 1 Sunday 7 Saturday X X MND RR Minutes since midnight X X Control AO Set AO ARGUMENT1 output X X ARGUMENT2 EUs DO Set DO ARGUMENTT 1 status X X ARGUMENT2 TDO Force Discrete Output Recalculation X X Database VAL RR Value specified in ARGUMENT1 X X SAV Write RR to variable specified in X X ARGUMENT1 RDB Read History Value into RR X X WDB Write RR Value to History X X WTM Write Current Time to History X X DHV Read Daily History Value into RR X DHT Read Daily History Time Stamp into RR X PHV Read Periodic History Value into RR X PHT Read Periodic History Time Stamp into X MHV Read Minute History Value into RR X DIS Read Starting Daily History Index into RR X DIN Read Number of Daily History Indexes into RR X PIS Read Starting Periodic History Index into RR X PIN Read Number of Periodic History Indexes into X RR Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FloBoss 100 Series Category Command Action ROC300 Series and i pi FloBoss 407 GTE Extract Time Element from Time Stamp into X RR Miscellaneous GO Jump to ST
306. gure TPO r 7 4 7 5 7 18 7 21 History Points cccccccssssssesseseeeeeeeeeeeees 6 1 6 3 6 5 History Segments ccvcesievascsovevesanonteaiadenesererestrerweredevens 6 8 O E E E T 4 2 4 9 4 14 4 21 4 29 E EE SAT 4 38 4 42 4 46 4 50 7 1 E S D E E E EE A E T 12 5 LCD User Lis Gennin 12 6 ModD s eee ee 8 1 8 18 8 29 Opcode TaD IC cass cantascmssacanencetensessucdacscensatanceusotascnaes 7 3 Configuring Device Information c cece ceeccceecceescesceeeseueees 3 2 VIS COT 9 deat caine sec comilnsa E 6 1 History POMS sacsientsiecncmnscacwentesiisenaptaccesdinannpeaddentess 6 10 Meter TIS COTY areira sacs 6 10 SVS CCM Plil Sasra a 3 15 System Parameters scscccvewassaacenceseduaesnseedemtandveuattentus 3 1 T E E A AA AP A A EEA 2 18 2 37 CO rr E E EEE 2 29 D a E E E 2 36 VMS EA A E A A ae ene oe A 2 28 2 Contacting the Flow Computer Division 1 2 Continuous Polling for Modbus 1 0 0 ccccccsssssssesseeeeeeeeeeees 2 21 Contract Hour cccec cee ceeceecceeceeceeees 3 5 4 31 5 3 6 9 Control Configuration c ssseeesssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeens 1 19 Control Related Commands BS E EEE EI OTI EN A ote acces A 24 CONV E A T E 4 31 Convert Codes MODUS cansarse a Te EEEE 8 23 COnvert EPM File vicdcvvccseiveonticicnverscinusiwnctussdecxdancdeeves 6 19 CRC Check iene te ae rarer einer e Na 2 21 3 20 Creating FO asses whence oecse stesso anes caiete aca cae t aneeeaeeoee A 10 New Conf
307. h the device through a serial port COM port For successful communications the Baud Rate setup in the ROC and the Baud Rate set here for the PC must match If you are having difficulties communicating to your device set the Baud Rate in both the device and the computer to 19200 bps Note When using a FloBoss 100 Series you may need to set the Baud Rate to 9600 bps if you are communicating simultaneously with external devices Phone Number If in the Use portion of the screen you selected Modem enter the Phone Number of the device to be dialed by ROCLINK 800 software Modem Use the Modem drop down list box to choose your modem Only the modems set up from the Modems dialog box in the Window s Control Panel on your PC display Ensure that the selected modem is properly setup Override Default TAPI Init String Enter a value to override your modem s default Initialization String configuration IP Address If in the Use portion of the screen you selected TCP IP enter the IP Address and Port Number so the Ethernet port of a ROC800 Series controller may be accessed by ROCLINK 800 software Enter the IP Address of the ROC to be accessed The default IP Address for a ROC is 10 0 0 2 Port Number The Port Number of the ROC to be accessed The default Port Number for a ROC is 4000 If these default values are changed in the ROC800 Series all ROC Plus communications over TCP IP connections will be closed and you will
308. hat the Discrete Input is active versus the time it is inactive is converted into a quantitative value similar to an Analog Input The TDI tab provides additional parameters to specify scaling and engineering unit conversion The Active Alarms field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is set to Enabled the active alarms appear Even if Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear If Alarming is set to Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled 4 4 2 Dl Advanced Select Configure gt I O gt DI Points The Advanced tab lets you configure features such as filtering input inversion and counter values for the Discrete Input Discrete Input Discrete Inputs 1 DI Default Tag Di Default Input f Moral C inverted Filter o3 Seconds Accumulated Value oO On Counter oo Off Counter 109889 3 Actual Scan 0 049956 Seconds Copy E Paste 2 Update y OK 7 Cancel l Apply Figure 4 16 Discrete Inputs Advanced ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 16 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Discrete Input Discrete Inputs 1 Dl Default Tag Di Default Filter Intervals Input 0 25 Seconde 15 0 Seconds f Normal CO Inverted Filter 20 Accumulated Value OO On Counter oO Off Counter 149870364 Copy EA Paste 2 Update
309. hat the Start Register is mapped to the selected TLP Subsequent registers through the End Register are mapped to the same point type and point logical number and increment the parameter number Example When using Point Indexing the configuration of Starting Register Ending Register Device Parameter s Conversion specifies four Registers 100 101 102 and 103 that are mapped to a group of Analog Input AIN values in engineering units EU starting at the Analog Input in the fourth module location first position 4 1 Register 100 EU of AIN point in location 4 1 Register 101 EU of AIN point in location 4 2 Register 102 EU of AIN point in location 4 3 Register 103 EU of AIN point in location 4 4 Example When using Parameter Indexing the configuration of Starting Register Ending Register Device Parameter s FST 1 Ri specifies six Registers 109 110 111 112 113 and 114 that are mapped to a group of FST 1 parameters starting at FST Register 1 Modbus Register 109 Register 1 of FST Point Number 1 Modbus Register 110 Register 2 of FST Point Number 1 Modbus Register 111 Register 3 of FST Point Number 1 Modbus Register 112 Register 4 of FST Point Number 1 Modbus Register 113 Register 5 of FST Point Number 1 Modbus Register 114 Register 6 of FST Point Number 1 i gt gt gt gt Conversion Code 1 Float to Integer Float Scale 1 is used to convert the floating
310. have to re establish a connection Port Numbers 1113 and 1131 are reserved If Login to ROCLINK 800 Configuration software fails then the TCP IP connection closes Note If the number of active ROC Plus Protocol using TCP IP connections displayed on the ROC gt Information gt Internet tab is 6 then you will not be able to establish a connection Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 6 2 ROCLINK 800 Communications Advanced Use the ROCLINK 800 Communications Advanced tab to configure advanced communications for the PC running ROCLINK 800 software 1 Select the Device Root directory icon 2 Right mouse click on a communications icon 3 Select Properties 4 Click the Advanced tab ROCLINK 800 Communication Parameters Advanced Features Number of Retries 3 Time Out E Secs Tx Delay 0 05 Secs kep Off Delay 0 Secs Host CAC Check i Enabled C Disabled y OK 7 Cancel l Apply Figure 2 13 ROCLINK 800 Communications Example Advanced ROCS800 Series Number of Retries Can be set from 0 to 25 Once connected ROCLINK 800 will attempt to request data This is the number of times to try after the initial attempt to request data from the specified device and before reporting a timeout error Adjust the amount of time between retries using the Time Out parameter The Number of Retries parameter does not apply to the dial up modem which only tries
311. he Device Parameter to specify the parameter of the Point Types you desire to set or acquire data Be aware of the different data types Character Integer Long Float and the size of the data types Use the TLP button to select parameters Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 22 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The Device Parameter field denotes the type of data associated with an address Starting Register through Ending Register When the Host requests a valid range of register numbers the Function Code tells the Slave what to do and between which registers Starting Register through Ending Register The Device Parameter defines what data is collected or which parameter is set Specify the type of Conversion required if any on the data before it is sent to the host or before it is written to the ROC or FloBoss device The conversions are used to allow for differences in data types between the master and slave devices Refer to the Modbus Register Definition Defaults FloBoss 100 Series table Conversion codes affect Function Codes 3 4 6 8 and 16 Select the Communication Port ROC800 Series for use with this entry Register numbers should be unique for any given communications port Registers may be duplicated as long as they are assigned to separate ports If a register number is duplicated within the port the first occurrence is used 8 4 1 Modbus Conversion ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series Conversion codes convert the
312. he ROC To download a display file once a display has been created and saved to disk file use the Browse button to search for the display file and download it The Flash File System information may be used to determine how much space is available before downloading displays Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 12 7 Keypad Display Editor Configuration Select Utilities gt Keypad Display Editor to create and edit Keypad Display files for the ROC800 Series unit These files may be stored on the PC or downloaded to the ROC unit While in use on the ROC Keypad Display the display file resides in the configuration memory of the ROC unit Note Keypad Display files have the extension dcfg The Keypad Display editor is available while on line with a ROC800 Series unit that has a ROC Keypad Display connected The Keypad Display is intended to display and allow interaction with TLPs in the ROC database An understanding of TLPs is crucial to configuring a Keypad Display file TLP refers to Point Type Logical number Instance and Parameter For example TLP DIN 4 2 ACC is the Accumulated Value parameter of channel 2 of the Discrete Input module in slot 4 This TLP can also be expressed numerically as 101 4 2 6 12 7 1 Creating a New Keypad Display File ROC800 Series Display files may be created in one of two ways by editing an existing file or by creating one in the editor When you
313. he Setpoint for the Override loop will be the pressure value where control should switch to the override loop Set the Loop Period in seconds This is typically set to one fourth of the time required for the actuator to move the valve from fully open to fully closed On the Tuning tab select the Override Type Select of Low This causes the lower of the change in outputs from the primary and secondary loops to be selected As the pressure approaches the Override Setpoint the pressure Override loop will pinch back the output At the point that the pressure loop requests an output change less than the flow primary loop the output from the pressure loop will be selected and control the valve Set the Scale Factor for each of the Primary and Override loops as span of output span of input Both loops have negative scale factors in order to have the control action close the valve when the Process Variable is above the Setpoint With the scale factor set per the above formula the initial settings for gain reset and rate will under most circumstances produce stable control The gain controls the magnitude of the initial change in output for a given change in the Process Variable or Setpoint The reset controls the magnitude of the change in output based on the continuing difference between the Process Variable and the Setpoint over time Then these may be then adjusted to give the desired control actions 7 5 Radio Power Control Sel
314. ho 4 OE a a be e ivf 0 v4 Analog Input k Analog Output IH Discrete Input HE Discrete Output TW Pulse Input W ATE 4 Thermocouple i System Analog Input MS Sensor Se Soft Point Control FST Registers ful PID Loop Me Radio Power Control Me SamplerUdorizer Ms D5500 Meter System History User Program User Display amp E Ti Figure l 7 Configuration Tree Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 20 ROCLINK 800 User Manual SECTION 2 CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS AND SECURITY This section describes how to configure the communication ports on a PC and on a ROC or FloBoss It also describes how to use the Connect and Direct Connect features in ROCLINK 800 software and security controlling access to the ROC or FloBoss and ROCLINK 800 software Security can be controlled in two ways ROCLINK 800 Security The ROCLINK 800 Security screen allows you to control who can log on to ROCLINK 800 software and which screens they can access Refer to Section 2 2 ROCLINK 800 Security on page 2 5 Device Security Device Security screen controls who has access to the Comm Ports on the ROC or FloBoss device Refer to Section 2 3 Device Security on page 2 6 Note Security Access Levels enable you to control which users have access to specific ROCLINK 800 functions Refer to Section 2 1 Security Access Levels on page 2 2 Before at
315. ice like a turbine meter or Mass Micro Motion Coriolis Mass Meter or similar mass meter The Calculation Standard is used for calculations The calculation of flow in a Meter Run depends on the type of FloBoss or ROC being configured Calculation methods include AGA3 1992 Orifice metering AGA7 1996 Turbine Rotary or other linear meters AGAS compressibility method ISO 1992 Turbine Rotary or other linear meters AGA8 compressibility method You can either enable or disable Alarming for this point For the ROC800 Series Alarming is Enabled or Disabled in the Meter gt Setup gt Orifice or Turbine gt Alarms tab For the FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 Alarming is Enabled or Disabled in the Meter gt Setup gt General tab If you enable alarms the alarms can be configured using the Alarms tab in the Meter Setup screen If Enabled alarms are also logged to the Alarm Log If you disable alarms no alarm generates for this point regardless of the Alarm configuration Alarm conditions display in the Active Alarms field Enter the Scan Period FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series value in seconds to determine how often the orifice or turbine meter flow calculation is to be performed Enter the inside Pipe Diameter of the pipe near the orifice plate in this Meter Run The units are inches or millimeters Enter the Orifice Diameter of the orifice plate in this Meter Run The units are inch
316. ice poll mode Is configured back to the proper setting Freeze Value mo Calibrate Copy B Paste Update Y OK Cancel Figure 10 15 HART Calibration Verify that the Communication Mode on the General tab is set to Point to Point Open the Device tab and verify that the Poll Mode is set to Skip This Device 1 2 3 4 5 Select the Point Number to calibrate Select the Calibration tab Click Calibrate Enter a value for Set Zero Enter a value for Set Span When returned to the Calibration tab the calibration routine is complete Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 10 3 Analog Input Calibration Values Select Utilities gt AI Calibration Values to view all the calibration values for a specific Analog Input point such as the Diff Pres differential pressure Al Calibration Values Point e Ee Raw Value 1 519 EU Value 1 oo Raw Value 2 4095 EU Value 2 100 000 Raw Value 3 4095 EU Value 3 100 000 Faw Value 4 4095 EU Value 4 100 000 Raw Value 5 4095 EU value 5 1 00 0 Press Effect 0 0 Timer 3600 0 Set EU Value 0 0 Mode 0 Manual EU 0 0 Type 0 2 Update XY OK 7 Cancel Figure 10 16 AI Calibration Values Example ROCS800 Series Use the drop down list box to select the AI Point you desire to view The Tag for that point displays Raw Value 1 is the lowest calibrated Raw A D input Raw Value 5 1s the highest calibrated Raw A D input
317. identify this table Function Name is by default the Function Code that corresponds to the Function Index selected Changing the Function Name is not recommended Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Table 8 8 Modbus Function Codes Code Meaning Action 01 Read Logic Coil Status Obtain current status ON OFF of a group of logic coils outputs 02 Read Discrete Input Status Obtain current status ON OFF of a group of Discrete Inputs 03 Read Output Registers Obtain current binary value in one or more holding registers Holding 04 Read Input Registers Obtain current binary value in one or more input registers 05 Force Single Logic Coil Force logic coil to a state of ON or OFF Acknowledge Alarm or Event request 06 Preset Single Holding Register Place a specific binary value into a holding register 15 Force Multiple Logic Coils Force a series of consecutive logic output coils to defined ON or OFF states 16 Preset Multiple Holding Place specific binary values into a series of consecutive holding Registers registers Enter a Start Register or Starting Register to represent the first data register in the address span A Start Register of 0 is a valid address Any number from 0 to 65535 is valid Register numbers can be duplicated as long as they are assigned to separate communication ports The tables should be numbered from smallest
318. ied by 100000 0 and 47 Signed Short 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 16 bit integer A value of 0 0012345 would be Implied 7 sent as 12345 FloBoss 100 Series only The Float to Unsigned Long conversion 47 moa i Hagen 6 16 changes a transmitted floating point value to an unsigned long data type ong for the FloBoss Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 1000000 0 and 48 Signed Short 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 16 bit integer A value of 0 0001234567 would Implied 8 be sent as 12345 Deadband Float 49 Scale 1 3 4 6 16 Deadband Float 50 Scale 2 3 4 6 16 Deadband Float 51 Scale 3 3 4 6 16 59 Deadband Float 4 4g FloBoss 100 Series only The Deadband to Float Scale conversion scale 4 aa changes FloBoss Deadband point data to an integer for transmission to Deadband Float the host The number of the Convert Code specifies which floating point 93 Scale 5 3 4 6 16 scaling value is to be used for the conversion Deadband Float 54 Scale 6 3 4 6 16 Deadband Float 55 Scale 7 3 4 6 16 Deadband Float 56 Scale 8 3 4 6 16 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 10 0 and 49 Unsigned Short 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 16 bit integer A value of 0 1234567 would be Implied 1 sent as 1 Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 100 0 and 50 Unsigned Short 3 4 6 16 converted to an unsigned 16 bit integer A value of 0 1234567 would be Implied 2 s
319. iewing the data or time in history it will be under Periodic Arguments Results historical database value of the specified database point ARGUMENT1 and the specified value Applies to historical database points defined for the FST only lf ARGUMENT 2 is a floating database value for example FST1 FST SEQ 1 R8 the command increments ARGUMENT2 to the next historical database value and sets it to 0 when the number of archived historical periods are exceeded Otherwise no effect occurs to ARGUMENT2 Note The ROC800 Series increments any Data Type WDB the value of the database point ARGUMENT 1 and the pointer ARGUMENT 2 Applies to only lf ARGUMENT 2 is a floating database value for example FST1 FST SEQ 1 R8 the command increments ARGUMENT2 to the next historical database value and sets it to 0 when the number of archived historical periods are exceeded Otherwise no effect occurs to ARGUMENT2 Note The ROC800 Series increments any Data Type Name Description VAL Load RR sets the RR out to the argument value 1 SAV Store RR sets the argument to the RR in 1 RDB Read Historical Database sets the RR out tothe 1 pointer ARGUMENT2 to the historical database 2 Write To Historical Database sets the RR in to 1 historical database points defined for the FST 2 Database or Constant Value Database Value Database or Constant Value Database or
320. ift 10 4 RTD Input Calibration Values For a ROC800 Series select Utilities gt RTD Calibration Values to view all the calibration values for a specific RTD input point Not available for the FloBoss 100 Series RID Calibration Values Point S ea Raw Value 1 42573 Raw Value 2 61 J63 Raw Value 3 61 J63 Raw Value 4 61 J63 Raw Value 5 61 963 Press Effect 0 0 Set EU Value 0 0 Manual EU 0 0 EU Value 1 49 99999 EU Value 2 350 0 EU Value 3 350 0 EU Value 4 350 0 EU Value 5 350 0 Timer Mode Type Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 10 17 RTD Input Calibration Values Use the drop down list box to select the RTD Point you desire to view The Tag for that point displays Raw Value 1 to 5 Raw Value 1 is the lowest calibrated Raw A D input Raw Value 5 is the highest calibrated Raw A D input Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual EU Value 1 to 5 The five calibration settings in Engineering Units values converted from the Raw Values based on the Low Reading EU and High Reading EU defined for the point EU Value 1 is the Zero value EU Value 5 is the Span value and the rest are Midpoint values Press Effect is the Zero Shift or RTD Bias adjustment value applies only to points configured as the Differential Pressure input to a Meter Run or temperature input FloBoss 407 Set EU Value is the Tester Value specified for the last calib
321. iguration File ccsssssessssssseeeeeeeeees 1 18 COren RIE ee noe ere ee ee err 4 32 Custom Displays cccccccccssssssssesesseeeeeeeeeeees 12 9 12 15 ASOT Seas E E E 12 13 de KL CSSIONS ctneessasescossveciavsinccesnnaeveuveaveaneciei scares 12 13 New Display ecisceasesasocsveciansixrccinnivereeteatveeaackavendes 12 10 Object Properties ce cccccccccceeeeeeesssssseeseeeeeeees 12 12 DIC CUS aa E E 12 11 Cycle TIME econ ESSE 4 26 D Pab EOT e a E 6 9 Daily FISTOIY secan E Chebedudzauss 6 31 Bea E E E E A E EE 2 25 Database Commands oa gee AE E AE A AE E AT TT A 26 D a E E 12 16 Dead Weight Calibration ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 33 Deadband cece cee ceeceeccecceccecccceeceecees 4 21 4 36 5 10 Defining a FST History Point a A 28 DEN C LC a a E E E E A 13 Deleting All DE Vi COS eracroosconaconcesaskainstenatxashioeabennonsitwasiooastuancsis 2 17 DC VC CS EEA 2 16 HC ICAL ornegi eranen NEE EENES A 12 GO eE E T E 2 16 Desktop Shortcut py csassssreasiecensinonceduareeaanssnncnatleaennaseeqvacanse 1 3 DEF E 6 19 Dea d ee E E E E 5 8 Device AUNE cases recentea vaccines a a Ea 2 16 A E E AE 2 16 COMI and COM2 ernea sascunanans 2 15 CTE IN EE E A E AEE E E mee 2 16 Deleting All ccccccccccccsseeessssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaas 2 17 DIC CLORY ecserin erena e iaie 2 1 2 14 PCC n E E EE E E E E 2 15 SOU a s NE E EE EA 2 16 MEMON sci dniesiowen iva daaratesdnin caetnemadooeSiadinvebewahcee
322. iguration General tab Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so that no false alarms generate For a ROC800 Series select the Alarming option Disabled No alarms occur for this Station Alarm on Volume Day Alarm values occur based on volume per day Alarm on Mass Day Alarm values occur based on mass per day Alarm on Volume Hour Alarm values occur based on volume per hour gt Oe 6M Alarm on Mass Hour Alarm values occur based on mass per hour Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 36 ROCLINK 800 User Manual For the ROC800 Series Alarming is Enabled or Disabled for each meter in the Meter gt Setup gt Orifice or Turbine gt Alarms tab Enabled Alarms can be based on either the Corrected Volume Flow Rate per Day the Corrected Volume Flow Rater per Hour the Mass Flow Rate per Day or the Mass Flow Rate per Hour For the FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 Alarming is Enabled or Disabled in the Meter gt Setup gt General tab Enter the High Alarm limit value in engineering units to which the calculated Flow Rate value must rise to generate a High Alarm For the ROC300 Series FloBoss 100 Series or FloBoss 407 units assumed for the input are MCF per day 1000 ft day or cubic meters per day m day For a ROC800 Series the units are depended upon the alarm selected Enter the Low Alarm limit value in engineering u
323. imum count of 4 294 967 295 The accumulator can be preset by entering the desired value or cleared by entering zero For a FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series select the Status on Power Reset to determine the Accumulated Value used after a power reset When Off is selected the Accumulated Value parameter is cleared upon a reset of the ROC or FloBoss such as a power restart or a Warm Start and the Low Reading EU is used as the new Accumulated Value If Retain Last Status is selected the last output value is used after a reset If the AO is set to Manual Mode Scanning Disabled no changes occur unless manually entered For a ROC800 Series select the State on Reset parameter to determine the Accumulated Value after a reset of the ROC such as a power restart or a Warm Start If Retain Last State is selected the last output value is used after a reset If the AO is set to Scanning Mode Manual no changes occur unless manually entered If you select Use Failsafe State the Low Reading EU is used as the new Accumulated Value For a ROC800 Series and Use Failsafe State is selected specify whether the Scanning Mode Auto or Scanning Mode Manual is set to On or Off Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 5 3 DO TDO Parameters Select Configure gt I O gt DO Points The TDO Parameters tab allows configuration of TDO parameters when one of the DOUT Types TDO Timed Duration or TDO Toggle
324. in output is calculated For example if you enter 5 there is a region of 5 units above and 5 units below the Setpoint in which the Process Variable can move without affecting the output Enter the SP Ramp Rate as the maximum rate at which the Setpoint is allowed to ramp to a new value Maximum rate is in EU per minute where engineering units are the units of the Process Variable For a ROC800 Series enter the SP Low Limit as the lowest allowed value for the Setpoint For a ROC800 Series enter the SP High Limit as the highest allowed value for the Setpoint Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 14 ROCLINK 800 User Manual For a ROC800 Series the Change in Output displays the calculated change in output from the associated loop Select Manual Tracking Enabled to have the primary loop Setpoint set equal to the Primary Process Variable when the PID point is in Manual Mode This is typically used to eliminate a bump when transferring back to the Automatic Mode Select Halt PID On Reset Enabled to have the PID control loop mode set to disabled upon a reset of the ROC or FloBoss such as a power restart or a Warm Start For a FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series enter the Min Control Time as the minimum amount of time that the Primary or Override Control loop must maintain control before switching occurs back to the other control loop For the ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series set the Override Type Select to Low or High Override Contro
325. in the ROC800 Series unit s firmware ROC Plus Protocol ROC gt Security for the Ethernet port will enable or disable security for all ROC Plus Protocol based Ethernet connections The Ethernet port is always available to accept ROC Plus Protocol connections Modbus The ROC800 Series firmware version 1 30 or greater allows both Modbus RTU encapsulated in TCP IP and Modbus TCP IP communications on the Ethernet port Modbus RTU encapsulated in TCP IP is the form of Modbus protocol traditionally supported on serial connections in the ROC800 Series which has been or encapsulated in a TCP IP message Modbus TCP IP is the protocol developed for use over TCP IP connections Note Both Modbus RTU encapsulated in TCP IP and Modbus TCP IP support Slave mode only The Ethernet port is always available to accept Modbus connections The ROC800 Series is capable of supporting Modbus communications on any of the serial ports at the same time as Modbus RTU encapsulated over TCP IP or Modbus TCP IP connections Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 35 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 8 Connecting to a ROC or FloBoss Once ROCLINK 800 communication parameters are configured you can connect to the ROC or FloBoss unit You can connect in several ways Direct Connect Connect to the device using the Local Operator Interface Port LOD if the default communication parameters apply Device Directory Double click the De
326. in the periodic archive to write to independently of the current index for the Segment e User Program Time This Archive Type should only be used as instructed in the respective user program documentation ROC800 Series e User Program Data This Archive Type should only be used as instructed in the respective user program documentation ROC800 Series For a FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series select the Meter History Point to reserve space for history archival The ROC300 Series has 1 to 87 Historical Points and the FloBoss 407 has 1 to 50 Historical Points A History Point cannot be defined in both Meter History Meter gt History and Standard History Configure gt History For a FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series select the Exponent used in formulaic averaging techniques This value is set by the unit and is typically 0 5 for orifice applications and 1 0 for turbine applications This displays the Point Tag for the Archive Point selected You may enter a User Description ROC800 Series of the selected archive point for identification purposes Current and Last Daily Value display the values for the Archive Point selected for a ROC800 Series Specify the Archive Point Click the TLP button to specify a Point Type Logical Number and Parameter to be archived 6 6 Configuring History for EFM Reporting ROCLINK 800 software has the ability to create an EFM Electronic Flow Measurement Report file that contains all the configuratio
327. ineering units Enter the Adjusted D A 100 count decoded by the Digital to Analog converter for 100 percent output This value is also used to scale the output to engineering units Select Value on Power Reset such as a power restart or a Warm Start When Low EU is selected FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series the Value parameter is set to the Low EU Value in the General tab upon a restart of the ROC or FloBoss If Retain Last Value is selected the last output value is maintained If Value on Reset is selected enter a value to be set in the Failsafe Value field for a ROC800 Series For a FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 select the RBX Alarming option to configure Spontaneous Report By Exception SRBX or RBX alarming for this point Disabled The RBX Alarming is turned OFF On Alarm Set The point enters an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host On Alarm Clear The point leaves an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host On Alarm Set and Clear In either condition an RBX message generates to the host Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 3 3 AO Alarms ROC800 Series Select Configure gt I O gt AO Poin
328. ionality can be configured on the EIA 232 RS 232 EIA 485 RS 485 and modem communications ports COMM2 to COMMS Enter a 10 character identification Tag for the Master Table Enter the RTU Address of the slave device to be queried Enter the Modbus Function Code to be sent to the slave device Enter the starting Modbus Slave Register number for this query on the slave device Enter the starting Master Register number where the queried data will be stored on the master ROC800 Series device Enter the Number of Registers for the master ROC800 Series device to either read or write Comm Status displays the status of the query Table 8 10 Status of Host Request or Command Status Description 0 Inactive or start of transmission Receive timeout error Received Address check Received Function Number check Number of expected bytes check Receiving slave response CRC or LRC check CRC or LRC check NN O O1rjRy _ oO hmM Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 30 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Status Description 8 Valid slave response 128 Write Device Data error 129 Access Device Data error 130 Host Function Table error 131 Transmit Timeout error 144 Transmit or Receive buffer overflow 145 Invalid Function Number in request 8 6 Modbus Master Modem ROC800 Series Select Configure gt Modbus gt Master Modem As a Modbus Master the ROC800 Series may have to com
329. is carefully as History Points cannot be added later Optionally the FloBoss 100 Series units have I O When 6 point I O termination board is selected External I O selections appear Be sure to select the types of I O for which the termination board switches and wiring are configured 1 8 1 Opening a Configuration File The Open option allows you to open an existing configuration file either on line from a ROC or FloBoss unit or off line from the PC hard drive or disk Configuration files are created using the Save Configuration function To open a configuration file 1 Establish an on line connection to the ROC or FloBoss if opening a file on line 2 Select File gt Open 3 Select the configuration file name ROCLINK 800 files have the extension 800 4 Alter the parameters and point assignments as necessary Once the configuration file 1s opened it automatically becomes active and you may edit the file off line The configuration file may also be loaded into a ROC by using the Download function Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 8 2 Configuration Tree Menu When you open a configuration file or go on line with a ROC or FloBoss unit the Configuration Tree appears on the screen It has a hierarchy tree with the configurable items in the configuration such as I O Meter Runs and History 5 Bele File Edt wiew ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools window Help 0 x D g ied j M4 He W
330. is chosen manually enter the Specific Gravity and Heating Value in the Gas Quality screen For Gross Method II the Heating Value is required only for calculating the gas energy flow User Requires the base compressibility standard compressibility flowing compressibility base density and flowing density values to be entered These values become Read Writable and may be obtained from a non calculated source The values may come from a User C program FST host computer DS800 program or a custom display If none of these sources provide values the last value will be held Select either US English or Metric Units for calculations If Metric units are selected then the AGA calculation expects all inputs to be in the indicated units such as kPa for the static pressure input keep in mind that any existing entered values are not converted Select either Calculate or Enter Atmospheric Pressure for the value of the atmospheric pressure absolute at the metering location If Calculate is selected the value is calculated based on the Elevation If Enter is selected type a value for the pressure The units of measurement are in PSIA or kPa for Metric If entered the value must be greater than zero Select Calculate or Enter Local Gravitational Acceleration for the gravitational acceleration at the metering location If Calculate is selected the value is calculated from the Elevation and Latitude If Enter is selected type a value for the a
331. is configured to receive field initiated calls you can select a Report by Exception RBX option to send a Spontaneous Report by Exception message Disabled FloBoss 407 Select Disabled to turn RBX Alarming Off On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a RBX message On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a RBX message On Alarm Set and Clear FloBoss 407 When the point enters or leaves an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a RBX message Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start Note Click the Write button in the Sensor Configuration field to update the sensor with the current values on the screen or click the Read button to read the sensor s current configuration data and Process Variables Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 59 ROCLINK 800 User Manual SECTION 5 CONFIGURING THE METER SETUP Use Meter Setup to configure Meter Runs all devices and Stations ROC800 Series The Meter and Station configuration screens contain the functions directly associated with measuring and logging flow including setup of American Gas Association
332. is selected the Total Mole should equal 100 after all the component mole percentages have been entered Select the Heavy Gas Option to separate the heavy gas percentage C6 into individual components in the mole percentages for n Hexane n Heptane n Octane n Nonane and n Decane To enter Heavy gases enable the Heavy Gas option and enter the percentage of Heavy Gases under Hexane Then go to the Advanced tab and enter the amount of each Heavy Gas Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The mole percentages in the Heavy Gas Distribution fields on the Advanced tab must equal 100 If the total of the distribution among the five heavier components is less than 100 hexane is increased to make the total add up to 100 If the total of the distribution is greater than 100 Decane is reduced first then Nonane then octane then Heptane then hexane until the total is equal to 100 The Gas Quality field determines where to get Gas Quality readings Live indicates readings come from a gas chromatograph and changes to the gas composition specific gravity and hearing value will not be logged to the Event Log or force a historical event Constant indicates the readings will be entered in the Event Log Select the Normalization Type to determine what action is taken if the Total of the gas mole percentages do not add up to 100 Select Methane Adjust to have the Methane component automatically adjusted
333. is selected in the Discrete Outputs screen Discrete Output Discrete Outputs 1 DO Default Tag oo Default Cycle Time A50 000 Seconds Low Reading Time 30000 Seconds High Reading Time 12 0 Seconds Low Reading EU 0 0 High Reading EU 100 0 EU Value 0 0 Units Percent Copy B Paste 2 Update y OF 7 Cancel t Apply Figure 4 25 Discrete Outputs TDO Parameters FloBoss 407 ROC300 Series ROC800 Series Enter the Low Reading Time 0 Count in seconds that represents a zero percent output pulse width The default is 3 seconds This is the minimum amount of time that the TDO can be energized to move the motor Set to a value that allows movement but also provides good resolution of control Enter the High Reading Time 100 Count in seconds that represents a 100 percent output pulse width The default is 12 seconds This is the maximum amount of time that the TDO can be energized to move the motor Normally this is the amount of time it takes for the actuator to move the valve from fully open to fully closed Enter the Low Reading EU engineering units value corresponding to the Low Reading Time Enter the High Reading EU engineering units value corresponding to the High Reading Time Enter the EU Value when using TDO or TDO Toggle mode When a value is saved the Discrete Output is activated according to the magnitude of the value The amount of on time that a given value represents 1s determi
334. ive Counter 0 Successtul Message Time i 01 2000 00 00 00 Transmit Counter 0 lnvalid Message Bytes o Invalid Message Byte Time o 01 2000 00 00 00 2 Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 2 22 Comm Ports Diagnostics ROCS800 Series The Valid Receive Counters displays the number of valid messages received by the ROC800 Series unit for the ROC Plus Protocol or Modbus protocol The Successful Message Time displays the time and date of the last valid message received for ROC Plus protocol or Modbus protocol The Transmit Counter displays the number of messages sent by the ROC800 Series unit Invalid Message Bytes displays the number of ROC Plus or Modbus protocol bytes lost since the last time it was cleared Invalid Message Byte Time displays the time and date of the last invalid message Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 33 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 7 7 Configuring TCP IP Communications on the Ethernet Port ROC800 Series TCP IP connections through the ROC800 Series Ethernet port can be used for DS800 Modbus RTU encapsulated in TCP IP Modbus TCP IP or ROC Plus Protocol communications To configure TCP IP communications 1 Connect to the ROC 2 If using ROC Plus Modbus RTU Encapsulated in TCP IP or Modbus TCP IP the parameters on the Internet tab of the ROC gt Information screen must be set Refer to Section a2 3 If using DS800 verify the parameters and enable the D
335. ked Bit values and have a conversion code of 37 38 No Conversion N A N A Elastic laieaer FloBoss 100 Series only The Float to Integer conversion changes a 39 Ja 3 4 FloBoss floating point data type to an integer for transmission to the No Scaling Host 40 Integer to Float 34616 FloBoss 100 Series only The Integer to Float conversion changes a No Scaling D transmitted integer value to a floating point data type for the FloBoss Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 10 0 and 41 Signed Short 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 16 bit integer A value of 0 12345 would be sent Implied 1 as 1 41 Float to Byte No 34 FloBoss 100 Series only The Float to Byte conversion changes a Scaling i FloBoss floating point data type to a byte for transmission to the Host Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 100 0 and 42 Signed Short 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 16 bit integer A value of 0 12345 would be sent Implied 2 as 12 42 Byte to Float No 346 16 FloBoss 100 Series only The Byte to Float conversion changes a Scaling ES transmitted byte value to floating point data type for the FloBoss Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 1000 0 and 43 Signed Short 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 16 bit integer A value of 0 12345 would be sent Implied 3 as 123 ee oHa No FloBoss 100 Series only The Float to Long conversion changes a 43 Sealing 3 4 FloBoss floa
336. l 14
337. l Operator Interface port Connect connects to a Device Flags views the Flags window Meter Setup views the Meter Setup window Configure PID Points views the PID Loop window Plate Change views the Plate Change window FST Editor launches the Function Sequence Table Editor Display Program Information displays program information version creation date and copyright of ROCLINK 800 software Help launches ROCLINK 800 on line help system 1 6 4 Keystrokes If you are using the keyboard you may use the Alt key plus the letter to activate the menus For example press lt Alt F gt and press lt O gt to select the Open file dialog You may also use the Left Arrow lt and Right Arrow keys to highlight the menu bar item the help Status Line at the bottom of the screen provides a description of the menu and press the letter With a menu displayed you can highlight the desired item by using the Down Arrow 4 and Up Arrow T keys or the mouse With the desired item highlighted press the lt Enter gt key to activate the function To leave a menu or submenu press the lt Esc gt key You can then select another menu You can also access another menu simply by using the Left Arrow and Right Arrow key The text scrolling keys are the lt Page Up gt and lt Page Down gt keys To use the keyboard in configuration screens and dialog boxes press the lt Tab gt key to move in a predetermined
338. l only If Low Override Type is selected the lesser of the primary change in output and the override change in output will be selected as the control output If High Override Type is selected the greater of the primary change in output and the override change in output will be selected as the control output Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 7 4 5 PID Status ROC800 Series Select Configure gt Control gt PID Loop PID Loop FI 1 PID 1 Tag FID 1 Output Low Limit Status N ot Limited Output High Limit Status N ot Limited Primary PY Status OK Frimary SP Low Lirit Statues Mot Limited Primary SP High Limit Status Not Limited Primary SP Rate Limited Not Limited Override PY Status OK Override SP Low Limit Status Not Limited Override SF High Limit Status Mot Limited Override SP Rate Limited Not Limited pa Copp Ei Faste Update X OK i Cancel Es Apply Figure 7 10 PID Loop Status ROCS8 amp 00 Series When a PID loop is enabled the Output Low Limit Status field indicates whether the output of the primary PID loop has been clipped by the low output limit Either Limited or Not Limited displays When a PID loop is enabled the Output High Limit Status field indicates whether the output of the primary PID loop has been clipped by the high output limit Either Limited or Not Limited displays When a PID loop has been enabled the Primary PV Status fie
339. larm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a SRBX message Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 28 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 6 PI Pulse Input Configuration Pulse Inputs PI accept pulse trains square wave signals generated by measurement devices such as turbine meters The Pulse Input accepts digital level On Off signals from an external device and accumulates the changes over a configured period of time The PI can also determine a rate from the accumulated pulses over a configured period of time Select Configure gt I O gt PI Points Examine the default settings and adjust the parameters to suit your application on each of the tabs in the order given below 1 The General tab sets the basic parameters for the PI point 2 The Advanced tab lets you configure features such as EU Options Rate Period Rollover value and Conversion for the Pulse Input 3 The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this PI point 4 When Alarming is Enabled the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband are configured on the Alarms tab When Alarming is Disabled no limit alarms generate for this point The Point Fail and Manual Mode alarm appears in the Active Alarms field but will not be logged in the Alarms Log 5 To conserve Alarms Log space alarms should be enabled only whe
340. larm Clear Alarm Deadband 2 0 Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 4 7 AI Alarms ROCS800 Series and ROC300 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Analog Input Analog Inputs 1 NotPresent Taq NotPresent Low Alarm 0 0 High lar Abes Alarming e Disabled O On Alarm Set LoLo Alarm 0 0 r C On Alam Clear C On Alarm Set and Clear HiHi Alarm 0 0 Rate Alarm 5 0 Alarm Deadband 2 0 Copy B Paste 2 Update yY OF Cancel Apply Figure 4 8 AI Alarms FloBoss 407 and FloBoss 100 Series Enter the High Alarm limit value in engineering units to which the input value must rise to generate a High Alarm The HiHi Alarm value is typically set higher than the High Alarm Enter the Low Alarm limit value in engineering units to which the input value must fall to generate a Low Alarm The LoLo Alarm value is typically set lower than the Low Alarm The Rate Alarm is the value in engineering units that represents the maximum amount of change allowed between updates If the change is equal to or greater than this value an alarm is generated To disable this Rate Alarm without disabling the other alarms the Rate Alarm value can be set greater than the Span of the Analog Input Alarm Deadband is the value in engineering units that is an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limits and below the High Alarm limits The purpose of the Alarm Deadband
341. lay entered in seconds and tenths of seconds before executing the next command For example entering a value of 0 1 implies a 100 millisecond delay and a value of 1 0 implies a one second delay This is entered in seconds for a FloBoss 100 Series Day of Week DWK and Minutes Since Midnight MND These commands are written to the Results Register For DWK 1 Sunday through 7 Saturday Name Description Arguments Results ST Set Timer for specified FST with value in 100 mSec intervals 1 FST Point FST Timer ARG1 1 second for FloBoss 100 Series Database ARG2 Value RR out RR in CT WT DWK Check Timer for specified FST with value in 100 mSec intervals 1 second for FloBoss 100 Series Wait suspend FST until specified number of seconds ARG1 have elapsed The number of seconds can be from 0 1 to 999 999 1 to 999 999 for a FloBoss 100 Series which only accepts whole numbers Day of Week sets RR out to the day of the week 1 Sunday 7 Saturday 2 Database or Constant Value 1 FST Point Database Value 2 LABEL 1 Database or Constant Value None Note The DWK function requires that the real time clock be set correctly MND Minutes Since Midnight sets RR out to the number of minutes past midnight None SVD out SVD in If FST Timer ARG1 0 continue to next command Otherwise Goto ARG2 RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Delay ARG1 seconds
342. ld indicates the status of the primary loop s Process Variable data Either OK Questionable Data or Invalid TLP displays The Primary SP Low Limit Status field indicates whether the Setpoint of the primary PID loop has been clipped by the low Setpoint limit Either Limited or Not Limited displays The Primary SP High Limit Status field indicates whether the Setpoint of the primary PID loop has been clipped by the high Setpoint limit Either Limited or Not Limited displays Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 16 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The Primary SP Rate Limited Status field indicates whether the Setpoint of the primary PID loop is currently being limited by the maximum Setpoint change rate SP Ramp Rate on Tuning tab When a PID loop has been enabled the Override PV Status field indicates the status of the override loop s Process Variable data Either OK Questionable Data or Invalid TLP displays The Override SP Low Limit Status field indicates whether the Setpoint of the override PID loop has been clipped by the low Setpoint limit Either Limited or Not Limited displays The Override SP High Limit Status field indicates whether the Setpoint of the override PID loop has been clipped by the high Setpoint limit Either Limited or Not Limited displays The Override SP Rate Limited field indicates whether the Setpoint of the override PID loop is currently being limited by the maximum Setpoint change rate SP Ramp Rate on Tuning tab
343. lear 3 Click Yes and OK 4 5 Click Yes and OK Click Restore Configuration From Factory Defaults button Note You may need to re connect as the factory default settings may be altered from the stored data FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 To return the device to the original factory default settings using a FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 unit 1 Select ROC gt Flags 2 Click Flash Memory Clear 3 Click Yes and OK 4 Perform a Cold Start using the Cold Start amp Clear ALL button 5 Click Yes and OK Note You may need to re connect as the factory default settings may be altered from the stored data Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 18 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 3 3 2 Flags Advanced Select ROC gt Flags Click the Advanced tab Flags Advanced CAC Check LO Scanning LED Enabled On For 5 minutes C Disabled C Disabled 0 LEDs always on Update YY OK Cancel Apply Figure 3 18 Flags Advanced ROCS800 Series LAC Check LO Scanning f Enabled f Enabled C Disabled C Disabled Set ATS High for 30 secs 44 485 Function LOI Port w 44 D S5 Dl Comi l AA P AS DI e a AEL Pl Read 1 0 2 Update Y OK Cancel Figure 3 19 Flags Advanced FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual CAL Check LO Scanning Pass Through Mode
344. lect a device from the Device Directory and press the lt Enter gt key Double click a device in the Device Directory Select a device from the Device Directory and click the Connect button on the toolbar Select ROC gt Connect to connect to the device currently selected in the Device Directory 2 8 4 Successful Login A successful login produces an on line connection The Configuration Tree of the configuration that is in the ROC or FloBoss unit displays Refer to Configuration Tree Menu A ROCLINK 800 On Line Com7 ROC809 Sel C File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help aea D co la al T wm hy Pp4MEE HE LHe mete 0 amp Control ea Meter Me System History User Pragrarn User Display Figure 2 23 Successful Login Example ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 37 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The following Configuration Tree menu options are available I O Lists all available inputs and outputs by type Control Displays the FST PID Radio Control Sampler and DS800 ROC800 Series options enabled on the ROC gt Information screen Station Lists all available Stations and Meters ROC800 Series Meter Lists all available Meters FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series System Displays ROC gt Information system folders Comm Port Flags and Opcode Table History Displays all available History S
345. led C Off C Disabled C Disabled C Disabled Running Running Running Clear Resources Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 7 12 DS800 Development Suite Software ROCS00 Series The Points number is always set to 1 the number of DS800 programs allowed The Mode enables the execution of all DS800 resources loaded into the ROC Enable RSI Task if you will be communicating via serial communications for downloading and debugging DS800 applications Distributed applications multiple resource projects are not supported over Serial links Enable TCP IP Task if you will be communicating via Ethernet The IXD Task parameter must be Enabled to download resources to a ROC This would only be Disabled to save processor time if there were NO bindings between resources using the HSD network The Clear Resources button removes all downloaded resources from the ROC800 Series unit s permanent storage This however does not affect or stop a currently executing resource because this resource is copied to RAM before it is started The resources will be resident in RAM until a restart is performed or until a Warm Start occurs at the ROC800 Series or the Mode radio button on the DS800 window is set to Off When the Mode radio button is set back to On or the ROC800 Series is restarted only resources downloaded to the ROC after the Clear Resources button was pressed will attempt to Start Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 21 7 7 User Progr
346. lines Also referred to as the RS 422 standard EIA 485 Serial Communications Protocol requiring only two signal lines Can allow up to 32 devices to be connected together in a daisy chained fashion Also referred to as the RS 485 standard EU Engineering Units Units of measure such as MCF DAY F Firmware nternal software that is factory loaded into a form of ROM or flash memory In the ROC or FloBoss the firmware supplies the software used for gathering input data converting raw input data calculated values storing values and providing control signals Flash ROM A type of Read Only memory that can be electrically re programmed It is a form of permanent memory and requires no backup power FloBoss A microprocessor based unit that provides flow calculations remote monitoring and remote control FST Function Sequence Table a type of program that can be written by the user in a language designed by Emerson Process Management G GND Electrical ground such as used by the ROC or FloBoss power supply Rev Dec 05 Glossary G 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual H HART Highway Addressable Remote Transducer protocol Holding Register Analog output number value to be read Hw Differential pressure l J K T O Inputs and Outputs I O Module Module that plugs into a ROC or FloBoss unit to provide an input or output channel IEC Industrial Electric Code or International Electrotechnical Commission For more information
347. llating around the alarm limit This also prevents the Alarm Log from being filled with nuisance alarm trips Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 45 ROCLINK 800 User Manual If the host computer is configured to receive field initiated calls you can select a Report by Exception RBX option to send a Spontaneous Report by Exception message 4 4 4 10 On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the ROC generates a SRBX message On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the ROC generates a SRBX message Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured System Al System Analog Input Configuration ROC800 Series Select Configure gt I O gt System AI Points System Analog Inputs are analog signals generated by sources within the ROC unit For the ROC800 Series select Configure gt I O gt System AI Points Examine the default settings and adjust the parameters to suit your application on each of the tabs The ROC800 Series has five System Analog Inputs gt gt gt OH System AI 1 Battery System AI 2 Charge Voltage System AI 3 Module Voltage System AI 4 AI Default System AI 5 Board Temperature Note For the FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 select Configure gt I O gt Analog Input The System Analog Inputs are treated as Analog Inputs Refer to AI Analog Input Con
348. llisecond periods when the Status parameter is in the Off state The Off Counter which does not operate if Scanning is set to Disabled is a 32 bit number that automatically rolls over when it reaches its maximum value The Off Counter can be preset by entering the desired value or cleared by entering 0 For the ROC800 Series Actual Scan displays the actual amount of time in seconds that passes between scans This number should be the same as shown for the Scan Period parameter if the system is not overloaded 4 4 3 DI TDI Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Select Configure gt I O gt DI Points The TDI Parameters tab FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series provides additional parameters to specify scaling and engineering unit conversion Discrete Input EJ Discrete Inputs 1 DI Default Tag Di Default O Pulse Width 60 Secs er EU 0 0 100 Pulse Width 240 Secs Span EU 100 0 0 Mas Time Between Pulses Secs EU Value 0 0 Actual Pulse Width o Secs Units Percent Copy EA Paste 2 Update Y OK Cancel Apply Figure 4 18 Discrete Inputs TDI Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Enter the 0 Pulse Width the width of a 0 input pulse in seconds Enter the 100 Pulse Width the width of a 100 input pulse in seconds Indicates Actual Pulse Width of the input signal measured in seconds The pulse width is the time that the input signal is in the ON state This parameter can
349. loBoss AOT ia a T ER 6 32 Figure 6 19 Select History to View ROC800 Series E E T E A E E ET E A ETE 6 33 Figure 6 20 Device Memory ROC300 Series and FIOB OSS AO icrtesihastovercuiavcstavidbsaotlieiedesn 6 35 Figure 6 21 Device Memory FloBoss 100 Series E EEE E TEE E A EE EEEN 6 36 Figure 7 1 Soft Points FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FIOBOSS 407 eeeeseeessesesesrrserrrssrress 7 2 Figure 7 2 Soft Points ROC800 Series 066 7 2 Figure 7 3 Opcode Table Settings eeeeeeeees 7 3 Figure 7 4 Sampler Odorizer ROC800 Series 7 4 Rev Dec 05 Index ROCLINK 800 User Manual Figure 7 5 PID Loop ROC800 Series 008 7 7 Figure 7 6 PID Loop ROC300 Series 0008 7 8 Figure 7 7 PID General ROC800 Series 7 9 Figure 7 8 PID Tuning ROC800 Series 7 13 Figure 7 9 PID Loop ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 a eda eels le E E EAE E E N A A A A 7 14 Figure 7 10 PID Loop Status ROC800 Series 7 16 Figure 7 11 Radio Power Control ROC 800 Series E E A rrr err AE ENEE E 7 19 Figure 7 12 DS800 Development Suite Software ROCSOU SENES Jna T 7 21 Figure 7 13 User Program Administrator ROC800 SES ENA 7 22 Figure 7 14 User Program Administrator FloBoss 100 SGEICS E NE 7 23 Figure 7 15 User Program Administrator FloBoss 407 and ROC30O Seres Jerrari aa E 7 24 Figure 7 16 User Data Example ROC300 Series 7
350. loBoss 407 six for a ROC306 ROC312 and sixteen for a ROC364 3 Click Apply 4 Select Configure gt Control gt PID Loop Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 7 4 1 PID ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series Select Configure gt Control gt PID Loop In a given PID point two separate PID loops are available Primary and Override In Primary Only mode the Override Control loop is disabled leaving only the Primary Control loop active In Override Only mode ROC800 Series the primary loop is disabled leaving only the override loop active In Override Control mode ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series both loops are active and a change in Output is selected based on either a low or high limit selection as configured by you Each of the maximum PID loops can have Override Control in which both primary and Override Control algorithms are active The PID control loop can use either one Analog Output or two Discrete Outputs to control the regulating device If Discrete Output control is to be used one DO will provide open forward control and the other DO provides close reverse control Each active PID loop acquires the Process Variable input and calculates the change in output required to maintain its Setpoint If Override Control is enabled the calculation result that is applied to the output depends upon whether the High or Low Override Type Select is chosen for a ROC800 Series or FloBoss 100 Series
351. loating point 57 signed long 0 1 13 4 6 16 conversions Dual register byte order 0 1 2 3 Note 0 Byte MSB and Byte 3 LSB Any type to ROC800 Series only Response is similar to dual register floating point 58 signed long 0 1 13 4 6 16 conversions Dual register byte order 1 0 3 2 2 3 Note 0 Byte MSB and Byte 3 LSB Any type to ROC800 Series only Response is similar to dual register floating point 59 signed long 0 1 3 4 6 16 conversions Dual register byte order 2 3 0 1 Note 0 Byte MSB and Byte 3 LSB Any type to ROC800 Series only Response is similar to dual register floating point 60 signed long 0 1 3 4 6 16 conversions Dual register byte order 3 2 1 0 Note 0 Byte MSB and Byte 3 LSB Any type to ROC800 Series only Response is similar to dual register floating point 61 signed long 0 1 3 4 6 16 conversions Dual register byte order 0 1 2 3 2 3 Note 0 Byte MSB and Byte 3 LSB Any type to ROC800 Series only Response is similar to dual register floating point 62 signed long 0 1 3 4 6 16 conversions Dual register byte order 1 0 3 2 Note 0 Byte MSB and Byte 3 LSB Any neta ROC800 Series only Response is similar to dual register floating point 63 PARA 3 4 6 16 conversions Dual register byte order 2 3 0 1 g g Note 0 Byte MSB and Byte 3 LSB Any type to ROC800 Series only Response is similar to dual register floating point 64 signed long 0 1 13 4 6 16 conversions Dual
352. low calculation This also defines the Units archived in history The US Units selections are CCF MBTU MCF MMBTU and 1OMCF MMMBTU The cubic Metric Units selections are 100OM MJoules kM GJoules and 10kM TJoules The default value is MCF MMBTU and kM Gjoules For the FloBoss 100 Series units are selected on the ROC gt Information screen Select either Calculate or Enter Atmospheric Pressure FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 for the value of the atmospheric pressure absolute at the metering location If Calculate is selected the value is calculated from Elevation If Enter is selected type a value for the pressure The units of measurement are in PSIA or kPaA If entered the value must be greater than zero Select Calculate or Enter Gravitational Acceleration FloBoss 100 Series for the value at the metering location If Calculate is selected the value is calculated from Elevation and Latitude If Enter is selected type a value for the acceleration The units of measurement are in ft sec or M sec If entered the value must be greater than zero Enter the flow measurement Base Pressure FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 specified in the gas contract The pressure units are in PSIA or kPaA Enter the flow measurement Base Temperature FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 specified in the gas contract The temperature units are in degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius Enter
353. ltered Value Enable Average Raw Values to average and calculate the raw readings during the Scan Period and use the outcome as the Raw A D Input during EU calculations For example when enabled an RTD Input point configured with a Scan Period of 1 0 seconds obtains a new value from the A D every 50 milliseconds During the Scan Period 20 values are obtained from the A D and summed together At EU calculation the values summed are divided by the Actual Scan Period display and are used as the Raw A D Input Disable this function to acquire instantaneous values Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 40 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Select the RTD Alpha of the RTD being used 0 00385 or 0 00392 When Clipping is enabled the software forces the Filtered EUs to stay within the range defined by the cut off limits Set the cut off limits by using the LoLo Alarm and HiHi Alarm parameters The Adjusted A D 0 is the calibrated Analog to Digital A D reading corresponding to zero percent input In the Calibrate function this value is altered to set the zero percent input exactly at the Low Reading EU value to eliminate transmitter and system errors The Adjusted A D 100 is the calibrated A D reading corresponding to 100 percent input This value is used to convert the input to engineering units In the Calibrate function this value is altered to set the 100 percent input exactly at the High Reading EU value Raw A D Input displays the cur
354. m FloBoss 100 Series If installed allows the second calculation User Program to be run LCD User Program If installed allows a User Program for the optional Local Display Panel to be run Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual SECTION 4 CONFIGURING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS I O The I O points in the ROC or FloBoss have many items that can be configured For more information on the types of I O available and their functions refer to the appropriate hardware manual In this Chapter Section Page 4 1 TO Configuration VS as ptr ee centers ara assent a atennsdaeedn cies annas Ee r aaan aa eeii riin 4 4 2 Al Analog Input Conti SUG AO eoet EE N ETE AN ETE EEN 4 2 4 3 AO Analog Output Configuration ccccccccccssssssseccecceeeaaeessseececcsseeeeseeeceeeeeesaaeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeegees 4A DI Discrete Input COMMS UPA ON enssins arn a a na oraa E E iian 4 14 43 IDO P Disercte Output C0 it gurao reres EEE Te 4 21 40 Pl Pulse Input Ori 0 0 Ai OO seses na rE E nn Erai 4 29 4 7 Pulse Interface Module Diagnostic FloBoss 104 sssnnsnesssssssseenrssssssssseeresssssssseeresssssssseeressssss 4 37 4 8 RTD RTD Input Configuration ROC800 Series enessssssseeeeresssssseseerrssssssssersssssssseeeessss 4 38 4 9 TC Thermocouple Input Configuration ROC800 Series ccc eeccceecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 4 4 10 System AI System Analog Input Configuration ROC800 SerieS
355. m Pori eniran n ai 2 33 Differential Pressure c ccccceecceecceecceesccesceeeceeeeees 5 17 DIN Tye ea saan vuinstceenposmearieoreeauataetes 4 16 Direct CONECE vwisiicossassenvexncssannvasnesaevouaseuntesbooveapbeateauns 2 36 Disconnect G6 10 0110 0111 AEE A AEEA ATA 2 29 ROC or FIO BOSS ivcsscisccondevenconancestiassensustavecesurosessues 2 40 T oe E EAEN EA 2 28 Discrete Inputs PROTEC E EEE E TA 4 14 Discrete Outputs Rro DO e E 4 21 Display Administrator ccccccccsssssssssesseeeeeeeeeeeees 12 15 Display Edi vosccassaccscesiadecseesevnenavacdasasesedeniaaneatesonsss 12 14 Display TLP Options cc ccccssssesessessseeseeeeeeeees 1 14 Displays IS OTM es egtesacrsd neues onente seco saecaesepscenauineeetoucpedenantan 12 9 Diagnostics amp Monitoring cccceseseeeeeeeeeeees 12 1 DO FUG LCT E16 a de 4 24 A e AAE 4 28 Discrete Output Configuration ccccceseeeeeeeees 4 21 DOUT Type cca e rere ere ternre ar rrr 4 23 ea cei 4 22 POD disa ai 4 21 4 22 TDO Parameters ccccccceecccecccssceeccesceescceseeees 4 26 Download ereireorirri raan 1 17 9 3 BS EE E A so sends AT A AAT A 11 DOW EC AI raai 5 31 D Orar ER 2 26 2 34 2 35 Development Suite Software nsnnsosssssse000eeeee 7 21 Duplicating a Configuration ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees l 17 Baire n ea E E E E E E 7 4 l 3 E PEM RDO aE EE 6 17 COME CE Data sceri 6 17 CONV CIM G ee a 6 19 CONV CRU 255 6005 sossietevedideei
356. m occurs only when desired These parameters are configured on the Alarms tabs of the I O configuration screens Once configured the configuration of all communications ports should be saved to programmable ROM using the Flash Memory Save Configuration function in the ROC gt Flags screen Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 22 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Comm Forts AAA atst Nte E Tag Local Port General Modem SRBx Store amp Forward Diagnostics Comm Type RS 232 Baud Rate ri kep On Delap e 300 f e00 o o Secs C 1200 f 2400 Key Off Delay 4600 S600 Jani Secs f 192K C 384k S76 BRG 0 Port Owner ROC Flus Protocol Modbus Slave ROC Plus Protocol Only Modbus Slave Orly Modbus Master DS 800 LEE Module Reserved User Prograrn 1 User Program 2 User Program 3 User Program 4 User Program 5 User Program 6 User Program 7 User Program amp 2 Update OK Cancel I Apply Figure 2 14 Comm Port ROCS800 Series 0 t oO E a a a a a Comm Fort Comm Ports paSis f 1 saa Tag Local Pot General REx Baud Rate Parity Data Bits C 600 None Even Odd 7 gg 1200 2400 C 4900 9600 RTS CTS Handshaking 192k C Enabled ft Disabled kep On Delay Secs Comm Board Installed ey Of Delay jo jo Valid Recene Ctr fi ete Secs ES Copy EA Paste Update Y OK 7 Cancel I Apply Figure 2 15 Comm Port FloBoss 100
357. manent memory in case you perform a Cold Start Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 50 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 11 1 HART General ROC800 Series Select Configure gt I O gt HART The General tabs sets parameter for the channel Each ROC800 Series HART module can support up to four channels Select the HART Point Number you desire to configure Point Number 2 1 General Advanced Calibration Device Device 2 Device 3 Device 4 Device 5 Channel Information Communication Mode Version 1 00 C Disabled Comm Status Not Scanning I O Type Analog Input C Multidrop 1 Devices EU Analog Scanning EU Value Mi Enabled Low Reading EU Disabled High Reading EL Copy BB Paste 2 Update Y OK Cancel l Apply Figure 4 45 HART General ROCS800 Series Channel Version indicates the version of firmware present in the HART card for this channel Comm Status indicates the status of the communications channel Scanning indicates the channel is currently scanning the device s Not Scanning indicates the device s is currently off line or not communicating Dual Master indicates that the channel has another master connected Examples of other masters include a Hand Held Communicator and a device that is configured to be in Burst mode When in Dual Master the ROC is not scanning the device which allows communications between the other master and the device s When
358. may desire to start the FST in Trace Mode A 5 1 4 Saving an FST To save the FST as an individual disk file 1 Select FST gt Save as or click the Write to file button in the FST Editor 2 Enter the File name and click Save The FST file will be saved with an fst extension A 5 1 5 Starting the FST Once an FST is compiled Build gt Compile without errors and is downloaded to the ROC or FloBoss the FST must be started in order to run 1 Connect the ROC or FloBoss to the computer running ROCLINK 800 software Select Configure gt Control gt FST Register Select the desired FST from the drop down list box Select the Status Enabled radio button Click Apply Click OK D RYN Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 5 1 6 Stopping an FST To stop the execution of an FST 1 Connect the ROC or FloBoss to the computer running ROCLINK 800 software 2 Select Configure gt Control gt FST Register 3 Select the desired FST from the drop down list box 4 Select the FST Status Disabled radio button 5 Click Apply 6 Click OK A 5 1 7 Deleting an FST Clear To permanently delete an FST 1 Select FST gt Clear 2 Select the desired FST FST1 to FST6 Not supported by a FloBoss 100 Series A 5 1 8 Reading Writing Selecting and Closing an FST The FST menu allows you to select FSTs to Read Write Select Close and Print Select FST gt Read gt From Device to retrieve the conte
359. mber and Tag The FloBoss 100 Series only have one AO Each Point is given a Tag which includes up to 10 characters to identify the Point being defined in the I O screen Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used The Point Number identifies the physical location of the input For the ROC800 Series the Point Number identifies the module slot channel number Enter the Units a user defined 10 character description for the engineering units assigned to the I O For example PSIG MCF degrees F milliamps or volts Select the Scanning option For the input to automatically process the field output select Enabled or Auto Automatic Mode When Scanning is set to Enabled or Auto Value displays the last Analog Output scan in engineering unit When Scanning is set to Disabled the engineering unit EU Value is no longer updated by the ROC or FloBoss If Alarming is Enabled a Manual Mode alarm generates when Scanning is set to Disabled For a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 and Scanning is set to Disabled the output holds the current value regardless of any Value entered For a ROC300 Series FloBoss 100 Series or FloBoss 407 and Scanning is set to Enabled the Value displays the current output Value For a ROC800 Series or FloBoss 100 Series and Scanning is set to Disabled enter a Value to override the output For a ROC800 Series when the Scanning is set to Manual use the Auto Value field to override the
360. meter for the meter selected 5 Enter the exact size of the Orifice Diameter inches or millimeters of the new plate 6 Click Apply to record the change creating a record in the Event Log and restart the flow calculation using the new orifice size data 7 Click OK Rev Dec 05 Updates and Changes 11 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual SECTION 12 DISPLAYS DIAGNOSTICS AND MONITORING This section describes the various methods in ROCLINK 800 software to monitor and run diagnostics on the ROC or FloBoss in your application The user can configure the LCD on a FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 unit for routine monitoring print a copy of the configuration to check for error in the configuration file view a Meter Run Values screen to check parameter values for the meter view an I O Monitor screen to check I O and other operations view the Pulse Interface Module Data screen to monitor the Pulse Interface Module of a FloBoss 104 or create a custom display to monitor routine or user program operations In this Chapter Section Page PZ PPT COT AG OM oes A E O P VOMON ee ca cece Sets ce seco T E E E E dears aesseaeaene ser E 12 3 12 3 LCD Display Configuration ROC300 SerieS ee cceccccecccessseeeseececececeaaeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeesseseceeeeeaaas 12 5 12 4 LCD User List FloBoss 100 Series and FloBoss 407 ou cece ceccceecceecceeeccesseeseseesseesseees 12 6 MD Merer R WIC Sg ices ste E E E T E tedawassamneeienqevedessaaseerte
361. mmands if the comparison is determined to be true Otherwise if the comparison is determined to be false no branching occurs and the next command in sequence is executed Comparison commands test values for equivalence non equivalence less than lt less than or equal to lt greater than gt and greater than or equal to gt Name Description Arguments Results Test If RR in equals 1 Database or Constant Value If RR in ARG1 Goto ARG2 ARG1 Note that this 2 LABEL Otherwise continue to next command command performs in a bit RR out RR in wise fashion so two SVD out SVD in floating Point Numbers displayed as equal may not match l Test If RR in Not Equal to 1 Database or Constant Value If RR in ARG1 Goto ARG2 ARG 2 LABEL Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in lt Test If RR in less than 1 Database or Constant Value If RR in lt ARG1 Go to ARG2 ARG 2 LABEL Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in lt Test If RR in less than or 1 Database or Constant Value If RR in lt ARG1 Go to ARG2 equal to ARG1 2 LABEL Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in gt Test lf RR in greater than 1 Database or Constant Value If RR in gt ARG1 Go to ARG2 ARG 2 LABEL Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in gt Test if RR in greate
362. mples of a per hour rate value are converted to a per second rate and summed over the logging interval to compute the archived value This Archive Type should be selected when the History Point being archived is a rate in EUs hour Accumulate Day The one second samples of a per day rate value are converted to a per second rate and summed over the logging interval to compute the archived value This Archive Type should be selected when the History Point being archived is a rate in EUs day Current Value A snapshot of the current sampled value is logged Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Totalize The difference between the current value at the end of the period and the current value at the last logging interval is logged EST Time This Archive Type allocates space for the FST to write time stamps to the periodic archive using the WTM command The number of time stamps that can be written is determined by the number of periodic entries in the Segment The format of the value will be MM DD HH MM or DD HH MM SS The FST determines which index in the periodic archive to write to independently of the current index for the Segment FST Data This Archive Type allocates space for the FST to write values to the periodic archive using the WDB command The number of values that can be written is determined by the number of periodic entries in the Segment The FST determines which index
363. mputers PCs The PC can be a desktop or a portable computer In any case the PC should meet the following minimum requirements Pentium class processor 233 MHz or greater recommended CD ROM drive Windows 98 ME NT 4 0 Service Pack 6 2000 Service Pack 2 or XP 64 MB of RAM Random Access memory SVGA color monitor 800 by 600 pixels small fonts 15 to 50 MB of available hard disk space depending on Operating System and revision level gt gt gt gt EIA 232 RS 232 serial connection a dial up modem connection a TCP IP connection ROC800 Series or a wireless radio FloBoss 100 Series 1 3 Contacting the Flow Computer Division Please contact your local sales representative or contact the Flow Computer Division directly Emerson Process Management Flow Computer Division Marshalltown IA 50158 USA Houston TX 77065 USA Pickering North Yorkshire UK YO18 7JA E mail fas tech support emersonprocess com Website www emersonprocess com flow Technical Support Website www emersonprocess com flow Emerson support support_index html Telephone 641 754 3449 Monday through Friday 7 30 AM to 4 30 PM Central US Time 1 4 Software Installation To install ROCLINK 800 software 1 Start the installation by one of the two methods described below Method 1 If you have a CD ROM that contains the ROCLINK 800 installation files A Place the ROCLINK Software Installation CD ROM into your drive B I
364. municate to multiple slave devices through modems and phone lines The Modbus Master Modem screen provides the necessary parameters to configure the modems and map RTU Addresses to phone numbers Only COMM2 to COMMS support Modbus functionality the Local Port and COMM Ethernet port will not Each communications port can access to six RTU addresses This point associates Modbus Slave RTU Addresses to their respective phone numbers Up to six different Modbus Slaves can be dialed up through one communication port The ROC800 Series will retry three times to establish a connection with a slave Modbus Master Modem 1 Moder 1 Tag Modem 1 Corresponding Comm Port Local Fort Address Connect Command Update yY OK A Cancel Figure 8 10 Modbus Master Modem ROCS800 Series Select the Comm port location that you desire to host The Modbus Master functionality can be configured on the EIA 232 RS 232 EIA 485 RS 485 and modem communications ports Only COMM2 to COMMS support Modbus functionality the Local Port and COMM 1 Ethernet port will not Enter a 10 character identification Tag for the Master Modem Enter the RTU Address of the slave device to be associated with the Connect Command Up to six different Modbus Slaves can be dialed up through one communication port Enter the Connect Command telephone number to be sent to the slave device Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 31 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 8 7 Mo
365. n alarms events and history logs associated with the Stations and Meter Runs in the ROC or FloBoss device This file then becomes the custody transfer audit trail In order to collect the periodic and daily history logs required for the EFM Report file a specific list of Station and Meter Run Parameters must be configured for historical archiving The History Points must be configured for each Meter Run The required Parameters to archive vary depending on the type of meter run orifice or turbine Note The first eight History Points are pre configured defaults in the FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series with FlashPAC units for Meter Run 1 only When using a FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series the History Points can be changed if required A ROC300 Series with a FlashPAC always defaults to AGA3 Note ROC800 Series units do not have any flow Parameters factory configured into History Points Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual For a ROC800 Series Station that has live inputs for gas quality data the heating value specific gravity and the gas composition of any components that are being updated should be configured as History Points The Archive Type should be any of the four meter averaging techniques Flow Weighted Linear Flow Weighted Formulaic Flow Dependent Linear or Flow Weighted Formulaic For a ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 additional gas chromatograph History Points
366. n necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so that no false alarms generate 6 After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start 4 6 1 PI General Select Configure gt I O gt PI Points The General tab sets the basic parameters for the PI point Pulse Input Pulse Inputs 1 PI Default Tag PI Default General Advanced Alarms Paint Humber Bt Contract Hour oOo EU Value oOo Conversion Li Units pO Frequency OO Pulses Second Scan Period AD o Secs Scanning Accumd Pulses f Enabled Pulses for Day C Disabled Today s Total Yesterday s Total Current Rate Active Alarms Figure 4 27 Pulse Inputs General ROCS00 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 29 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Pulse Input Pulse Inputs Tag Aus Pl 1 General Advanced Alarms Point Humber BGR EU Value OO Scanning Alarming Units PO Enabled C Enabled Seen Peod 5 a C Disabled Disabled Accunm d Pulses OO Today s Total OO o Yesterday s Total OO o Current Rate oO Active Alarms jo Copy Update yY OK A Cancel Figure 4 28 Pulse Inputs General FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series Select the Pulse Input to be config
367. n odorizer needs to track every 100 cubic feet of gas being metered enter 100 The units are cubic meters m Ft The Sampler Volume Accum value is based upon the instantaneous flowrate Enter the Sampler Duration to specify how long in seconds the pulse to the device needs to be This is how long it stays ON The Discrete Output DO2 on termination board is turned on for the amount of time set in the Sampler Duration every time the Sampler Volume Accum value is exceeded Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 32 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 3 6 Meter Instrument Calibration FloBoss 100 Series Select Meter gt Setup gt Instrument Calibration tab to calibrated devices Meter Setup Meter Number 1 Meter 1 Meter Tag Meter HI General Inputs Gas Guality Advanced Sampler Instrument Calib Alarms Dead Weight Calibration Water Manometer Calibration Static Press Diff Press Diff Press f No e No e No 0 Yes 0 Yes 0 Yes Calibrated Grav Accel Calibrated H20 Temp 60 0 Deg F aed FSecg Calibrated Air Temp 60 0 Deg F Mercurn Manometer Instrument User Mercury Manometer Used User Correction Factor 1 0 No Ces Ambient Hg Temp 60 0 Deg F Calibrated Hg Temp 60 0 Deg F 2 Update Y OF A Cancel i Apply Figure 5 20 Meter Instrument Calibration FloBoss 100 Series Select the Dead Weight Calibration option FloBoss 100 Series If a deadweight tester is used to calibrat
368. n of the number The event name new value and old value appear in the Comment for the new METER_CALC record PRIORITY LEVEL This represents the importance of the event 0 Alarm will not affect volume calculations 1 Alarm will affect volume calculations This is redundant If METER CALC COLUMN NAME exists for the event the PRIORITY LEVEL will be a 1 if not it will be a O DESCRIPTION varchar 64 Text description of the event RJ COMMENT varchar 100 Comment optional Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 7 4 2 Meter Related Events Meter related events include changes to Meter and Station Points Parameters and Calibration Verification events for points configured as inputs to meter points changes to the number of active Stations orifice or turbine points changes to the clock system events and Parameter change events for history points when the old or new point being archived is a Meter or Station point Events such as Warm Starts Cold Starts system initializations and clock changes duplicate for every Meter Run in the unit Station Parameter change events duplicate for every Meter Run in that Station Events used by the PGAS system to recalculate meter values are indicated by including a METER_CALC_COLUMN_NAME in the PGAS event record The Point Types and Parameters map to PGAS METER CALC events METER_CALC_ COLUMN NAME aa Point Types Orifice Material PLATE MATERIAL U
369. n procedure the ROC may modify this value The user may also modify this value after a calibration is performed as needed The Pressure Temperature Values display the scaled Differential Pressure Diff Pressure reading from the sensor The units display as either In HO or kPa The scaled Differential Pressure Reverse DP reading is from the sensor times a negative 1 for flow in the reverse direction The scaled absolute Pressure Static Pressure reading from the sensor displays in either PSI or kPa The scaled process Temperature reading from the sensor displays in either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius Enable Scanning for the input to enable communications to the MVS sensor An alarm generates when Scanning is Disabled If Scanning is Disabled no values are updated from the MVS sensor Select either US or Metric Units for the Process Variable If Metric units are selected then the AGA calculation expects all inputs to be in the indicated units such as kPa for the Static Pressure input Note that US Units are included in the factory defaults for the MVS101 but not for the MVS205 For an MV S205 if you change Units use the Set Back to Factory Defaults button in Utilities gt MVS Calibration screen to match the default calibration values For an MVS101 the default calibration values automatically match Units If you change the Units a Sensor Configuration Write is required Click to enable or disable Differential Pressure
370. nalog to Digital converter Actual Scan displays the actual amount of time in seconds that passes between scans This number should be the same as shown for the Scan Period parameter on the General tab if the system is not overloaded When Hold Last Value is selected the last input value is retained on point fail If Set to Fault Value is selected then the value entered as the Fault Value is written to the Filtered Value on point fail Enable Average Raw Values to average and calculate the raw readings during the Scan Period and use the outcome as the Raw A D Input during calculations Disable this function to acquire Instantaneous Values Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual For example when using a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 and Average Raw Values is enabled an Analog Input point configured with a Scan Period of 1 0 seconds obtains a new value from the A D every 50 milliseconds During the Scan Period 20 values are obtained from the A D and summed together At EU Value calculation the values summed are divided by the number of samples taken during the Scan Period and are used as the Raw A D Input When Clipping is enabled the ROC or FloBoss forces the Filtered EUs to stay within the range defined by the cut off limits Set the cut off limits by using the LoLo Alarm and HiHi Alarm parameters defined on the Alarms tab When Temp Compensation ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 is enabled a tempera
371. nd Typically associated with baud rate Built in I O I O channels that are fabricated into the ROC or FloBoss and do not require a separate option Also called on board I O C Comm Abbreviation for communications Most commonly used as comm port referring to the communications port on the ROC Comm Module Module that plugs into the ROC or FloBoss unit to provide a channel for communications via a specified communications protocol such as EIA 422 RS 422 or HART Compare Flag CF Compare Flag Stores the SVD Configuration Refers either to the process of setting up the software for a given system or the result of performing this process The configuration activity includes editing the database building schematic displays and reports and defining user calculations Typically the software setup of a device that can often be defined and changed Can also mean the hardware assembly scheme Configuration Tree When a configuration file is open in ROCLINK 800 software the Configuration Tree View menu appears It is a hierarchy tree style means of navigating within the configuration screens CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check error checking CTS Clear to Send modem communications signal D D A Digital to Analog signal conversion DCD Data Carrier Detect modem communications signal Also Discrete Control Device A discrete control device energizes a set of discrete outputs for a given Setpoint and matches the desired result
372. nd any inherited from lower access levels For example the users with Access Level 3 have access to screens with levels 0 1 2 and 3 Refer to Security Access Levels for a full list of the access levels Refer to Table 2 1 Security Access Levels on page 2 2 Note If security is enabled on any port at least one user must have the highest level of security level 5 Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 8 ROCLINK 800 User Manual LCD ON Select Enabled to turn the LCD Display Always ON and leave it active or select Disabled to allow the LCD Display to time out and turn itself off If Enabled the LCD remains on until the next user logs on who has the LCD Disabled LCD Custom User List Check a radio button to give a user access to the LCD Custom User List 1 2 and 3 of an on line FloBoss 407 for viewing editing or both This includes the keypad functions Security On LOI Security on COM1 and Security on COM2 For each communications port select Disabled User ID Enabled to require security on a specific communications port or User Access Level Enabled to require a specific level of security for this user 2 3 3 Device Security Users ROC300 Series Select ROC gt Security The Device Security screen controls who has access to the Comm Ports and optional Liquid Crystal Display LCD on the ROC device When Enabled you must login to use the communications port Each communications port m
373. ndawanees 6 35 MotM ESAS 2 15 Renaming eeeessssssssessseerreessssssssssssssserereesssssssssss 2 17 6 6 EOE ATAA Re a En TA T E EA 2 15 Security n 2 1 2 6 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 Device Address ccccecceeceecceccecceccesceccesceecens 2 18 3 7 Rev Dec 05 Index ROCLINK 800 User Manual Device Flags sssccccccececccccssecccensssesseeseaeeeeeeees 3 15 Device GT OUP sire ess sisentnvanatis ctesindoeevewetausviewcanancencsnentes 2 18 Device Information ccc ceecccsecceeccceccesccesceesseeees 3 2 Other Information cece ceecccecceeecceeceeeseeeeeees 3 10 PON ene ve ee a ae Ar a 3 7 Revision IN O sarati inara e AAA EAE 3 13 System Configuration ccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 12 Device Security Comm POIS ee ee Eras EnO EE 2 11 FODOS AO pearen ARE EAE 2 8 Ee E EA ere E E men E E errr 2 10 ROCJO SON CS seinri scat ntescicedretecceaeestiu need eeecnaceavens 2 9 ROC800 Series amp FloBoss 100 Series 2 6 E a EE EEA A EE ekenteeers 2 6 2 8 2 9 Users Group Summary cccccccccccssssserseeeeeeees 2 12 B Ais crea yo oer ene er re E 3 5 DI PG INC E ean sasn aeons ations aeeies 4 16 F421 0 LAPPEE PEE E A I T 4 19 Discrete Input Configuration cccccceseseeeeeeeees 4 14 ETE 1 Rae et en re ee eT E A EE 4 14 PO cae an Te 4 14 TDI Parameters icvncncsacecincesseesancdsscemeecssnsevedewncnsasstvs 4 18 Diap ngsStCsS serras haian 2 34 12 1 Com
374. ndicate the location of the static pressure tap in relation to the orifice and normal flow Upstream is the default Flange or Pipe ROC300 Series For an orifice run this indicates either Flange or Pipe type of pressure taps in this Meter Run For a 1992 AGA calculation only Flange is selected Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 31 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 3 5 Meter Sampler FloBoss 100 Series The FloBoss 100 Series uses the fields in the Sampler tab to enable you to set up the Discrete Output DO of the FloBoss to send a pulse output to another device such as an odorizer and control a gas sampler for a Meter Run To use this feature select the Enabled option under Sampler Control Select Meter gt Setup or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for FloBoss 100 Series Meter Setup Meter Number 1 Meter 1 Meter Tag Meter H General Inputs Gas Cuality Advanced Sampler Instrument Calib Alarms Sampler Control f Enabled Disabled Sampler Volume Accum i 000 0 Fra Sampler Duration i O Seconds 2 Update Y OK A Cancel A Apply Figure 5 19 Meter Sampler FloBoss 100 Series Select Enabled in the Sampler Control field for the Sampler to override the built in DO located at Point Number B4 for 4 point I O or at Point Number B5 DO 2 for 6 point I O Enter the Sampler Volume Accum number of cubic feet of gas to be metered between pulses For example if a
375. ne numbers One Communication Port will have the ability to dial up 6 different Modbus slaves The ROC800 Series will retry three times to establish a connection with a slave An FST User C Program or DS800 application can be used to schedule Modbus Master requests The Master Activity status parameter may be used to determine if the communication port is available for use The Start Polling checkbox Configure gt Modus gt Configuration will need to be set by you if continuous polling will be enabled or master polling can be managed enabled and disabled by a control application Using FSTs the ROC800 Series can dial other Modbus Slave devices at regular intervals Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 29 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Modbus Master Table Logical Point euE COMM Tag MasTb 1 OOO MastTb 1 0000000 ATL Slave Master ne Comm a Address Function Code Register Register F es A Status m T Disabled 0 Disabled 8 3 o pu e e e 4 0 O Disaed o do ho o 5 0 O Disabled ft 60 O Disabled o d h h z o O Disabled deo d ho ejo O Disabled h d h hb ajo O Disabled ft o O Disabled do fo ho ijo O Disabled o do ho do fo 0 Disaisd oo oo p o ajo 0 Disaed o oo e oo i4 jo 0 Dised o o noo aoo 15 0 O Disabled o o h b i Update Y OK A Cancel Figure 8 9 Modbus Master Table ROC800 Series Select the Logical Point of the communication port location that you desire to host The Modbus Master funct
376. ned by the scaling from Low Reading Time High Reading Time Low Reading EU and High Reading EU The EU Value is typically written by a PID Loop or an FST Enter the Units as a 10 character name for the engineering units assigned to the TDO output For example MCF or CFM might be typical entries for this field Enter the Cycle Time when using TDO Toggle mode Cycle Time defines the total time of one cycle the sum of the On time and Off time in seconds After a cycle has been completed a new cycle is initiated The default is 15 seconds Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 26 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The Cycle Time entry is used to define the OFF time in the TDO Toggle mode The OFF time is calculated by the formula Off Time Cycle Time On Time Example A TDO 1s used to emulate a field instrument measuring flow The TDO outputs a pulse width of 3 seconds for no flow and a pulse width of 12 seconds for 1000 MCF per day flow The output is repeated every 15 seconds If the Cycle Time is less than or equal to the On Time the OFF time is set to one Care must be taken in configuration including other places such as FSTs to ensure that the Cycle Time remains greater than the calculated On Time for proper operation Select Configure gt I O gt DO Points The TDO Parameters tab allows configuration of TDO parameters when one of the DOUT Types TDO Timed Duration or TDO Toggle is selected in the Discrete Outputs
377. nfiguring System Parameters 3 2 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Device Information E Update w ok Uk A Cancel 1 Apply Figure 3 2 Device Information ROCS00 Series Device Information a ies x General Foints Other Information Revision Info Station Marne AEEEESMIE Device Type fi U3 Address i Group 2 Units Contract Hour jo l Force End of Day f US Metric FST Execution 20 Instructions Per Cycle Update yY OK Cancel Apply Figure 3 3 Device Information FloBoss 100 Series Configuring System Parameters 3 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Device Information Station Name Remote Uprtns Crtrlr Device Type an7 Address fi Group 2 Contract Hour fo T Force End of Day Update yY OF 7 Cancel J Apply Figure 3 4 Device Information FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series 3 2 1 Information General Select ROC gt Information The General tab has basic information about the ROC or FloBoss Device Information Station Mame Remote Oprtrs Crtrlr Device Type 300 Address Group 2 Contract Hour 0 Force End of Day 2 Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 3 5 Device Information Example ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Station Name to be logged in EFM Reports for easy site identification Enter a unique Address with which to differentiat
378. nication and the restarting of polling of the HART device 4 11 3 HART Device ROC800 Series Select Configure gt I O gt HART The Device tabs set parameters specific to the devices in that channel Each channel in Analog Output mode can support one device Each channel in Analog Input mode can support up to five devices When Point to Point Communications Mode is selected from the General tab the device information is presented via the Device 1 tab When Multidrop Communications Mode is selected each Device tab corresponds to the HART Tag Point Number defined for the ROC to Poll Point Murber 1 2 1 Foll Mode Dynamic Yarnables Slot Variables C Skip This Device PY Undet Slot O Assignment fl C PY Only P Fail Sate 0 0 Slot Value O0 Undef CO Dynamic Variables G 0 0 Undet Slot 1 Assignment ee Slot Variables SV Fail Safe 0 0 Slot 1 Yale O0 Unde f Update TY D D Undet Slot 2 Assignment 2 Dynamic Variables on Reset T Fail Safe 0 0 Slot 2 Value 0 0 Undet eea eae Fy 0 0 Undet Slot 3 Assignment 3 Use Failsafe Value F Fail Safe 0 0 O00000 Slot Value O0 Unde Configuration amp Status Information HART Process Input Actual Scan Period oo Tag PY Damping Value D0 Current m oo PollAddress 0 Z of Range D D Device ID 0 Status No Device Sensor Analog Output Response Code fr PY Sensor Serial Number fr PY Range Units Undet ID Mumber ft PY Upper Senso
379. nits to which the calculated Flow Rate value must fall to generate a Low Alarm For the ROC300 Series FloBoss 100 Series or FloBoss 407 units assumed for the input are MCF per day 1000 ft day or cubic meters per day m day For a ROC800 Series the units are depended upon the alarm selected For a ROC800 Series the Low Alarm and High Alarm units are depended upon the alarm selected Vol Day MCF Day km Day Vol Hour Ft Hr Mass Day Mib Day Tones Day MassiHour Ubi kor Alarm Deadband ROC800 Series is the value in engineering units that is an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limits and below the High Alarm limits The purpose of the Alarm Deadband is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This also prevents the Alarm Log from being over filled with data The Alarm Deadband Time ROC800 Series is the amount of time in seconds that is an inactive zone before and after the sensor alarm is triggered The purpose of the Alarm Deadband Time is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This also prevents the Alarm Log from being over filled with data Select the SRBX Alarming or RBX Alarming option to configure Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX or RBX alarming for this point Disabled The RBX Alarming is turned OFF On Alarm Set When the point enter
380. nona iaaa 2 28 D a E A AE A 2 15 Modbus Mastet cccdcccccussscndecadcndscensinenscndacoaunseceussxeds 8 31 ARM COS asein a AEGA 2 19 OE US EA ETIS E TEE ATTE AT 2 29 TY era a EA ETE E E 2 28 Module Scan Period ciccccscivics dcscessexsadsccswosdesivevsovseeaseene 4 15 DAO TING LAG T enerne E 4 23 TN esse cctceseeie A EE 5 30 Monitor OV EEE ce E ce pie A E E AA 12 3 Monitor Mod essri vecoteaeed A 13 Monlong sesecseniod a 12 1 MIO O eE 2 13 MVS Calibration Valles ssriirisisisorisitinersrirriisnisonerineis 10 19 S O EA 4 57 N Nav aO E E 1 10 New Configuration File cccccssssssssseseeeceeeeeeeees 1 18 Dooe asst A EN 2 15 D a te eee pest sees 2 15 DIS PLAY ecserin rai E N 12 10 COUN ee A 2 15 No Flow Time nn eee ceeccceecccescceecceecceesceesceescceessees 5 30 INOS E E E E E E E 3 6 Normalization Type ssssesssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 6 N mberof Days ssenei e 6 6 Number of Retries cc cece cecccsecceesceescceecceesceessees 2 20 O O O gamer ne nee are PR ana te Et ER ea ne ee er ne eT 7 4 OM COUTET csnnscncnricacisincnsatdsesnapsipnousiveustdsecasdebascedsmanents 4 18 TG SE epee separ E E S AEE AEA 10 10 On Alarm Cleat cccccccccecccscccssccsscesccescccesscesccencess 5 10 On Alarm Set ou cecccsecccscccssccesscescccesscessceesseesecs 5 10 On Counter svosccsisacncaveriecavassresanssdencavacisacevacesacneameseseens 4 18 Dn VRS EEN AE E E EAN 1 20 OD OUES oiera e T E 7 3 Open Conf eura OM
381. nputs 1 Pl Default Tag Fl Default Alarming HiHi Alarm 10 0 a Shelia High Alarm Disabled Low Alarm H Bes LoLo Alarm On Alarm Set Bee Site bo On Alarm Clear Alarm Deadband 2 0 Copy EA Paste Update Y OK 7 Cancel l Apply Figure 4 32 Pulse Inputs Alarms ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 35 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Pulse Input Pulse Inputs 7 FCI Deflt Tag FCI Detlt General Advanced Alarms Low Alarm 0 0 RE Alarming Disabled High Alarm 000000 0 E C On Alarm Set LoLa Alarm 10 f On Alarm Clear HIHI Alarm UOUOU 0 f On Alarm Set amp Clear Rate Alarm ogad Alarm Deadband i 00 0 2 Update y OF Cancel A Apply Figure 4 33 Pulse Inputs Alarms FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series The Rate Alarm is the value in engineering units that represents the maximum amount of change in the calculated rate allowed between updates If the change is equal to or greater than this value an alarm is generated To disable this Rate Alarm without disabling the other alarms the Rate Alarm value can be set to a value greater than the maximum rate The two high level alarms are the limit values in engineering units to which the EU Value must rise to generate a High or HiHi Alarm The HiHi Alarm value is typically set higher than the High Alarm The two low level alarms are th
382. nsure that the alarms are enabled and configured for each point you desire to monitor Configure the alarm parameters so that an alarm occurs only when desired These parameters are configured on the Alarms tabs of the I O MVS and Meter Setup configuration screens Enter the SRBX Host Address and SRBX Host Group number of the host to which the SRBX feature is communicating Defines the time in seconds between attempts to transmit an SRBX message There is a Delay parameter associated with each Retry Count parameter Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 30 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The SRBX Attempts 1 to 3 Retry Count is the number of attempts a message is repeated if a valid response is not obtained on the first attempt Attempts include the initial message plus the retries The three Retry Count parameters each have an associated Delay parameter This allows you to set up different length delays for successive retries Selecting Fixed Number allows you to enter a value for how many times a message is retried after the first unsuccessful attempt Note that a 0 entry causes no retries Selecting Continuous 255 causes continuous retries that can only be stopped when the host acknowledges the SRBX alarm For example If you set Retry Count 1 to 2 and Delay 1 to 10 Retry Count 2 to 1 and Delay 2 to 20 then after the first unsuccessful attempt to communicate with the host the device trie
383. nt General Segment 0 or Segment 1 through 10 and History Point 1 through 200 ROC800 Series ARGUMENT2 for a ROC800 Series the historical database commands is the index or pointer to the history storage array The history storage array holds entries taken at either set intervals typically daily hourly and each minute or user configurable intervals For information on the intervals and number of entries refer to the history database specifications instruction manual for the ROC800 Series Argument2 should be a Soft point or FST register The history point defined by Argument will be logged at the index location defined by Argumentz2 Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 26 ROCLINK 800 User Manual ARGUMENT2 for FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 can be a constant or a database parameter that contains the history log pointer If ARGUMENT is a floating point database parameter the historical database commands check for rollover by comparing the pointer against the number of archived periods per history database point Following the write or read the floating point database parameter is incremented by 1 and then compared against the number of archived periods If the floating point database parameter is equal to or greater than the number of archived periods the floating point database parameter is set to 0 and the data writes over the stored data History not Minute History Note For ROC800 Series when v
384. nt Type Table 6 4 EFM History Points for a FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 rano AGA History Point Dosonpron Pomttype Parameter Ache Type 1 ERN stands for the Extra Run Parameters Point Type FLW stands for the Flow Calculation Point Type PIN stands for Pulse Input Point 2 For the FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series this point is set in Standard History Configure gt History All others are set in the Meter History Meter gt History 3 For a FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 the points indicated by a Yes are pre configured The ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 allow you to change the default history point to suit the application Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 16 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 7 EFM Reports You can generate printed and on screen reports of the configuration alarms events and historical flow data for a meter point EFM Electronic Flow Measurement Reports is used in conjunction with the AGA flow calculation capabilities of the ROC or FloBoss to display or print previously collected flow data This flow data is contained in an EFM Report file which includes the operational characteristics of all the configured Meter Runs The operational characteristics consist of Configuration Parameters History Events and Alarms associated with each measured Meter Run Note In order for the EFM Reports utility to work the historical database in the ROC or Fl
385. nter The accumulated value rolls over to zero after reaching 16 777 216 for the ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series The FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series rolls over to zero after reaching 8 388 608 Enter the Conversion ROC800 Series This value is multiplied by the number of pulses to determine the Units as configured This parameter is sometimes referred to as the K Factor for turbine meters The value entered here is taken times the number of pulses to convert the pulses into the Units of measurement configured on this screen Enter the Contract Hour ROC800 Series This will set the beginning of the day for the daily counted parameters listed above If you Enable Alarming the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband are configured on the Alarms tab If you disable Alarming no limit alarms generate for this point The Point Fail and Manual Mode alarm may appear in the Active Alarms field but will not be logged in the Alarms log Alarms should be enabled only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the values so that no false alarms generate For the ROC800 Series Alarming is Enabled in the Configure gt I O gt PI Points gt Alarms tab For the FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Alarming is Enabled in the Configure gt I O gt PI Points gt General tab Frequency ROC800 Series version 1 24 and greater displays the frequency in pulses second of incoming pulse
386. ntial loading increase on the system it is recommended that you monitor the Master Processor Unit MPU loading to ensure that the FST is not consuming too much of the MPU s resources Note It is good practice to insert WAIT WT commands or make sure an END command is encountered to reduce processor loading As the sequence of functions executes two memory locations store intermediate results from one function to the next One location called the Results Register RR stores a floating point value referred to as the Signal Value Analog SVA The other location called the Compare Flag CF stores a discrete value called the Signal Value Discrete SVD Depending on the Command the Results Register RR and the Compare Flag CF may be loaded stored tested modified or left unchanged Note FST Registers including the Run Flag are always cleared upon restart therefore use Softpoints to load initial values for the FST Table A 1 Devices Software and FST Functionality ROC or FloBoss ahaa rata Maximum Byte Size per FST Maximum Line Length FloBoss 100 Series 2 3000 300 FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series 4 8000 300 ROC800 Series 6 3000 500 Maximum number of Steps is a limit of the FST Editor Total FST space in ROC300 series and FloBoss 407 units is 8000 bytes Individual FST size is not limited but the sum of all FSTs cannot exceed 8000 bytes Rev
387. nts of the ROC or FloBoss memory a and load the FST in the selected Workspace Select FST gt Read gt From File to retrieve the contents of a disk file and display the FST in the selected Workspace Note If invalid points exist in the FST you receive an error indicating which Point Number is missing Note The Output view is populated with data when a Compile operation is performed or when an FST is read from the ROC or FloBoss Select FST gt Save as to save the current Workspace contents to a disk file saves one FST at a time Select FST gt Close to exit the FST Editor or Monitor screen A 5 1 9 Printing an FST In the FST Editor select FST gt Print Preview to print an FST or export it to a file When the Print Preview screen appears click the Print button to send the FST to a printer You may also select the PDF Excel or RTF buttons to export the FST as a file in those formats A printed FST can help you in troubleshooting Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 5 2 Altering an FST Edit Menu The FST Editor Edit menu provides options for altering a FST E Select Edit gt Insert Step to place a blank line in the Workspace before the current line Use this G option to add a function between two existing functions Select Edit gt Delete Step to delete the current line from the Workspace Select Edit gt Erase Workspace to erase the contents of the current Workspa
388. o Table 2 1 The Menu Options focus on the activity while you use the Access Levels to increase or decrease responsibility levels within the Menu Options Note If security is enabled on any port at least one user must have the highest level of security level 5 Note Login requests are rejected when ROCLINK 800 Access Levels are greater than Device Security Table 2 1 Security Access Levels Menu Menu Option Access Level ROC ecurity icense Key Administrator ROCLINK 800 Security C D 47 m C D on C 3 4 N Utities C D 07 Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure I O gt DO Points Configure Configure I O gt PI Points Configure Configure Configure O gt System Al Points Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Save Configuration OC Clock Utilities Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 2 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 User Manual menu Menu Option Access Level ROC ROC ROC View VO Monitor Edt fco ooo C C a S en fese ooo T o en fuo J oo Fle e o g o File Print J o Fe Prits J o Hep AboutROCLINK J oo Help HelpTopes J o Roc come J o ROC Direct Connes 0 o Toos Customize 0o Configuring Communications and Security 2 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Men Menu Option
389. o execute the polls Enable Continuous Polling ROC800 Series to control whether the Modbus Master polling sequence is executed on a continuous basis The sequence is defined in the Modbus Master Table When Continuous Polling has been enabled the Request Delay ROC800 Series sets a delay time in seconds between polling request sequences Each line in the Modbus Master Table is considered a request The Retries parameter can be set from 0 to 25 to control the number of times after the initial try that the Master ROC800 Series attempts to establish communications with the specified device before reporting a timeout error Adjust the amount of time between retries using the Timeout parameter The Timeout parameter defines the amount of time that the Master ROC800 Series waits to receive a valid message after it sends a request to a device Do not enter O zero in the Timeout field 8 1 4 Modbus Configuration Scale Values Select Configure gt Modbus gt Configuration The Scale Values tab allows you to enter eight low and high floating point scale values and one low and high integer values for converting floating point numbers to a scaled integer For a ROC800 Series the Integer Scale values and the Float scale values are used in conjunction with one another whenever you use the Convert Code through 8 In older Modbus devices data was exchanged with no scaling applied just raw A D counts were sent between devices These
390. o the RTD terminals of the ROC or FloBoss 7 Click Calibrate 8 If desired during a meter calibration select and specify a Calibration Report File Select Yes to 10 11 12 13 14 15 create a report text file containing calibration and verification details Select No to continue without creating a report If you select Yes another dialog box appears Refer to Calibration Report Enter a value for Set Zero Enter a value for Set Span Enter values for up to three Midpoints You will now return to the main Calibration screen If calibrating a Differential Pressure input click Zero Shift For a FloBoss 407 static pressure input click Offset For a FloBoss 407 temperature input click RTD Bias Click the OK button to close the main calibration window and unfreeze the associated inputs To calibrate the inputs for another Meter Run if available return to Step to calibrate another input for the same Meter Run Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 10 2 7 Turbine Meter Calibration The Static Pressure and Temperature inputs from a turbine meter can be calibrated To calibrate a ROC800 Series unit select Meter gt Calibration gt Turbine To calibrate a FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 unit select Meter gt Calibration 1 If you are calibrating a meter select a specific Meter Run Meter or Turbine Meter to verify and calibrate Use the Meter Tag to verify the identity of the Me
391. oBoss 2 1 2 21 8 2 Communication Ports ccc ec cecceecceescessceesceeeseeeces 2 25 Communications MONOT esere Er E ERASE 2 40 ROCLINK BOG voseseensa cece ostedectvoeaeenace nacecaekeseessces 2 17 Troubleshooting sisisits cesenduuivorscvasiestatendions 2 38 2 39 2 40 Compare Flag CE E uence on saeeiescusaeennceesens A 2 Comparison Commands TS Ue ioe seers E aeion E A 22 Cpe none eee emer en Neer nen err cre E A 11 Computer Requirements cccccccsssssssesssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 Config Command ccccccccccceecececeeseesssssseeeeeeeeees 2 28 Configuration DAS ene cent ey ea 1 14 Di ES are ee A EEEE nee 1 14 Checklist FloBoss 100 Serites cece eeeeeee 1 16 Checklist FloBoss 407 oo eecceeecceeceeesceeeeees 1 17 Checklist ROC300 SerieS 00 0 cecceecceeecee scene 1 16 Checklist ROC800 SerieS 0 0 eecceecceeecee scene 1 15 XO 15 01 0 6 Dn 9 3 PU PHC AUN Oa cssicaceosaacinanswabeovesuyseorsesanesrestonutnncacauntes 1 17 TO sce conc AEE E N AEE EN A 4 1 Menu TICE ee 1 20 2 37 Mod DUS ees auneerisis nenn Na rE E N ATEREA 8 1 NON e EE 1 18 ATIVE PATEA NEENA O E 1 19 PVE Pci eosin E EEA AENA E EAEN 9 4 P E ase eeneaecoasshane ments 12 2 Proc SUI aeccaccaonaceatnanccaestntesnenocacenasa ona eecsancsecsaness 1 14 AV EEA EE E EE E E E see 9 2 Saving and RetrieVing ccsessseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 9 1 TCP IP Communications ccccceecceeecceeceeesceees 2 34 Confi
392. oBoss 407 change the State to Off to clear the output Select Momentary to place the DO in Momentary mode ROC800 Series Select Toggle if you want the Discrete Output to enter the Toggle mode Toggle mode enables a square wave output for which both the Time On and Time Off are defined by the Time On parameter Time On and Time Off will be equal Select TDO for a timed duration output TDO Parameters tab provides additional parameters to specify scaling and engineering unit conversion For a TDO the quantitative value calculated by a PID loop or FST is converted into a time that the Discrete Output is active versus the time it is inactive similar to an Analog Output Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Select TDO Toggle if you want the Discrete Output to enter the TDO Toggle mode In the TDO Toggle mode the DO continuously repeats in a cycle defined by the Cycle Time parameter with the on time duration being controlled by the EU Value parameter When the TDO mode is enabled the TDO parameters tab becomes available Select TDO Parameters tab to set the Cycle Time and EU Value parameters Enter the Time On value for momentary operation The Time On default value is 1 second Time On indicates the following In Momentary mode this is the amount of time in seconds that the momentary contact is energized In the Toggle mode this value is the time in seconds between switching On or Off In
393. oBoss contacts the host to report an alarm condition SVA Signal Value Analog Stored in the Results Register it is the analog value that is passed between functions in an FST SVD Signal Value Discrete Stored in the Compare Flag it is the discrete value that is passed down the sequence of functions in an FST System Variables Parameters configured that describe the ROC or FloBoss unit These parameters are set in the ROC gt Information screen of ROCLINK software Rev Dec 05 Glossary G 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual T TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TDI Timed Discrete Input or Time Duration Input TDO Timed Discrete Output or Time Duration Output TLP Type of point Logical or point number and Parameter number Turbine Meter A turbine device to measure flow rate and other parameters TXD Transmitted data communications signal U Z Upload To send data a file or a program from the ROC or FloBoss unit to a configuration PC or the Host Rev Dec 05 Glossary G 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual INDEX Alarms Symbols Mass A Dayse 5 36 Vome Da yoona 5 36 IN A AA tty Meaaoute 6 25 Volume Hour oooooooooooooooooooooooooooeooooooooececce 5 36 AR Ma sofas ret oe e a tania eatace TN 6 25 A ALMS oooooooooooooooooooooeoooooooooooooooooe sc 4 4 4 20 4 31 A E EEEE PT E TEIE AA Se ene E E A 6 31 AcknowledgingModbus c ssssccssesseecssesseeeeeeees 8 16 EVT seetri as e a E 6 23 E T A EE 4 4 K
394. oBoss must be configured so that certain flow calculation values can be retrieved from memory 6 7 1 Collecting ROC Data Select ROC gt Collect Data to save various ROC and FloBoss data to disk files Data includes Configuration data Hourly Periodic volume data Daily volume data Alarm Log data 6 Event Log data This screen may only be accessed when you are on line with the already configured ROC from which you will be gathering data Use the Save As field and Browse button to either accept the default File name or enter a new File name Collect Device Data Collect i EFM Report Data Save s C Program FilesSROCLINE 80054162 efm Browse TTT Y OK Cancel Figure 6 11 Collect Device Data When you select EFM Report Data the Collect Data function saves all the values for EFM Parameters The file has the efm extension of Note You can create an EFM Report from this data by selecting View gt EFM Report The file has the EFM extension Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 7 2 Displaying EFM Reports You can choose to view the report or print the report 1 Select View gt EFM Reports View EFM Report Report Data File C Program Files S AOCLINESO0 AT G2 etm Station Address Al G2 Station Name Remote O prtns Crtrlr Report Sections Meter Run Characteristic Configuration Data w Hourly Volume Data Sta
395. obtained from the A D and summed together At EU calculation the values summed are divided by the number of samples and are used as the Raw A D Input Disable this function to acquire instantaneous values When Clipping is Enabled the software forces the Filtered EUs to stay within the range defined by the cut off limits Set the cut off limits by using the LoLo Alarm and HiHi Alarm parameters Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 48 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Adjusted A D 0 is the calibrated Analog to Digital A D reading corresponding to zero percent input Adjusted A D 100 is the calibrated A D reading corresponding to 100 percent input Raw A D Input displays the current reading directly from the Analog to Digital converter Actual Scan displays the actual amount of time in seconds that passes between scans This number should be the same as shown for the Scan Period parameter if the system is not overloaded 4 10 3 System Al Alarms ROC800 Series Select Configure gt I O gt System AI Points The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this AI point system Analog Input Analog Inputs 1 Battery Tag Battery Alarming HiHi lam 15 0 C Enabled i 4 5 Disabled High Alarm Low Alarm i 1 0 nea LoLa Alarm i 0 On Alarm Set o On lar Clear mated alle Alarm Deadband 0 5 Update YY OK 7 Cancel Apply Figure 4 44 System AI Alarms ROCS800 Series
396. odbus with EFM extensions method for retrieving alarms and events When the ROC or FloBoss receives a Function Code 03 request referencing defined Events Alarms Register usually 32 the ROC or FloBoss begins to collect records from first the Event Log and then the Alarm Log starting where the last poll left off The ROC or FloBoss will collect records until either there are not any more new events alarms or the maximum of twelve records have been collected The ROC or FloBoss unit sends the information back to the host which in return replies with Function Code 05 referencing the same Events Alarms Register indicating that the points have been received and that the Host is ready for the next twelve records Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 8 3 1 Modbus Events and Alarms ROC800 Series The following details how the Event Log and Alarms Log information is placed in Modbus Event and Alarm messages and how or what is generated upon the Event or Alarm condition Normal Event Record A normal Event record format Bit Map Time as float Date as float Old Value as float New Value as float Olt 1213141516 71 8 9 0 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 System Text Events When you set the System Command Change Bit bit 7 in the Operator Change Bit Map of the Event the Register number for all System Command Change events will be set to the Event Alarm Register number default 1s 32 Bit Map Time as oat
397. ode When LCD Backlight Power Saving Mode ROC800 Series is enabled the LCD automatically shuts off after the amount of time set in the Inactivity Time field LCD Firmware Version displays the firmware version currently loaded Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 14 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 3 3 Configuring System Flags Select ROC gt Flags to perform actions that affect the overall operation of the ROC or FloBoss device From this screen a configuration can be saved to Flash memory and the ROC or FloBoss can be re initialized if necessary Refer to Table 3 1 Restart Restore Configuration Wam Start From Factory Defaults Cold Start Clear Cold Start amp Clear Alarms History Configuration amp D ata Cold Start amp Clear Events Flash Memory Cold Start amp Clear FST Save Configuration Cold Start amp Clear History Data eer Lale Stale a Else ALL Flash Write Status fo Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 3 16 Flags ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Restart Flash Memory Warm Start Save Configuration Clear Cold Start Com leted Cold Start amp Clear Alarms E vents stains j Cold Start amp Clear Displays Cold Start amp Clear FST Cold Start amp Clear History Cold Start amp Clear ALL 2 Update Y OK Cancel Figure 3 17 Flags FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series
398. ode When the Channel I O displays Analog Output select an Output Mode option For the output to automatically process the field input and use the Auto Value select Automatic Enabled Mode For the output to use the Manual Value select Manual For the engineering unit EU Value to be no longer updated by the ROC select Disabled Note Even in Manual Mode the HART device may change When the Channel I O displays Analog Output and Automatic Output mode has been selected the Auto Value in Engineering Units will be used as an output When the Channel I O displays Analog Output and Manual Output mode has been selected the Manual Value in Engineering Units will be used as an output Physical Value displays the current value of the output in Engineering Units Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 52 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 11 2 HART Advanced ROC800 Series Select Configure gt I O gt HART The Advanced tab sets parameters for the channel Each ROC800 Series HART module can support up to four channels Point Number 2 1 A D Values Adjusted A D D3 B21 0 Adjusted 4 0 100 3103 000 Faw 4 0 Input AE Analog Output EU Value on Reset ic o Failsafe Value Pass Through C Disabled f Enabled Strip all bytes including preambles before message C Enabled Don t alter the message return all bytes Timeout 5000 milliseconds Copp BB Paste 2 Update
399. odes Latched Momentary Toggle Timed Duration Output TDO and TDO Toggle Select Configure gt I O gt DO Points Examine the default settings and adjust the parameters to suit your application on each of the tabs in the order given below 1 The General tab sets the basic parameters for the DO point 2 The Advanced tab enables you to configure accumulated value and state for reset for the selected DO 3 The TDO Parameters tab allows configuration of TDO parameters when one of the DOUT Types TDO Timed Duration or TDO Toggle is selected in the Discrete Outputs screen 4 The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this DO point for a ROC800 Series 5 After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 5 1 DO General Select Configure gt I O gt DO Points The General tab sets the basic parameters for the DO point Discrete Output 2 Ed Discrete Outputs 1 DO Default Tag Do Detault General Advanced TOO Parameters Alarms Point Number 2 Time On 1 0 Seconds Auto Output Manual Output Momentary Physical Output C On Off C On amp Off a f f DOUT Type Scanning Mode C Latched C Momentary Toggle Auto C Manual C TOO C TOO Toggle C Disabled Active Alarms E
400. of FST 1 could display as either FST 1 R2 or 96 0 3 Options Display TLP C As Number fe g 103 96 21 Auto Scan Update Interval 1 000 Seconds Y OK K Cancel Figure 1 5 TLP Options Select Tools gt Options to set the time interval in seconds at which the AutoScan feature on various screens in ROCLINK 800 software will poll the ROC or FloBoss device Click the AutoScan button to cause ROCLINK 800 software to poll the device automatically until the StopScan button is clicked 1 6 9 AutoScan Update Interval Option Select Tools gt Options to set the time interval in seconds at which the AutoScan feature on various screens in ROCLINK 800 software will poll the ROC or FloBoss device Pushing the AutoScan button on any screen will cause ROCLINK 800 software to poll the device automatically until the StopScan button is pushed 1 7 Configuration Basics Configuration of a ROC or FloBoss unit can be performed by altering an existing configuration file or by starting a new configuration file The full configuration procedure involves using the menu functions or Configuration Tree Menu to access the configuration screens Some of the configuration screens may not be required for your application or may not be available for your type of ROC or FloBoss The following checklists present the order of configuration in a typical application Omit configuration screens for modules and accessories that do not appe
401. oints The Advanced tab lets you configure features such as EU Options Rate Period Rollover value and Conversion for the Pulse Input Pulse Input AEA Pulse Inputs 1 Pl Default Tag Fl Default EU Options Rate Max Rollover C Today s Total Max Rollover CO Ruming Total Entered Rollover Rollover Value EUs i 000 0 Rate Pernod Conversion C EUsec C EUmin C EUs puse Pulses EU EUhour C EUday Copy EA Paste Update yY OF Cancel t Apply Figure 4 29 Pulse Input Advanced ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 32 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Pulse Input IX Pulse Inputs 1 FCI Deflt Tag FCI Detlt General Advanced Alarms EU Options f Rate Maz Rollover f Today s Total Max Rollover f Running Total Entered Rollover Rollover Value EUs hoon oo Conversion Rate Period f EUs Pulze C Pulses EU Conversion K Factor O EUhour C EUdap 2 Update y OK 7 Cancel A Apply Figure 4 30 Pulse Inputs Advanced FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Pulse Input Pulse Inputs 1 Aus FI 1 Tag Aus FI 1 General Advanced Alarms EU Options f Rate Max Rollover Filter Time Seconds None C Today s Total Max Rollower f Running Total Entered Rollover Rollover Value EUs 2 0 Conversion Rate Period f EUs Pulee f Pulses EU Conversion K Factor i O C EUhour C EUdap Copy EA Paste 2 Update y
402. ol using Function Code 03 FloBoss 100 Series units can also send the Extended History Modbus History Table Regist i egisters History Index Mode f EFM Extensions Mode O Override Mode Current Date BILE Feriodic History History History Register Register i i Update YY OK 7 Cancel Figure 8 4 Modbus History Example ROCS800 Series Each historical record contains a time and date stamp and all of the history archives or values for which the Register Number is configured The Modbus Function Code 03 and the History Archive Register are used to collect the archived data Two separate Modbus registers indicate the current Hourly and Daily history index These can be configured on the Modbus Registers screen as the Hourly History Index Register and the Daily History Index Register for the Segment being referenced subtract 1 to get the last archived values These indexes identify the current history archive at which data is about to be logged When the ROC or FloBoss unit receives a Function Code 03 request referencing the Periodic History Index commonly register 7161 or Daily History Index commonly register 7160 the value returned is interpreted as an index into the specified history log The Host reads the indexes and then compares the index to the last polled history index that the host maintains and decides whether to request history Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 8 ROCLINK 800 User Manual If the
403. olling E Starting Request 1 Timeout 30 Seconds Number of Requests E Retries 2 Continuous Folling f Enabled amp Disabled Request Delay oo o Seconds Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 8 1 Modbus Configuration General ROCS800 Series Modbus Configuration General Scale Values History Access Registers Status OK Modbus Type Log Modbus Events Byte Order C ASCII f Disabled f Least Significant Byte First f ATU C Most Significant Byte First EFM Modbus Date Time Registers f Disabled Date Register 7046 f Enabled Time Register 7047 2 Update yw Ok 7 Cancel Apply Figure 8 2 Modbus Configuration General FloBoss 100 Series Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Select the Comm Port ROC800 Series that you desire to configure Select the Comm Mode or Modbus Type The Modbus protocol supports two modes of transmission ASCII and RTU All devices in the same communications network must be configured with the same mode of transmission ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange mode represents each 8 bit byte of data as two ASCII characters that are the hexadecimal representation of the value This allows the messages to be read with the use of a dumb terminal but uses twice as many characters as the RTU mode Each character sent is composed of a Start bit 7 or 8 Data bits and one or two Stop bits with Even Odd or No parity
404. ommended Click Next A confirmation screen appears when you are ready to start copying files Click Next in the Setup Status screen Click the Finish button in the Wizard Complete screen If the installation was performed from the CD ROM select View Manual or Exit on the Main Menu screen Once you have exited the Main Menu remove the installation CD ROM Note A restart may be necessary after installation is complete Manually Creating a Desktop Shortcut ROCLINK 800 software installation should automatically create a Desktop Shortcut on your computer If for some reason you need to manually create the Desktop Shortcut perform the following steps 1 2 oe E Double click the My Computer icon Navigate to the C Program Files ROCLINK800 folder or the folder where you installed ROCLINK 800 Select the ROCLINK exe file Select Create Shortcut from the File menu Click and drag the shortcut to your Desktop Double click the shortcut on your desktop to launch ROCLINK 800 software Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 1 4 2 Launching ROCLINK 800 During Setup This procedure launches ROCLINK 800 software every time you start this computer 1 2 Double click the My Computer icon Navigate to the C Program Files ROCLINK800 folder or the folder where you installed ROCLINK 800 software Select the ROCLINK exe file Select File gt Create Shortcut Depending on the Operatin
405. on 2 20 or greater or FloBoss 407 Version 1 04 or greater If you disable an FST and then restart it the FST will start executing from where it left off The FST can be forced to restart from the beginning by setting the Run Flag to a value of 2 Write to Config Memory FST point parameters Registers and Run Flag are permanently saved to memory FST executable code is not saved to Config Memory Stop Start If you disable an FST and restart it the FST begins executing from the first Step Warm Start If a FST Point Type is saved to memory and it is active running when a Warm Start occurs FSTs automatically restart at the beginning STEP Cold Start On a Cold Start FST Registers will be cleared but will be restored from Internal Config Memory if valid However if you perform a Cold Start amp Clear FSTs or a Cold Start amp Clear ALL type of Cold Start the FSTs are permanently cleared from memory Upgrading Firmware If a FST Point Type is saved to memory and it is active running when a firmware upgrade occurs FSTs automatically restart at the beginning STEP after the upgrade completes For a ROC800 Series Write to Internal Config Memory FSTs are permanently saved to memory Warm Start If an FST is saved to memory and it is active running when a restart occurs FSTs automatically restart at the beginning STEP Cold Start On a Cold Start FST Registers will be cleared bu
406. on Points automatically begin to download The Status Point Type and Point Number will display how the download is progressing Click OK when the download is complete Select ROC gt Flags and click the Save Configuration for Flash Memory button Select only the Configuration Points you desire to download The items that are not configured in your configuration will be grayed out Rev Dec 05 Saving and Retrieving Configurations 9 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 9 3 1 Opening a Configuration The Open option allows you to open an existing configuration file Configuration files are created using the Save Configuration function To open a configuration file 1 Select File gt Open 2 Select the configuration File name 3 Click Open Once the configuration file is opened it automatically becomes active and you may edit the file off line The configuration file may also be downloaded into a ROC or FloBoss Refer to Downloading a Configuration Rev Dec 05 Saving and Retrieving Configurations 9 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual SECTION 10 CALIBRATION This section describes how to calibrate Analog Inputs RTD Inputs and Sensor Inputs for orifice meters and turbine meters In this Chapter Section Page MAD A CaM AON TS ASICS saiee seca E E E E sala A E E E E 10 1 OZ VARIN G AUT ORO IN or ces art carers E E sto A E I E E toon tou mene E E 10 3 10 3 Analog Input Calibration Values 2 0 0 ccccccccccccccceceeessseeeceeeeeeaseesseeec
407. on Setup Station 1 Station 1 Tag Station 1 General Gas Quality Advanced Alarms FRY Method Units Atmospheric Pressure Local Gravitational Acceleration C Detailed fe US C Calculate Enter Calculate Enter r C Meti Gross HEM 14 45 PSIA 3214398 Ft 5ec2 Base Fressure 14 73 PEJA Heavy Gas Distribution C6 75 10 0 Latitude 30 0 Deg Octane Z Nonane oo Decane 0 0 Total 100 00 Copy 2 Update Y OF 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 5 3 Station Advanced ROCS800 Series For flow calculations select FPV Method of Detailed Gross I Gross II or User methods of calculating the compressibility factor The Detailed method provides the highest accuracy in a broader range of measurement conditions however one of the Gross methods can be used when Temperature is between 0 and 54 C 32 and 130 F Pressure is between 0 and 8274 kPa 0 and 1200 psia Gas composition is within the normal range as defined in the 1992 AGAS report Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Briefly the three FPV Methods are Detailed Requires the natural gas composition in mole percent to be entered for all components Gross I Specific Gravity relative density Real gas gross heating value per unit volume The mole of CO Gross II Specific Gravity relative density The mole of CO2 The mole of N2 Note If either Gross Method
408. on bar select Size to widest to change the width of all selected Objects to the width of the widest element From the Icon bar select Make Vertical Spacing Equal to evenly adjust the vertical spacing between all the selected Objects From the Icon bar select Make Horizontal Spacing Equal to evenly adjust the horizontal spacing between all the selected Objects Objects can be removed by selecting the Object and pressing the lt Delete gt key Click the Test button to verify that the Custom Display works correctly Click the Save Display to File button 12 6 2 Custom Displays Objects Select View gt Display Objects can be added in one of two ways Select an Object from the icon bar and drag it to the area of the display where you want the display Object to appear Place the cursor where you want the display Object to appear Right click on the mouse and select an Object ai ROCLINK 800 Display Editor C File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help De ch AY Wie a eee O l Gl Fal E m g m Aa AGAME FF B O CRG Frarmne 1 C OptionButton 1 Deda Nare C OptionButton 2 Logical Point List Disabled Point Type s Undefined Labell None T Checkbox TextBox 1 CheckBox 2 Update Mode Normal Y ComboBox ee aa Point 1 Point 2 Print 3 Point 4 Figure 12 9 Display Editor Objects Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 11 ROCLIN
409. on based on EU second totals ROC800 Series EU Min Calculation based on EU minute totals EU Hour Calculation based on EU hourly totals e EU Day Calculation based on EU day totals The following shows the calculation of the Current Rate in two different ways If Conversion Mode is EUs per pulse and Rate Period is EU per minute then Current Rate accumulated pulses x Conversion Scan Period x conversion from seconds to minutes If Conversion Mode is pulses per EU and Rate Period is EU per hour then Current Rate accumulated pulses Conversion Scan Period x conversion from seconds to hours Select the Conversion if Rate was selected under EU Options EUs Pulse The specified number of engineering units typically fractional parts such as 0 01 associated with a single pulse Pulses EU This is the inverse of EUs Pulse Here the specified number of pulses such as 100 is required to equal one engineering unit For the ROC800 Series this parameter specifies how the number entered in the Conversion field on the main PI screen is used For the FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 enter the Conversion K Factor This parameter is sometimes called the K Factor for turbine meters For the ROC300 Series and FloBoss 100 Series if the PI is used as an input to AGA7 calculations then the Conversion value should be set to produce the EU Value in MCF or kM Rev Dec 05 Configuring
410. on the PC to open the Display 3 Rename menus by right clicking on the menu title in Hierarchy Menu and selecting Rename Rename User Scrollable screens and the Screen Saver by clicking once on the screen name in the Hierarchy Menu and typing the new Title that will appear both in the editor and on the ROC Keypad Display screen 5 Edit the TLPs display parameters and security settings for the User Scrollable screens 6 Enter the Title for this configuration file Use of all uppercase letters is recommended When the Keypad Display is in use logged on the value listed for On Open TLP will be written to the TLP selected here When the Keypad Display is no longer in use logged off the value listed for On Close TLP will be written to the TLP selected here You can scroll through the logical instances of the point types assigned in the Point Types field 9 Line Entries can be added deleted or moved Each line represents one line on the display Each 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 field of the entry is configured separately However a command to add move or delete the entry will add move or delete the entire line Once an entry has been created the parameters in the Field section become available if appropriate to that entry If the field highlighted in the entry is to have manually entered text or numbers select a Value of Manual Value If the field is to have a parameter name in full select Paramet
411. onds Qutput Point AQUS EU O00000 B 2 Update y OK Cancel fl Apply Figure 7 4 Sampler Odorizer ROCS800 Series Select the specific number of the Sampler or Odorizer Sampler Odorizer to configure This field will be grayed out if the number of Sampler points on the ROC gt Information screen is zero ROC800 Series If Mode is Enabled the DO sends a signal when the specified flow conditions are met ROC800 Series Use the Input Rate Point TLP box to select an input point from which to get the rate ROC800 Series Input Rate Value displays the current value of the Input Rate Point selected The unit of measure for the Input Rate Value and Unit Accumulation will be the same as the unit of the input point selected for Input Rate Point ROC800 Series The Time Basis determines the time base for which the Input Rate Point is integrated every second minute hour or day ROC800 Series The Unit Accumulation field determines when an output pulse generates The Input Rate Value is integrated over the Time Basis When the total matches the Unit Accumulation value a pulse is generated for the duration specified in the duration field ROC800 Series The Duration is how long in seconds the output pulse will be on This is how long the DO stays ON The DO is turned on for the amount of time set in the Duration field every time the Unit Accumulation value is exceeded ROC800 Series Use the Output Point TLP box
412. ons below the Expression preview pane select the TLP button to configure a specific TLP to this expression From the buttons below the Expression preview pane select the logical operations that your expression requires When the expression is complete click Apply Click OK to approve and return to the Display Editor Saving the display file at this point is highly recommended so that you save the expression C File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help S td MNM Onn np Point Number 1 Battery For System Al s ROC8O3 Information Graphics Example Chart Example Tab 4 Tab Tabe Tab Tabs Example of a ROCLINE 800 Display for the ROCSOS System Al s ROC Information ROC Date Time tag Batey Station Name Remote Oprtne Crtrlr 10 07 2005 miasa Address 1 EU Value 11 4534 Wols e eB e Group Scanning W Enabled Al Default IP Address 1 0 0 0 2 Scan Period f O seconds maaar iz Actual Scan Time 1 000125 Seconds ead eu E subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Firmware Version W681 26 Other Boot Version Wb 270012 Or as a label 6 Useful Notes Moving an Object Press the arrow keys while holding down CTAL Resize an Object Press the arrow keys while holding down SHIFT or select other resize options fram the tool bar Add an Object Aight mouse click on the main form and select object Adding Object to Frames Objects can be moved from the main form to a frame by dragging
413. ons have similar characteristics use Copy and Paste to create Gas Quality configurations Note For information on the Gas Quality tab in the Station Setup for a ROC800 Series refer to the Station Gas Quality Tab ROC800 Series 5 The Advanced tab specifies additional parameters for the meter 6 The FloBoss 100 Series uses the fields in the Sampler tab to enable you to set up the Discrete Output DO2 of the FloBoss to send a pulse output to another device such as an odorizer and control a gas sampler for a Meter Run To use this feature select the Enabled option under Sampler Control 7 The FloBoss 100 Series use the Instrument Calibration tab to calibrated devices 8 The Calibration Factors tab displays a dialog box containing a number of parameters that allow select and calculation of optional flow adjustment factor to compensate for the difference in condition between the meter location and the location where the calibration instruments were certified Selecting the Meter gt Setup Orifice or Turbine gt Calibration Factors tab ROC800 Series displays a dialog box containing a number of parameters that allow select and calculation of optional flow adjustment factor to compensate for the difference in condition between the meter location and the location where the calibration instruments were certified 9 The Alarms tab sets Alarm parameters for the meter 10 Ifthe Turbine Meter Input Type on the General tab was configu
414. or details concerning these configuration screens Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Well Test Flow Table Point Number iii AWELLTDAYT MCFD Fws Hr o foo Hr 2 340 Hr 4 00 Hr 6 00 Hr a o0 H10 loo H12 loo oo His 00 Hie 00 Higo Hr20 00 Hr22 00 Update Y OK Cancel Figure 7 16 User Data Example ROC300 Series After you select a User Program option from the User Data drop down menu the screen associated with that option displays You can then proceed to configure the parameters shown on the screen Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 26 ROCLINK 800 User Manual SECTION 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS Select Configure gt Modbus gt Configuration This section describes how to configure a ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series to communicate using the Modbus protocol for integration of the ROC and Modbus devices into the same Host Slave system In this Chapter Section Page 8 1 Modbus Configuration ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseseeeeees 8 2 Modbus Configuration History cccccccccccsssssssecccccceeaeesseecceceeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeceesessaaaaeseeeeees 8 8 8 3 Modbus Events and Alarms Functionality cccccccccssssssseecccccceeessseeeceeccseaaesseeeeeeeeessuaanseeeeess 8 13 8 4 Modbus Registers ROC800 Series and FIOBoss 100 Series ccccccssseessseeceeeeeeeeeesssee
415. ose Close the screen Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 31 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 8 4 Viewing Report Logs From the Device A report is generated based on your Search Criteria from the currently connected ROC or FloBoss device 1 Select View menu gt History Alarm or Event gt From Device 2 Select or de select the History Points History only Deselect All and Select All allow you to mass select or deselect History Points The Search Criteria selections change depending on the Frequency 3 Select the History Type frequency at which you desire to view the report You can view Minute Hourly Hour or Periodic Daily Day Minimum Maximum or Extended History FloBoss 100 Series values 4 Click OK Select History to View 7 x EAN 1 MINTDOY TOTAL Point 2 FL 1 CURDP AVG Point 3 FLW 1 CURFP AWG Point 4 FL 1 CURTMP AWG History Points Point 5 FLY 1 MVE MY Avg Select All Point 6 FLW 1 HW PF AVG Point 7 F 1 CURFLO ACCUM Deselect All Point 8 FLW 1 ENERGY ACCUM History Type f Minute C Hour Day C Min dMas yY OK 7 Cancel Figure 6 18 History From Device Example FloBoss 407 Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 32 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Select History to View Sig a General General 00 oof Point 1 HART 4 1 EU AVG Point 2 SFP 1 DAT AB AYG History Type Minute f Hour Periodic Day yY OK 7 Cancel Figure 6 19
416. otocol Only configures the Port to only accept ROC Plus protocol messages Modbus Slave is disabled Modbus Slave Only configures the Port to allow the ROC or FloBoss to act only as a Modbus Slave device ROC Plus Protocol is disabled Note It is recommended that the Only options be used if the messages received will only be of this specific protocol Otherwise select ROC Plus Protocol Modbus Slave if this Comm Port is going to have both protocols communicate on it Modbus Master configures the Port to allow the ROC or FloBoss to poll Modbus devices ROC Plus Protocol and Modbus Slave are disabled DS800 configures the Port to download and debug Development Suite 800 projects only You will not be able to connect two ROC800 Series units together with this option It 1s exclusively configured for DS800 PC communications Note Modems are not supported for the DS800 communication type LCD configures the port for communications with a ROC Keypad Display unit I O Module configures this Port to use the communications protocol residing in the I O module User Program 1 to 8 configures this Port to use the communications protocol residing in the loaded user program The user program number here will match the user program number in the Configuration Tree menu and the User Program Administrator screen Reserved indicates that this Port is reserved and cannot be used for communications For the ROC300 Series
417. output Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 10 ROCLINK 800 User Manual For the ROC800 Series when Scanning Mode is set to Auto or Enabled Auto Value displays the last Analog Output scan in engineering units For the ROC800 Series when the Scanning Mode is set to Manual use Manual Value to enter the value instead of the Auto Value field For a ROC800 Series Physical Value indicates the current state of the AO When the AO is in Manual Mode this should reflect the Manual Value When the AO is in Auto mode this should reflect the Auto Value Enter the Low Reading EU value corresponding to a zero percent output the low end of the EU range Based on the EU range determined in part by this parameter the EU Value is converted to a corresponding analog signal Enter the High Reading EU value corresponding to a 100 percent output the high end of the EU range Based on the EU range determined in part by this parameter the EU Value is converted to a corresponding analog signal If you Enable Alarming alarms will be generated on point failure or Manual Mode If you Disable Alarming the Point Fail or Manual Mode alarm appear in the Active Alarms field but will not be written to the Alarm log The Active Alarms field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is set to Enabled the active alarms appear Even if Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual
418. pace and Output Keystrokes A 6 Table A 3 Monitor and Trace Mode Keystrokes A 15 Table A 4 FST Command Library Conventions A 16 Table A 5 FST Command Summary 006 A 16 eae be coed eee ee lee sec a eee aseaneec eee 2 18 2 25 TC PAYA a E a eniawisin wea tacaneens 4 44 PA ATTN E A aeasiatanav meee 4 45 TSS E E ATE EEA A EE A E 4 43 POTS EE E EE E E A E EE E E 4 42 Thermocouple Input Configuration 08 4 42 Type Jort Type E scctiassvcstecuassaatucdinwecteseanaros eves 4 43 LEP eae EA A 2 34 TCP IP NetWork swvsctavsosssscvassvetecssidnndevavaveniendcerreeoevensons 3 6 ICPP E a 7 21 TOE aa E A AE AEA 4 16 TDI Parameters cccccccecccceesecccesecceeeseceeeseceeeeeees 4 18 UO E EEE pete E A meaty ese N EE 4 23 Defining the Output Pulse eecccceeeeeeeeees 4 27 Parameters eroien nonr onnar 4 26 aA d e E E E E E 4 24 Technical SUPPOMt ssccsssssscocanatpoersotasesaansanensbcantonsvasnansins 1 2 Telephone eacee iseinean eRe REE 1 2 Temp Compensation cccccccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 7 Temperaire TLP esteeseen 5 17 Thermocouple Reltorio Terere 4 42 Time Ts AS ES ereraa E ER N 7 4 Time Dura Ossin antaneansnactonates 4 16 L ea E T 2 21 Time Related Commands BW DAE EEEE E E E E A 23 TLP BOX SelecCHonS sarisari en ENEA E 1 13 Display Options cccceccccccceeesesssseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeees 1 14 Today ST GGA otesccerncnnaceranetsscseuoedanedenvethaienr
419. play editor will open 2 Specify the Custom Display properties Display Name Enter text describing the entire display Logical Point List If Disabled only one iteration logical of the display is created When Enabled multiple logicals of the display are created The number of logicals is based on the number of logicals in the first point selected in the Point Type s field Point Type List When a Logical Point List is Enabled select the Point Type whose logical will track the iteration of the display Picture Select a graphic to be used for the background of the display Advanced Features Menu Location Replace Rename or Hide the menu selection in the ROCLINK 800 menu This applies only to displays that are resident in the ROC or FloBoss and not for displays on disk Hide Hide a menu selection in the Meter View or ROC menu Syntax H menuname submenuname Example H Meter Plate Change Replace Replace a current screen in the Meter menu with the Custom Display Syntax R menuname submenuname Example R Meter Setup Rename Replace a current screen with the Custom Display and rename the menu selection Syntax N menuname submenuname newsubmenuname Example N Meter Calibration Coriolis Cal Note To Hide Replace or Rename multiple features separate features with a comma Example N Meter Calibration Coriolis Cal N Meter Calibration Central Cal
420. plit Ina DS800 license the application code has no meaning and is 0 Ina User Program license the application code s meaning is documented in the user program s manual In an AGA 3 7 8 license the application code will be 6 which indicates six Meter Runs per license If the quantity of licenses is 2 then 12 Meter Runs can execute License Key Administrator License Kep 1 Hum 4pplication Mame Provider Name App Code Version Quantity Available Expiration Time Created 1 4G4_3 778 Emerson FCD 6 0 0 0 1 0 No Expiration 0570672005 10 49 46 License Kep H2 2 Update 9X Cancel Figure 2 9 License Key Administrator ROCS800 Series The License Key grids provide a list of the licenses currently on the key in the upper 1 and lower 2 key slots of the CPU module Licenses may be moved from one key to another If both keys are full the Move Merge and Split buttons are grayed out Use the Move button to move licenses from one key to another key Use the Merge button to merge the first two similar entries by creating a single license with the combined quantities Use the Split button to split a license with a quantity greater than 1 This allows multiple quantity licenses to be split and moved between license keys You cannot split a license with a quantity of 1 Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 5 Device Directory The Device Directory is the
421. point is not in scanning mode If you are calibrating a temperature input disconnect the RTD sensor and connect a decade box or comparable equipment to the RTD terminals of the ROC or FloBoss Press the Calibrate button Enter a value for Set Zero after stabilization Enter a value for Set Span after stabilization Enter values for up to three Midpoints one at a time or click Done if you are not configuring Midpoints Click the OK button to close the main calibration window and unfreeze the associated inputs To calibrate the inputs for another AI or RTD return to Step 1 Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 14 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 10 2 9 HART Calibration Select Configure gt I O gt HART Points A two point calibration routine can be run on HART inputs The Calibration routine may only be run on devices when the channel is in Point to Point mode and when the device is in Skip this Device mode Point Nurniber i General Advanced Calibration Device 1 Device 2 Device 3l Device 4 Device 5 nalog Input Calibration In order to calibrate the Analog Input for this HART card confirm the device yalues are either not being used or the device s poll mode is Skip This Device This will ensure that values being used for control or as inputs to calculations meter runs do not get updated unexpectedly when the HART Communicator is attached to the channel Following the completion of the calibration routine ensure the dev
422. point value to an integer before the response message is returned to the Host Once a register is mapped it can be referenced by any Modbus request providing the data type of the TLP is appropriate for the Function Code Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 18 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Note If the native ROC or FloBoss data type does not meet the requirements of the Modbus host device Conversion Codes are available to convert the data to the required data type For more information refer to Modbus Conversion ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series Note For the ROC800 Series you can select to have the mapping apply to all ROC communication ports or on a selected port only When a Modbus request is received a search is performed for the referenced register s If a register number match is found a response is built based on the device point type and parameter configured in the table If no register number match is located an error message is returned Rev Dec 05 Table Index Modbus Registers Tag Reg Map 1 a Start Register End Register Device Parameters Indexing Conversion Comm Fort 0 0 Undefined Print U All Comm Ports All Comm Ports o O Undefined Poit O ll Comm Ports r Undefined Point J0 All Comm Forts o O Undefined Poit O All Comm Ports o Undefined Poit O AI Comm Pors o Undefined Poit O ll Comm Parts O Undefined Point O AI Comm Ports o Undefined Poit O AI Comm Ports o Undefined
423. pointing device The major components of ROCLINK 800 software user interface are Menu bar and menus Toolbar Function screens Dialog boxes Help system including the Status bar and message boxes gt gt gt gt SH Device Directory or Configuration Tree menu ROCLINK 800 software employs a Graphical User Interface GUI with a standard Windows menu structure After logging on to ROCLINK 800 software available functions display in a menu bar with drop down menus A Status Line at the bottom left of the display contains pertinent information about the highlighted item such as a menu option or a parameter Buttons display dialog boxes for further configuration details or perform a desired action such as the Update button To activate the button Click the button with a left click of the mouse When a button is active press lt Enter gt or a function key Dialog boxes are areas that pop up inside the current screen to allow further selections or values to be entered They can also provide messages or information that is more detailed The menu structure lists choices from which you can select the desired function Once a function is selected the screen or dialog box for that function displays This screen or dialog box provides the requested information and lets you enter the applicable configuration data Refer to Table 1 1 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Table 1
424. ptional but are may be required if you are using the Label within a Command Enter all required Labels or a compile error may occur Enter the END command at the end of your FST A 5 1 1 Creating an FST from an Existing File Use the following steps to create an FST by editing an existing FST You may use either a FST from the device or a FST file on your PC If you are using a file from the device connect the ROC or FloBoss to the computer running ROCLINK 800 software 1 Select Utilities gt FST Editor 2 Select File gt Read gt From File or File gt Read gt From Device 3 Open an existing FST file with the FST extension 4 Edit each STEP with the appropriate Command Tag and Arguments The Label field is optional but are may be required if you are using the Label within a Command Enter all required Labels or a compile error may occur When you select the field for the Command the select i button appears If you click the button a display of commands from which to choose appears You may also type in the 3 character command Depending upon which Command was chosen the Argument fields prompt you to type in a Label choose a TLP or enter some other data Verify that the END command is at the end of your FST Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 10 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 5 1 2 Compiling Build and Viewing an FST When you perform a Compile the contents of the Workspace are encoded into the proper format fo
425. r System Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Pulse Inputs ATO 1 ATD Det 2 ATD Det Multivariable Sensor Station Parameters Orifice Meter Aun Values Turbine Meter Run alues Deselect All Y OK X Cancel Figure 12 2 I O Monitor Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual am ROCLINK 800 10 Monitor Fie Edit View ROC _ Meter Utilities Tools Window Help D ca lal me fyi SORER EF Sistem Analog Inputs 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 Point Tag ID Battery Charge Ir Module Default Ea Units Tag Degrees C EU Value 202607 ooj 120207 OO 2 45097 Analog Outputs F F B 33 F a Point Tag ID 40 Defaut 40 Default A0 Default 40 Default Units Tag Physical Value Discrete Inputs Point Tag ID Status Accumulated Value Physical Status Pulse Inputs g oe Point Tag ID Pl Default Pl Default Units Tag Accumulated value Pulses for Day Oo o Curent Rate o ooo o0 Select Hew Stop Scan Close H ORRE 2P Figure 12 3 I O Monitor Values Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 12 3 LCD Display Configuration ROC300 Series Select Configure gt LCD The LCD Display Configuration is used to configure the LCD for a ROC300 Series unit with a FlashPAC that has an optional Local Display Panel LDP connected to it The configured parameters may also be changed from the LCD When setting up a LCD point
426. r value set in the Register Number field The Starting History Point value is the first history point to be retrieved Enter the Ending History Point to acquire a group of History Points without having to define each history point separately Enter values in both the Starting History Point and Ending History Point fields The Starting History Point and Ending History Point values must be different with the Starting History Point value being the smaller of the two The group of History Points is specified by the Modbus register value set in the Register Number field The Ending History Point is the last history point to be retrieved Select the Archive Type to indicate or return Hourly Daily or Extended values Hourly and Daily will return values from Standard History Points Extended will return values from Extended History Points Select the Conversion field to specify the type of conversion required if any on the data before it is sent to the host or before it is written to the FloBoss The conversions are used to allow integer values instead of floating point values to be transmitted and received Refer to Table 8 9 Modbus Convert Codes on page 8 23 8 2 1 1 Modbus History Table ROC800 Series To configure the Modbus History select Configure gt Modbus gt History The Modbus History Table allows the Periodic and Daily history values and Event Alarm records to be configured for retrieval through Modbus Protocol using Function Code 03 Th
427. r Limit D D PY Upper Range Limit M Active Alarms fr PY Lower Sensor Limit D D PY Lower Range Limit a0 Sensor Units Undet PY Minimum Span oo Device Descriptor Message Copy BB Paste Update X OK Cancel 1 Apply Figure 4 47 HART Device ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 54 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Poll Mode determines the polling behavior for this device Skip this Device removes this device from the polling sequence PV Only signifies that only the Primary Variable value is to be polled Dynamic Variables signifies that the values for all of the Dynamic Variables primary secondary tertiary and fourth are to be polled Slot Variables signifies that only the values for the three Slot Variables are to be polled Update polls for a full update of all values PV is the value of the Primary Dynamic Variable If Value on Reset is set to Use Failsafe Value PV Fail Safe is the value to be used as the Primary Variable after a reset or Warm Start SV is the value of the Secondary Dynamic Variable If Value on Reset is set to Use Failsafe Value SV Fail Safe is the value to be used as the Secondary Variable after a reset or Warm Start TV is the value of the Tertiary Dynamic Variable If Value on Reset is set to Use Failsafe Value TV Fail Safe is the value to be used as the Tertiary Variable after a reset or Warm Start FV is the val
428. r View gt Calibration Report 10 1 1 2 Viewing a Calibration Report 1 Select View gt Calibration Report from the menu 2 Select the Calibration Report you desire to view View Calibration Report Report Data File C Program Files AUCLINESOO 809C alb 800 Station Address Al he Station Name North Oakdale Meter Point Orifice 1 uaea HES Cancel Figure 10 1 View Calibration Report Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 3 Click Print Preview The Report opens Print Preview Calibration Report C File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help D S selam CEEA ACEEA TEIE 2 E Pit A OB Q Qfioxr AA wf Back Foward PDF Excel RTF TXT Calibration Report A1G2 North Oakdale Meter ID Orifice 1 Meter Description Orifice Operator LOI Differential Pressure Calibration M WS 1 2 DPREWEU 11 06 2005 12 41 35 Werify Calibration As Found 0 000 Actual 00 Deviation 100 000 40 0000 To 11 06 2005 12 41 53 Set Zero Shift As Found 0 000 Actual Or Deviation 0 000 0 0000 4 t ERRIRE 12 44 Px Figure 10 2 Calibration Report Print Preview 10 2 Starting Calibration Click Freeze to stop the values of the Analog MVS HART and Temperature RTD inputs from being updated during verification or calibration This creates the Freeze Value used in ongoing processing such as flow calculations and history logging while calibration is being performe
429. r each event alarm in the response Up to 12 Events and Alarms can be returned in a single response If no events alarms have occurred since the last collection the response contains zero data bytes For the date stamp in the events and alarms returned the year YY is really the number of years since 1980 for example if the current year is 2007 the year Y Y for the date stamp would be 27 Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Following is an example of a request for Events and Alarms with the history access event alarm register defined as 32 0x0020 hex Table 8 2 Host Events and Alarms Request Example Message woe ws The following example shows a response returning three events alarms Table 8 3 Events and Alarms Response Example Message Message Device Function Byte 20 bytes per evenvalarm LS MS TX Order Floats Selectable 8 3 3 Acknowledging Modbus Events and Alarms After the host has correctly received event alarms data it transmits an acknowledgement message to the ROC to clear these Events and Alarms from the Modbus buffer Until acknowledged the ROC continues to send the same Event and Alarm records to the host The Modbus acknowledgement to clear the event alarm log buffer uses Function Code 05 and the register number defined in the history access configuration In this request the data value is always one 1 Table 8 4 Events and Alarms Acknowledgem
430. r range of registers with the Conversion field set in the Modbus Registers definition configuration to a Convert Code from to 8 The equations used to convert floating point values to integers to enable the reading of floating point values are Float Range High Value Float Scale Low Value Float Scale 100 0 120 0 20 0 Integer Range High Value Integer Scale Low Value Integer Scale 6000 7000 1000 Adjusted Reading Float Reading Low Value Float Scale 50 0 70 0 20 0 Integer Integer Range x Adjusted Reading Low Value Integer Scale Float Range 3500 6000 x 50 0 100 0 1000 The equations used to convert integers to floating point values are Float Range High Value Float Scale Low Value Float Scale 100 0 120 0 20 0 Integer Range High Value Integer Scale Low Value Integer Scale 6000 7000 1000 Adjusted Integer Integer Sent Low Value Integer Scale 3000 4000 1000 Float Value Adjusted Integer x Float Range Low Value Float Scale Integer Range 70 0 3000 x 100 6000 20 Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 8 2 Modbus Configuration History Select Configure gt Modbus gt Modbus Configuration and select the History Access Registers tab Communications functionality in the ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series allows the Periodic Hourly and Daily history values and Event Alarm records to be retrieved through Modbus Protoc
431. r than 1 Database or Constant Value If RR in gt ARG1 go to ARG2 or equal to ARG1 LABEL Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 22 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 7 4 FST Time Related Commands Use time related commands FST Timers to implement simple time related operations such as setting Timers checking Timers determining if Timers have elapsed wait time before continuing and imposing a delay upon each command executed Timers are used to branch the FST to a specific Label after a specified period of time following an action Up to four Timers are available for use in an FST and each Timer has a time interval of 100 milliseconds or seconds for a FloBoss 100 Series Each FST Timer decrements by 1 interval if the Timer value is greater than 0 Set Timer ST The ST command sets any one of the four available Timers for any of the available FSTs ARGUMENT specifies the number of the Timer to set and ARGUMENT specifies the number of intervals to which the Timer is set Check Timer CT When executing a loop repeatedly in an FST it is recommended a timer CT be included so the loop executes only once every time interval This prevents the loop from executing several times within the allotted task period eliminating unnecessary calculations that could deprive time from other tasks Wait WT The Wait command imposes a de
432. r the Meter Run Flow Dependant Linear This is the simplest and most commonly used method This method discards samples for periods when there is no measurable flow and performs a straightforward linear average of the remaining samples to compute the minute and hour values The value specified in the Low Flow Cutoff of the Meter setup determines the values When no flow occurs all values are sampled Flow Dependant Formulaic This method discards samples for periods when there is no flow However in calculating the average this method typically takes the square root of each sample before averaging the samples together and then squares the result This formulaic method produces a slightly lower value than the linear method Flow Weighted Linear This method does not discard any samples instead it Weights each sample by multiplying it by a flow value square root of the differential pressure measured during the sample period Next a linear average is calculated by dividing the sum of the flow weighted sample by the sum of the flow values This result includes minute and hourly values that are more reflective of short periods of high flow Flow Weighted Formulaic This method combines the flow weighting action with the formulaic averaging technique both of which were described previously Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 18 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 3 3 Meter Gas Quality FloBoss 100 Series RO
433. r to the history storage array The history storage array holds entries taken at either set intervals typically daily hourly and each minute or user configurable intervals For the DHV DHT PHV PHT and MHV commands select the History Segment and the corresponding History Point that you desire to log in Argument 1 In Argument 2 select either a database point or a constant value which is the actual History Index where the data resides in the historical database The Minute History Value MHV History Index is the same as the minute of the hour Read the clock s minutes to get the last History Index value For example if it is 8 10 then the History Index is 10 Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 28 ROCLINK 800 User Manual For the Extract Time Element GTE command select the database point or a constant value which is the actual History Index value where the data resides in the historical database In Argument 2 select the Time Element to log the exact time of the database point or History Index value The GTE command is used to extract the time element from the time stamp received back from the CHT and PHT commands For DIS DIN PIS and PIN commands select the History Segment and the corresponding History Point that you desire to log in Argument 1 In Argument 2 select the Month and Date on which to log the History Index value To acquire the Daily History Value DHV perform a Starting Daily Index DIS command to locate the st
434. r use by the ROC or FloBoss The FST code can than be downloaded to ROC memory To build and compile an FST Select FST Build gt Compile or click the Build button to encode the FST into the proper format for use by the ROC or FloBoss memory The compiled file displays in the Output FST field If invalid points exist in the FST during compilation you receive an error indicating which Point Number is missing The Output compiled FST field displays the errors so that the error can be corrected before the FST is downloaded Note If an error occurs during the compile process the Output field lists the error type and the cell in question turns red Compile errors are indicated when Invalid Arguments or Commands are entered during the writing of the FST You perform a Compile The error displays in the Output field You open an FST from a ROC FloBoss or disk file A 5 1 3 Downloading the FST to the ROC or FloBoss To download the FST to ROC or FloBoss memory 1 Click the Download button on the toolbar or select File gt Download If the FST currently loaded is operating you will be prompted to stop the FST and continue with the download or to stop the FST without downloading 2 Enter the Version number and Description of the FST for later identification and click OK Following the download you will be prompted to start the FST or you can start the FST in Monitor Mode or the FST Register screen To verify the FST logic you
435. ration to Flash memory on the ROC gt Flags screen before performing the update 6 Navigate to the File Name or Image File using the Browse button to select the location where you desire to store the Device Configuration Rev Dec 05 Updates and Changes 11 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Update Firmware W Save Device Configuration Before Firmware Update W Restore Device Configuration After Firmware Update Contig File Browse Image File Browse STUER RRR Status Figure 11 1 Update Firmware Example ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 7 Use the Browse button to locate and select the proper Image File that will be used as the new firmware code in the ROC or FloBoss unit Note The ROC800 Series displays a file extension dli the FloBoss 100 Series displays a file extension bin and the FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series displays a file extension Ist 8 Click the Start button and verify the version number and file name of the firmware file to be replaced and the file to replace it 9 Click OK 10 For a ROC300 Series FloBoss 100 Series or FloBoss 407 click Yes to confirm the update The loading process typically takes several minutes do not disturb it during this time When loading of the firmware is complete the configuration files are automatically loaded into the ROC or FloBoss if the restore configuration option was selected and the actions are recorded in the Event Log When re loading of ba
436. ration value that was set Manual EU is the Live Reading for the last calibration value that was set The Timer field shows the last inactivity count down in seconds typically starting from 3600 seconds that occurred during the last calibration session Had the countdown reached 0 time out would have taken place causing the calibration mode to be automatically ended Calibration Mode indicates 0 Use Current Calibration 1 Start Calibration 2 Calibrate 3 Restore Previous Calibration 4 Stop Calibration Type indicates which calibration value is currently being set 0 Inactive no value 1 Zero 2 Span 3 Midpoint 1 4 Midpoint 2 5 Midpoint 3 6 Unused Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 18 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 10 5 MVS Input Calibration Values ROC800 Series and FloBoss 407 Select Utilities gt MVS Calibration Values to view all the current calibration values for MVS Sensor points MVS Calibration Values MVS Sensor ae Sensor Tag MVS Detlt Differential Pressure Static Pressure Temperature Manual Value Manual alue U Manual Value 0 0 Cal Value 1 Cal Value CalValue1 453 4 Cal Value 2 50 0 Cal Valued 00 6447 Cal Value 2 00 6 Cal Value 3 50 0 Cal Value 00 6447 Cal Yalue 3 00 6 Cal Value 4 50 0 Cal Valued 00 6447 Cal Value 4 00 6 Cal Value 5 50 0 Cal Valued oO B44 Cal Value 5 00 6 Set To Factor Defaults 2 Update Y DK 7 Cancel Figure 10 18 MVS Inpu
437. rbine 1 General Inputs Advanced Alarms Calibration Factors Mass Meter Press Effect O Definition Values Mass PIN 81 RATE O Joo Lb hout Static Pressure Manual Bl 0 0 PSI Temperature Manual 0 0 Deg F 2 Update y OK 7 Cancel Apply Figure 5 9 Meter Inputs Turbine ROC800 Series For Orifice Click the Differential Pressure TLP button to assign the input that senses the differential pressure high differential pressure if Stacked Dp is Enabled The units assumed for the input are inches of water column In H20 or kPa If Manual appears the Values field can be used to enter an engineering units value for the meter input Otherwise the Values field indicates the current input value For Turbine Click the Uncorrected Volume TLP button to assign the input that senses the input from a turbine meter typically pulses The units assumed for the input are MCF per day 1000 ft day or 1000 cubic meters per day kM day The Values field indicates the current input value based on non adjusted pulses from the turbine meter If Manual appears the Values field can be used to enter an engineering units value for the meter input Click the Static Pressure TLP button to assign the input that senses the static pressure The units assumed for the input are PSIG PSIA or kPaG kPaA If Manual appears the Values field can be used to enter an engineering units value for the Static Pressure input Otherwise th
438. rd and Extended History 103 History Sizing Be sure to select this carefully as History Points cannot be added later without clearing current history present in the unit Standard history affects the amount of available extended history Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 18 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 8 Save the configuration file ROCLINK 800 files have the extension 800 9 Establish an on line connection to the ROC or FloBoss unit 10 Set the parameters and point assignments as necessary The Type parameter indicates the type of ROC or FloBoss unit For the FloBoss 100 Series select the type of termination board I O Type Selections are 4 point old style termination board or 6 point new style with or without I O points When 6 point with I O is selected External I O selections appear Be sure to select the types of I O for which the termination board switches and wiring are configured For the ROC800 Series enter the number of PID loops FSTs Stations Sampler Odorizers Orifice Meters and Turbine Meters that will be configured Only activate the necessary number of devices For the FloBoss 100 Series enter the number of PID Loops For the ROC800 Series select the type of I O or Comm 809 Modules that will reside in each of the nine module slots of the ROC800 Series unit For the FloBoss 100 Series select the maximum number of History Points in Standard and Extended History 103 History Sizing Be sure to select th
439. red to Mass the Mass Meter Press Effect tab appears 11 After configuring all point parameters click Apply Use Flash Memory Save Configuration in the ROC gt Flags to save configuration to permanent memory in case you perform a Cold Start Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 3 1 Meter General The General tab sets the basic parameters for the meter Select Meter gt Setup gt Orifice Meter or Turbine Meter or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for a ROC800 Series device Meter gt Setup or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units Orifice Meter Setup E x Meter Run 1 Orifice 1 Tag Orifice 1 General Inputs Advanced Alarms Calibration Factors Meter Description Morth Atlanta Station Station 1 Meter Type Pipe Diameter 8 071 inches C Flange Tapped Orifice Orifice Diameter 4 0 inches User Defined Device Low Flow Cutt 0 0 InH20 Active Alarms jo Copy 2 Update y OK A Cancel l Apply Figure 5 5 Meter General Orifice ROCS amp 00 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 12 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Turbine Meter Setup f x Meter Run 1 Turbine 1 v Tag Turbine 1 General Inputs Advanced Alarms Calibration Factors Mass Meter Press Effect Meter Description South Turnpike Meter Type Station S
440. ree registers are defined to retrieve the current date in the ROC the current time in the ROC and the Event Alarm records The Modbus History Table also allows the Periodic and Daily registers to be defined for up to twenty groups of History Points Before configuring the Modbus History be sure the History Segment and History Point configuration is complete Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Modbus History Table Registers History Indes Mode Events Alaims 32 f EFM Extensions Mode C Override Mode Penodic Hist Stark End History History niet t History History Register Register 5 wt Update Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 8 6 Modbus History Table ROCS800 Series The Event Alarm Registers are Modbus Register Numbers used to acquire the Current Date value Current Time value and Event Alarm Logs You may enter registers or use the defaults Using the defaults is highly recommended The Current Date and Current Time values identify the current date and time from the unit and may be most useful to users who want the date and time as floating point numbers in the format of DDMMYY and HHMM For more information on the Modbus retrieval of the Event Alarms log refer to Modbus Events and Alarms Functionality In the Modbus History Table each Group defines a contiguous group of History Points from a single Segment whose values can be accessed through a Modbus Function Code 03 request for a user define
441. register byte order 3 2 1 0 2 3 Note 0 Byte MSB and Byte 3 LSB 65 IEEE Floating 3416 Code 65 places byte 0 and byte 1 in register xxxxx byte 2 and byte 3 Point Number di are placed in register xxxxx 1 This places a 4 byte floating point value into two 2 byte registers to allow integer values to be transmitted Code 66 does the same as Code 65 regardless of the Byte Order field in the 66 IEEE Floating 3446 Modbus Configuration screen Point Number Register xxxxx byte 0 byte 1 Register xxxxx 1 byte 2 byte 3 67 IEEE Floating 3416 Code 67 reverses byte 0 and byte 1 order in register xxxxx reverses Point Number aie byte 2 and byte 3 order in register xxxxx 1 This places a 4 byte floating point value into two 2 byte registers to allow integer values to be transmitted Code 68 does the same as Code 67 regardless of the Byte 68 IEEE Floating 3 4 16 Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen Point Number Register xxxxx byte 1 byte 0 Register xxxxx 1 byte 3 byte 2 69 IEEE Floating 3 4 16 Code 69 places byte 2 and byte 3 in register xxxxx byte 0 and byte 1 are Point Number g placed in register xxxxx 1 This places a 4 byte floating point value into two 2 byte registers to allow integer values to be transmitted Code 70 does the same as Code 69 regardless of the Byte Order field in the 70 IEEE Floating 3446 Modbus Configuration screen Point Number Register xxxxx byte 2 byte 3 Register xxxxx 1 byte 0 byte 1
442. rent reading directly from the Analog to Digital converter Actual Scan displays the actual amount of time in seconds that passes between scans This number should be the same as shown for the Scan Period parameter if the system is not overloaded 4 8 3 RTD Alarms Select Configure gt I O gt RTD Points The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this RTD point RTD Input ATD Inputs 1 ATO Defl Tag RTO Deflt Alarming HiHi Alarm 120 0 m Eells High Alarm 10 0 Disabled Low Alarm 10 0 RBs Alarming LoLo Alarm 20 0 On Alarm Set Ree 5 0 On Alarm Clear Alarm Deadband 2 0 Copy EA Paste 2 Update Y OK 7 Cancel Apply Figure 4 38 RTD Alarms ROCS800 Series When Alarming is Enabled the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband are configured on the Alarms tab When Alarming is Disabled no limit alarms generate for this point The Point Fail alarm appears in the Active Alarms field but will not be logged in the Alarms Log To conserve log space alarms should be enabled only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so that no false alarms generate The Rate Alarm is the value in engineering units that represents the maximum amount of change allowed between updates If the change is equal to or greater than this value an alarm is generated To disable this Rate Alarm without disabling the other alarms the Rate Alarm
443. ressure of the mass meter as calibrated in PSI Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 38 ROCLINK 800 User Manual SECTION 6 CONFIGURING AND VIEWING HISTORY This section describes the history databases in the ROC and FloBoss flow computers It also describes the history collection configuration process for the ROC and FloBoss units and associated reports In this Chapter Section Page OL FON e ee er eee ee ee ee eee oe 6 1 62 Misto Set p FloBoss L00 SErics sescenetocceetesscenqatcenarstueseeantccanapitaadteaanonecqentaateasoaemqentnateemmncecnans 6 3 6 3 History Setup ROC300 Series and FIOBOSS 407 essssssssoenessssssssserrssssssssseeeessssssseereeesssssseeeeees 6 6 6 4 Configuring History Segments ROC800 Series eee ccccccccccessesseeeeeeecceeaaseesecceeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeeeaaas Op COMI CUMIN S EHS OL PO Ss state a E ereetestueatten 6 10 6 6 Configuring History for EFM Reporting cc cscessesccccccceeeeeeseeeceeeeeeaaeseececeeeesaeeeseeeeeeeeeaaas 6 13 Oe PEEM REDO hc gn re ee te ee ee 6 17 6 8 History Alarm and Event Log Reports nonnnssssssssoeerssssssssserssssssssceresssssssseeeeessssssseeeeesssssssees 6 31 o Dore e N e E E 6 35 6 1 History The Configure gt History Points option allows you to setup the History Points for any numeric Parameter in the ROC or FloBoss to archive and to select which archiving method to use for each Parameter The Meter gt History ROC300 Series and Flo
444. ride the input Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 30 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Scan Period as the amount of time between scans of the EU Value in seconds The default value is 1 second for the ROC800 Series and 5 seconds for the other devices The rate calculation is performed based on the number of pulses counted during the scan interval divided by the time interval To avoid highly fluctuating calculation results there should typically be at least 10 pulses occurring between scans at low flow conditions For example if a flow meter produces one pulse per second at low flow then the Scan Period should be set to a minimum of 10 seconds For a Pulse Input implemented in a PI module for a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 the input signal must be scanned often enough such that rollover in the module s 16 bit counter which occurs at 65535 is not missed For example a 10 kHz input signal must be scanned at least every 6 5 seconds to register the value before rollover occurs Once the Scan Period is reached the Accum d Pulses Pulses Today Today s Total Yesterday s Total and Current Rate values update Enter the Accum d Pulses as the value of the raw counts accumulated pulses as stored in an accumulated value counter that resides in the firmware For each Scan Period the ROC or FloBoss determines the number of raw counts that have occurred since the last Scan Period and adds them to the accumulated value cou
445. rifice or Meter gt Values gt Turbine For the FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 select Meter gt Values Orifice Meter Run Values Orifice Meter Differential Pressure 0 0 InH20 Fur Oritice Tag Orifice 1 Static Pressure 0 0 FSI Description Temperature 0 0 Deg F Current Values Factors Flow Rate Energy Rate Mase Rate HwPt 0 0 Fob 0 0 CFhour 00 BTU hour o o Lb hour CdFT 0 6 Ftb 0 0 MCF day 0 0 MMET Uday 0 0 MIbs day Fy 1 021575 MMultioher Accumulation ag i D0 Fowl MCF MMBTU Minutes Mass zn 1 0 Reynolds 0 0 Today jon oo jo a 0 0 Upstream Static Pressure 0 0 PSIA Yesterday 0 0 oo 0 0 oa Density 0 0 Lb Cf Month a0 o o jo a 0 Orifice Diameter 3 997484 inches Prey Month on 0 0 o a o o Fipe Diameter 8 067597 inches Accumulated 0 0 00 a0 o o Bote 0 495497 Auto Scar 2 Update 7 Cancel Figure 12 6 Meter Run Values Example ROCS800 Series Orifice Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Turbine Meter Run Values Turbine Meter Mass Flow 0 0 Lb hour Run fi Turbine 1 Tag Turbine 1 Static Pressure 0 0 PSI Description Temperature 0 0 Deg F Current Values Factors Flow Aate Energy Fate Mass Fate zf 0 0 CF hour 0 0 BTU hour 0 0 Lb hour Fpl 0 0 MCF day 0 0 MMBTU day 0 0 MIbyday Density Pressure Multiplier Accumulation Temperature Multiplier
446. rough Mode communications option to send Pass Through messages By using any of the FloBoss 100 Series communications ports Pass Through Mode allows data to be received by one unit and then passed through to other devices connected on any other communications port For example the host communicates via a radio on the FloBoss 100 Series COM2 port Other FloBoss 100 Series units can then be connected via EIA 485 RS 485 on the COM port of the first FloBoss 100 Series unit and then all the FloBoss 100 Series units can use the one radio to communicate to the host Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 20 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Note If COM2 is a Dial up modem this port must be used as the receiving port for Pass Through messages It will not transmit to other field devices other than the host Note The Group number of the FloBoss 100 Series receiving the data must match the Group number of the FloBoss 100 Series unit s to which the data will be passed If the Group number does not match the data will not be forwarded Refer to ROC gt Information to view or change the Group number Select the respective port Local Port COM1 or COM2 for the Set RTS to High for 30 Sec option FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 and click Apply to activate the RTS Request to Send signal The RTS signal turns on for 30 seconds For a FloBoss 100 Series COM is not available and COM2 requires an optional EIA 232 RS
447. rt Date End Date Daily Yolume Data 1120472005 11 04 2006 v Alarm Data l Event Data Print Preview Cancel Figure 6 12 View EFM Report 2 Navigate to the files that have the EFM extension created by using the Collect Data function Select the desired file and click Open 3 Select the Meter Run from drop down list box to select the Meter Run on which you desire to report 4 Enter the Start Date Enter the End Date These are the dates for the period of the report you desire to cover Note Click the drop down list arrow to view a calendar and select the report dates Select the Report Sections on which you desire to report Click Print Preview to see a copy of the report Note Select Utilities gt Convert EFM File to convert the data to PGAS Coastal Flow AGA or DET data formats Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 18 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 7 3 Converting EFM Files Select Utilities gt Convert EFM File to convert a EFM Report files EFM database file to the report file format you select ROCLINK 800 version 1 60 or greater supports batch conversion of EFM files to PGAS and Flow Cal formats 1 Select Utilities gt Convert EFM File Device Type Convert To e ROCS09 C ROC306 312 364 FB103 104 407 503 504 lic FPGAS f FlowCal AGA DET Select Efm File s to Convert i Folder for Converted or Log Converted File Namejs Prefs Use Station Address amp Group
448. ry using the Flash Memory Save Configuration function in the ROC gt Flags screen Select the Radio Power Control point you desire to configure Enter the Tag as a 10 character name to identify this point with its respective Comm Port Set Radio Power Control to Enabled to activate the Radio Power Control function Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Use the Time Units to switch between Seconds and Minutes In Seconds mode the time base for the timers is in 0 1 second increments primarily used with radios In Minutes mode the time base for the timers is in one minute increments primarily used with cellular telephones Enter the Zone parameters to indicate when Radio Power Control is active and inactive for various Zones Start Time in hours and minutes HHMM that the respective Zone begins Time is expressed in local time 24 hour clock For example 1500 under Zone 2 means that the associated On Time and Off Time are used beginning at 3 00 p m The Zone is active unit the start time for the next zone is encountered On Time during a control cycle when the output is in the ON state Off Time during a control cycle that the output is in the OFF state Note The On Time and Off Time alternate throughout the period the zone is active Enter the Hold Time that the output remains ON after detection of communications activity in Seconds or Minutes depending on the Time Units mode This value applie
449. s Pulses For Day ROC800 Series displays the total number of pulses that the PI has received for the contract day The Contract Hour is specified on this screen At the end of the contract day it zeros and starts over only if being totalized in History Today s Total displays the total EU Values accumulated for the current contract day Today s Total is reset to zero at Contract Hour Today s Total Accumulated Pulses x the Conversion Value Yesterday s Total displays the total EU Value accumulated the previous contract day Yesterday s Total Previous day s Today s Total at Contract Hour before being cleared Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 31 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Current Rate is the value of the calculated rate as of the most recent scan expressed in EUs per unit of time Time units are selected by the Rate Period parameter on the Advanced tab Rate is calculated at the end of each Scan Period Current Rate Number of pulses received x Conversion Value Rate Period The Active Alarms field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is set to Enabled the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm indicator can still appear If Alarming is set to Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled 4 6 2 PI Advanced Select Configure gt I O gt PI P
450. s Orifice Config 143 17 Pipe Material TUBE MATERIAL Us Orifice Config 13 14 Tp Lesion eta Tar LOCA Ue ores cena 3 Ores Confia 113 Orifice Config 113 o Static Press Span STATIC_HI_RANGE Float Turbine Contig 11 a 27 or15 5 3 Orifice Config 113 o Temp 0 EU TEMP LO RANGE Float Turbine Config n 29 or 17 3 Orifice Config 113 o Temp Span TEMP_HI_RANGE Float Turbine Config ie 29 or 17 The ROC Point Type and Parameter listed for this entry contains a 3 byte value that is the Point Type Point Number and Parameter to use for the differential pressure value If the Point Type of the differential pressure input is MVS 108 or Analog Input 103 the differential pressure span will be the same Point Type and Point Number as the differential pressure value and coincidentally the Parameter will be 17 for both of these Point Types If the Point Type is any other type a span will not be available 5 The ROC Point Type and Parameter listed for this entry contains a 3 byte value that is the Point Type Point Number and Parameter to use for the static pressure value If the Point Type of the static pressure input is MVS 108 the static pressure span will be the same Point Type and Point Number as the static pressure value and the Parameter will be 33 If the Point Type of the static pressure input is Analog Input 103 the static pressure span will be the same Point Type and Point Number as the static pressure v
451. s A breakdown of the bit map in Byte 1 2 is given in Table Event amp Alarm Change Bit Map Contents Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 8 2 1 Modbus Configuration History Access Registers FloBoss 100 Series The History Archive Registers tab FloBoss 100 Series allows a single register to contain one or more History Points for retrieval of the Historical Archives using Function Code 03 Up to 15 Hourly Daily or Extended registers can be defined The FloBoss 100 Series can store up to 35 days of hourly data for each of its History Points The Points mapped on this tab are configured on the Configure gt History Points screen Refer to the Configure gt History Points screen if you are unsure of the point numbers The Register Number field is used to address the individual History Archive Register The Daily Index Hourly Index and Event Alarm data fields are used to address a history index number Select Configure gt Modbus gt Modbus Configuration and select the History Access Registers tab Modbus Configuration General Scale Values History Access Registers Daily Index 7160 Hourly Index 7161 Extended Index 7162 Events Alarmes a2 Register Starting History Ending History Archive Type Conversion Number Point Point _ ha ry Extended Extended Extended Extended Extended Extended Extended Extended Extended Extended Hourly Daily 3 Hourly Daily O
452. s 1 through 10 enter the Number of Points history required in that Segment Enter the desired number of Periodic Entries in the Periodic log The Number of Entries in the Periodic log multiplied by the Periodic Sample Rate listed in minutes will give the number of minutes before the periodic log begins to write over itself Enter the desired number of Daily Entries in the Daily log Enter the Periodic Sample Rate listed in minutes This indicates how often a time stamped value will be written to the periodic log If this Segment is tied to a meter Station an entry will also be written whenever a configuration change is made to a Station or meter that is part of that Station All options for Periodic Sample Rates are evenly distributed into 60 and logging will be synchronized with the top of the hour Enter the Contract Hour At this time the daily values are logged If this Segment is tied to a meter Station this will also be the contract hour for the Station and will be the time that daily and monthly 1f it is the first of the month accumulations will be reset Additional entries will be made if the Force End of Day option is exercised for this Segment For each Segment an option is available to Enable Logging for all History Points in the Segment De select the checkbox do disable logging For each Segment a Force End of Day option is available to force logging of entries in the daily log for all History Points in the Segment
453. s an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the ROC or FloBoss generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host On Alarm Set and Clear FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 In either condition an RBX message generates to the host Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 37 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 3 9 Meter Mass Meter Pressure Effect ROC800 Series If the Turbine Meter Input Type on the General tab was configured to Mass the Mass Meter Press Effect tab appears Meter gt Setup gt Orifice Meter or Turbine Meter or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for a ROC800 Series device Turbine Meter Setup f Ed Meter Run 1 Turbine 1 Tag Turbine 1 Mass Pressure Compensation C Enabled Disabled Coefficient 0 0002 ar PSI Calibration Pressure 20 0 PSIG Copy 2 Update y OK 7 Cancel Apply Figure 5 24 Meter Mass Meter Pressure Effect Turbine ROC800 Series Enable Mass Pressure Compensation when the mass input requires compensation for pressure effect on the Coriolis tube If enabled enter a pressure correction Coefficient in percent per PSI This value is supplied by the manufacturer of the mass meter The p
454. s and screens to each level in the Hierarchy Menu to suit your application Right click on a menu in the Hierarchy Menu and select Add Screen Then select the type of screen User scrollable This screen displays and interaction with TLP names and values Events This screen displays the Events log This type of screen can only be inserted in a display file once Alarms This screen displays the Alarms log This type of screen can only be inserted in a display file once Screen Saver This screen provides a scrolling list of parameters that will appear when no user is logged on The function of the screen saver is the same no matter where in the Hierarchy Menu it is placed This type of screen can only be inserted in a display file once Calibration This screen allows the user to perform a deadweight calibration of the I O channels for which calibration is appropriate This type of screen can only be inserted in a display file once When the required number of menus and screens have been added it 1s good practice to save the file to the PC Use the Save As button in the right pane of the editor ROC Keypad Display files save with the extension dcfg A display file be saved in a 800 configuration file using the Download button on line or the Save button off line The screens will now require editing to select TLPs and assign security Refer to the steps in Editing a Display File You will save the file a
455. s as a Modbus Host 1 Set up the ROC gt Comm Port Refer to Section 2 Communication Ports on the ROC and FloBoss 2 Define the Modbus Registers within the Host by mapping them to TLPs Define Modbus Registers that will hold the information that will be transmitted and received by the Host Refer to Section 8 4 Modbus Registers ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series on page 8 18 3 Define the polling sequence to designate with which Modbus devices RTU Addresses are communicated and what Slave Registers will be read to and which Master Registers Host will be written out by the Host Refer to Section 8 5 Modbus Master Table ROC800 Series on page 8 29 4 Select Configure gt Modbus gt Configuration and configure the Modbus to format the data correctly Refer to Section 8 1 3 Modbus Configuration General on page 8 3 5 Initiate the polling by setting the Modbus Master Modem parameters Refer to Section 8 6 Modbus Master Modem ROC800 Series on page 8 31 Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 8 1 3 Modbus Configuration General Select Configure gt Modbus gt Configuration The General tab sets the basic communication parameters Modbus Configuration Comm Fort Comm Mode Byte Order 1 Local Port f RTU fe Least Significant Byte First C ASCII C Most Significant Byte First Slave Mode Event Logging Exception Status 0 f Enabled f Disabled Master Mode Start P
456. s given a Tag which includes up to 10 characters to identify the Point being defined in the I O screen Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used The Point Number identifies the physical location of the input For the ROC800 Series the Point Number identifies the module slot channel number If Scanning is set to Disabled enter a Value to override the input When Scanning is set to Enable Value displays the last Analog Input scan in engineering units A Units is a user defined 10 character description for the engineering units assigned to the I O point For example PSIG MCF degrees F milliamps or volts Select a Scanning option For the input to automatically process the field input select Enabled Automatic Mode When Scanning is set to Enabled the engineering unit EU Value displays the last Analog Input scan When Scanning is set to Disabled Manual Mode the engineering unit EU Value is no longer updated by the ROC or FloBoss If Alarming is Enabled a Manual Mode alarm generates when Scanning is set to Disabled If Scanning is set to Disabled enter an override input in the Value field Scan Period is the amount of time between updates of the Filter value All Analog Inputs are updated based on their individual Scan Periods The default value is 1 second The minimum Scan Period allowed is 50 mSec For a FloBoss 100 Series the minimum Scan Period is 1 second Low Reading EU engineering unit corresponds
457. s only When using Function Code 03 or 04 this 97 Sk ins B 34616 conversion changes any data type unsigned or signed Character T Ong B Integer or Long in the ROC to a specific point value for transmission to Megat the Host When using Function Code 6 or 16 this conversion changes a Any type to transmitted floating point value to the correct data type for the ROC TLP 28 Unsigned Short 3 4 6 16 Integer Any type to 29 Unsigned Long 3 4 6 16 Integer 30 to 32 No Conversion N A N A 33 Character to 34 FloBoss 100 Series only The Character to Integer conversion changes a Integer i FloBoss character data type to an integer for transmission to the host 34 Integer to 6 16 FloBoss 100 Series only The Integer to Character conversion changes a Character i transmitted integer value to a character data type for the FloBoss Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Convert _ Slave rr Code Description Function Definition FloBoss 100 Series only The Long to Integer conversion changes a 2 songo mieger oe FloBoss long data type to an integer for transmission to the host FloBoss 100 Series only The Integer to Long conversion changes a o megerto Song eae transmitted integer value to a long data type for the FloBoss nc anced Buco ROC800 Series only Response is identical that for a function 1 or 2 3 g yi 3 4 6 16 request All registers in the range requested must be unsigned integer 8 Pac
458. s screen is used to setup the communications ports that are available for incoming and outgoing communications with the ROC or FloBoss and not the personal computer PC PC communication ports are setup using the Device Directory The communication ports located on the ROC or FloBoss provide a data link to ROCLINK 800 software other ROC or FloBoss units and host systems Depending on the type of modules you are using the following types of communications are possible ETA 232 RS 232 serial communications EIA 422 RS 422 serial communications ROC800 Series ETA 485 RS 485 multi point serial communications Dial up modem communications TCP IP communications ROC800 Series Spread Spectrum wireless radio FloBoss 100 Series gt gt gt OH Table 2 2 Communication Ports for the ROC800 Series CPU 5 pin bottom 5 Module Slot 2 COMM4 EIA 232 RS 232 EIA 422 RS 422 EIA 485 RS 485 Modem or MVS Module Slot 3 COMM5 EIA 232 RS 232 EIA 422 RS 422 EIA 485 RS 485 Modem or MVS EIA 232 RS 232 EIA 422 RS 422 EIA 485 RS 485 Modem or MVS Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Table 2 3 Communication Ports for the FloBoss 407 Default Tag Function Type Local Port LOI RS 232D COMM1 EIA 232 RS 232 COMM2 EIA 232 RS 232 EIA 485 RS 485 or Modem Note COMM1 is built into the termination board of the FloBoss 407 and COMM2 is locat
459. s that overrides the group access level Display screens can be customized to allow users to view and edit parameters view parameters only or have no display access based on their group or individual access level Typically group or individual access is assigned based on job function Each user within a group assumes the group s access level However an individual user can be granted or denied access to a specific display based on their individual access level For example consider John Joe and Pat to be members of a Technicians group that is allowed to view and edit the PID display Joe can be prevented from changing the set point of a PID loop if he is assigned individual access that restricts him to viewing only The rest of the group members are unaffected by Joe s individual restriction If a user is assigned to more than one group each with different access levels the user assumes the access level of the highest group for all of their assigned groups For example if John is in the Technician group which is given access to edit and view and he is also assigned to the Meter Setup group which only has view access he automatically has edit access in the Meter Setup group because of his membership in the Technician group However if the he is assigned individual access he may be restricted to viewing only in the Meter Setup group Note The User Access and Group Access lists are established on the Configure gt ROC S
460. s to all Zones When communications occur during the On Time the On Time is extended by the Hold Time The DTR signal and Discrete Output remain in the ON state If a Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX message needs to be sent to the host computer the radio power will be turned on for the Hold Time allowing the SRBX message to be transmitted The Hold Time should be configured for a length of time long enough to allow the ROC or FloBoss to receive a response back from the host Enter the Low Battery Deadband for the ROC800 Series The Low Battery Deadband value is added to the Low Battery Shutoff to determines when the Radio Power Control function is enabled again and allows the DO to turn on when needed Enter a Low Battery Shutoff value that specifies the voltage at which Power Control is automatically disabled The voltage being sensed is the System AI Battery Input voltage 0 to 1 for the ROC800 Series and E2 for the FloBoss 100 Series The Low Battery Shutoff parameter allows power cycling to be automatically disabled whenever the input voltage to the ROC or FloBoss falls below the specified threshold The default value is 11 volts Radio Power Control is automatically enabled again when the input voltage rises up to this value Select which Discrete Output point used to power the radio Not available for the FloBoss 100 Series Select Inverted Inverted Normal to define the action of Discrete Output value Normal output is energize
461. s two more times after waiting 10 seconds each time and once more after waiting 20 seconds Defines the time in seconds between attempts to transmit an SRBX message There is a Delay parameter associated with each Retry Count parameter Enable Extra Key On Delay FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 to add an additional amount of time to delay prior to transmitting an RBX message after turning the RTS signal on This parameter may be required for radio communications For the FloBoss 100 Series unit the RBX Ack Timeout field displays the amount of time that 1s allowed for the host to respond with an ACK acknowledge to the SRBX message from the FloBoss 100 Series unit If the ACK fails to be received within the timeout period the FloBoss 100 Series unit retries the SRBX messages The SRBX Alarm Index indicates the ROC or FloBoss alarm currently being reported through SRBX The SRBX Status parameter indicates the status of RBX messaging either Active or Inactive Active indicates that an SRBX alarm is being processed Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 31 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 5 Comm Ports Store amp Forward ROC800 Series and FloBoss 407 Select ROC gt Comm Ports gt Store amp Forward tab to configure the Store amp Forward features on the ROC or FloBoss Comm Port Comm Ports 3 COMM Tag COMM2 Store amp Forward Mode C Enabled f Disabled Store amp Forward
462. sabled or in Manual Mode ROC800 Series or FloBoss 100 Series For a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 O Disabled l Primary 2 Override Enter the Calc Time ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 to indicate the actual period of time in seconds between executions of the PID algorithm This is the amount of time measured between executions from the beginning of one execution to the beginning of the next and should equal the value entered for the Loop Period on the Tuning screen when the unit is not overloaded Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 10 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Loop Period ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series to set the period of time in seconds between executions of the PID algorithm This is the amount of time between executions from the beginning of one execution to the beginning of the next If Override Control 1s selected both loops will be executed in this time period The Actual Period ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series read only field displays the actual amount of time in seconds from the beginning of the last execution of the loop to the beginning of the current execution of the loop Use the PID Loop Primary fields to setup the Primary PID Loop s configuration Fora ROC800 Series or FloBoss 100 Series select an input or enter a Setpoint around which the Primary Process Variable is controlled For a ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 enter a Setpoint around which the Primary Process Varia
463. screens with levels 0 1 2 and 3 Refer to Security Access Levels Note Login requests are rejected when ROCLINK 800 Access Levels are greater than Device Security Refer to Table 2 1 Security Access Levels on page 2 2 Security On LOI and Security on COM1 For each communications port select one of the following options Disabled All login requests are accepted User ID Enabled Login requests are accepted if the User ID and Password are valid Upon successful login full access 1s allowed User Access Level Enabled Login requests are accepted if the User ID and Password are valid Upon successful login the user is restricted by access level Refer to Security Access Levels Refer to Table 2 1 Security Access Levels on page 2 2 2 3 4 Device Security Groups Select ROC gt Security Click the Groups tab For ROC800 Series units with firmware version 1 50 or greater the Group tab establishes the Groups used in Keypad Display security Enter a name for each Group that you are establishing If your application does not require a Keypad Display do not create Groups Device Security Users Groups Comm Ports User Group Summary a Name 2 Update yY OF 7 Cancel Apply Figure 2 6 Device Security Groups ROC800 Series Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 10 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 3 5 Device Security Comm Ports ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Seri
464. sctunienteceia atone 4 6 4 17 4 44 Filter IMEN Als 1 c5ca cag sceassacecacceaascsecncmecoserenacaretenncencnes 4 17 Filter Time Seconds ccccccccesseccceesececeeseceeeeees 4 34 Firmware UTILS e tet cent A T contact E A N 11 1 Update Keypad Display ssesessseeeeeeeeees 12 17 Be TS E EE OE E acerca sions A P A EA A N 3 15 Advanced sapranno arna 3 19 User PIO OT ANS cous censnancesdomeanatinenasceieentaaeiacussieevoutesaes 3 22 I FA cece Sows dernerr E E sens Sse cc onic oenenneinteoneanece 5 31 FloBoss 100 Series TIS COT Z ares eas tone odae E 1 19 Flow Dependant Formulaic cccccccccsneseeeeeeees 5 18 Rev Dec 05 Index ROCLINK 800 User Manual Flow Dependant Linear cccseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 18 Flow FRACS scaiccaiine witoatnincravaiesinantnveowarsoataesadainninancaaeanndaased 5 4 Flow Tod ay cccccceeeecccccccccecceeaeeessseseeeeceeseeeeeeanags 5 4 Flow Weighted Formulaic ccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 18 Flow Weighted Linear ccccccccssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 18 Flow YOS C1 Aya 6 sed ewansad concintd aan satompenuaseunnssinantentsewnn 5 4 POW Alls ete cca enesies E E T OE 6 19 COE VCE S108 seirinin a E einen sehen 6 31 Force End OF Day vss siacsccscaceninascxactetcoemacedrnnencdaws 3 5 6 9 Force Recalculation essenin 5 31 FPV Method eccriene 5 7 5 8 5 28 F E E E 10 3 Fee eV AUC r E E 10 3 PING a a E ete 4 31 Feon DEVICE aieiai E
465. se Read Only fields display information about the module firmware and hardware as well as data from the last scan of the module E Pulse Interface Module Data AE Revision 003 Status Build Date 1292003 63200 AM Direction Clockwise 000 Last Rotation Time sec jooo PT Installed ies ADOK Rotation Deviation Ba nn P2 Installed es ADOK Unexpected Switch Counts jo Rotation Position J Auto Scan Update x Cancel Figure 4 34 Pulse Interface Module Data FloBoss 104 Revision and Build Date refer to the firmware in the module Direction refers to the direction that the magnet will move P1 Installed and P2 Installed refer to the Auxiliary Pulse Inputs Last Rotation Time is the amount of time in seconds required to complete a rotation at the last Update or last scan in AutoScan mode Rotation Deviation is the amount of change between the last rotation and the current rotation in Unexpected Switch Counts is a diagnostic tool If this value in this field rises while the FloBoss 104 is installed and operating please contact your local sales representative The Rotation Position graphic at the bottom of the screen is a visual representation of the counter s position Rotation position is the indicator that the magnet is turning on the Roots or Rotary meter If this position does not change while the FloBoss is in operation and this screen is in AutoScan mode please contact your local sales representative
466. sequence from one parameter field or button to the next The selected field or button becomes highlighted Fields unavailable for changes are automatically skipped When you lt Tab gt to the last field or button in the screen or dialog box pressing the lt Tab gt key again jumps back to the first field or button To go back to a previous field or button press lt Shift Tab gt Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 Software Basics 1 10 ROCLINK 800 User Manual In an option field the currently selected option is highlighted To select one of the other options use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow V keys to highlight the desired option and then press lt Enter gt In a field that requires a text or numerical entry type in the required characters or numbers from the keyboard Use the lt Backspace gt or lt Delete gt keys to erase unwanted characters Use the Left Arrow lt and Right Arrow to move the cursor one character at a time and the lt Home gt and lt End gt keys to place the cursor at the beginning and end of the field respectively Other keys or key combinations include e lt F1 gt Launches ROCLINK 800 on line help lt Esc gt Cancels the current activity closes the screen and returns you to the last used place in the menu structure screen or other place from which the dialog box originated If a menu is active lt Esc gt closes the last opened menu taking you up one level in the menu structure If the menu bar is active
467. ser mdb file then create a back up copy of this file in case your settings should ever be corrupted Devices can be configured for on line communications using the Local Operator Interface LOI port or a communication port such as a modem Each icon represents a different type of communications connection Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The devices can be logically organized to form Groups A Group is typically several units in the same geographical area Each Group contains a list of all the devices contained within that Group Each ROC or FloBoss has a Tag and unique Device Address for differentiation The Device Address must be different from any other host system that may access the network The Tag and Device Address are set by clicking with the right mouse on the Device and selecting Properties 2 5 1 1 Adding a Group Devices can be organized to form Groups Groups are typically units in the same geographical area or units with something else in common When you select a Group file a list of all communication setups in the Group appears below the Group To add a new Group under the Device Root directory or add a Subgroup to an existing Group 1 Select the Device Root directory icon 2 Right mouse click 3 Select Add a Group 4 Right mouse click again and Rename the Group or use the default 5 You may now wish to add a Device 2 5 1 2 Deleting a Group To delete a Gro
468. signed values Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 7 When finished configuring all parameters click Apply Save the Softpoint configuration to Flash memory using the Flash Memory Save Configuration function in the ROC gt Flags screen The Integer Flag FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 is a 16 bit unsigned integer value used as a flag to denote the validity of the floating point data or as a counter The value may be under the control of an FST or a User Program 7 2 Opcode Table Use the Opcode Table to group data being polled for more efficient communications Parameters from different point types can be assigned to the Opcode Table data points which can substantially reduce the number of polls from a host computer Note Use of the term Opcode in this context does not refer to the operator identification codes in ROC and ROC Plus protocols Select Configure gt Opcode Table Opcode Table Settings Table No 1 Data 1 SY51 ROCADA Version No TLPH IN 6 1 STATUS TLP TLP TLP TLP H TLP TLP TLP 10 HTLP 11 TLP 2 3 4 z E t a g A E 13 HTLP a ILE ee ae jeicee 17 ATLP eq te RIP eg je RECA 20 HTLPH eq ees a 22 HTLPH ay 23 HTLP a afr 25 HTLP ay 26 HTLPH ay 27 HTLP a 28 HTLP eg 29 HTLPH ef 30 HTLP ey ee 32 HTLP a 33 HTLP a Ue 35 HTLP al 36 HTLP ey a7 HTLP ay 38 HTLP a 39 HTLP
469. spective FST SVD out SVD in RR RR RR RR Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 7 2 FST Logical Commands You can store a discrete value called the Signal Value Discrete SVD in the Compare Flag CF The SVD is stored as an 8 bit byte The CF is true whenever non zero and the CF is false when zero Logical commands operate upon the Compare Flag CF Prior to execution of a logical command the CF must be loaded with an 8 bit value by using the SAV command The bit wise logical commands AND OR NOT and XOR apply Boolean operations on two 8 bit integers bit by bit The two 8 bit integers are the CF and the value defined by ARGUMENTI of the logical command Note that this value is then converted by the software into an 8 bit unsigned integer This value is used as a binary number 8 bits long as described next Each bit is weighted as a power of two and the bit position determines which power of two The bit either 0 or 1 is multiplied by the respective bit weight The resulting binary number is read from right to left with the right most bit representing bit O and the left most bit representing bit 7 For example the integer 42 is equivalent to the binary number 00101010 as shown next where bit 0 is the right most bit Bit Binary X Weight Bit 70x 2 0x 128 0 Bit60x 2 0x 64 0 Bit5 1x2 1x32 32 Bit40x2 0x 16 0 Bit3 1x2 1x8 8 Bit20x2 0x4 0 Bitl1x2 1x2 2 Bi
470. ss This applies only to Check Box buttons Select the Action to be performed by the Pushbutton Enter the Value to be written when the Pushbutton is clicked Click the button in the Item List field to enter Item Values and List Items This applies only to combo boxes Enter a Line Width to increase or decrease the thickness of the line Select the Color Click on the button in the Color field to open a color palette This applies to lines rectangles and ovals Enable Visible when the element is to appear to the user in the final version of the display This applies to frames labels text boxes option buttons checkboxes combo boxes and pictures If you select Expression refer to Adding an Expression to a Display Element Set the Tab Order of this element after all objects have been created When the user is navigating the display the Tab key on their PC follows the order entered This applies to frames labels text boxes option buttons check boxes and combo boxes 12 6 4 Editing a Custom Display From a File Select View gt Display gt From File The From File option reads a display from a previously saved DSP file translates the data fields and updates the data Select View gt Display gt From File Select the display File name Display files have the DSP extension Click Open Click Update to update data for the existing display elements oP gaa ig St a Click Edit to add edit or remove elements from th
471. ssion begins at Request Number 10 The messages that are transmitted begin with the Request Number set in the Starting Register Subsequent Request Numbers are transmitted until a Function Code 0 or Address 0 is encountered or the last Request Number 39 has been transmitted If Continuous Polling is Enabled the Host starts the transmission sequence over again Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 32 ROCLINK 800 User Manual In certain Modbus Host devices the register 40101 is actually transmitted as 100 The value 100 should be placed in the Starting Register field because the FloBoss uses the actual number sent by the Host Any number from 0 to 65535 is valid A Starting Register of 0 is a valid address Register numbers can be duplicated as long as they are in separate Modbus Function configuration tables The tables should be numbered from smallest to largest When Continuous Polling has been enabled the Host Poll Delay sets a delay time in seconds between polling request sequences Transmission Status displays the current status of the Modbus program Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 33 ROCLINK 800 User Manual SECTION 9 SAVING AND RETRIEVING CONFIGURATIONS This section describes how to save configurations download configurations to the ROC or FloBoss and save ROC or FloBoss data to files for reports In this Chapter Section Page I ty iN re CN Sei eV rece E cee eem esas seas texeane E EE S E EEE 9 1
472. st in troubleshooting When on line the FST Editor uses a Trace mechanism that provides the ability to debug FST program logic Trace executes the FST function indicated by the Instruction Pointer IP moves the Instruction Pointer to the next FST function to be executed and then stops You are given the opportunity to examine the results of the FST function and determine the next FST function to be executed The location of the action depends on the nature of the command The action may be traced to the history log I O value Point Numbers Softpoint and so on The command executed is determined by comparing the Instruction Pointer IP shown on the Monitor screen to a list of all Instruction Pointers and their corresponding commands Trace thereby verifies proper execution and sequencing of the FST functions Note Before entering Trace mode print out an Instruction Pointer listing of the FST After entering Trace mode from a newly compiled FST the FST starts at the first STEP After entering Trace mode from an executing FST the FST starts at the STEP being executed When using a FloBoss 407 ROC300 Series FloBoss 100 Series a value can be entered into the Instruction Pointer IP field to manually jump to another STEP Press lt F6 gt to execute the next command Note When you attempt to Trace an FST that contains WT BRK ST or CT commands a pause in the sequencing can occur until the command conditions are met
473. sterentestasterenre 3 19 3 3 3 Flags User Programs FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Section 4 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O sscccccccssssssscccccccssssccccceeeesees AA TVO CONFIGURATION OV BR VTE Ws scscss ce seccrncecnescsassecenteastacacsesucusnscnesecauaucanwanabssecesaasumanseatetemaecenonees 42 AT ANALOG INPUT CONFIGURATION ccccccssccssccssccssccsscesscescessesscenscesscesscesseessessesscesscesseuscens AE Zed A A cc ace eeacnncta ci cdisnssate xanteeelaceatsena E ans 4 2 2 AL Advancede cccccccecceccsccecceccscceccsccecceccscceccsccsccssceccsccescsscsscccssessessceccssessesscssesceeseecatceecs A AT 1 6100 a a eC ren a 4 3 AO ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIGURATION cccccccssccssccscccssccsscesccsscescenccesscesscesseusceussescesccesseussens ie POC 0 Ae tsetse akc nasa eta socaneasuebaiabiesade eeu bateeiecasiessesolaeeecaitscusbatabiaeancieeubeebiecaiaatees AZ PO VNC sa pene egestas E E T 4 3 3 AO Alarms ROC S00 S6I16S eccoiicssticeccdssecsssacconasecsoevelsactecnustsesonsessenssachesseisactbenrebecsnoseare Rev Dec 05 Table of Contents ROCLINK 800 User Manual cS DS 4 4 DI DISCRETE INPUT CONFIGURATION ccccccsseccccssccccesecccesececesccceesecseeeceseuecceeuneceseecessueeseeees dA D a E A E a a ee AA D AIN e EE eee ree 4 4 3 DI TDI Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC300 SerieS ssnssensenseessessenssessesserssessrssesse TAa Dr FARINA
474. stored in Flash memory and clears all History database files Custom Displays Alarm Log Event Log and FSTs Restores a configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clears the ROC Custom Displays Restores a configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clears the Event Log Restores a configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clears the FSTs Restores a configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clears the History Restores a configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clears the History Restores a configuration from default factory values Clears all historical configurations and historical data Saves the current configuration to Flash Memory ROC or FloBoss is initialized from SRAM memory If the configuration is valid databases and FSTs remain intact If the memory is not valid the configuration last saved to Flash is used User Programs remain on 3 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 3 3 1 Returning the Device to Factory Default Settings Sometimes it is necessary to return the ROC or FloBoss device to the original factory default settings The following procedure clears all saved restart configuration data contained in Flash memory Only factory defaults are retained ROC800 Series To return the device to the original factory default settings using a ROC800 Series unit 1 Select ROC gt Flags 2 Click Flash Memory C
475. t channel number If Scanning is set to Disabled enter a Value to override the RTD Input When Scanning is set to Enabled Value displays the last RTD Input scan in engineering unit Select one of the Units radio buttons This determines in which EU the temperature will be calculated Enter a Units Tag to display in configuration screens reports and custom displays This should be the same unit of measure as is chosen in the Units radio buttons If this field is blank then configuration screens reports and custom displays will show a blank where the unit of measure should be Select the Scanning option For the input to automatically process the field input select Enabled Automatic Mode When Scanning is set to Enabled Value displays the last RTD Input scan in engineering units When Scanning is set to Disabled Manual Mode the engineering unit EU Value is no longer updated by the ROC If Alarming is Enabled a Scanning Disabled alarm generates when Scanning is set to Disabled If Scanning is set to Disabled enter a Value to override the input Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 39 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Scan Period as the amount of time between updates of the Filter value All RTD Inputs are updated based on their individual Scan Periods The default value is 1 second The minimum scan period allowed is 64 mSec ROCLINK 800 software will not allow a value less than 64 mSec in this field The
476. t Calibration Values Pressure Effect 0 0 Click the Set To Factory Defaults button if you desire to return MVS Calibration values to their original values and reset the MVS Note The MVS Address will be set to the default value of 1 and MV Sensor as the Sensor Tag Use the drop down list box to select the MVS Calibration or MVS Sensor point sensor number you desire to view The Tag for the selected point displays Differential Pressure is a display of the Differential Pressure calibration values currently used by the MVS Sensor Manual Value is the value of the input at the time of the last meter Freeze Static Pressure is a display of the Static Pressure calibration values currently used by the MVS Sensor Manual Value is the value of the input at the time of the last meter Freeze Temperature is a display of the Temperature calibration values currently used by the MVS Sensor Manual Value is the value of the input at the time of the last meter Freeze Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual SECTION 11 UPDATES AND CHANGES This section describes how to update firmware upgrade hardware and change the size of an orifice plate To upgrade or re install ROCLINK 800 software refer to Software Installation In this Chapter Section Page DM MAG PMN ANG rats secant E A E E E A E A E E 11 1 11 2 Upgrade Hardware FloBoss 100 Series sonnnnnessssooeenssssssssse
477. t Settings cceccccccceeeeeesseseeeees 3 18 FF TT UC ennea Ea a 4 6 Figure 1 1 LOOM ss cccssasecentcanewoperetassadveranenedencsemoveseruiie 1 5 Figure 1 2 Menu Bar and ToolBar ROC800 Series TX CUEING A N E E E seaeahascbesodeste 1 8 Figure 1 3 About ROCLINK 800 ROC800 Series EE AE A A E A A E 1 12 Figure 1 4 Select TLP ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 1 13 Figure 1 5 TLP Options cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 1 14 Figure 1 6 New File Configuration Example ROC800 SC E E I IEE I E AEA A A E TA 1 18 Figure 1 7 Configuration Tree eeeeeeeeseessssseeee 1 20 Figure 2 1 ROCLINK 800 Security cesses 2 5 Figure 2 2 Device Security Users ROC800 Series and FIOBoss 100 Series cccccceccccseccceeeccceesceeeseeeeseeenes 2 6 Figure 2 3 Device Security Users Maintenance ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series 2 7 Figure 2 4 Device Security Users FloBoss 407 2 8 Figure 2 5 Device Security Users ROC300 Series Figure 2 7 Device Security Comm Ports ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series cccccceeeeeeeeeees 2 11 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Figure 2 8 Device Security User Group Summary ROC800 SerieS oe eccceeeeeeessesntteeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeas 2 12 Figure 2 9 License Key Administrator ROC800 Series cee Sas crc cepts eee tases Beak Sale sg eee cenetcnieaeaemeteee tnt 2 13 Figure 2 10 Device Direc
478. t will be restored from Internal Config Memory if valid However if you perform a Cold Start amp Clear FSTs or a Cold Start amp Clear ALL type of Cold Start the FSTs are permanently cleared from Internal Config Memory Upgrading Firmware If an FST is saved to memory and it is active running when a firmware upgrade occurs FSTs will be turned off and need to be MANUALLY restarted Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 5 Working with FSTs This section details how to work with FSTs A 5 1 Creating an FST An FST can be created directly by entering the steps in a blank workspace or by editing an existing file from a device or from a disk file Use the following steps to create an FST while on line with a ROC or FloBoss 1 Start the ROCLINK 800 software and connect to the ROC or FloBoss 2 Select Utilities gt FST Editor 3 Select the tab of the FST you wish to create FST 1 FST 2 FST 3 FST 4 FST 5 or FST 6 The number of FSTs available is device dependent 4 Fill in each STEP with the appropriate Labels Commands Tags and Arguments When you select the field for the Command the select E button appears If you click the button a display of commands from which to choose appears You may type in the 3 character command Depending upon which Command was chosen the Argument fields prompt you to type in a Label choose a TLP or enter some other data The Label field is o
479. t00x2 0x1 0 Total 42 The following table summarizes the bit wise AND operation AND 0 1 ee 0 00 Lio1 The following example ANDs the two integers 37 and 42 giving a result of 32 37 00100101 AND 4200101010 JA 3 00100000 The following table summarizes the bit wise Inclusive OR operation OR 01 T O o 1 ce Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 20 ROCLINK 800 User Manual The following example ORs the two integers 37 and 42 giving a result of 47 37 OOLOO0101 OR 42 00101010 47 00101111 The following table summarizes the bit wise Exclusive OR operation The following example Exclusive ORs the two integers 37 and 42 giving a result of 15 37 00100101 XOR 42 00101010 I5 00001111 Name Description Arguments Results NOT Logical NOT of SVD in None If SVD in gt 0 SVD out 0 Otherwise SVD out 1 RR out RR in AND Logical AND ARG1 with SVD in 1 Database or Constant Value RR out RR in SVD out SVD in AND ARG1 OR Logical OR ARG1 with SVD in 1 Database or Constant Value RR out RR in SVD out SVD in OR ARG1 XOR_ Logical XOR ARG1 with SVD in 1 Database or Constant Value RR out RR in SVD out SVD in XOR ARG1 Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual A 7 3 FST Comparison Commands Use comparison commands to compare values Comparison commands conditionally compare two values and branch to a different sequence of co
480. tal VAD E E E T T 5 3 INAS EE E A T E enn eec oes 3 5 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 User Manual VAUS scera TE EET 5 4 ELELE PE E E A T T 4 15 Status on Power Reset cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 25 Stop Bits sscasecreiraon brr ii aaea 2 25 Stopping FS ETE NEE TIE ITN N ter A 12 O e as E EA TT 1 14 Store Ge POW ANC wisecesccincusascsssusiveossseasevesserebabseaieveris 2 32 INOS er E E E EEE en 2 32 Pathi AdGrESS ccuscnceccsitixcunnsnnsewancndxcwanstas aanas 2 32 PO E E E ete 2 32 SODE V Earn E EE N ENN 3 6 Successful Message Time ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 2 33 System Al PUA SINGS E tha EE A AE ouaaede ee 4 48 IP WANN E A A E E 4 49 E o e I A E E 4 47 System Analog Input ccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 46 System Analog Inputs Refer to System Al o ccccceccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 4 46 System Configuration ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 12 System PIAS acie i E EE S 3 15 System ParaMeterS ccccccsssssssecccceccseseseceeeeeaeeseeeees 3 1 T Table 1 1 Menu Listing for ROCLINK 800 1 7 Table 2 1 Security Access Levels cccccccceeeeeeeees 2 2 Table 2 2 Communication Ports for the ROC800 Series A nea besa a beor E E 2 21 Table 2 3 Communication Ports for the FloBoss 407 P I EEA E sa qdenat en E E A N E E 2 22 Table 2 4 Communication Ports for the FloBoss 100 S ee E A E E E A E O 2 22 Table 2 5 Communication Ports for the
481. talized to give total values by taking the difference between the value at the end of the current logging period and the value at the end of the previous logging period Finally the current value of any Parameter can be logged at the end of each logging period Note In previous products the totalize Archive Type was intended to be used for Parameters that return to zero at contract hour In the ROC800 Series the Totalize Archive Type is intended to be used for Parameters that represent on going accumulators Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 2 History Setup FloBoss 100 Series Select Configure gt History Points History is saved to two databases Standard and Extended History Historical Configuration for the FloBoss 100 Series units occurs on three tabs Setup Standard History and Extended History The number of entries logs available to Standard and Extended History is configurable within boundaries The first eight Standard History Points are pre configured Refer to Figure 6 1 Standard History lt lt Minimum 8 Points Pre configured Standard History Default 35 Points Standard History or Extended History Points Figure 6 1 History Memory FloBoss 100 Series Standard History The first eight Standard History Points are pre configured This is the minimum number of Standard History Points The maximum number of Standard History Points is 35 The default number of Standard
482. tation 1 C Yolume 0 Mass Active Alarms o Meter Setup Meter Number 1 AGA Meter Tag AGAT General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Alarms Meter Description Meter Type Calculation Standard Alarming f Orifice 1992 AGA f Frabled Scan Pernod Turbine C Disabled Seconds Pipe Diameter 8 071 Inches Orifice Diameter 40 inches Low Flow CutOff 1 D InH20 Active Alarms 0 E GA Paste Update Y OK Cancel Apply Figure 5 7 Meter General FloBoss 100 Series FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Select the number of the Meter Run Point Number to be configured Enter a unique Tag Meter ID or Meter Tag for the meter of up to 10 characters Select the Station ROC800 Series in which this meter belongs Enter a unique Meter Description up to 30 characters to further identify this meter or to provide information about the meter Select the Meter Type For the FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 select Orifice or Turbine Select Orifice when measuring flow through an Orifice Plate and select Turbine when measuring flow through a turbine Positive Displacement PD or other linear meter For the ROC800 Series with an orifice meter type the selections are Flange Tapped Orifice or User Defined Device For a ROC800 Series with a turbine meter type the selections are Volume volume metering dev
483. te is defaults to the current date You can manually enter a date or click the drop down arrow box to display a calendar and make your date selections Refer to Figure 6 16 Click Start Conversion Click OK when the conversion is complete Note If you click Cancel any time during the conversion click OK to acknowledge that the conversion process has been canceled Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 22 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 7 4 PGAS Conversions The PGAS exports the EFM file data to four files The PGAS event file EVT lists all of the events in the Event Log that are related in any way to a Meter Run The exception is Gas Quality events that are included in the PGAS quality file ANA 6 7 4 1 PGAS Event Files EVT ColumnName Data Type 1 METER_ID char 16 Identification number for the measurement point in the field This must be the tag id of the orifice or turbine point associated with the event 2 EVENT DATE Datetime Date and time the event occurred in mm dd yyyy hh mm ss format 3 IMETER_CALC_COLUMN_NAME char 32 Actual column name within the METER_CALC table This information is only required for events that are to trigger record insertion into the METER_CALC table 4 NEW_VALUE char 16 New value to be used in the METER_CALC record This is the ASCII representation of the number 5 OLD VALUE char 16 Old value to be used in the METER _CALC record This is the ASCII representatio
484. tec 12 7 PAE COM BEE IC a Gace ts E E E E E E A E A E E E 12 9 12 7 Keypad Display Editor Configuration ccccccccccssssesseeecceeeeeaeessseccceeeeesaeeseeeceeeeseauaaasseeeeeess 12 16 Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 12 1 Print Configuration The Print Configuration option allows you to specify the Point Types that you desire to Print 1 Select File gt Print Configuration 2 Select the Point Types you desire to print You may either use the Select All or Deselect All buttons for multiple Point Types or select deselect individual Point Types by clicking with the mouse on the Point Type in the left hand column and selecting specific Parameters in the right hand column Print Configuration Setup Point Types Point Numbers Parameters applies to all points DLS Program Contig A UDPE3 1 Foint Tag ID Tank Gauge Param J Point Version Number HART Parameters Calculation Status System Variables Number of Units Logon Parameters Comm Port Number License Key Information DO Relay Number User C Configuration Poll Mode ROC Comm Forts Scan Period FST Parameters Response Timeout FST Register Tags Valid Receive Counter Soft Point Parameters Current Oil Production Configurable Opeode Current H20 Production Power Control Parameters Yesterday s Oil Production Discrete Inputs Yesterday s H20 Production Discrete Outputs Current Oil Runs Analog Inputs Current H20 Runs lt li
485. teesosencueiorese 4 3 Today s Total Max Rollover cceesseeeeeees 4 34 ToO el se races canieaceane E OOE 1 8 1 9 Tools Menu OPONSE 1 14 Total Mole ccc ccccecceecceccesccscceccecceccescescesceeees 5 5 5 19 Total Mole Percentage cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 5 19 MOCO CG RERE IT EE AAS EA T E 3 5 Tee No aE A 15 Transmission Status cccecccceesccceeseccceessececeeseceeeeees 2 27 Transmit OUNCE si cxcsiscvaxssceicantseeasinidentnrtlacarscidcentaeess 2 33 Transmitter POW sisiscsccsscessvaxivssencctiveotactdeansssesscentenses 3 21 Troubleshooting Communication MOnitor cccccccceeeccceeeeceeeeees 2 40 Connection Errors visscecnicnevanastciancseasieiwacaseesevaentucs 2 38 E A E AE T E A tates at N E EA E TTT A 8 A 13 FST Monitor Mode ssurenorsiisnrii nnn A 13 Rev Dec 05 ROCLINK 800 User Manual PST Trace Mode aeren nan ANSA A 15 ROCLINK 800 Communications cc eee 2 39 TCP IP Connections ccccceecccsecceeccesscceeseeeseeees 2 39 Turbine Meter Calibration ccc ec ceccesecceeccessceeeeceeeeees 10 13 CNA I ENIE II A T E 2 20 OV E E EE EET E E 1 19 U Uncorrected VOLUME ueniren 5 17 Un Installing ROCLINK 800 ccccececceeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Unit Accumulation cc ccc cccecccsccessccesccesscensceessens 7 4 METTE IIE IA I A IE ET 3 5 4 3 5 8 Update Firmware V O Termination Board eee ceecceecceeeceeeceeee 11 3 Keypad DIS AY siscasictncmnsi
486. tem AI are treated as Analog Inputs Because this type of input has no physical location the portion of the Point Number that refers to module location is 0 The portion that refers to channel number is to 5 for the input numbers Enter a 10 character string Tag for identification of the point When Scanning is set to Enable Value displays the last Analog Input scan in engineering units If Scanning is set to Disabled enter a Value to override the input Enter the Units value Inputs 1 2 and 3 are in Volts Input 5 is in Degree C Select the Scanning option For the input to automatically process the field input select Enabled Automatic Mode When Scanning is set to Enabled Value displays the last System AI scan in engineering units When Scanning is set to Disabled Manual Mode the engineering unit EU Value is no longer updated by the ROC or FloBoss If Scanning is set to Disabled enter a Value to override the input Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 47 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Scan Period as the amount of time between updates of the Filter value The default value is 1 second All System Analog Inputs are updated based on their individual Scan Periods The Low Reading EU engineering unit corresponds to zero percent input The High Reading EU corresponds to 100 percent input The Active Alarms field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is set to Enabled
487. temperature in Deg F Hourly accumulation of uncorrected volume at flowing conditions in MCF Turbine only Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 2 O O NI NINININ OIOQIOIOJIO O1 01 01 01 O1 oA OF1 a O17 Aj BH AJ AIAJ BRL HR RIE BR BR Bl OI OIO ouuu WIN O o NIDII BR WP O oO O AJIN O 0 N O1 oO Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 3 2 D O 00 O1 7 00 4 O1 7 0 Mi 3 4 e ROCLINK 800 User Manual V A NVA NVA NVA N A NVA NVA NVA NVA NVA NVA NVA NVA NVA NVA NVA NVA NVA Note For additional information on the PGAS and the EVT ANA ARM VOL file formats refer to the documentation provided with your PGAS and the web site www pgas com ROCLINK 800 User Manual 6 7 5 Flow Cal CFX Conversions Selecting Flow Cal performs conversion of EFM files to the Flow Cal Coastal Flow CFX format For additional information on the Flow Cal and the CFX file format refer to the documentation provided with your Flow Cal product and the web site www flowcal com 6 8 History Alarm and Event Log Reports Use the View menu to display the History Alarm and Event Log Reports 6 8 1 Viewing the History Log Select View gt History to display the Minute Hourly Periodic and Daily History Log reports History to be viewed can be retrieved either from the device if ROCLINK 800 is currently connected to a device or from a
488. tempting to connect to a ROC or FloBoss configure communication parameters in two places ROCLINK 800 Communications The Device Directory communication configurations allow ROCLINK 800 software to communicate to an individual ROC or FloBoss unit Refer to Section 2 6 ROCLINK 800 Communications on page 2 17 Communication Ports on the ROC and FloBoss Use the ROC gt Comm Ports to set up communication ports available for incoming or outgoing communications with the ROC or FloBoss Refer to Section 2 7 Communication Ports on the ROC and FloBoss on page 2 21 In this Chapter Section Page 2 1 Security Access Levels 2 2 2 2 ROCLINK 800 Security A 2 6 2 3 Device Security 2 4 License Key Administrator ROCS800 Seri S 0 0 ceecccscccccccceeseesseeccceeeceeaeeeeeeceeeeessaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 2 13 DD D MC 10 sania E salsa eee ces oes eens sagt A E eeu eects eae 2 14 2 6 ROCLINK 800 COC AON So seas sanseeetronengnaseurspnunetevuancansneeentgdudassmanaduencteesamiuadeeneacusessaenecstes 2 17 2 7 Communication Ports on the ROC and FIOBOSS ccccssssssseeeeceeceeeeeseseceeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 2 21 ee COMME CIN 10 4 ROC OR GIOB OSS saa ssce cece ca suee E A 2 36 2 9 Troubleshooting COMMUNICATIONS c cc ceeeeeseccccccceeeeseeecceeeeesaeessseeceeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeaas 2 38 Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 1 Security Access Levels Refer t
489. ter RR which is implied The Label in this example serves as a comment only as no other function branches to it STEP LABEL CMD ARGUMENT1 ARGUMENT2 0 CKHIAL VAL AIN 3 1 EU AIN 3 1 HIAL PUMPON In the example above when the value RR from Step 1 equals or exceeds gt the High Alarm value VAL in Step 2 and the High Alarm limit HIAL condition is met the FST branches to the PUMPON Label to turn the pump on Note Refer to the FST User Manual Form A4625 for additional examples A 4 7 Basic Rules for Creating FSTs Several rules should be followed when creating FSTs e An END command is required at the end of every FST The END command tells the FST to return to the top of the first STEP and begin to run from the first line at STEP 0 However you can use a branching function to force the FST to immediately return to STEP 0 if you do not desire to wait for the next execution cycle to begin If not present the FST Editor will automatically add the END Command when compiling The first blank line found in an FST is automatically converted to the END command Any commands following a blank line are lost Only one END command can be present in an FST Avoid internal loops and direct the program flow to the End Command Use Wait states WT command to suspend operation of the FST whenever possible to reduce MPU processor overload especially in a loop in which a condition is being repeatedly checked Be sure to configur
490. ter Run Turbine Meter Calibration Turbine Meter Meter Tag Turbine 1 Freeze Values Static Pressure Temperature 0 0000 50 0000 Verity Calibrate A Cancel Figure 10 14 Turbine Meter Calibration Example ROCS800 Series 2 Click AutoScan or Update AutoScan requests values from the meter It will continue to request values until the Freeze or StopScan button is pressed Update requests a single update of new values from the meter 3 Click Freeze to stop the values of the Static Pressure and Temperature RTD from being updated during verification or calibration Press the AutoScan or Update and then the Freeze button to create the Freeze Values used in ongoing processing such as flow calculations and history logging while calibration is being performed The Calibration Freeze Value field displays the value received from the AI MVS DVS or RTD when the Update button was last pressed 4 If you are calibrating a pressure input isolate the Sensor from the process Set up the pressure calibrator and make the necessary connections to the Sensor 5 If you are calibrating a temperature input disconnect the RTD sensor and connect a decade box or comparable equipment to the RTD terminals of the ROC or FloBoss 6 If desired during a meter calibration select and specify a Calibration Report File Select Yes to create a report text file containing calibration and verification details Select No to contin
491. ter in the sequence Note This function is not available for the ROC800 Series 1 Select Configure gt LCD User List LCD User List List No 1 l Text Device Parameter Text Device Parameter METER AGANEW CURDP 9 Undefined SSS PRESS S AGANEWT CURSP f ineine Teme S S dAGACNEW T CURTP af o ineine FLWNEWTFLOWDY 2f Undefined FLWNEWTENGDAY 13f Undefined AIN A1 ALARM fafo Undefined oa Update y OF 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 12 5 LCD User List Select the LCD User List Number that you desire to configure 3 Enter the Text to describe the Parameter to be viewed on the LCD The description has a 10 character limit Only 1 through 5 display on a FloBoss 100 Series unit 4 Select the Device Parameter that you desire to view on the LCD Undefined indicates that no parameter has been specified The Device Parameter must be numeric only For example System Variables gt SYS 1 gt Station Name is not supported 5 When using a ROC300 Series unit select the Line Value you desire to view on the LCD Undefined indicates that no parameter has been specified Rev Dec 05 Displays Diagnostics and Monitoring 12 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 12 5 Meter Run Values The Meter Run Values screens display the values from the orifice or turbine meter upon update These may be used for diagnostics or monitoring For the ROC800 Series select either Meter gt Values gt O
492. that uniquely identifies each node of a network In IEEE 802 networks the Data Link Control DLC layer of the OSI Reference Model is divided into two sublayers the Logical Link Control LLC layer and the Media Access Control MAC layer The MAC layer interfaces directly with the network medium Consequently each different type of network medium requires a different MAC layer Rev Dec 05 Glossary G 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Manual Mode In a ROC or FloBoss configuration Manual Mode generally refers to I O Scanning set to Disabled mode Modbus A popular device communications protocol developed by Gould Modicon MVS Multi Variable Sensor The MVS provides differential pressure static pressure and temperature inputs to the FloBoss 407 and ROC800 Series for orifice flow calculation O Off line Accomplished while the target device is not connected by a communications link For example off line configuration is configuring a ROC in a electronic file that is later loaded into the ROC On line Accomplished while connected by a communications link to the target device For example on line configuration is configuring a ROC while connected to it so that current parameter values are viewed and new values can be loaded immediately Opcode Type of message protocol used by the ROC to communicate with the configuration software as well as host computers with ROC driver software Orifice Meter A meter that records the flow rate
493. the Elevation FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 of the metering location The units are in feet or meters Elevation is required for the calculation of atmospheric pressure and gravitational acceleration Enter the geographic Latitude FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 of the metering location Latitude is required for calculation of gravitational acceleration The units are in degrees and minutes separated by a decimal point For example 46 15 Specify the User Correction Factor as desired This need not be limited to gravitational adjustments Note For a FloBoss 100 Series or ROC800 Series the Gravity Correction factor may be calculated A manually entered User Correction Factor is available on the Calibration Factors tab Enter the dynamic Viscosity of the flowing gas The units of measure for the ROC800 Series and the FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series will be either Ib ft sec for US Units or cP for Metric units and for the FloBoss 100 Series will always be cP centipoise Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 29 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Specific Heat Ratio Sp Heat Ratio of the gas defined as the specific heat of the gas at constant pressure divided by the specific heat of the gas at constant volume Accepted practice for natural gas applications is to use a value of 1 3 which was used to develop the expansion factor tables in the AGA 3 Report Part 3 If entered the value must
494. the Hand Held Communicator finishes communicating with the HART device or Burst mode was turned off in the device normal HART module scanning will automatically resume Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 51 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Note Burst mode is not supported by the ROC800 Series HART module The device should not be configured in Burst mode when connected to the ROC If a device is in Burst mode use a Hand Held Communicator to turn off Burst mode I O Type indicates whether the jumper on the HART module is configured as an Analog Input or Analog Output When Communication Mode is disabled all HART communication stops No changes will occur unless manually entered When in Point to Point mode the channel will allow communications with one device When in Multi drop mode the channel will allow communications with the specified number of devices maximum of five EU Value is the value in Engineering Units of the Analog Input or Analog Output Low Reading EU is the value in Engineering Units that corresponds to zero percent input High Reading EU is the value in Engineering Units that corresponds to 100 percent input Output Mode Analog Scanning When the Channel I O displays Analog Input select an Analog Scanning option For the input to automatically process the field input select Enabled Automatic Mode For the engineering unit EU Value to be no longer updated by the ROC select Disabled Manual M
495. the TDO and TDO Toggle modes this value is calculated in the software by the TDO configuration The Active Alarms field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is set to Enabled ROC800 Series the active alarms appear Even if Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear If Alarming is set to Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled 4 5 2 DO Advanced Select Configure gt I O gt DO Points The Advanced tab enables you to configure accumulated value and state for reset for the selected DO Discrete Output Discrete Outputs 1 DO Default Tag D Default Accumulated Value o State on Reset Retain Last State C Use Failsafe State Failsafe State f On Copy BB Paste 2 Update Y OF Cancel i Apply Figure 4 23 Discrete Outputs Advanced ROCS800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 24 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Discrete Output Discrete Outputs 1 DO Default Tag D Default Accumulated Value 0 Status on Power Reset C Off f Retain Last Status Copy EA Paste Update Y OK Cancel Apply Figure 4 24 Discrete Outputs Advanced FloBoss 407 FloBoss 100 Series and ROC300 Series Indicates Accumulated Value as the number of Off to On transitions of the Discrete Output The accumulator is a 32 bit number with a max
496. ther Calculate or Enter for the Heating Value of a specified quantity of gas If you choose Calculate then the Heating Value is calculated from the gas composition data If you choose Enter the value entered will be used in the energy calculation Use the Units parameter on the Advanced tab to toggle between volume or mass measurement of English units represented as BTU Cf or BTU Lb and the metric unit values as MJ M or MJ Kg Select either Calculate or Enter for the Spec Gravity ratio of the molar mass of the gas to the molar mass of air The value entered for standard conditions is used in the flow calculation The Specific Gravity value cannot be less than 0 07 If Calculate the ROC or FloBoss calculate the Specific Gravity value to be used in the flow calculations If Enter the value entered is used in the flow calculation The Specific Gravity should be entered for the gas at standard conditions and cannot be less than 0 07 Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 20 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 3 4 Meter Advanced The Advanced tab specifies additional parameters for the meter Select Meter gt Setup gt Orifice Meter or Turbine Meter or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for a ROC800 Series device Meter gt Setup or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units Orifice Meter Setup fx Meter Run 7 Orifice 1 Tag Orifice 1 G
497. tial Pressure Static Pressure and Temperature inputs from an orifice meter can be calibrated When calibrating Stacked Differential Pressure you may calibrate either the low differential pressure Low DP input or the high differential pressure Diff Pressure input If you have an MVS sensor refer to the Sensor Calibration section in the ROC or FloBoss Accessories Instruction Manual Form A4637 for the recommended way to remove restore the MVS from to working pressure during calibration Failure to follow recommendations may cause sensor damage Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 10 ROCLINK 800 User Manual If you have a DVS Sensor refer to the Calibration section of the appropriate FloBoss hardware manual for the recommended way to remove restore the DVS from to working pressure during calibration Failure to follow recommendations may cause sensor damage Orifice Meter Calibration Orifice Meter Meter Tag Orifice 1 Freeze Values Diff Pressure Low DP Static Pressure Temperature 0 OOO lo agog 0 OO00 Calibrate aero Shift A Cancel Figure 10 13 Orifice Meter Calibration Example ROCS800 Series To calibrate a ROC800 Series unit input select Meter gt Calibration gt Orifice To calibrate a FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 unit input select Meter gt Calibration 1 If you are calibrating a meter select a specific Orifice Meter Run to verify and calibrate Use the Met
498. ting point data type to a Long Integer for transmission to the Host Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 10000 0 and 44 Signed Short 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 16 bit integer A value of 0 12345 would be sent Implied 4 as 1234 Lanaio Fioat No FloBoss 100 Series only The Long to Float conversion changes a 44 A ee 3 4 6 16 transmitted Long Integer value to a floating point data type for the caling FloBoss Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 100000 0 and 45 Signed Short 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 16 bit integer A value of 0 12345 would be sent Implied 5 as 12345 FloBoss 100 Series only The Float to Byte Unsigned Character 45 Float to Byte 6 16 conversion changes a transmitted floating point value to an unsigned character data type for the FloBoss Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multiplied by 1000000 0 and 46 Signed Short 3 4 6 16 converted to a signed 16 bit integer A value of 0 01234567 would be Implied 6 sent as 12345 l FloBoss 100 Series only The Float to Unsigned Integer conversion 46 pagal to TEONE 6 16 changes a transmitted floating point value to an unsigned integer data Integer type for the FloBoss Rev Dec 05 Modbus Communications 8 26 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Convert AT Slave i Code Description Function Definition Any Type to ROC800 Series only Value within ROC is multipl
499. tion For ROC800 Series units once the Station has been configured the individual Meter Runs that are a part of the Station should be configured Select Meter gt Setup gt Orifice Meter or Turbine Meter You may also click on the meter in the Configuration Tree to open the Meter Setup screen that sets parameters unique to that meter For FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units select Meter gt Setup or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree to open the screen that sets parameters unique to that meter 2 Note For the FloBoss 104 Rotary Meter configuration is identical to Turbine Meter configuration Configure the parameters on each tab as pertains to your application 1 Select Meter gt Setup gt Orifice Meter or Turbine Meter or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for a ROC800 Series device Meter gt Setup or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units 2 The General tab sets the basic parameters for the meter 3 The Inputs tab lets you define the field inputs for differential pressure AGA3 uncorrected volume or mass AGA7 static pressure and temperature to be used in the flow calculation 4 For FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 the Gas Quality tab defines the mole percentages of twenty gas components as well as the Heating Value Basis the Heating Value and the Specific Gravity If other Stati
500. tion accumulators are cleared and data is logged to the Daily History database The Contract Hour is based on a 24 hour clock with midnight as the 0 hour Select Force End of Day FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 checkbox and click Apply to cause the current day and its hourly values to be logged into memory for all historical data except Station totals Force End of Day also resets the daily and hourly accumulators Force End of Day uses one of the 35 possible slots for storing daily data The user may specify how many FST instructions will be executed per FST Execution period FloBoss 100 Series Execution period is 1 second The default number of instructions is 20 When the default is used an FST with 30 sequential instructions will run in 2 execution periods 20 in the first period and 10 in the second Note Changes to this parameter will take effect in the next execution period Re start is not required Note To reduce the potential risk of loading on the FloBoss unit the user should monitor the MPU loading when changes to this parameter are made The Device Type field displays the type of ROC or FloBoss being configured Rev Dec 05 Configuring System Parameters 3 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 3 2 2 Information Internet ROC800 Series Select ROC gt Information The Internet tab ROC800 Series configures addresses for Internet communications Device Information General Internet Points
501. tion output DOUT types Set the Low Reading Time to the minimum amount of time in seconds the TDO can be energized to move the motor Set the High Reading Time to the amount of time in seconds the TDO must be energized for full travel Set the Low and High Reading EU values The units can either be in terms of the valve position O to 100 or in terms of flow capacity 0 to 1000 MCF Day Set the Output type on the PID screen to Discrete Under DO Open Point and DO Close Point select a TLP Point Type of Discrete Outputs the desired logical number and EU Value parameter Note The FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series cannot perform Override Control and Discrete Output Control at the same time Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Configure the PID point with a Control Type of Override Control This causes available fields to appear on the PID screen to enter the I O definition of the Process Variable and Setpoint for both the Primary and Override loops Select a TLP Point Type of Orifice Meter Run Values the desired Logical Number and a Parameter of Flow Rate Per Day for the Primary Process Variable Select a TLP Point Type of MVS the desired Logical Number and a Parameter of SP Reading for the Override Process Variable The Setpoint I O Definition ROC800 Series only remains undefined because you enter the values The Setpoint for the Primary loop will be the desired amount of flow per day T
502. tions request is in ROC protocol Modbus RTU encapsulated in TCP IP or Modbus TCP IP protocol The ROC responds using the same protocol as the incoming request ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 The ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 require the Modbus Protocol Emulation User Program to provide Modbus communications 8 1 Modbus Configuration ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series The General tab sets the basic communication parameters The Scale Values tab allows you to enter eight low and high floating point scale values and one low and high integer values for converting floating point numbers to a scaled integer The History Access Registers tab FloBoss 100 Series allows a single register to contain one or more History Points for retrieval of Periodic and Daily Historical Archives as well as the Register number for retrieving the Event Log and Alarm Log 8 1 1 Configuring a ROC800 Series or FloBoss 100 Series as a Modbus Slave 1 Set up the ROC gt Comm Port Refer to Section 2 Communication Ports on the ROC and FloBoss 2 Define the Modbus Registers Refer to Section 8 4 Modbus Registers ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series on page 8 18 3 Configure all Conversion Codes Refer to Table 8 9 Modbus Convert Codes on page 8 23 4 Select Configure gt Modbus gt Configuration and configure the Modbus to format the data correctly Refer to Section 8 1 3 Modbus Configuration General on page 8 3 8 1 2 Configuring a ROC800 Serie
503. titude 35 0 Deg User Correction Factor 1 0 00000Es Base Pressure Stainless Steel O bonel C Carbon Base Temperature Elevation Ref Temp 68 0 Deg F LomFt Sec Viscosity Pressure ap Sp Heat Ratio p Heat Ratio Gers f Absolute Copy EA Paste Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup C Upstream Kde Meter Tag AGAT Fipe Material C Stainless Steel C Monel f Carbon Ref Temp 68 0 Deg F 2 Update Y OK Cancel Apply Figure 5 17 Meter Advanced Orifice FloBoss 407 5 27 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Meter Setup ud Eg Meter Number 1 4GA1 Meter Taq AGAT FPY Method Atmospheric Pressure Units f Detailed f Calculate Enter f US CCF AMBTU F m e MEF MMEBETU Gross 14 45 peja Metric beet TOME MMB TL Base Pressure 14 75 PSIA Base Temperature 60 0 Deg F Elevation 500 0 Feet Latitude 35 0 Deg User Correction Factor Pressure Tap C Gauge Meter Factor al f Absolute Es Copy EA Paste 2 Update y OF A Cancel i Apply Figure 5 18 Meter Advanced Turbine FloBoss 407 For AGA calculations select FPV Method FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Detailed Gross I and Gross II methods of calculating the compressibility factor The Detailed method provides the highest accuracy in a broader range of measurement conditions however one of the Gross methods
504. to establish a connection once Tx Delay Enables the RTS line for the amount of delay specified before transmitting data Tx Delay is typically used to allow a radio to fully stabilize before data is applied to transmit For EIA 232 RS 232 and Dial up Modem communications the Tx Delay and Key Off Delay values should normally be set to O zero or the default of 0 05 seconds For EITA 485 RS 485 and Radio communications the Tx Delay value is typically set to 0 1 Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 20 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Time Out The actual amount of time that ROCLINK 800 software waits to receive a valid message after it sends a request to a device Do not enter 0 zero in the Time Out field For Dial up Modem communications the Time Out value is typically set to 3 seconds Key Off Delay Defines the amount of time to delay when done transmitting a message before turning the RTS signal off For E A 232 RS 232 and Dial up Modem communications the Tx Delay and Key Off Delay values should normally be set to O zero CRC Check Select Enabled or Disabled in the ROCLINK CRC Check field for Cyclical Redundancy Checking 2 Communication Ports on the ROC and FloBoss While in a configuration and on line with a ROC or FloBoss unit select ROC gt Comm Ports to display the Comm Port settings screen Each communications port has a unique set of parameters on the screen The ROC gt Comm Port
505. to select which DO point is to be used ROC800 Series Rev Dec 05 Extended Functions 7 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 7 4 Proportional Integral and Derivative PID Select Configure gt Control gt PID Loop Closed loop Proportional Integral and Derivative PID control is used to provide smooth and stable operation of the feedback control loops employing a regulating device such as a control valve or a motor The typical use for PID is to control a Process Variable to a Setpoint Note To enable PIDs select ROC gt Information gt Points Enter the number of PIDs you desire in the Point PIDs Active field and click Apply The maximum number of PID loops is sixteen for the ROC800 Series one for the FloBoss 100 Series four for the FloBoss 407 six for a ROC306 ROC3 12 and sixteen for a ROC364 In a given PID point two separate PID loops are available Primary and Override In Primary Only mode the Override Control loop is disabled leaving only the Primary Control loop active In Override Only mode ROC800 Series the Primary loop is disabled leaving only the Override loop active In Override Control mode ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series both loops are active and a change in Output is selected based on either a low or high limit selection as configured by you In a FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series on the selected loop is active The selected lop 1s determined by the switch parameter setting Each of the maximum P
506. to the next If ARG2 gt number of historical database value and sets it to 0 when the archived periods number of archived historical periods are ARG1 then exceeded Otherwise no effect occurs to ARG 0 ARGUMENT2 a Otherwise ARG2 Note The ROC800 Series increments any Data ARG 1 Type For all other cases RR out RR in SVD out SVD in A 7 7 1 Defining a FST History Point When defining history database points for WDB WTM and RDB define at least one History Point as an FST Time type minute or second to provide a time stamp for the values logged The time stamps represent what time each portion of the accumulated data was logged To define an FST History Point 1 Select Configure gt History Points For the ROC800 Series select the desired History Segment Select the desired History Point Click the Archive Type TLP button and select FST Time or FST Data Click the Archive Point TLP button and select any TLP such as FST Register 2 to contain the data or time stamp The Archive Point selection is ignored by the FST 6 Click OK oo 2 The FST for a History Point uses one of the historical database commands and two Arguments ARGUMENTI typically contains the history database History Segment and History Point number with a value between For History Segment General Segment 0 or Segment 1 through 10 For History Point 1 through 200 ARGUMENT2 is the History Index or database pointe
507. to zero percent input For example if a temperature transmitter is connected to the Analog Input with a range of 40 to 160 degrees F the Low Reading EU would be set to 40 High Reading EU engineering unit corresponds to 100 percent input For example if a temperature transmitter is connected to the Analog Input with a range of 40 to 160 degrees F the High Reading EU would be set to 160 Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual If you Enable Alarming the limit alarms thresholds four levels Rate and Deadband are configured on the Alarms tab If you Disable Alarming no limit alarms generate for this point The Point Fail alarm may appear in the Active Alarms field but will not be logged in the Alarms file Alarm Enable actives the limit alarms for the point If Alarming is set to Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled The Active Alarms field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is set to Enabled the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear 4 2 2 Al Advanced Select Configure gt I O gt AI Points The Advanced tab enables you to configure features such as filtering A D conversions and clipping for the selected Analog Input Analog Input Analog Inputs 1 Al
508. tory cecccceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 14 Figure 2 11 Device Root 0 0 0 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeees 2 15 Figure 2 12 ROCLINK 800 Communications General Example ROC800 SerieS ccccccccesssseeeeeeeeeeees 2 18 Figure 2 13 ROCLINK 800 Communications Example Advanced ROC800 SerieS ccc cece eeecceeeeceeeeees 2 20 Figure 2 14 Comm Port ROC800 Series 2 23 Figure 2 15 Comm Port FloBoss 100 Series 2 23 Figure 2 16 Comm Port FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Le Seite casters erase se acai A EE E E 2 24 Figure 2 17 Comm Port Example ROC800 Series PEI AN ETE A EE Senta meneeua ence eaneeene 2 25 Figure 2 18 Modbus Host Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROCJO Serey aaan NN 2 27 Figure 2 19 Comm Port Advanced Example ROC800 Eo L A E EA 2 28 Figure 2 20 Comm Port SRBX Example ROC800 ICS aa A NAN 2 30 Figure 2 21 Comm Ports Store amp Forward ROC800 Series and FIOBOSS 407 cccceeccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 32 Figure 2 22 Comm Ports Diagnostics ROC800 Series Sara ciisk ease shee EA A E A A E 2 33 Figure 2 23 Successful Login Example ROC800 Series PE AE A E A E N E A 2 37 Figure 2 24 Communications Monitor Example ROC800 Series eseneeesesenesessenssesssessserssersssess 2 40 Figure 2 25 Device Directory ccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 2 40 Ficus Jl COCK oesccsexetecosencnatesene dances pocastosnneas ainnis 3 1 Figure 3 2 Device Information ROC
509. ts The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for the AO point If you Enable Alarming the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband are configured on the Alarms tab To conserve Alarm Log space alarms should be enabled only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so that no false alarms generate Analog Output Ed Analog Outputs 1 A0 Default Tag Ag Default Alarming f Enabled f Disabled RE W On Alarm Set On Alarm Clear Copp BB Paste 2 Update y OF A Cancel Apply Figure 4 13 AO Alarms ROCS800 Series For a ROC800 Series select the SRBX RBX Alarming option to configure Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX or RBX alarming for this point On Alarm Set The point enters an alarm condition the ROC generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host On Alarm Clear The point leaves an alarm condition the ROC generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host Note SRBX Alarming requires the ROC gt Comm Ports gt RBX or SRBX to be properly configured Rev Dec 05 Configuring Inputs and Outputs I O 4 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 4 4 DI Discrete Input Configuration The DI modules monitor the status of relays open collector open drain type solid state switches and other two state devices Each DI channel can also be software configured to function as a latched DI A lat
510. tton returns to an un pressed state when connections are successfully closed For Modbus RTU encapsulated in TCP IP or Modbus TCP IP connections select Device Address Slave Address or Either Device or Slave Address The ROC800 Series unit will respond to the Device Address ROC Address configured on the General tab of the Device Information screen to a Slave Address configured in the Slave Address field or to either address 3 2 3 Information Points Select ROC gt Information The Points tab displays the Maximum number points are available and how many are currently Active in the ROC or FloBoss units such as Events Alarms PIDs Stations Samplers FSTs and Meter Runs Orifice and Turbine The Maximum column displays the number of Points available for the option and the Active column displays the number of Points that are active To conserve processor executions set the Active fields to the minimum value required by your application For FloBoss 407 units the Points tab displays the number of database History Points contained in the RAM areas Base RAM is always 30 RAM is always 20 RAM2 is always 0 These fields are Read Only and cannot be changed You can also configure the number of PIDs and AGAs For ROC300 Series units the Points tab displays the number of database points contained in the RAM areas Base RAM is always 30 RAM is always 30 RAM2 is always 27 These fields are Read Only and cannot be changed You can also
511. ture compensation curve is applied to the Analog Input using the board temperature of the ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 as areference Use this feature to improve the A D conversion accuracy at temperature extremes for modular Analog Inputs only built in Analog Inputs already have temperature compensation If you use this feature be sure to perform a calibration after it is enabled For a ROC800 Series or FloBoss 100 Series enter a Zero Shift value if necessary to compensate for the zero shift effect on a differential pressure input 4 2 3 Al Alarms Select Configure gt I O gt AI Points The Alarms tab sets the alarm parameters for this AI point If you enable Alarming the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband are configured on the Alarms tab To conserve Alarm Log space alarms should be enabled only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so that no false alarms generate For the ROC800 Series Alarming is Enabled in the Configure gt I O gt AI Points gt Alarms tab For the FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 Alarming is Enabled in the Configure gt I O gt AI Points gt General tab Note Refer to Section 10 Calibration Analog Input Analog Inputs 1 Al Default Tag Al Default Alarming HiHi arm 20 0 a SMe High lar 10 0 f Disabled Low Alarm 0 0 REX LoLo Alarm 20 0 On Alarm Set HE 50 On A
512. type P or A for the AM PM field or use the arrows 4 The clock can automatically compensate for daylight savings time by enabling this feature ROC800 Series and FloBoss 100 Series 5 Click the Apply button 6 Click the OK button 3 2 Configuring Device Information The Device Information screen establishes the Station Name Address Group and other global variables that differentiate each individual ROC or FloBoss Other system variables set in the Device Information screen must be established for a particular application Select ROC gt Information The General tab has basic information about the ROC or FloBoss The Points screen allows you to change the number of certain points that you want to be active The Other Information tab and Revision Info tab FloBoss 100 Series display information about the firmware and boot firmware The System Configuration tab ROC800 Series allows you to specify the four Baud Rate Generators BRG possible by the ROC800 Series unit at any one given time The Internet tab allows you to set addresses for I P and other Internet communication options TCP IP connections can be used for either DS800 Modbus RTU encapsulated in TCP IP Modbus TCP IP or ROC Plus Protocol communications If the default value of the IP Address Gateway Address or Subnet Mask parameter is changed then all ROC Plus Protocol over TCP IP connections will be closed and you will have to re establish a connection Rev Dec 05 Co
513. ue without creating a report If you select Yes another dialog box appears Rev Dec 05 Calibration 10 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 7 Click the Calibrate button 8 Enter a value for Set Zero 9 Enter a value for Set Span 10 11 Enter values for up to three Midpoints You will now return to the main calibration screen Click the OK button to close the main calibration screen and unfreeze the associated inputs To calibrate the inputs for another Meter Run if available return to Step 1 10 2 8 Aland RTD Calibration For FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 RTD Input calibration select Configure gt I O gt AI Points gt Calibration tab For ROC800 Series RTD Input calibration select Configure gt I O gt RTD Points gt Calibration tab 1 2 3 aw ue Select an RTD Input or Analog Input Click Update to request one value update from the input Click Freeze to stop the values of the input from being updated during verification or calibration Click Update and the Freeze button to create the Freeze Value used in ongoing processing such as flow calculations and history logging while calibration is being performed The Calibration Freeze Value field displays the value received from the AI or RTD input when the Update button was last pressed Scan Mode indicates Normal or Manual Normal indicates that the point scanning is enabled and is being updated each scan period Manual indicates that the
514. ue Analog SVA eeeeeeeesssssssssssssseerrrsssese A 2 Signal Value Discrete SVD ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees A 2 Slave Address cccwessiosvioousencitnerncainnsresneueertenssnctemareceeinnses 3 7 So POIS ene en ne E 7 1 Sp Heat Ra Oesen EEEE 5 30 SPE U r OE E 4 19 SLE EL A A E 5 6 5 20 Speed of Sound yas cassedisnoriedecoonhavadecanenencwedsiabsaamndancmuees 5 30 BD Pi EE PA A T AA TT 2 13 SRAM Memory 2 scaceanacontienstaancaseparmocsatednedeatemnadanniansene 3 17 SRB X sia coehesnideationemonentenenetenenetaneneces 2 30 4 8 4 36 5 37 Alarm Nde Xeyne ai 2 31 Alarming 5062 ceccescusetasgansaneeaconobnonenaccanyevactenan enacensnens 5 10 AttempiS scsi ar 2 31 Configuring Comm Ports ccccssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 30 ALOE PEIE A E TAT 2 30 DS EUS EEE PT TEET EAT TATT 2 31 EC te TOP E E S E T 5 17 Sames OLEE erasini aS ee 5 30 A n 4 16 Standard History ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 19 6 3 6 5 6 6 Starting ae E E E E S E A 11 Host Request for Modbus nnnoesssssssoeeeneessssssss 2 27 ROCLINK 800 eeeeeeeeeneeeessesssesssesesreressseresesesseen 1 4 Transmission for Modbus ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 21 Startup ROCLINK 800 Software ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Static K Factor serscrircrsan irie 5 15 5 30 Sae CSS US occse REA 5 17 SAOS arreirar iA AEE 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 14 E E o E T A A E 5 7 A MINS a a a E E E 5 9 PDU a E E 3 7 ETRO IE y E E O E T 5 5 Ce Me
515. ue of the Fourth Dynamic Variable If Value on Reset is set to Use Failsafe Value FV Fail Safe is the value to be used as the Fourth Variable after a reset or Warm Start Slot Assignment 0 1 2 or 3 determines which variable in that slot to request Slot Value 0 1 2 or 3 is the value of the variable requested from that slot The Read Only units defined in the device is displayed to the right of this field Actual Scan Period displays the actual amount of time in seconds that passes between scans Current displays the current in milliamps reported by the device of Range displays the percentage of the range currently being reported by the device Status displays the state of the device This field will display either No Device or Communicating Response Code displays the response status of the device Refer to the documentation from the transmitter manufacturer for more information ID Number displays a 3 byte globally unique address of the device The Active Alarms field indicates any alarms that are being sent from the device These are not entered in the Alarm Log When Retain Last Value is selected as the Value on Reset the last EU values for the Dynamic Variables are used after a reset or a Warm Start If Use Failsafe Value is selected then the values entered as the Failsafe Value are used after a reset or Warm Start Enter a Tag for the HART device This will identify this device throughout the configuration The Tag
516. up or down to compensate for the difference if the Total does not equal 100 Select Full Normalization to have each component adjusted if the Total does not equal 100 Select between Dry no water vapor present in the gas Wet saturated water vapor present in the gas or As Delivered may contain some water vapor for the Heating Value Basis This selection indicates on what basis the entered Heating Value was determined and is for accounting purposes only and does not affect the flow or energy calculations Enter the gross volumetric Heating Value of the measured fluid at base conditions in lb ft or kg m For gas this value represents the real Heating Value rather than the ideal Heating Value For gas enter the Spec Gravity as the real gas relative density that is defined as the ratio of the real density of the gas to the real density of dry air a the same reference conditions of pressure and temperature For liquids enter the Spec Gravity as the ratio of the density of the liquid to the density of water at the same reference conditions of pressure and temperature Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 2 3 Station Advanced ROC800 Series To configure a Station select a Station icon in the Configuration Tree menu or select Meter gt Setup gt Stations The Advanced tab of the Station Configuration contains a number of additional parameters that affect the flow calculation Stati
517. up under the Device Directory 1 Select a Group 2 Right mouse click 3 Select Delete Group 4 Click Yes in the Confirm Delete Message dialog 2 5 1 3 Deleting a Device To delete a Device under the Device Directory 1 Select a Device by highlighting the Name next to its icon 2 Right mouse click on the Name 3 Select Delete Device 4 Click Yes in the Confirm Delete Message dialog 2 5 1 4 Adding a Device To add a new Device under the Device Directory or add to an existing group 1 Select the Device Root directory icon Right mouse click 2 3 Select Add a Device 4 Configure the communication parameters Note You can place a Device connection under a Group by selecting the Group before adding the Device connection Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 16 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 5 1 5 Deleting All Devices To delete all Device communication parameter configurations under the Device Root directory Note This deletes all ROC units that you currently have configured 1 Select the Device Root directory icon 2 Right mouse click 3 Select Delete All Devices 4 Click Yes in the Confirm Delete Message dialog box 2 5 1 6 Renaming a Group or Device To rename a Group or Device in the Device directory 1 Select highlight the Device Name or Group label Right mouse click on the Device Name or Group label Select Properties Enter the Tag of the Group label or Device Nam
518. ured Enter a 10 character string Tag for identification of the Point Number Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used The Point Number identifies the physical location of the input For the ROC800 Series the Point Number identifies the module slot channel number Enter the Units a user defined 10 character description for the engineering units EU assigned to the I O such as Counts or Pulses The EU Value is dependent on how the EU Options are set in the PI Advanced tab If the PI is set up for a Rate Max Rollover then the Current Rate is assigned to the EU Value If the PI is set up as an accumulator using Today s Total Max Rollover then Today s Total is assigned to the EU Value If the PI is set up for accumulator using Running Total Entered Rollover then the EU Value corresponds to the accumulated pulses times the Conversion The EU Value is compared to the value entered for the Rollover Value If it is greater than or equal to this entered value the EU Value here is reset to zero Select the Scanning option For the input to automatically process the field input select Enabled Automatic Mode When Scanning is set to Enabled EU Value displays the last Pulse Input scan in engineering units When Scanning is set to Disabled Manual Mode the engineering unit EU Value is no longer updated by the ROC or FloBoss If Scanning is set to Disabled a value may be entered in the EU Value to over
519. use for PID is to control a Process Variable to a Setpoint In a given PID point two separate PID loops are available Primary and Override In Primary Only mode the Override Control loop is disabled leaving only the Primary Control loop active The ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units implement Override PID as a switchover algorithm At any given point in time only the selected loop Primary or Override is active The loop selected is based on comparison of an input to a configured Switch Setpoint Both the Primary and Override Control Loop have independent Switch Inputs Switch Setpoints Switch Modes and Outputs One application of Override PID Control allows pressure control to Override flow control when the pressure exceeds a Switch Setpoint For example The flow control loop is active until the pressure Switch Input exceeds the Switch Setpoint of 700 Psig At that pint the pressure control loop Override Loop becomes active and begins controlling the pressure to the Override Setpoint Through the use of an FST you can implement an Override algorithm by configuring flow and pressure control loops as two separate Primary Control Loops and writing the outputs to the Softpoints or FST Registers The FST then manages the high low selection PID Loop FID Control Type Output Type r Tuning FID Fi e Primary Only ite Analog Primary Override Tag PID HT O fi Loop Period a E Scanning Mode eae O5 o5 C Prane C
520. utput value from Results Register RR CF in The value or contents of the Compare Flag CF Signal Value Discrete SVD prior to execution of a function command CF out The contents of the Compare Flag CF following execution of the function command Table A 5 FST Command Summary FloBoss 100 Series ROC800 Category Command Action ROC300 Series and Senes FloBoss 407 Math RR RR ARGUMENT 1 add X X RR RR ARGUMENT 1 subtract X X j RR RR ARGUMENT1 multiply X X RR RR ARGUMENT1 divide X X ji RR RR raised to power of ARGUMENT1 X X ABS RR Absolute value of RR X X EXP RR e 2 71828 raised to power of RR X X INT RR Integer value of RR X X LOG RR Log base 10 of RR X X LN RR Natural Log of RR X X SQR RR Square root of RR X X P3 RR 3rd order polynomial R1 R2 R3 R4 X X Logical NOT SVD NOT SVD 0 1 gt 020 X X AND SVD SVD AND ARGUMENT1 X X OR SVD SVD OR ARGUMENT1 X X Rev Dec 05 FST Editor A 16 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FloBoss 100 Series Category Command Action ROC300 Series and sete FloBoss 407 XOR SVD SVD XOR ARGUMENT 1 X X Comparison If RR ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 X X LABEL If RR lt gt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 X X LABEL lt If RR lt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 X X LABEL lt If RR lt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 X X LABEL
521. values cannot be less than zero Up to five K Factor and EU values can be entered The Active Alarms field indicates any alarm currently activated For example Low indicates that the calculated flow is below the Low Alarm limit Other alarms can include High No Flow and Manual Mode Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 5 3 2 Meter Inputs The Inputs tab lets you define the field inputs for differential pressure AGA3 uncorrected volume AGA7 static pressure and temperature to be used in the flow calculation Select Meter gt Setup gt Orifice Meter or Turbine Meter or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for a ROC800 Series device Meter gt Setup or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units Orifice Meter Setup Meter Run 1 Orifice 1 Tag Orifice 1 General Inputs Advanced Alarms Calibration Factors O Definition Values Differential Pressure FST 1 F5 Bi 0 0 InH20 Static Pressure Manual w 0 0 PSI Temperature Manual E 0 0 Deg F stacked DIP Low DP Input Manual E Low DP SetPoint 0 0 InH20 C Disabled aaa High DP SetPoint 0 0 InH20 Copy 2 Update y OK 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 5 8 Meter Inputs Orifice ROC800 Series Rev Dec 05 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 16 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Turbine Meter Setup Meter Run 1 Turbine 1 v Tag Tu
522. verride Switch PY Undefined on Min Control Time o Switch to Primary if gt 0 0 SECS Output Primary Output E ndefined fe Override Output U ndefined i lt lt Tuning Copy Paste Update kA OF A Cancel i Apply Figure 7 9 PID Loop ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 For a FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series set the Loop Period time in seconds between execution of the PID algorithm Enter the Proportional Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in the error Process Variable Setpoint Enter the Reset Integral Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in the integral of the error Process Variable Setpoint with respect to time This value is in terms of repeats per minute Enter the Rate Derivative Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in the error Process Variable Setpoint with respect to time This value is in terms of minutes Enter the Scale Factor number representing the ratio of the output span to input Process Variable span The sign of the number specifies the action of the loop negative for reverse action the default or positive for direct action Reverse action causes the PID loop point to produce a decrease in output to close a valve for example when the Process Variable exceeds the Setpoint Enter the Integral Deadband as a window around the Setpoint When the Process Variable 1s within this window no change
523. vice Name to connect to the device using the parameters currently set for that port ROC gt Connect Connect to the Device Name currently selected in the Device Root Note Once you are connected on line the Configuration Tree view becomes the active screen 2 8 1 Direct Connect Select Direct Connect to establish a connection with a ROC or FloBoss ROCLINK 800 software attempts to establish communications through COM1 of the PC at one of the following baud rates 19200 9600 57600 38400 4800 2400 and 1200 bps If this is unsuccessful the program then attempts to establish communications through the remaining COM Ports of the PC successively until it receives a valid reply To use Direct Connect 1 Physically connect cable to the ROC or FloBoss 2 Launch and login to ROCLINK 800 software 3 Do one of the following Click on the Direct Connect icon in the Device Directory Click the Direct Connect button on the toolbar Select ROC gt Direct Connect 4 If this is the first time that you have connected to the ROC or FloBoss continue to the steps for Setting the Clock By default the Local Port is the Comm Tag in the ROC gt Comm Port settings screen For the Direct Connect option to work security conditions must be met and the IBM compatible personal computer PC must be connected to the Local Port LOI of the device with communication settings of 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity
524. w Dependent Linear ZIZ z e jej S 2 4D vg Flow Dependent Formulaic ORF Orifice Meter Run Differential Configuration PARER DE Pressure gt Q Q vg Flow Weighted Linear gt Q vg Flow Weighted Formulaic vg Flow Weighted Linear Q vg Flow Weighted Formulaic ORF Orifice Meter Run Configuration CURSP SP Static Pressure vg Flow Dependent Linear gt gt Q Q V am Ae Flow Dependent Formulaic Flow Weighted Linear ORF Orifice Meter Run CURTMP TMP Temperature Configuration Flow Weighted Formulaic gt gt Q Q V A gt V Q Rev Dec 05 Configuring and Viewing History 6 14 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Archive Type Point Point Type Parameter Description Avg Flow Dependent Linear Avg Flow Dependent Formulaic Avg Flow Weighted Linear Avg Flow Weighted Formulaic QRFV Orifice Meter Run HWPF Pressure Pressure Avg Flow Dependent Linear Values Extension Extension Avg Flow Dependent Formulaic Avg Flow Weighted Linear Avg Flow Weighted Formulaic ORFV Orifice Meter Run MULVAL Multiplier Value Avg Flow Dependent Linear Values ZT Flow Dependent Formulaic ORFV Meter Run FLOACC a ORFV Meter Run JENGACC aoe hae Accumulated Multiplier Value Totalize Energy Note For a ROC800 Series Orifice Meter Run the following History Points must
525. wnload User Program File Determine the amount of memory available in Memory Usage FloBoss 100 Series and FloBoss 407 or Device User Program Environment ROC800 Series The memory location must be available for the specific User Program that you are loading When using a ROC800 Series click Reset Counter to clear the value that indicates how many time the User Program has been restarted Select the User Program in the User Program Installed in Device field click Start or Enable The Status field displays ON or OFF indicating the status of the User Program selected in the User Programs Installed in Device field Click Browse and select the User Program file to download from the CD ROM Program files are typically located in the Program Files ROCLINK Files folder The Open File dialog displays the names of all the files that have the tar ROC800 Series bin FloBoss 100 Series or HOO FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series extension Select the File name you desire to load and click Open Click Download to download the selected User Program Only install one User Program 7 8 User Data Configure gt User Data lists User Program configuration screens for User Programs loaded These User Data screens are used to configure the parameters needed for each User Program After you install a User Program the User Data drop down menu then lists the menu options associated with the program Refer to the user manual supplied with your User Program f
526. y ROCLINK 800 software when establishing a connection to a Device In order for ROCLINK 800 software to communicate with a Device ROCLINK 800 software must know to which device it is communicating Each Device within a Group is given a unique Device Address Rev Nov 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 14 ROCLINK 800 User Manual 2 5 1 Device Root The Device Root is the organizational level in the Device Directory When you open ROCLINK 800 software the default Device labels display in the Device Directory You can modify these communications setup configurations or you can create new configurations lt 4 ROCLINK 800 Device Directory Seles s File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Ultilities Tools Window Help x Bi Meith S4eObli key e GE Direct Connect COMI Device a COM Device amp Modem Device Ethemet Device New Group New Devicel ty New Device Figure 2 11 Device Root The default Device Root labels include COMI Device COM Device Modem Device Ethernet Device gt New Groupl1 New Devicel e New Device2 The communication configurations allow ROCLINK 800 software to communicate to an individual ROC or FloBoss unit You may add delete or modify these communications setups and establish Groups of devices Creating a back up file of the Device Root settings after you have configured the settings is highly suggested To do so use Windows Explorer to find the ROC_u
527. y checks are to be performed by the communications controller select the Parity radio button Select the number of Data Bits contained in an asynchronous byte or character This number is typically 8 Select the number of Stop Bits contained in an asynchronous byte or character This number is typically 1 Rev Dec 05 Configuring Communications and Security 2 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual Enter the Key On Delay to define the number of seconds to delay after turning the RTS signal on before beginning transmission For some older radios the Key On Delay may need to be set as high as 0 2 seconds For newer radios designed for data transmission no more than 0 02 second should be required For Dial up modems and EIA 232 RS 232 communications the Key On Delay should normally be set at O seconds or may be changed to optimize communications Enter the Key Off Delay intervals defining the period to delay before turning the RTS signal off once a valid message has been sent The default of 0 01 seconds should be sufficient for most radios For Dial up modems and EJA 232 RS 232 communications the Key Off Delay should normally be set at 0 seconds or may be changed to optimize communications Select the Port Owner ROC800 Series This refers to the communications protocol that will be in use on this Port ROC Plus Protocol Modbus Slave configures the Port to automatically switch between Modbus and ROC Plus protocol messages ROC Plus Pr
528. y sized for use at a standard gravitational force or at some specified gravitational force A correction factor must then be applied to correct the calibrations to the local gravitational force When a deadweight calibrator is used for the differential pressure and the static pressure both must be corrected for local gravity This involves using Fpwl twice Enter the Calibrated Grav Accel Calibrated Gravitational Acceleration used to calibrate the weights of the deadweight tester being used The units assumed for the input are Ft Sec or m Sec Enter the User Correction Factor value that is multiplied by the base volume flow equation allowing you to make any desired adjustment to the flow If you use the default value of 1 no correction is applied 5 3 8 Meter Alarms The Alarms tab allows you to configure Station wide alarming parameters For the ROC800 Series Alarming is Enabled or Disabled for each meter in the Meter gt Setup gt Orifice or Turbine gt Alarms tab Enabled Alarms can be based on either the Corrected Volume Flow Rate per Day the Corrected Volume Flow Rater per Hour the Mass Flow Rate per Day or the Mass Flow Rate per Hour Meter gt Setup or click on the meter in the Configuration Tree for FloBoss 100 Series ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units Turbine Meter Setup Meter Run 1 Turbine 1 Tag Turbine 1 General Inputs Advanced Alarms Calibration Factors Mazs Meter Press Effect Al

ROCLINK 800 User Manual - Welcome to Emerson Process

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents